Actions

Work Header

Rating:
Archive Warning:
Category:
Fandom:
Relationships:
Characters:
Additional Tags:
Language:
English
Collections:
WIP Encanto fics
Stats:
Published:
2022-04-17
Completed:
2023-09-14
Words:
142,983
Chapters:
58/58
Comments:
3,801
Kudos:
2,672
Bookmarks:
593
Hits:
110,656

How Bright You Burn (How Brave You've Been)

Summary:

“Run. Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo,”

His birth father had been bent over him, trying to shield him, trying to keep him alive. Juan had walked to his certain death to distract them from Bruno and his damn curse, a curse Juan hadn’t even known about until tonight.

So Bruno followed that last instruction, that last plea: he ran and he didn’t look back.

***

Found in the river as a baby, Bruno has only one clue about his family: the blanket he was found wrapped in, embroidered with his name and a caterpillar. Finding them has never really been a dream of his; after all, they're surely dead, just like his father.

But when his village is destroyed, he unknowingly follows his parents' footsteps and finds himself in a hidden village, saved by a magical family.

Surely this is too good to be true. As Bruno waits for the other shoe to drop, for some catch to reveal itself, mysteries are unearthed and secrets are revealed. It seems the Madrigals are missing someone too.

Maybe, just maybe, he has a family after all.

Notes:

✨Sokka's back on her bullshit✨

Welcome to the Not-So-Anastasia AU, the closest thing I will get to doing another Anastasia AU at all. It borrows certain elements from the movie/play (such as having one "clue" to your past) but not much else.
Trigger warnings ahead for violence and murder. Bruno's not having a good time and neither is his village

He'll be meeting the Madrigals fairly soon however 👀👀

Songs I listened to while writing:
Panic Room, by Au/Ra
Afraid, by The Neighbourhood
Sweet Dreams (Are Made Of This), by Emily Browning
R.I.P To My Youth, by The Neighbourhood
The Grey, by Icon For Hire

(See the end of the work for more notes and other works inspired by this one.)

Chapter 1: Up In Smoke

Chapter Text

“The lights spark and flicker with monsters much bigger than I can control now. Welcome to the panic room, where all your darkest fears are gonna come for you, come for you. Welcome to the panic room. You'll know I wasn't joking when you see them too.” - Panic Room, Au/Ra




Bruno woke in the middle of the night, heart pounding, terror freezing him in place and his head throbbing with pain.

 

This wasn’t new. This happened with such frequency that he’d long since accustomed himself to it. Chronic nightmares and chronic pain couldn’t be stopped, only helped- and it was help he couldn’t afford in any case. No one in such a small village could.

 

Sighing, he reluctantly hauled himself out of bed and went to his kitchen. He poured himself a glass of water, gulped it and poured another, sitting on the counter and swinging his legs like a child, though he was…Well. Somewhere in his forties. About forty-five at least.

 

What had the nightmare been this time? He strained to remember. The dream had been green as usual; there’d been fire, shouting. Gunfire. Blood. 

 

His little village had been aflame. 

 

It sent shivers down his spine and, though he tried to ignore it, he couldn’t. His green nightmares always came true. But who could he even tell? He’d long since learned his lesson about being quiet; to tell anyone what he saw was to risk being branded a brujo. If he opened his mouth, he ran the risk of being beaten, whipped, maybe even killed.

 

And that was when people believed him. When they didn’t, he was called crazy, disturbed, impaired. 

 

It had been like this since he was five years old. The green dreams started then and never left. 

 

The nuns certainly hadn’t liked it. His back was a tapestry of their anger, their fear and displeasure. His arms and legs were a map of scars, a lifetime of being shunned and alone making itself known outwardly as his brain screamed at him that he deserved it.

 

The dreams weren’t all bad: sometimes he saw a good harvest, a healthy baby being born, weddings, people helping each other. But good or bad, the green dreams always came true.

 

But still, he’d never seen anything like this. He drank the rest of the water, still shivering. Bruno felt frozen to the spot, torn between telling someone or keeping quiet. Who could he even tell anyway? He wasn’t exactly close with anyone except his boss, the local potter, Juan Puerta. The whole street called him Abuelo, a tall man in his seventies with a crooked, gap-tooth smile for those he called his own. Bruno was on that list and had been since he arrived in this village nearly fifteen years ago. 

 

Maybe…Maybe he could tell Juan? This wasn’t some far-off disaster, this was their village. Their home. Bruno knew these people and none of them had ever harmed him. They thought he was odd, sure, but no one threw stones or hurt him. If he could just convince Juan that he was telling the truth then surely the villagers would listen to Juan? People liked him, people trusted him. Abuelo Puerta, always taking in strays.

 

He’d just climbed off the counter, resolving to find a way to tell Juan that danger was coming in the morning, when he heard a far-off scream. Then a flash. Smoke.

 

Fire.

 

Someone pounded at his door, shouting; “Bruno! BRUNO! Wake up, niño!” 

 

It was Juan and Bruno had never heard him sound so afraid.

 

He ran for the door, stumbling and unlocked it with shaking hands. He could see fire in the distance, could smell smoke in the air. People were screaming and- oh God, those were gunshots.

 

He was too late. They were already under attack.

 

Bruno knew there’d been violence, that other villages had been attacked, some small towns…But the violence had been going the other way, away from them and further down the mountains. They were so small that the village elders assured them all they’d be overlooked. Bruno wasn’t even sure if there’d been an evacuation plan.

 

It was a bit late to be worrying about that.

 

Juan pushed his way into the small home and ran immediately to Bruno’s room. He came back holding Bruno’s favourite ruana and a pair of sandals and he shoved them into Bruno’s arms.

 

“Come on, boy, hurry,” he said. He was sweating, his grey hair sticking up awkwardly. There was a bruise on his cheek.

 

Bruno didn’t question him. No hesitating, no stumbling; if he hesitated now he’d die. No arguing, no questions. He could trust Juan. If there was anything he was sure of in his life, it was this: Abuelo Juan Puerta would not hurt him. 

 

Juan held a small cloth bag and Bruno didn’t even have time to grab much. He grabbed his own bag by his bed, shoving in his nearly-empty wallet, a shirt and pants, some food and his most precious possession: the baby blanket he’d been found swaddled in as an infant, pale green and embroidered with his name and a single caterpillar. He didn’t own much, he never had. The food took up most of the space in his bag, which he figured was the most important thing anyway.

 

The shouting was getting closer, the smoke clogging the air and Bruno pulled his ruana up over his mouth and nose as he coughed.

 

Juan grabbed his hand like he was a child and pulled him along the street. They lived in the middle of the village and Bruno cursed that fact where he’d previously liked it. Before, living just off the village square had felt secure and it had been convenient to be so near the shops and his job. Now it meant they’d have more trouble fleeing.

 

“Keep your head down,” Juan said gruffly as they ran. 

 

“Don’t need to tell me twice,” Bruno mumbled. He winced at the screams, coughing on the smoke. 

 

Their pretty little village had turned into a warzone, the stuff of nightmares. The sky was red with fire, clogged with grey smoke. All around him his neighbours fled and died. Blood stained the cobblestones, there were horrible high-pitched screams for mercy, people shouting for family and friends, sobbing. He couldn’t block it out and he couldn’t shake the horrible feeling that this was his fault. If he just hadn’t seen it in the first place, maybe it wouldn’t have happened. Or if he hadn’t hesitated, if he’d just gone to Juan the second he woke up, maybe they could have woken some of their neighbours and gotten away before they were attacked…

 

Bang!

 

“Aah!” Bruno ducked on instinct as a gun fired, much closer now. Juan swore, a rare sound, and suddenly a man on horseback was blocking the street, a machete aimed at them. 

 

Bruno froze, terror holding him in place. He may not have remembered it, but he’d been in a situation like this once, long ago. He’d been told the story many times: how he’d been found in his father’s arms in the river, how they’d been surrounded by dead civilians and soldiers with machetes, strangely burned…

 

“Well, well, well,” the man drawled. “A couple of rats sneaking away?”

 

“We want no trouble,” Juan said, pushing Bruno behind him. They backed away, but were forced to stop; behind them was the flaming town square, the smoke, the bodies and so many more attackers.

 

“Please,” Juan said. “We are unarmed.” His grip on Bruno's arm tightened. “We have no money. Just let us go.”

 

“Juan,” Bruno whispered. “We’re tra-” He broke off with a hiss as his constant headache flared. The world flashed green- a mountain trail, a valley, a village- and the man with the machete gaped, his expression twisting.

 

“What the fuck was that?” the man hissed. Bruno knew that look; it was the look of the orphanage kids as they threw stones and shouted, Brujo! It was the look of the nuns as they locked him in the attic, as they brought the belt down on his back. 

 

It was a look that meant blood was going to be spilled.

 

Juan pushed Bruno back the way they’d come, eyes wide. “Run,” he said hoarsely. “Bruno, run!






They ran through their crumbling village, ducking down side-streets, choking on smoke, their eyes watering, their lungs burning, forced to take the long way to the village edge. Bruno cursed his luck, cursed whatever had given him these damnable visions in the first place; they so rarely happened when he was awake, why did it have to happen now? 

 

The man had seen Bruno’s eyes glow and now…Now they were direct targets. Not just another pair of villagers, but being purposefully chased.

 

“I’m sorry,” Bruno panted as they ran. “Abuelo, I’m so sorry.”

 

“Don’t be ridiculous,” Juan said, still holding his hand. “Whatever that was, it’s not your fault. I know you. You hear me, niño?”

 

Bruno heard him, but that didn’t mean he believed him.

 

There were hoofbeats, so many hoofbeats and as they reached the end of the alley, Juan stopped, ducking back into the shadows.

 

Bruno immediately saw why: there were four men on horseback, two with machetes, two with rifles. Two more were on foot and they held rifles too; Bruno could see knives strapped to their belts.

 

Juan turned to Bruno just as one of the men shouted and pointed at the alley.

 

Abuelo Juan Puerta was an old man and he’d just spent the better part of the night running through burning streets, ducking down alleyways and avoiding burning debris and corpses lining the streets. He was shaking and panting for breath, clearly exhausted…

 

And he smiled as he cupped Bruno’s face in his hands and kissed his forehead.

 

Why did Bruno feel so cold, so small?

 

Run. Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo,” Juan whispered and he pulled away before Bruno could hold onto him, running at their attackers.

 

“Will you cowards strike down an old man?” he shouted.

 

Bruno knew he needed to run. He needed to run and, as Juan said, not look back. He didn’t need to see this…

 

But he did. He saw Juan, surrounded.

 

He saw a man raise his rifle.

 

Bruno turned to run, tears stinging his eyes, but he still saw it, still heard it.

 

The gun shot. The bullet striking.

 

Juan falling to the ground as his blood stained the cobblestones.

 

Bruno ran, sobbing. Among all the terror, he formed only one coherent thought: history doesn’t repeat itself, but it rhymes. 

 

Because he’d been here before, hadn’t he? But as a baby he’d been too small to remember.

 

He didn’t have that luxury anymore. He’d never forget.

 

“Run. Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo,”

 

His birth father had been bent over him, trying to shield him, trying to keep him alive. Juan had walked to his certain death to distract them from Bruno and his damn curse, a curse Juan hadn’t even known about until tonight.

 

So Bruno followed that last instruction, that last plea; he ran and he didn’t look back. He ran right out of the burning village, realising with dread that it was getting quiet. He ran further up into the mountains and into the jungle; he ran through the river, he ran down narrow trails and stumbled over hills; he ran and ran and ran as the sun began to rise.

 

He ran until he couldn’t anymore, until his burning lungs and shaking legs demanded he stop.


Then and only then did Bruno fall to his knees. Chest heaving, shaking all over, he clawed at the earth and screamed.

Chapter 2: El Chico Del Río

Summary:

Bruno's village and the life he'd made for himself are gone. As he makes his way up the mountains, memories come rushing back at him.
Live or die? Well, he made a promise...

Notes:

Trigger warnings for discussion of suicide attempts, child abuse, depression and self-harm. If anything here could trigger or harm you at all, please skip the chapter

In the next chapter he'll be meeting the Madrigals, but we have to get through the angst and backstory first

Songs I listened to while writing:
In My Dreams, from Anastasia: Broadway
The Grey, Icon For Hire
Impossible by James Arthur
Lost Boy, by Ruth B.
Antidote, by Faith Marie
Sleepsong, by Bastille
OK, by Alan Walker
I Dreamed A Dream, cover by Darren Criss

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Travelling the backroads, sleeping in the wood; taking what I needed, working when I could. Keeping up my courage, foolish as it seems. At night all alone in my dreams. In my dreams, shadows call; there’s a light at the end of a hall. Then my dreams fade away, but I know it all will come back one day.” - In My Dreams, Anastasia: Broadway




When Bruno was five, he had his first green dream. One of the nuns was going to fall down the stairs and break her hip.

 

He told her in the morning. She laughed.

 

That afternoon, she fell and broke her hip.

 

She was the first person to blame him for making bad things happen, but she would not be the last.

 

It was the first time the Mother Superior used the belt on him. 

 

It would not be the last.






When he was twelve, he cut his hand on a broken plate; it was his turn to help clean up after dinner and the boy with him had dropped the stack of plates. Bruno had stayed kneeling on the floor, watching the blood gather on his hand. He was barely aware of the other boy’s apologies, or the cook coming in to yell at them. 

 

He slipped one of the plate’s shards into his pocket. 






He was fifteen the first time he tried to die. Sixteen the second time. Each time had earned him a beating and hours in the chapel on his knees and begging for forgiveness for “such a grievous sin.”

 

Not long after his second attempt, he was kicked out of the orphanage. He was sixteen, old enough to look after himself, to make his way in the world.

 

Bruno was quite certain the nuns had only saved him for fear of going to hell themselves if they didn’t. They’d keep him alive, but that was all. As soon as they could, they washed their hands of el chico del río. 

 

He tried to die again, a clumsy attempt; the bridge hadn’t been nearly high enough.

 

He told the doctors he’d dropped his wallet off the side, that he’d slipped and fallen off the bridge as he tried to grab it. They believed him and he fled before anyone thought to question him further. He didn’t even have a wallet. 






Twenty-one and he tried again. He’d been living in a small sea-side village, so small they only had one doctor who hadn’t even really known what he was doing. There was talk of sending Bruno to an asylum in a city.

 

He fled again, back to the mountains, to where he’d come from in the first place.

 

He had the mad idea of finding the river he’d come from, maybe finally paying his respects to his father. Bruno wasn’t even sure why, he just knew he had the desperate need to find something related to his family, whoever they had been. He only vaguely knew the direction of the river in relation to the orphanage's town, he could barely remember the name the nuns had given him. He searched and gave up when he realised he was nowhere near the right jungle in the first place, picking a quiet riverbank to sit and sob until he couldn’t anymore, until his throat ached and his eyes burned, until he felt numb.

 

All the while, the green dreams came. All the while, his head pounded like a drum, on and on and on. He felt so tired all the time, afraid of falling asleep yet unable to stay awake. Sometimes green flashes came when he was awake and Bruno hid in alleyways and woods, dark rooms and empty fields when it happened, closing his eyes like a child- if I can’t see you, you can’t see me- praying no one saw.

 

Sometimes they didn’t. Sometimes they did. And when they did, Bruno ran again.

 

He had no friends, no family, not even a steady job; always the odd one out, always alone. Sadness weighed down on him, pulling him under, drowning him, clogging his lungs and choking him. It left him feeling heavy, as if he was literally being weighed down. Sometimes his temper flared and Bruno wanted to scream at everyone, absolutely everyone in the world that this wasn’t fair. He didn’t make bad things happen, he just dreamed of them and he didn’t even know why. He didn’t ask for this and he just wanted someone, anyone, to want him to stay.

 

And other times he felt nothing. Just numb.

 

After he’d cried at the river he felt numb. He’d picked up his belongings and forced himself to walk. One foot in front of the other, eyes on the ground, trying to tell himself he’d feel better tomorrow. Or the day after.

 

Sana sana colita de rana…






When he was thirty he arrived in the little mountain village and realised, with a jolt, that he wasn’t too far from the town he’d grown up in, from that hellish orphanage, the stones, the belt, the accusations.

 

He’d immediately wondered if he should move on and find somewhere else, but he’d been completely worn out by days of non-stop travel. He'd had to leave his last job in something of a rush. He told himself he’d only stay for one night.

 

It ended up being a lot longer than one night, obviously.

 

Bruno had been staying in a small room at the tavern and, on his third night, he ended up talking to Juan. The whole room lit up when the man came in, cheerfully calling his name, or shouting out, “Hola, Abuelo!” Bruno had realised fairly quickly that all these men and women could not possibly be the man’s grandchildren. A nickname then, a title. A show of affection and respect.

 

And Juan, for whatever reason, had found Bruno in his corner and started talking like they were old friends. Bruno didn’t exactly tell the man his life story (they’d only just met, he was even worried about telling Juan his name), but he admitted to not having a job, that his intention was only to pass through.

 

“One of my girls just quit,” Juan told him. “Had a baby. There’s a spot open if you’re any good with pottery.”

 

“I’ve never tried it,” Bruno admitted.

 

“Come by anyway,” Juan said.

 

Bruno had been sure he was joking or just being kind. A pity offer. 

 

He hadn’t even gone to Juan’s shop, he’d just passed by when Juan darted out, grabbed him by the arm and hauled him inside.

 

Bruno was hired to help clean the place. Eventually he ended up helping with the pottery; vases, bowls, plates, mugs…He preferred painting them though and that became his official job. His house only had three rooms: a main room with a kitchen nook, a bedroom and a bathroom, but it was his. He had a home. For the first time in his life, he felt safe.

 

But before that, two months after meeting Juan, he tried to die again.

 

Juan did not lecture him about God. He did not call Bruno selfish or crazy. Instead he ushered the doctor out (sternly reminding the man of patient confidentiality) and sat on the edge of Bruno’s bed.

 

“You said your papá was protecting you?” he asked.

 

Bruno stared at him in confusion. He nodded.

 

“Then you live for him,” Juan said, holding Bruno’s shoulder. “You live, Bruno.”

 

It wasn’t a magic spell that cured his depression but it gave Bruno something to think about. It was the first time anyone had ever said something like that. Maybe it should have felt like an accusation, another guilt-trip. Maybe to someone else it wouldn't have helped at all. But it lit a little spark in Bruno's mind. It got him wondering.

 

He didn’t know how old his father was when he died, crouching over Bruno, shielding him. But he’d been told once that his father appeared quite young. For all Bruno knew, he was older than his father already.

 

It was a strangely humbling thought.

 

You live for him.

 

Bruno still hadn’t been sure he wanted to live but…But maybe…

 

Well. Maybe he could try. For both of them.






It had been fifteen years since he last tried to die. Nine years since he last hurt himself. The green dreams remained, the infrequent flashes sometimes caught him unawares; the headaches never went away, the fatigue sometimes left him in bed, weak and feverish…But he lived.

 

He was happy.

 

He’d felt safe. Still considered odd, still left to his own devices most of the time, but in a strangely affectionate sort of way. The villagers didn’t hurt him. They didn’t want to hurt him. They liked the pottery he painted, he once helped paint a mural of the Virgin Mary for the church: he helped paint his neighbours houses and painted the schoolhouse in bright, pretty colours. He was just quiet, strange Bruno, who made up stories and sometimes mumbled to himself as he worked. Not Bruno Expósito or el chico del río; not brujo, or freak…Just Bruno. 

 

And now that was all gone and it was never coming back.

 

His village had been burned to the ground. Juan was dead. His neighbours and colleagues were dead. And the attackers had seen his eyes glow. He couldn’t turn back.

 

Where was he supposed to go now? What was he supposed to do? For the first time ever, Bruno didn't have an escape plan.






He wandered aimlessly up the mountains for two days. His lungs still ached, whether from the smoke or exhaustion he wasn’t sure. He didn’t really care anyway.

 

The numbness was coming back, dulling his senses. 

 

On the first day, as it grew dark, he fell down a hill, banging his head as he tumbled, badly cutting his leg on the jagged rocks and he barely registered it past the numbness blanketing him. It was a miracle he hadn’t cut his head open. Blood seeped down his leg and he tried to summon the panic he knew he should be feeling, battered and bruised.

 

Nothing. He lay there on the grass, surrounded by rocks and plants he barely recognised and wondered about dashing his head against one of the rocks.

 

Only then did he tear his nightshirt and wrap it around his leg, a makeshift bandage. If Juan knew what he was thinking, then he’d surely come back and haunt Bruno to box him around the ears.

 

Sighing, he checked his bag. He’d torn up his nightshirt, but his pyjama pants were in one piece. He was wearing his only other shirt and pants and his ruana. His sandals were not meant for hiking. He had food but no water. His wallet didn’t have a whole lot of money and, truth be told, he wasn’t even sure where he was.

 

You could just give in, a voice in the back of his mind hissed. Just lie back down and-

 

His head hurt, his eyes burned and Bruno closed them with a pained hiss, knowing what was coming.

 

A mountain, a river, a valley, a village. Green, green, green. A house on a hill, overlooking the village.

 

He opened his eyes and colour returned to the world. It was a flash of the same village he’d seen during the attack.

 

Maybe…Maybe he wasn’t far from it? 

 

He struggled to stand, wincing. Did his head hurt because of the flash or because of the fall? He wasn’t sure. 

 

You have to try, Bruno told himself, taking unsteady steps. Juan died for you. Your papá died for you. You have to try.

 

Even if he failed at least he’d be able to say he tried.






On the second day his leg was burning, his head was throbbing worse than ever. His throat was dry, his stomach churning; he vomited anything he managed to choke down.

 

And then he found the river. 

 

It was a wide, shallow river, surrounded by beautiful plants and the water was coloured; jewel-toned and stunningly beautiful. Whether it was a trick of the light or something else, Bruno didn't know. Butterflies were all over the area, lazily drifting from flower to flower. The current looked slow, just as lazy as the butterflies. Easy to cross.

 

And it was clean water, that was what mattered most. Past the dizziness, he wished he had a cup, but his hands would have to do.

 

After he finally managed to drink…Well. He wasn’t sure what to do then. He wasn’t sure how much further he could walk. His leg hadn’t stopped hurting; every now and then it bled a little before thankfully stopping. His head still hurt, a steady thump-thump-thump. 

 

Maybe I could just stay here, Bruno thought, staring at the water. He even lay down, flat on his back, feet in the river. He closed his eyes, feeling the heat of the sun on his face.

 

You tried, Bruno told himself. But you’re all alone out here, you’re lost and you’re injured. It’s a jungle, there’s no way you’ll make it much further. Just admit defeat.

 

And it was the strangest thing: as soon as he thought it, it felt like someone was grabbing his hand. There was a warmth, a pull.

 

Bruno pushed himself up onto his elbows and stared at the mountain in front of him. It was tall. It was steep. It would be madness to try and climb it in his state and yet…

 

A big house, bright and cheerful; smiling people, a soft bed, pain melting away.

 

That village he saw couldn’t be far now, not if the day flashes were hitting him so frequently. He’d never had more than one a day and never so close together; he could go months without day flashes.

 

Which meant they were trying to tell him something.

 

Maybe he was being crazy. Maybe he was delirious. But Bruno pushed himself to his feet and waded through the river. At the centre, he felt a shiver…

 

And he kept walking. Lips pressed together in a thin line, sweating and shaking with pain…He kept walking.

 

Slowly, painfully, Bruno began to make his way up the mountain.

Notes:

Bruno has unknowingly found the very river he once wanted to find. Next up, the Madrigals take in an injured newcomer. The next chapter should hopefully be up today!
If anyone would like to yell, I'm on tumblr: @sokkas-first-fangirl ✨

Chapter 3: Miracles

Summary:

It's been years since the last outsiders stumbled upon Encanto, but when Julieta is called for help she doesn't hesitate: she has a life to save. Her questions can wait.

Notes:

I promised another update today! I also promised he'd reach Encanto fairly quickly and here we are: Julieta, Dolores and Félix to the rescue 💕

Small trigger warning for brief mention/discussion of self harm

Songs I listened to while writing:
Leaves From The Vine, from Avatar The Last Airbender (because if I'm going to sit here and cry then I'm making everyone else cry with me)
The Promise, by Emma Blackery
The Light Behind Your Eyes, by My Chemical Romance
Human, by Dodie
Secret For The Mad, by Dodie
One More Light, by Linkin Park
Not Alone, by Red

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Leaves from the vine falling so slow; like fragile, tiny shells drifting in the foam. Little soldier boy, come marching home. Brave soldier boy comes marching home…” - Leaves From The Vine, Avatar The Last Airbender




Dolores came running to Julieta’s stall, so wide-eyed and frantic looking that Julieta nearly dropped a plate of arepas.

 

“He’s hurt!” Dolores squeaked. “Tia Julieta, there’s a man- an outsider- he’s really hurt!” Even as she raised her voice she was the quietest teenager that Julieta had ever met. Even as she panicked, Julieta had to lean forward to hear her.

 

“An outsider?” Julieta repeated in bafflement. The last outsiders had been…Well, the last ones had been Agustín’s family actually. Her husband had only been eight and swelled up with bee stings. His father had been exhausted but unhurt; his mother had badly sprained her ankle. Julieta, only nine years old, had fed them and watched as her mother explained where they were.

 

The mountains only let in those who truly needed protection and help. Whoever this man was he was already injured, injured enough to panic her sobrina.

 

“I’ve already told Papá,” Dolores said, taking Julieta’s hand and tugging her along. “They’re looking for him now.”

 

So Julieta grabbed a plate and ran after her niece, leaving Agustín and Mirabel in charge of her stall.

 

“I’ll be back later!” Julieta called over her shoulder. Well, she'd try to be anyway. “Just hand the food out!”

 

Agustín gave her a thumbs up, looking at the line of people with a slightly worried smile. Mirabel just looked baffled.

 

Julieta ran with Dolores, hoping she’d grabbed enough food, more than enough. Her niece looked terrified- just how injured was this outsider?

 

“It’s bad,” Dolores whispered, as if she’d read Julieta’s mind. “Really bad. His heart’s so slow.”






Thanks to Dolores they met up with Félix and a trio of men from town fairly quickly. Dolores ran ahead of them all, up into the mountains. She kept tilting her head, listening for the hurt stranger and then racing ahead again, sometimes glancing back with rare impatience.

 

Healing food or not, Julieta was forty-five and not used to running up mountains; she figured she could be forgiven for being a little out of breath.

 

They found the stranger among the trees, on an overgrown rarely used path. He had completely collapsed, curled up on his side. He was pale, too pale and Julieta could see a bloodstained cloth wrapped around his thigh. He was covered in shallow cuts and bruises, his breathing was slow and rasping.

 

She took this all in within seconds. Instinct drove her and she ran to him, dropping to her knees. The poor thing was out cold and she cursed herself for not thinking to bring a flask of soup, broth, tea- something liquid, something that would be easier to feed him.

 

“How bad is it?” Félix asked tensely.

 

“Quite bad,” Julieta admitted, cautiously unwrapping the makeshift bandage; a torn up shirt. The cut on his thigh was long and inflamed, but not too deep. Mostly it was the fact it was his thigh at all that worried her. One false step and…

 

Well. He was here now. She could help. That was what mattered.

 

She tore up an arepa and, massaging the man’s throat, managed to get him to swallow a bite. Some colour returned to his face, some bruises and cuts healed, but the gash on his thigh remained and his breathing was still rasping too much for comfort.

 

“We need to get him to Casita,” Julieta said, re-wrapping his leg. “Get him to a proper bed and then I can get some food into him. We need liquids, I can’t do much when he’s unconscious like this.” She was already mentally going through her list of leftovers. She definitely had some soup she could reheat, that would be best.

 

Félix lifted the man with ease and Dolores picked up the man’s bag. It was a small thing, dark green and a little threadbare. 

 

“What do you think happened?” Alano Cortes asked, looking grim.

 

“I don’t know,” Julieta said, giving the man a worried glance. Next to Félix’s healthy pallor and clean clothes, the outsider looked weaker and sicker than before.

 

“I don’t know,” she repeated softly, her heart going out to him. “But I suppose we’ll find out.”






Casita opened its doors as soon as they were within sight of it. The shutters opened and closed, the roof tiles danced. The second they reached the patio, the tiles rippled, pulling them inside.

 

“Ay, Casita, careful!” Félix cried, keeping a careful hold on the outsider. “I don’t wanna drop him!”

 

Dolores squeaked. “Abuela is coming,” she whispered.

 

“That’s okay,” Julieta reassured her. “She’ll be able to help.” Alma may not have been able to help with feeding him, but she’d know what to do with the poor man once he was awake.

 

A part of Julieta wondered if her mother would use the same speech she gave to the rare outsiders all those decades ago; “You don’t need to worry; you are safe here, you will not come to harm. I am Alma Madrigal, leader of this village. I promise you will be taken care of. We look after each other here.”

 

Julieta would always remember that speech. It was always given to frightened, injured, lonely people and their faces always stuck in her mind.

 

There was only one guest room in Casita and it was very rarely used; in fact, it actually got more use as a sickroom than a guest room, when Julieta needed time to heal someone. Their last guest had stayed after a mudslide took out his home.

 

Once, one of the young farmhands had been badly trampled by a startled horse and, even with her healing food, took two weeks to recover. Without her food he would have died. Even with her healing they’d needed Doctor Ortega’s help. Similarly, an old woman once shattered her hip so badly that she needed to stay in Casita over the weekend. 

 

Sometimes even magic needed time to work.

 

The room was on the ground floor, by the side stairs. It was a small room, but comfortable; it was painted a pale lavender with a soft bed with a pretty painting of a meadow on the wall. Casita would never allow anything less within its walls.

 

Félix lay the man down and Julieta ran for the kitchen, searching for that leftover soup.

 

“Félix!” she called. “Check if he has a change of clothes, sí?”

 

“Sí!” Félix called back. While the soup heated, Julieta paced back and forth. Casita seemed eager to help, fetching a bowl and spoon for her. When Julieta turned around, Casita had even laid out a tray, complete with one of Isabela’s roses in a small glass vase and napkins neatly folded, even a small plate of leftover arepas. The floor tiles rippled, the paintings swayed from side to side.

 

“Don’t worry, Casita,” Julieta said, patting the wall fondly. “He’ll be okay. I’ve got him now.”






When Julieta left the kitchen, she found Dolores standing outside the guest room. Her already large eyes were even wider and she bit her lip. 

 

“Papá told me to wait here,” she whispered at Julieta’s questioning look. “But I still saw.”

 

“Saw what, amor?”

 

Dolores shook her head and opened the door.

 

The outsider was in one of Félix’s nightshirts (pale yellow and orange) and a pair of white pyjama pants. Still out cold, no surprise there. Without his oversized ruana he somehow managed to look even smaller than before. She could plainly see just how skinny he was.

 

Félix hovered over the outsider worriedly. “No spare clothes other than those pants,” he told Julieta. “And…” He glanced at Dolores and sighed. “His back- his arms and legs…Juli, he’s been through some shit. Someone hurt him and…” He gestured to the man and Julieta’s heart cracked. The sleeves of Félix’s nightshirt were short, but baggy on the man’s slim frame allowing her to see the scars criss-crossing his thin forearms and two long, jagged scars overlapping them all.

 

“Oh, the poor thing,” she breathed. She looked at her niece. “Lola, amor-”

 

“I’m fine,” Dolores squeaked. She gulped and sat on a stool by the window.

 

“You don’t need to see this,” Félix said gently.

 

Dolores shook her head, looking oddly determined. 

 

And honestly, Julieta understood. Even if leaving was an option for her, she wouldn’t want to. She wanted to help.

 

“Help me sit him up,” she said to Félix and, soon enough, she was coaxing some soup down the man’s throat. One spoonful, then another; a third and…

 

His eyes fluttered open, his breathing evened out. He blinked blearily at the ceiling with dark green eyes. Julieta was willing to bet the gash on his leg was gone; the cuts and bruises faded before her eyes.

 

“Hola,” Julieta said gently. Félix settled the man back against the pile of pillows, giving him a smile. The man looked completely lost, his eyes still a little glassy. 

 

“...Wha’...?” he mumbled, swallowing heavily. He rubbed his eyes and blinked. “I don’t…”

 

“My name’s Julieta,” Julieta said, setting the tray on the bedside table. “Julieta Madrigal.” She remembered her mother’s speech and added, “It’s okay, you’re safe.”

 

Casita shivered and the man jerked back, eyes wide.

 

“Is that an earthquake?” he asked, voice raising to a more normal level.

 

“Not exactly,” Julieta said. She could hear footsteps: Alma was here.

 

“It’s nothing to worry about,” Félix added quickly. “I’m Félix, Julieta’s cuñado. What’s your name, amigo?”

 

The man looked at them with wide eyes, shivering. “I…I don’t…I mean, what’s-?”

 

The door opened and Alma glided in, straight-back and proud, hands clasped together, lips pressed in a thin line.

 

“Buenos días,” she said in her usual imperial tones. Her eyes zeroed in on the man and he shrank back, eyes wider than ever. “I hear we have a visitor.”

Notes:

✨Alma's here✨
Next up- well, we have her point of view actually 😉

Casita certainly seems fond of Bruno already, hm? 👀👀

Chapter 4: Lost And Found

Summary:

Finding yourself in a magical safe haven sounds too good to be true at the best of times, and this is not the best of times.
Bruno struggles to believe what's happening.
Alma struggles with his name. A name that still breaks her heart.

Notes:

*pats Alma's head lovingly* This baby can fit so much angst

Anyone ask for an Alma playlist? No? Too bad, you've got one! https://open.spotify.com/playlist/4axCuUBeAxuTtlws0pOCl2

Songs I listened to while writing:
Welly Boots, by The Amazing Devil
Jenny Of Oldstones, by Florence And The Machine
When She Loved Me, from Toy Story 2
Dead Hearts, by Stars
Exile, by Taylor Swift

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“High in the halls of the kings who are gone, Jenny would dance with her ghosts: the ones she had lost and the ones she had found; and the ones who had loved her the most. The ones who'd been gone for so very long she couldn't remember their names; they spun her around on the damp old stones, spun away all her sorrow and pain.” - Jenny Of Oldstones, Florence And The Machine




Alma stared at the outsider and he cringed back, looking at her with wide eyes. If she had to guess, she’d say he was around Julieta and Pepa’s age. A small man with a mop of black hair, he looked at her like he was expecting to be hit.

 

Even with Julieta’s healing doing its job, he looked exhausted.

 

“Félix, Dolores, could you give us some privacy?” she asked.

 

Félix nodded and he and Dolores left. Of course, Dolores would hear every word anyway, but the outsider didn’t need to know that yet. 

 

Newcomer, Alma sternly told herself. He is a newcomer, not an outsider. This is a young man in need of your help.

 

The mountains so rarely let anyone in. The last new family to arrive had been Agustín’s, and the mountains only let in those who well and truly needed protection and those who could better the community.

 

Alma wondered how this man would grow to help them, what he would contribute. 

 

She pulled the stool next to the bed, sat down, and gave him the same reassuring look she gave the villagers day to day. He sat hunched over, wringing the blanket between his hands and avoiding eye-contact. The longer the silence stretched on, the more frightened he seemed.

 

So Alma broke the silence.

 

“You don’t need to worry; you are safe here,” she said, softening her voice somewhat. “You will not come to harm.” He didn’t look like he believed her. She saw the scars on his arms and her heart went out to him, poor thing. “I am Alma Madrigal, leader of this village. I promise you will be taken care of. We look after each other here.”

 

It was an old speech, one she’d made up on the spot when the first outsider arrived; a young woman, all alone and heavily pregnant, fleeing her brute of a husband. Alma, only thirty years old, had taken her hand and said the first thing that came to mind. Soothing words that she once so badly wished someone would say to her. It had helped calm the young woman, who gave Alma a shy, hopeful smile.

 

So the speech stayed. And each time she said it the newcomers gave Alma that same grateful, shy, hopeful smile; some light coming back to their eyes, chasing away the fear.

 

For a moment she wondered if she should have found her dear Isabela and brought her along. After all, this would be good practice for her in the future; if nothing else, it was a chance for her granddaughter to learn and see how to help those who were lost and scared.

 

“I don’t…I don’t understand,” the newcomer whispered, still staring at his hands. “W-where am I exactly?”

 

“This is the Encanto,” Alma said. “Our home. I promise, these mountains protect us; they will protect you too.”

 

“What’s your name?” Julieta asked gently. 

 

“Bruno,” he muttered.

 

As always, the name was like a physical blow.

 

Alma had to look away, closing her eyes. She took a deep breath and tried to steady herself, to stay in the present. She tried to banish all thoughts of Pedro and her baby, dropping into the river.

 

She could not say his name out loud. She could barely even think it.

 

“...Bruno,” Julieta repeated, her voice only slightly wavering. Alma turned back to them just in time to see Julieta take the man’s hand with a reassuring smile. “That’s- that’s a nice name. Is there a last name to go with that?”

 

He was tense, so tense. “Bruno Expósito,” he said, still not looking at them. “If you want to get technical. Which, uh…I’d rather not. Just Bruno’s fine.”

 

“Well, if you’re not fond of it maybe you can choose your own surname,” Julieta said. Alma admired her daughter’s big heart, she always had and always would. Even without the food, Julieta had a healing touch.

 

“Can you tell us what happened?” Alma asked Bru- the new- him.

 

He looked at her through the curtain of his hair.

 

“My village was burned down,” he said quickly, flatly, like he was trying to get it over with. “I didn’t- I mean, I…My friend was…” He swallowed. “He gave me time to run.”

 

It was impossible not to think of her Pedro.

 

Pedro, shouting at her to run, pushing her ahead of him. Pedro, bending protectively over their son as the machete came down. Pedro, looking at her as the blow struck, as he fell.

 

Her Pedro, the love of her life. Her Brunito, her baby, gone forever. 

 

Oh, the glowing door had given her hope, but…Well, what were the odds that her son would ever stumble over those mountains? 

 

He had a good family, a good life, somewhere out there in the big wide world. She had to believe that.

 

“I’m sorry for your loss,” Alma said and she meant it with every fibre of your being.

 

He bit his lip and asked, “How long was I out? My leg feels fine- I feel fine.”

 

“Well…I’d say it’s been about two hours,” Julieta said, slightly sheepishly.

 

He sat up straight, giving Julieta a sharp disbelieving glance.

 

“No, really,” he said. “How long?”

 

Alma sighed. This was always the hardest part to explain.

 

“We were given a Miracle,” she began. “My daughter Julieta healed you with her Gift.”

 

“So you’re a doctor?” the man asked.

 

“Not quite,” Julieta said.

 

He looked between them both with utter confusion and a little suspicion. 

 

Alma tried to give that reassuring look again, though his name pounded in her head like a drum. She couldn’t quite look him in the eye.

 

“It’s a long story,” she said, more stiffly than she intended. “Allow me to explain, Br- child.”

 

She knew she’d have to call him by name eventually, just…Just not yet. For now, she’d focus on explaining everything to him and helping him settle. 

 

Then they would see what the future held.






Bruno stared ahead blankly, eyes on the door. The two women were staring at him and he kept expecting them to sprout feathery white wings or maybe horns. Because he was dead, surely. Or dreaming at least. Hallucinating. Because this wasn’t real. It couldn’t be real.

 

But his leg was healed; all those cuts and bruises were gone, the nausea, the pain and exhaustion…It was all gone. Oh, his usual dull headache was there, don’t get him wrong. But everything else? Gone. As if he’d never been injured at all.

 

The younger woman, Julieta, gently pressed an arepa into his hand. Bruno didn’t eat it, not yet. Not until he was sure he wasn’t dead.

 

It didn’t feel like Hell.

 

“It’s okay,” Julieta said. “I know it’s a lot to take in.”

 

That was putting it mildly. Magic! An entire magic family and a magic house!

 

It pulled him up short and his breathing hitched. Magic. They…Were like him?

 

Granted, Bruno couldn’t heal people, far from it. He couldn’t control the weather or flowers; he didn’t have super-strength, nor did he have super-hearing. He couldn’t change shape. He just…saw things. Usually bad things. Things he couldn't even change.

 

Maybe they weren’t alike after all, not if these people helped protect and serve an entire village. Bruno definitely couldn’t do things like that. 

 

A tiny spark of hope was there all the same, deep down. Maybe, just maybe they wouldn’t judge him or hate him or cast him out if they realised what he was. Maybe they’d understand...

 

But Bruno wasn’t exactly familiar with hoping for the best when it came to the green dreams, so he kept his mouth firmly shut.

 

Honestly, all he wanted to do was curl up in a little ball and sleep for a million years. He’d kept his promise to Juan and his silent promise to his Papá, hadn’t he? He’d lived, he’d gotten away and made it over the mountain. So he figured he had every right to wallow in despair for a while.

 

His whole life was gone.

 

“So…What happens now?” he asked. They were being too nice. Even the villagers hadn’t been so nice at first. They had to want something from him.

 

He put the arepa aside, untouched.

 

“Well, there’s some new homes being built right now,” Alma said, looking thoughtful. “Newlyweds and young people need their own space, you know. But they won’t be ready for three months. There won’t be many of them, but not all of them will be claimed. We can find you one.”

 

What?

 

“You- you’re not- are you serious?” Bruno blurted out. He knocked on the headboard with one hand and crossed his fingers on the other. “You’re not just giving me a house?”

 

“Can you build your own?” Alma asked. She didn’t sound sarcastic; she sounded genuinely curious, looking at him appraisingly.

 

Bruno shook his head.

 

“Then you may choose one,” Alma said with a dismissive wave of her hand, almost like it was an order instead of an offer. “What is your profession?”

 

The quick changes in topic were making his head spin. “Um, a- a potter. Sort of. I mostly painted the ceramics when they were done. I helped with the church mural and some interior stuff for my neighbours…”

 

“You’re an artist,” Julieta said with a little smile. She sounded approving. “You’ll get along with my youngest then.”

 

“An artist,” Alma repeated. She sounded thoughtful now, with a little pinched frown on her face. “Hm. Sí, I’m sure we can find something for you to do.”

 

“For now…” Julieta glanced at her mother. “Perhaps you can stay here until the new homes are ready?”

 

They had to be joking.

 

Alma mulled over Julieta’s words and gave a sharp nod. “That may be best,” she said, not quite looking at Bruno. 

 

They weren’t joking.

 

Bruno wasn’t sure if he wanted to laugh, cry, or call them crazy. He pinched himself and didn’t wake up.

 

Maybe it was a very detailed hallucination?

 

Julieta patted his hand with a comforting smile. Alma didn’t quite look at his face; her gaze was more so around his shoulder; she looked sterner now, prouder. Like a leader. Straight-backed and proud, shoulders back, chin up. Oddly regal, even just sitting on a stool.

 

The leader of the village. Bruno could easily believe it. She had an imposing air about her.

 

This all still felt too good to be true. Bruno was waiting for the other shoe to drop.

 

He bit his thumbnail and thought it all over. Well, if things went wrong he could just…Just leave again, right? He wasn’t a prisoner. He could leave if he needed to, he’d done it before, so many times. Bruno knew how to make a quick getaway if need be. 

 

For now he needed time to try and feel like a real person again, not a ghost. He needed time to try and banish fire, smoke, gunshots and machetes from his mind.

 

Bruno needed time to mourn the life he’d lost. It hadn’t been glamorous or exciting, but it was the most peaceful he’d ever been. It was safe. He’d been safe. For fifteen solid years, he'd been safe.

 

And now he’d lost it all, lost the closest thing to a family he’d ever had.

 

Oh, Juan, I’m so sorry.

 

He looked at Julieta and gave a tiny nod. “Gracias,” he whispered and she squeezed his hand. When she let go, he wrapped his arms around himself, trying to hide his scars, though he knew it was far too late for that. Still, he could try and pretend otherwise.

 

Bruno sighed so hard his chest ached with it. None of this felt real.

 

It abruptly stopped feeling like a dream when the window opened and shut on its own, when the floorboards danced and the painting swayed back and forth. Bruno had the strangest impression of complete and utter joy, like ghostly arms trying to hug him.

 

He jerked back so sharply that he banged his head against the headboard with a yelp.

 

“Casita!” Julieta scolded and Alma sighed. “Don’t frighten him like that!”

Notes:

Hm, another glowing door, Casita? 👀👀

Next up, we head into Bruno's first real day in Encanto and meeting the rest of the family

Chapter 5: A Perfect Constellation

Summary:

Bruno's first real day in Encanto begins as he's introduced to the rest of La Familia Madrigal.

Notes:

Here we go with the rest of the family!

Songs I listened to while writing:
The Family Madrigal, from Encanto
Don't You Worry Child, by Madilyn Bailey
Fake Smile, by Ariana Grande
The Dysfunctional Tango, from Encanto
What Is Love, by Jaymes Young
The Last Dance Of The Romanovs, from Anastasia: Broadway

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Feel my blood runnin', swear the sky's fallin'. How do I know if this shit's fabricated? Time goes by and I can't control my mind. Don't know what else to try, but you tell me every time: ‘Just keep breathin' and breathin' and breathin' and breathin'.’ And oh, I gotta keep, keep on breathin'.” - Breathin’, Ariana Grande

 

 

 

Blessedly, they left him alone after the explanations. Well, Julieta stayed to chat for a while, trying to coax more of the story from him, but Bruno just mumbled monosyllabic answers, his head bowed. 

 

Julieta seemed nice, but he was not going to start crying in front of this stranger. 

 

As the afternoon wore on, Bruno could hear people arriving home. Eventually, Julieta gave him a small smile and said, “Well, I’d better get a start on dinner,” and let him be.

 

Bruno immediately lay down, buried his face in his pillow and screamed until his voice cracked and deserted him entirely. Then he lay there, feeling like his limbs weighed a ton, unable to move, face still pressed against the pillow as his shoulders heaved, as he gasped for breath that he couldn’t quite catch.

 

This wasn’t actually happening, was it? This was surely the most bizarre dream of his life. Any moment now, he’d wake up back in his little house. He’d fight off the usual headache, force some breakfast down and go to work. He’d listen to his co-workers gossip and chat with Juan. And he was getting low on groceries, so he’d better go shopping before going home and then Señora Rojas wanted help painting her fence tomorrow…

 

But he didn’t wake up. The room around him didn’t change. The shutters gently opened and shut, almost sadly. He had the strangest impression that this house, Casita, was somehow mourning with him.

 

He wasn’t dreaming. His village was gone. Juan was dead. His co-workers and poor Señora Rojas were likely all dead too. There was no going back.

 

Bruno was…In a magical house. Surrounded by magical people. People who said they wanted to help.

 

They had to want something from him, surely? There was a job to do or they needed a favour. People didn’t just welcome strangers like this. These people weren’t Juan, perpetually picking up strays.

 

Or maybe they were this village’s Abuelo Juan. Leaders, protectors. Alma had said she was their leader. What did Bruno know?

 

But Bruno wasn’t exactly in the mood for charitable thoughts right now.

 

He curled up in a tiny ball and pulled the covers right up over his head and let himself cry in peace.






“Someone beat the shit out of him,” Félix said bluntly and Julieta winced as she served up the next plate. “His back’s covered in welts and scars, Juli. They look old, sure, but…Someone hurt him.”

 

“His village burned down,” Julieta confided quietly. “He says they were attacked.”

 

“Dios mío,” Agustín said, crossing himself. His eyes were a little too bright, his expression one of utter sympathy.

 

“Apparently it’s been happening for a while now,” Julieta said. “He told us other villages and towns were attacked, but they were going in the opposite way, down the mountain. His village’s leaders didn’t…” She sighed. “They didn’t prepare.”

 

“There’s never truly any way to prepare for such violence.” Alma’s voice startled them all and they turned to find her standing in the doorway of the kitchen, regal and queen-like as always. Ruler of her little kingdom. “We do not know exactly what he has seen.” A muscle in her jaw twitched. “So be prepared for some…Odd behaviours as he adjusts. You never know how people will handle such violence.”

 

Her mamá knew what she was talking about, Julieta reflected sadly. She’d know all too well. 

 

“Is there any way we can help him?” Agustín asked, worried and earnest as always. Her husband had a big heart.

 

Alma sighed. “Give him space when he needs it, talk to him when he needs it,” she said. She didn’t sound completely certain. “As I said, there’s no telling how he will react.” Her eyes darkened and her gaze held a warning now. “Do not let him hurt himself.”

 

“What?” Agustín looked baffled. “Why would we let-?”

 

“And do not let him hurt anyone else.”

 

“I’m sure he won’t, Alma,” Félix said gently.

 

“You can never be sure, Félix,” Alma said. Julieta tapped her fingers against the counter, biting her lip. 

 

Her mother had a point. Trauma was an ugly thing, difficult to navigate and impossible to predict, manifesting differently in every individual. Bruno didn’t trust them, that much was clear. Julieta could hardly blame him. Fleeing certain death and arriving in a safe haven, surrounded by magic, surely sounded too good to be true at best and like a cruel trick at worst.

 

But she’d do what she could. Julieta was a healer, it was what she did best. Someway or another, she’d help him adjust. 

 

And that meant starting with feeding him. Honestly, the man was skinnier than Camilo. She served up an extra plate and brought it to his room.

 

He was fast asleep when she entered. That wasn’t so surprising either.

 

Julieta left the plate on the bedside table, watching him worriedly. He’d clearly been crying and the dark shadows under his eyes were obvious. Even though he was sleeping he still looked exhausted. 

 

Casita’s floor shuddered and Julieta patted the doorway fondly as she left the little room.

 

“I know, Casita,” she said gently. “But don’t worry, we’re going to help him.”

 

They were the Madrigals after all. Helping was what they did. 






Bruno woke up with his normal headache; his mouth and throat were so dry it felt like he’d swallowed sand.

 

And there were little voices whispering outside his door.

 

He lay there frozen, gripping the sheets and momentarily utterly certain it was those men on horseback again and there was fire, fire, fire; smoke, gunshots, fire shining off the machetes; screams and shouts, pleas for mercy. Juan collapsing in a puddle of blood.

 

No, no, that wasn’t where he was. He was…He was…

 

Bruno squinted at the pale lavender wall. His bedroom wasn’t lavender, it was green. So he was…Where was he?

 

The floorboards moved up and down, the painting on the wall danced from side to side, the curtains swayed despite the closed shutters and Bruno shot up with a yelp.

 

Casita. Encanto. Alma and Julieta Madrigal.

 

Right. He’d made it over the mountain.

 

“You don’t need to worry; you are safe here, you will not come to harm. I am Alma Madrigal, leader of this village. I promise you will be taken care of. We look after each other here.”

 

Could he believe her? Did she mean it?

 

This felt too easy.

 

I wanna wake him up!” someone hissed and- right, there were people outside the door. They sounded young.

 

Another voice whisper-shouted, “Mamá asked me to get him!”

 

A pair of kids, definitely. And not very quiet kids either. Or subtle.

 

Bruno made sure to pull his ruana on before opening the door. The pair of kids gaped at him before offering nearly identical sheepish smiles, clearly embarrassed about being caught. 

 

They were a boy and girl, maybe ten years old if Bruno had to guess. 

 

The girl had a pair of big green glasses and short curly black hair; her smile quickly turned from sheepish to bright and eager. She looked a little like Julieta, come to think of it. Her dress was blue and white, but brightly embroidered with all sorts of colours: pink butterflies, yellow suns, orange chameleons, green leaves and hearts; pink and purple flowers, purple dumbbells, red wavering lines (Bruno wasn’t sure what they were supposed to be- maybe they were just meant to be pretty?); yellow candles, red and orange umbrellas and, finally, bees. The embroidery was, honestly, pretty damn impressive. 

 

The boy was a little taller than her with lanky limbs, big green eyes and a mop of wild brown curls and freckles on his nose. He grinned up at Bruno as if they were best friends, mischief in his gaze. He wore a yellow shirt with the sleeves rolled up and a red scarf patterned with little chameleons and bright yellow sandals. Huh, maybe these kids just really liked the little reptiles. Who was Bruno to judge, after all? His favourite animals were rats and mice.

 

“Hi!” the girls said, waving at him rapidly, as if worried Bruno couldn’t see her. “I’m Mirabel, this is Camilo. You’re Bruno, right?”

 

“Uh…Yeah,” Bruno said. Kids. Okay. He could handle kids. “Um…Good morning?” Smooth, Bruno, really.

 

“Good morning,” Mirabel said politely.

 

“Tia Julieta said to tell you breakfast is ready,” Camilo said, hands in his pockets. “We’re supposed to show you were to go.” He looked across the courtyard and nodded towards an open door. “Like, right over there. It’s like she thinks you’ll get lost or something.”

 

“Camilo!” Mirabel smacked him on the arm, ignoring his indignant yelp. “Don’t be rude!”

 

Bruno snorted, pressing his hand over his mouth. No matter where you went, kids were always the same. It was something Bruno had always appreciated about them. Honestly, they were easier to figure out than adults half the time.

 

“I’ll, uh, just get dressed,” Bruno said, quickly ducking back into the room. At least his clothes were easy to find, draped across the dresser.

 

Breakfast. Right, well…He spotted the plate of food next to the bed and winced. Right. He hadn’t actually eaten much yesterday at all. Except, apparently, Julieta’s magic food. 

 

He should probably bring the plate back to her. He felt weirdly guilty for not touching it, even though he’d been asleep. 

 

God, how long had he slept anyway?

 

There was a polite little knock on the door and Mirabel called out, “Señor Bruno? Are you okay?”

 

Bruno snapped back to reality and went back to the kids, carrying the plate of untouched food.

 

“I’m fine,” he said. “Gracias. So, um- breakfast?”

 

Camilo pointed at the plate. “You gonna eat that?”

 

“...It’s from yesterday, kiddo.”

 

“That doesn’t answer my question.”

 

Mirabel huffed and dragged Camilo along, gesturing for Bruno to follow. “Ignore him,” she said primly, glancing over her shoulder. “He’ll be stealing seconds from breakfast anyway.”






The kids led him right outside onto the back patio. Bruno left his plate in the kitchen.

 

The back patio was overlooking a very pretty garden with a view of the village. There was a long dining table covered in a white cloth, set with plates, glasses and cutlery, even a vase of bright flowers. Another two tables, pressed against the wall, had an absolutely massive spread of breakfast. Bruno wasn’t sure he’d ever seen so much food laid out in all his life.

 

“Buenos días, Bruno!” Julieta called. Was Bruno imagining things, or did Alma wince? He glanced at her worriedly, but the old woman walked past him, gazing straight ahead.

 

“Buenos días,” Bruno mumbled, rubbing his arm. “Er, sorry I didn’t- I mean, the food you left- I assume it was you anyway, but I didn’t actually eat it, I was sleeping so, er…Yeah. I left it in the kitchen.”

 

Julieta waved the apology away with a smile. “Don’t worry,” she said. “Casita will handle it.”

 

Bruno nodded and tried to pretend that was a totally normal thing to say. The house would handle it. Of course. Why not?

 

“I see the kids found you,” Julieta continued with a fond smile at Mirabel and Camilo. “Mirabel’s my youngest, Camilo’s mí sobrino.”

 

Ah, so Mirabel was the artist Julieta had mentioned yesterday. That explained the embroidery. 

 

“And- oh, here’s everyone,” Julieta said cheerfully, and Bruno winced as a long line of people poured out of the house. There was Félix and the girl from yesterday- Dolores?- a man wearing a smart vest and dress pants, a very tall muscular girl, a heavily pregnant woman with long auburn hair in a braid and another teenager in a long pink dress with flowers in her hair.

 

Bruno wanted the ground to open up and swallow him when they all turned to stare at him. He winced, pulling his hood up on reflex. Félix waved at him and Bruno tried to return his smile, not quite managing it. He probably just looked twitchy.

 

The girl in pink stepped forward with a pretty smile. Her every move was graceful and precise; Bruno wondered if she was some sort of dancer or performer. Her pink dress had delicate blossoms embroidered on its ruffled layers and there were rosebuds in her hair to match her earrings and necklace. She looked to be around the same age as Dolores and her long black hair swept to her hips in a glossy sheath. 

 

And then, with a wave of her hand, she summoned a beautiful pink rose and handed it to Bruno.

 

“Welcome to Encanto,” she said graciously, even bobbing a curtsy. “I’m Isabela Madrigal.”

 

Alma was watching the girl with a proud smile. In fact, the whole family softened, all of them smiling…Except Mirabel. Bruno caught her rolling her eyes, arms crossed.

 

But what a little sweetheart. Bruno managed a small smile, pushing his hood back down. “Gracias,” he said. He quickly added, “Oh, um, I’m Bruno, but…” He gestured between Alma and Julieta. “They p-probably…Probably already t-told you…” He was sure he sounded like a total idiot. He hadn’t stuttered so much since he was a teenager. 

 

Sue him, he was understandably overwhelmed. 

 

Isabela’s smile widened and she flipped her hair back, taking a seat at the table. Alma sat at the head, no surprises there. She took Isabela’s hand gently and quietly spoke with her, still with that soft, proud smile on her face. They were clearly close. It reminded Bruno a bit of Señora Rojas and her granddaughters. She’d always smiled at the girls like that too.

 

A little squeak brought him back to the present. Dolores stood next to him, head slightly tilted, a curious spark in her eyes. Her hair was held back by a bright red bow and there were golden wavering lines on her red and yellow dress, a lot like the ones on Mirabel’s skirt. “I’m Dolores,” she said so quietly that Bruno had to lean forward to hear her. “I hope you’re feeling better.”

 

“A bit, thank you,” Bruno said. She squeaked again and hurried to the table, moving silently. She was even quieter than Bruno. Frankly, it was impressive. 

 

Félix clapped him on the back and said, “I hope you’re hungry!” and mercifully let him be, taking a seat next to Dolores. Camilo followed him.

 

The big tall girl gave him a shy smile and a little wave. Bruno waved back and the girl went to the table.

 

“That’s Luisa,” Mirabel said. “My sister.” She huffed and added, almost reluctantly; “Isabela’s my sister too.”

 

“Luisa’s a little shy,” Julieta said, pouring a cup of coffee for the red-haired woman. “This is my twin sister, Pepa, and my husband, Agustín.”

 

At first glance they didn’t look alike at all. Pepa was tall and pale with red hair and green eyes; Julieta was smaller (though still taller than Bruno) with black hair, tanned skin and brown eyes. Pepa’s face was narrower, Julieta’s was rounder. But they had the same cheekbones and curly hair, the same quirk of their eyebrows, even similar stances. Bruno supposed Pepa must have looked like their father, because Julieta certainly looked more like Alma. 

 

Agustín was tall and fair-skinned with brown hair and a little moustache; a flower was pinned to his dark blue vest. His socks were mis-matched and his glasses were a little crooked. His smile was bright and friendly, a lot like Mirabel’s.

 

“Hola,” Agustín said. “It’s good to meet you.”

 

Bruno nodded. “You too,” he mumbled.

 

Pepa was staring at him, one hand on her stomach. Bruno wondered how far along she was. Her earrings were shaped like the sun and there were more suns on the hem of her orange dress. 

 

As she stared, an honest to God cloud appeared above her head and Bruno squeaked, wide eyes trained on it.

 

Pepa winced and took a sip of coffee. The cloud immediately vanished.

 

“Sorry,” she said sheepishly. “I’m not a morning person.”

 

“Me neither,” Bruno mumbled, forcing himself to look away from the now empty spot where the cloud had been. Pepa’s smile was crooked, a little amused. Like Camilo, she had big green eyes.

 

“I know this must be a lot,” she said. 

 

Understatement of the century, Bruno thought. He just nodded.

 

She was staring again, head tilted to the side. Even as Julieta and Agustín took their seats, Pepa stayed standing and staring at him. Mirabel was still next to him and she looked between them in confusion.

 

Bruno wondered what he’d done already to offend her. She just kept staring, a little crease appearing between her eyebrows.

 

“You look…” She trailed off and shook her head. “...Familiar,” she settled on and Bruno’s eyebrows rose.

 

“Um…” How was he supposed to respond to that?

 

“Pepa,” Alma called. “Take a seat, mija.”

 

Pepa finally looked away and said, “Ah, sí, Mamá, we’re coming.” But even as she went to the table, she glanced back, frowning at Bruno.

 

Great, he’d already managed to annoy someone and he wasn’t even sure what he’d done.

 

A little hand took his and Bruno glanced down to find Mirabel smiling at him. “Sit with me,” she whispered and pulled him to the table.

Notes:

Mirabel, the second she sees Bruno: "New bestie!"

Next up, Bruno's given a tour of the town

Chapter 6: Encanto Village

Summary:

Bruno only had time to take one change of clothes with him when he fled. Pepa and Mirabel take care of that and take the opportunity to show him around town.
Mirabel makes it her private mission to be Bruno's new best friend. Pepa wants to help him smile again.

Notes:

Mirabel has called dibs on being Bruno's bestie

So I saw some headcanons about Encanto working on a bartering/trading system since, as they're so isolated, it's unlikely they have actual currency. And honestly, I like that headcanon so I decided to use it this time. I won't be exploring the idea too much, honestly, but it was a fun chance to use it!

Songs I listened to while writing:
Dream, by Imagine Dragons
God Help The Outcasts, from The Hunchback of Notre Dame
Zombie, by The Cranberries
Better Days, by Dermot Kennedy

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Oh, we all are living in a dream but life ain't what it seems. Oh, everything's a mess. And all these sorrows I have seen, they lead me to believe that everything's a mess.” - Dream, Imagine Dragons




Breakfast was weird. Bruno picked at his food and avoided everyone’s curious gazes; he could feel them like pinpricks, like insects crawling across his skin. He tried, instead, to focus on Mirabel’s chatter. She happily told him all about her embroidery (“I’ve got a symbol for everyone!” she said) and how she hoped the new baby would be a boy (“We’ve got enough girls,” she said with a scowl in Isabela’s direction), and that she was learning to play the accordion. 

 

“I can’t play any instruments,” Bruno told her and Mirabel’s eyes widened like this was a grievous sin.

 

“We’ll have to fix that,” she said solemnly, as if informing him he needed a terrible operation. Bruno was helpless not to smile at her. “Papí can play the piano!”

 

“So can Luisa,” Agustín jumped in. “And Isa loves dancing. Honestly, we all do.”

 

“There’s a lot of music around here,” Félix said happily. “Hope you’re a music fan, amigo.”

 

Bruno liked listening to music, he just couldn’t play any. Or dance. He sometimes liked singing when he was by himself.

 

He nodded at Agustín and sipped at his tea while Mirabel went on a tangent about the last party they’d had and the songs Agustín had played.

 

They were interrupted by Alma delicately clearing her throat and tapping her fork against her glass. It wasn’t very loud, but everyone fell silent, turning towards her. Bruno sat perfectly still, eyes on his plate. 

 

“I will be explaining the situation to the village councillors today,” Alma announced. “But you will follow your usual schedules.”

 

“Yes, Abuela,” the grandchildren said. Mirabel was still quiet.

 

“Yes, Alma,” Félix and Agustín said.

 

“Yes, Mamá,” Julieta said.

 

Alma said, “Pepa, when is your appointment today?”

 

“Not until three, Mamá.”

 

“Then perhaps you can show Br- our guest around in the meantime. He will need new clothes as well.”

 

“Yes, Mamá.”

 

“You don’t need to,” Bruno said quickly, eyes still on his plate. “If you have work to do, I don’t want to distract you.”

 

“I don’t have any today,” Pepa said. Bruno dared to glance up and found her smirking at him, like they were in on some joke together. She patted her stomach with emphasis. “I’m meant to be resting.” She rolled her eyes as she said it.

 

Alma shook her head. “Well,” she said and stood up. “Here’s to another perfect day. La familia Madrigal!”

 

“La familia Madrigal!” everyone else cried. Bruno tapped the table with one hand and crossed his fingers on the other. Uno, dos, trés, four, five, six…

 

“Can I go with you?” Mirabel asked and Pepa reached over to ruffle her hair. Mirabel giggled and batted at her aunt’s hands.

 

“Of course, Mira,” Pepa said, standing up. “Vamos!”

 

Bruno followed, glancing back worriedly as the others began to clear the table. “Shouldn’t- I mean, I can clean up-”

 

“Nah,” Pepa said, dragging him along. Bruno tried not to flinch. “Trust me, you don’t want to be around Agustín and ceramics.”

 

“What…? Why?”

 

Crash!

 

“Ay, Agustín!” He heard Julieta groan.

 

Pepa rolled her eyes. “That’s why.”






People were staring. Pepa couldn’t entirely blame them, but still. It was rude and it wasn’t helping. 

 

Only Mirabel seemed oblivious to the stares and whispers, dancing along the road and pointing out her favourite parts of the village to Bruno. Said newcomer kept his eyes firmly on the ground, wringing the hem of his too-big ruana between his hands.

 

Félix had told her what he’d seen, from finding Bruno collapsed in the hills, to the scars on his back. Julieta had filled her in on the rest.

 

Her heart broke for him. It was a struggle to keep a cloud from forming every time she looked at him. She didn’t want him to think she didn’t like him! She needed to keep calm and keep the awful images out of her head.

 

But it was impossible not to imagine it. 

 

“I don’t have much money,” he mumbled.

 

“You won’t need it,” Pepa said airily. “We have a bartering and trading system around here. It’s a bit hard to make money when we’re so isolated, y’know?” Bruno looked stumped and Pepa added; “Maybe the tailor will take the money anyway, it’ll be a novelty. But you don’t need to worry; he’ll get you sorted with whatever you need and when he needs a favour we’ll help him out.”

 

Bruno shook his head frantically, eyes wide. “I can’t- I mean, no, I can’t let you pay for me,” he said. “Even if it’s favours. I mean, I’m the one who needs clothes, not you.”

 

“I need fabric,” Mirabel added. “So it evens out.”

 

“N-not…Really…” Bruno still looked lost.

 

They stopped outside the tailors and Pepa tried to give him her best encouraging smile. He did not look encouraged. 

 

Still, at least he followed her inside without protest. Mirabel happily ran to a pile of fabrics, examining different threads displayed on the wall.

 

“Ah, Señora Pepa!” The shop owner himself came forward, appearing behind a stack of fabric like a magician. He was a tall thin man, only a little older than Pepa by the name of Señor Edgardo Reyes. “And Señorita Mirabel!” His eyes widened when he spotted Bruno. “And…Who is this?”

 

“Our guest,” Pepa said firmly, laying her hand on Bruno's shoulder. “Bruno. He’s a newcomer; he didn’t have much time to pack when he had to leave home. We’re helping him, uh, restock, I suppose.”

 

“Ah, of course.” Edgardo nodded, looking less nervous; more understanding, more determined in a way. He gestured for them to follow, turning on his heel. “Well, Señor, we can take your measurements, but I also have some ready-made clothes that may suit you.”

 

Bruno looked terrified by the prospect but he let Pepa pull him along. 

 

“We’ll be over here, Mira!” she called over her shoulder.

 

Mirabel waved to acknowledge she’d heard, but didn’t even glance away from the fabrics she was studying. If Pepa left her to her own devices, she’d be here all day. She was the exact same with the dressmakers after all.

 

Bruno was clearly reluctant to take his ruana off and, without it, he seemed even smaller and skinnier. One of Pepa’s breezes could knock him over.

 

And, somehow, in just a shirt with the sleeves reaching his elbows, when he brushed his hair out of his eyes he looked weirdly familiar. Even more so than before.

 

But that couldn’t be right. Bruno had just arrived in Encanto yesterday. Pepa had never seen him until this morning. Maybe Pepa was just being paranoid. Pregnancy hormones making her see things. 

 

He stood still as a statue as Edgardo took his measurements, studiously avoiding their gazes. To Edgardo’s credit, he didn’t say anything or even do a double-take as he measured Bruno’s arms. 

 

Pepa had to look away before her cloud made a reappearance. 






In the end, they walked out with a new ruana (also green), a pair of pants that were just a little too long and two new shirts. Bruno flushed bright red when Pepa insisted on putting in an order for more clothes. If he’d let her she’d have gotten him more there and then, he plainly needed it. 

 

And, as it turned out, Edgardo did consider the money a novelty (“Oh, my papí had a coin collection!”) but only took one coin and refused to take anything further. Not even when Pepa argued that they could return the favour.

 

“It’s an honour to help,” Edgardo said, waving her promises away.

 

Bruno just continued to look slightly embarrassed and very, very confused. Part of Pepa wanted to insist that it was okay, this was just how things worked around here. But she wouldn’t push him. Not now. She’d wait until he seemed a little calmer and try to explain again.

 

Mirabel marched out with five new spools of thread and three new fabrics. Apparently she was planning to make a new skirt. The rest was just for back-up, to restock in case further inspiration hit. 

 

Fair enough, Pepa figured. She’d never been the best at sewing or embroidery herself, but Mirabel took to it like a champ, right from the age of four. 

 

“So, Bruno,” Pepa said as they walked around the village. “What do you do?”

 

“Um, painting mostly,” Bruno said, tugging on his hair. He stepped over a crack in the pavement, holding his breath. “And some pottery. But I usually painted them.”

 

“I like painting,” Mirabel said happily.

 

“I’m clueless about pottery,” Pepa admitted. “Did you like it?”

 

“Hm…” He shrugged. “It was okay. I mean, it was a- a job, you know? It paid. But I definitely preferred painting them instead.”

 

Yep, Mirabel was going to follow this guy around like a baby chick, Pepa was sure of it. Her sobrina’s eyes had utterly lit up with glee. 

 

As Mirabel asked questions about pottery and painting, Bruno seemed to relax a little. He stood up straighter and didn’t seem so conscious of the villagers’ stares and whispers. Pepa glared at anyone she caught staring, her cloud making an appearance to rumble ominously. Seriously, they were trying to make him feel welcome. Gossip was hardly going to do that. He was a newcomer, not a monkey in a zoo! Mamá was right, some people had no manners.

 

And as they made their way to Pepa’s favourite café, Bruno’s eyes widened as he inevitably saw the Madrigals at work. He stopped and stared as Luisa lifted a bridge and carried it a little further down the river, setting it down again. She moved the church across the square and marched away carrying a whole load of donkeys. Pepa swore the donkeys got out every second day.

 

Isabela was with Señora Guzman; she summoned a vine swing and gracefully stepped onto it. As she rose into the air, she summoned roses to twine around Señora Guzman’s balcony and arch over her doorway. Pepa spied Mariano watching Isabela with a smitten smile from his window. 

 

Camilo was with his friends, playing football in a field. He turned into an older boy from school and used his new size to his advantage, easily keeping the ball away from the opposing team.

 

And, of course, Julieta was hard at work at her stall, handing out healing food to anyone who needed it.

 

For a moment, Bruno hesitated. He bit his lip, picking at a loose thread on his ruana. He looked like he was doing some deep thinking. He looked afraid.

 

“Bruno?” Pepa squeezed his shoulder and he flinched with a yelp. She quickly let go, raising her hands placatingly. He looked at her with wide eyes; his smile was plainly forced.

 

“Sorry,” he said sheepishly. “Just, uh- lost in thought.”

 

“Are you okay?” Mirabel asked. He nodded, eyes on the ground.

 

“Well,” Pepa said. “We’re nearly there, let’s go. Some lunch will make you feel better, sí?” 

 

She hoped so anyway. Maybe he just needed more rest. Pepa knew she’d surely need it in his shoes.

 

Pepa was a Madrigal. Being a Madrigal meant you helped people. But truthfully, Pepa had no idea how to help Bruno. She wasn’t sure any of them did.

 

But she’d do her best. 

 

Camilo and Félix weren’t the only ones who liked to make people smile.

 

So Pepa leaned on an old failsafe: she began to recount dramatic, over-the-top stories of her and Julieta’s teen years. Julieta would surely kill her (Mirabel’s scandalised giggles promised as much) but as Bruno let out a quiet laugh and smiled, really smiled, Pepa knew she was on the right track.

 

“She was so drunk that I had to try to finish making her food!” Pepa said, throwing her hands up. Bruno ducked his head to hide his grin. Pepa beamed, a rainbow appearing above her. “Only, y’know, I’m not a healer and I was pretty drunk too. So I had to keep waking Juli up to do the next steps, the big ones, so her Gift would work. And, yeah, it worked- but let me tell you, it tasted like crap.

 

Mirabel laughed louder and Bruno was finally standing up straight as they reached the cafe.

 

It would do. For now, it would do.

 

As if in response, in agreement, the baby kicked. Pepa smiled, her hand resting on her stomach. She figured that was a good sign.






Honestly, it was impossible not to smile as Mirabel chattered away. Bruno could almost ignore everyone staring and whispering. 

 

Well, he’d been in small towns like this before. Surely the novelty of his presence would wear off soon. Hopefully. 

 

Pepa’s cloud sometimes flickered to existence above her head and she’d wave it away with an annoyed scowl as she ate her lunch. She always looked around apologetically when it appeared, as if expecting angry reactions. And maybe she was; Bruno was pretty sure he caught some people looking at the cloud and rolling their eyes.

 

Bruno wanted to reserve judgement on the villagers, really he did; he knew he should. But Pepa had been so nice that it was hard for him to not immediately categorise anyone staring at her as Nosey Bastards. 

 

And Mirabel was just a complete and utter sweetheart.

 

They’d done the impossible: they’d actually managed to distract him and keep Bruno from getting lost in his own head.

 

“I’m sorry if it’s rude to ask,” Bruno said shyly. “But, um, how far along are you?”

 

Pepa lit up (literally, there was light around her and it was shocking and beautiful) and grinned at him, both hands resting protectively on her stomach.

 

“Six months!” she said proudly. “Camilo’s hoping it’s a boy, Dolores is hoping for another girl.”

 

Bruno smiled. “Poor kid’s outnumbered with all the girls, huh?”

 

“Oh for sure,” Pepa said.

 

Mirabel nodded in agreement. “I want another boy,” she said. “We’ve got too many girls.” She’d said the same thing at breakfast and she was saying it like she was putting in a formal request.

 

Pepa grinned at her. “I’ll be sure to tell the baby to be a boy, Mira.”

 

Mirabel nodded, looking satisfied. Pepa caught Bruno’s eye and winked.

 

And Bruno, who wasn’t even sure if he’d ever smile again only yesterday, bit back a laugh and poured himself more coffee.

 

Maybe it was part of the whole magic family thing, or maybe Pepa and Mirabel were just that charismatic, but he liked them anyway. 

 

Speaking of magic, a thought occurred to him.

 

He turned to Mirabel and asked, “So, what’s your magic, chiquita?”

 

Mirabel froze. Pepa froze. Bruno was pretty sure he saw the waitress and some of the patrons freeze too. Yep, definitely nosey. 

 

“Oh, um…” Mirabel was flushing bright pink, studiously avoiding eye contact. She took a long gulp of her orange juice and blurted out, “I don’t have a Gift.”

 

“Oh.” Bruno shrugged and smiled. “Okay. So, what’re you gonna make with all that fabric you bought? You said something about a skirt, right?”






“Oh. Okay. So, what’re you gonna make with all that fabric you bought? You said something about a skirt, right?”

 

Mirabel stared at Bruno, mouth slightly open. His words were so simple but they echoed on and on in her head, a mantra. Even as she answered him, explaining her plans for a new skirt, she couldn’t get it out of her head.

 

“Oh. Okay. So, what’re you gonna make with all that fabric you bought? You said something about a skirt, right?”

 

Bruno just…Accepted it. He didn’t look at her with pity or confusion like so many adults (and even a lot of the kids her age); he didn’t hate her like Isabela or avoid her like Abuela. He didn’t go overboard like her mamá and papá, always trying to reassure her she was Just As Special As Anyone Else. He just accepted that Mirabel didn’t have a Gift and moved on.

 

It made Mirabel’s head spin.

 

“Oh. Okay. So, what’re you gonna make with all that fabric you bought? You said something about a skirt, right?”

 

Such small, simple words. Such a casual sentence, small talk really. Almost boring, the type of stuff adults talked about. And Mirabel couldn’t get it out of her head, she couldn’t move past it.

 

Bruno hadn’t sounded sad or sorry for her. He hadn’t been confused or angry or suspicious. 

 

He still talked to her like normal.

 

Even Tia Pepa had frozen up for a moment but Bruno didn’t look at Mirabel like she was a weirdo. To him, the magic was the strange thing. To him, Mirabel not having magic was normal. 

 

He thought Mirabel was normal. And not normal in a bad way. In a good way. He didn’t care that she was Madrigal and she was supposed to have a Gift. He didn’t seem to care about being a Madrigal at all. Maybe it was because he was new and didn’t get it yet, but right now he still smiled at Mirabel and listened to what she said.

 

Slowly, a grin stretched across her face. Her eyes stung and she had to wipe them quick when Bruno and Pepa weren’t looking. She was ten, she was too big to be crying over this.

 

But…

 

But he was being so normal about it. So casual. He just moved on and didn’t press or ask funny questions. 

 

Mirabel suddenly hoped the new houses would take longer than three months. She hoped that maybe there wouldn’t be enough after all and they’d have to wait while another house was made for Bruno. Then he could stay in Casita longer and Mirabel could keep talking to him. 

 

Mirabel wasn’t sure if she had all the right words to describe how she was feeling. She just knew she felt like someone had set off fireworks in her chest.

 

When Mirabel described the skirt she wanted to make, Bruno smiled at her the way people usually smiled at Isabela, like she’d done something really impressive.

 

That did it. Mirabel had to be friends with him, like right now. 

 

“She’s even helped make some of the baby clothes,” Pepa said proudly. As she spoke about the baby, she got a little teary-eyed and her cloud reappeared. Mirabel swatted at it with her menu.

 

“I’m hopeless with a needle,” Bruno said with a shrug and he sounded cheerful enough. “The last time I tried to mend one of my shirts by myself, I ended up sewing the sleeve together.”

 

“I can teach you!” Mirabel said eagerly. She grinned at him, an idea springing to life; she could teach him and he’d stay longer. Mamá had said to make him feel welcome and what better way to do that than just hang out? 

 

Bruno looked surprised by the offer.

 

“She means that,” Pepa said. “She actually showed Luisa how to do some sewing too.”

 

Bruno tilted his head a little and Mirabel thought he looked weirdly like Tia Pepa when he did that. 

 

He shrugged and said, “Sure, it would definitely be useful.”


That was another thing: useful. Here, Mirabel could definitely be useful. She’d be teaching Bruno something that would help him and do what Mamá said by helping to welcome him. Two birds with one stone.

Notes:

Next up, Bruno and Dolores have a late-night chat and we get some Alma POV

Chapter 7: Late Nights

Summary:

Bruno and Dolores have a late night chat. Alma does what she does best and tries to ignore her own feelings.

Notes:

Alma: "We should keep an eye on this young man and help him through any trauma he may face. Trauma is a complicated, unpredictable thing."
Also Alma: "Not me though, lol"

Songs I listened to while writing:
Tio Bruno, from Encanto
Somewhere Only We Know, by Lily Allen
Waving Through A Window, from Dear Evan Hansen
Hiding In Your Hands, from Dear Evan Hansen (Bonus Track)
Blossoms, by The Amazing Devil

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Is this the place we used to love? Is this the place that I've been dreaming of? Oh, simple thing, where have you gone? I'm getting old and I need something to rely on. And if you have a minute, why don't we go talk about it, somewhere only we know?” - Somewhere Only We Know, Lily Allen




The day was long and chaotic, so Bruno hoped it would wear him out, that he’d get some sleep. Despite sleeping a long time yesterday, he didn’t feel like he had.

 

But as soon as he lay down that night, it was like all his energy came pouring back. He couldn’t even close his eyes. He lay there on the bed, occasionally tapping on the headboard, humming to himself and trying to think of a story to make himself nod off.

 

No luck.

 

He closed his eyes and-

 

Gunshots, fire, Juan.

 

He opened his eyes with a sigh. Yeah, somehow he doubted he’d be getting any sleep tonight.

 

Bruno didn’t much fancy the risk of another green dream anyway.

 

He pushed himself off the bed and went to the kitchen. Hopefully the Madrigals wouldn’t mind if he made himself some tea.

 

Casita’s tiles rippled (seriously, how was Bruno supposed to get used to this?) as if trying to help him along. When Bruno entered the kitchen, a lamp lit itself and when he reached for a mug the shelf lowered itself.

 

Feeling utterly ridiculous he said, “Um, gracias.”

 

The very walls seemed to perk up. It looked like Casita appreciated it. 

 

So, weirdly enough, Bruno wasn’t alone. He wasn’t quite sure what to make of that yet; was it comforting or did it freak him out? Maybe a bit of both. Still, it didn’t seem like the house wanted to hurt him.

 

He got to work on making the tea and Casita rolled out a plate of cookies as the water boiled.

 

“You’re sweet, huh?” Bruno asked and the tiles rippled again, looking almost like a dance. Flattered, agreeing. 

 

Okay, maybe it was comforting after all.

 

He sat on the counter to drink, swinging his legs like he always did. 

 

Then a very quiet voice spoke up; “Do you mind if I join you?”

 

He was startled all the same and nearly fell off the counter with a yelp. Dolores stood in the doorway, wrapped in a red dressing gown, her curls spiralling around her shoulders, looking at him with wide eyes and a curious little pout.

 

Well, it was her home, Bruno could hardly refuse her. So he nodded and she moved silently into the room, making herself some tea and sitting on the counter next to him. Bruno tried very hard to pretend he hadn't almost had a heart-attack.

 

“Did I wake you?” Bruno asked, suddenly worried. Julieta mentioned Dolores had magic hearing. Could she even turn it off? How did she sleep like that?

 

“No,” Dolores said, still so quiet. “I was awake anyway. There’s-” She broke off with a squeak.

 

Bruno raised an eyebrow, peering at her curiously. She was staring straight ahead, tapping her fingers on her knees and sitting stiffly.

 

“There’s what?” he asked. “Are you okay?”

 

“Hm…” She was staring resolutely at the wall. “There’s just…A neighbour writes poetry every night and I can hear it. He recites it as he writes it. He’s really good, so I wanted to listen. That’s why I was awake.”

 

Okay, Bruno had to admit, that was kind of adorable. He could appreciate a good poem. 

 

Which begged the question, how did Dolores sleep with all the noise? She didn’t look sleep deprived at all. Bruno envied it.

 

“Do you- with your hearing, uh…” He took one of the cookies and Dolores tilted her head curiously. “Is it hard to sleep?”

 

“Oh, no.” She shook her head. “My room is soundproof.”

 

For her sake (and her sanity) he was glad.

 

They sat for a while in companionable silence. The mystery poet must have finished his recitation, because Dolores spoke up; “How was your day? I know this must all be overwhelming.”

 

Everyone kept saying that. Well, they were right.

 

“It’ll take some adjusting,” Bruno said, avoiding her gaze. “Uh, a lot of adjusting. But it- it was okay. Gonna take a while to get used to trading instead of using money too.”

 

“Oh, you have actual money?” Dolores perked up with interest. “My abuelo and abuela- Papá’s parents- they have some. I like the sound it makes when it clinks together.”

 

Bruno smiled at her. “I have some,” he said. “If you want you can have some of it.”

 

“Hm!” Her smile widened. “I couldn’t, I- oh, who am I kidding, yes please.” She finished her tea and hopped off the counter. “Buenas noches.”

 

“Buenas noches,” Bruno echoed.

 

She left the kitchen without a sound and, faintly, Bruno heard her bedroom door open and shut, so quietly he almost missed it. She truly was quiet as a mouse. Quieter than a mouse, even.

 

The tap squeaked as it swayed left to right, catching his attention.

 

“Ay, I know, it’s late,” he whispered and immediately felt ridiculous again. He was talking to a house. Now that was going to take some getting used to.

 

As he crossed the courtyard to head back to his room, the stairs clattered, making a racket.

 

“Shh!” Bruno hissed, pressing a finger to his lips. He didn’t want to wake anyone else.

 

(He closed the door behind him, missing how the stairs clattered again, more insistently.)

 

Even as he lay down, he knew he wouldn’t be sleeping. He still felt wound up, thrumming with nervous energy.

 

Earlier that day, watching the Madrigals so casually use their magic, he’d wondered about telling Pepa about the green dreams. Maybe they would understand. 

 

But their magic was so different, so useful, and they could all control it.

 

And even then, he saw how some of the villagers had looked at Pepa with annoyance. 

 

If they looked at their leader’s daughter like that, how would they look at him? The one who saw bad things, the one so many people had been convinced made bad things happen...

 

Bruno sighed, rolling over onto his side and pulling the cover right up over his head. He’d keep quiet. He’d keep his big mouth shut and pray he wouldn’t see anything catastrophic ever again. 

 

He didn’t get much sleep that night.

 

Maybe that was for the best.






Alma went to her window with a frown. She could have sworn she heard Casita moving, but when she looked out over the courtyard, all was calm.

 

She briefly wondered if their guest was sleeping and then couldn’t fully banish the thought.

 

Another village burned down. Another loved one sacrificing himself. More friends and neighbours lost, more lives destroyed. 

 

Another desperate flight into the mountains.

 

Another lost boy bearing her son’s name.

 

Shouldn’t she have felt a companionship with him? Instead, his name tore at her heart. Among all the tragedy, it was the one detail she kept coming back to: that name.

 

You’ll need to call him by name, Alma reminded herself as she turned away from the window. He’ll think you’re incredibly rude otherwise. It was hardly the proper way to treat a guest, let alone a new villager who would soon look to her as the strong leader she needed to be.

 

But she couldn’t do it. Not yet. God, she could barely stand to think about his name, let alone say it. 

 

Perhaps he would not begrudge her, or even notice. She didn’t owe him her most tragic story anyway.

 

She’d still have to keep an eye on him. As she’d told Julieta and the others, trauma manifested in unexpected ways. She’d seen so many of her friends, usually rational people, become lost in unseen horrors, hurting themselves and others around them.

 

Sighing, she lay back down. It wasn’t as if she thought he was a threat, not exactly, but the possibility was there all the same. 

 

“And he is not a threat?” Señor De la Cruz had asked when she finished explaining what had happened. Rumours had already started circulating anyway, it was a wonder they hadn’t come knocking at Casita’s door for answers, instead waiting patiently for Alma to call on them.

 

“Of course not,” Alma had said briskly. “Or else the mountains would never have let him in.”

 

He’s unarmed, he’s alone, she did not say. Félix told me his back is covered with scars. I saw his arms myself. Someone hurt that boy again and again. Perhaps many people did. We will not be among that number. 

 

I will not be responsible for the loss of a life.

 

“He will help us grow, like all the others before him,” Alma had said instead, chin up, looking the councillors all in the eye, one by one. Trust that I would not risk our home in such a manner. “He fled a massacre much like the one we faced. He is a stranger, yes, but he does not mean us any harm.”

 

“He probably thinks we mean him harm,” Señora Guzman said sadly.

 

It was a possibility, Alma had to admit it. Even if it made her bristle on instinct, even if it made her want to protest that she would never…

 

“What is his name?” Padré Martinez asked, looking sympathetic.

 

Alma swallowed. “Bruno Expósito,” she said and quickly changed the subject to the construction of the new bridge.

 

Tomorrow you will call him by his name, Alma told herself as she closed her eyes. You will not ignore him and you will not walk away when someone else says his name.

 

And if she didn’t…Well. It wasn’t like he’d be living in Casita forever.

Notes:

Alma, I say this with all my love: get some therapy.
Bruno, sweetie, maybe question how you can understand the house so well, hm?

Next up, some Bruno and Mirabel bonding; Bruno sees his first hints of a missing Madrigal and that trauma starts to show itself...

Chapter 8: Shatter

Summary:

Mirabel starts her Best Friends Forever Plan, dragging Bruno along for the ride.
Bruno struggles to adjust: between lack of sleep and unaddressed trauma, it's a miracle he lasts the week before things go wrong.

Notes:

TRIGGER WARNING: Bruno has a massive panic attack as well as some heavy flashbacks in this chapter of self-harm, a suicide attempt and child abuse. It starts with "It was simple. So simple," and continues to the end of the chapter. Please proceed with caution, skip if you must; just keep yourself safe 💕

In which Mirabel starts her Best Friend Plan and Bruno struggles with his trauma

Songs I listened to while writing:
OK, by Alan Walker
Circles, by Greta Svabo Bech
Laura Palmer, by Bastille
Achilles Come Down, by Gang Of Youths
RIP 2 My Youth, by The Neighbourhood
Leave Out All The Rest, by Linkin Park
Shatter Me, by Lindsey Sterling
The Grey, by Icon For Hire

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“When I told you it was fine, it was just another lie; just like ‘Boys don’t cry.’ Lost in the threads of her little spiderwebs, got me hiding in a corner, trying not to call it. This is how the heart breaks. Just like you said, a fairytale from hell.” - OK, Alan Walker




The next day, Mirabel put her plan into action. As soon as breakfast was done, and Papá and Tio Félix started on their chores, she ran up to Bruno before he could disappear into his room.

 

He looked tired and she almost felt bad for disturbing him. But not really. She was going to teach him how to sew and then she’d get to keep talking to him; he’d feel welcome like Mamá wanted and Mirabel would get to be his friend. All around, everyone won! 

 

“I can show you how to sew today,” she said brightly.

 

Bruno yawned, his hand pressed over his mouth. He crossed his eyes at her and she giggled.

 

“Unless you’re too tired?” she asked, suddenly worried. He really looked sleepy.

 

“Nah,” Bruno said, shaking his head. His curls bounced as he did. “Just go easy on me, kid, I’m hopeless with needles.”

 

“Don’t worry, it’ll be easy!” Mirabel grabbed his hand and pulled him to the stairs. Casita’s floor danced in their wake, the stairs extended so they reached them faster.

 

As soon as they reached the landing, the floor shuddered. The tiles rippled in one row, towards the staircase no-one touched. Towards the blank, glowing door. Her poor lost Tio's door, which no one could open. Camilo had tried once, but that was a secret. The door hadn't budged anyway.

 

Mirabel glanced at the candle and thought, Bring him home, okay? The candle shined steadily, like a tiny lighthouse. Not that Mirabel had ever seen a lighthouse, but she’d seen illustrations in books and the candle sometimes reminded her of those lighthouses, looking out over Encanto, always shining, guiding the way home.

 

Bruno had spotted the door. He looked at Abuela’s door and all the others and frowned.

 

“Why’s that one blank?” he asked. “Is it yours?”

 

“No,” Mirabel said sadly. “It’s my Tio’s.”

 

“Félix’s?” Bruno looked confused.

 

“No, no, my other Tio. He got lost a long, long time ago, when Abuelo Pedro died and went to Heaven. Abuela told me. But we’re not supposed to talk about him, because it makes Abuela and everyone else sad.”

 

“Oh…” Bruno bit his lip. “Sorry, kid.”

 

“It’s okay.” Mirabel took his hand again, pulling him towards the nursery. “My room’s this way!”

 

He kept glancing back at her tio’s door with a little frown. 

 

Come to think of it…Huh. Her Tio’s name was Bruno too! But Abuela always called him Brunito, because he’d been a baby when he was lost. Not lost like Abuelo Pedro, who went to Heaven; her Tio Bruno was actually lost. And Mamá said this Bruno’s surname was Expósito, but that he didn’t like it and might choose a new one, so she said to just call him Bruno for now, unless he said not to. In other words, be polite. Mirabel tried to imagine choosing a new name and immediately felt overwhelmed by all the possibilities. There were so many names in the world. How could you ever pick one? And what if you picked something that people made fun of? You’d have to change it again.

 

Besides, Madrigal was a pretty great name. Mirabel wouldn’t ever want to change it.

 

She pushed Bruno towards the window seat and grabbed some thread, a needle and fabric. She gave him the best serious look she could manage.

 

“We’re going to start with the basics,” she announced, trying to sound like her teacher. “Watch me close, okay?”

 

Bruno smiled at her, looking a little less tired. Score! He saluted her and leaned forward. “Aye-aye, captain,” he said and Mirabel giggled.

 

True to his word, Bruno watched carefully. It was such a simple row of stitches, but he seemed really impressed. 

 

Mirabel hoped Camilo wouldn’t try and steal him. She’d called dibs. Silent dibs, but it still counted. Besides, she was the one who’d helped show Bruno around and he seemed to like her too.

 

“When’d you learn all this?” Bruno asked.

 

“I was tiny,” Mirabel said proudly. “Mamá started showing me when I was four! It's fun.”

 

Bruno’s eyebrows rose and he let out a low, impressed whistle. Mirabel grinned at him.

 

“When’d you learn painting?” she asked.

 

“Uh, probably around the same age as you,” Bruno said with a little smile. “I was always drawing on stuff.”

 

“Did you ever draw on the walls?” Mirabel asked. “Camilo and I tried a few times, but Casita washed it away.”

 

There was a funny look on his face then; his smile vanished, his eyes went dim. He stared into space for a moment and Mirabel was worried that maybe his parents had yelled at him or- oh no, what if they’d hit him? Mamá and Papá told her all about bad parents like that.

 

But then Bruno shook his head and smiled at her again, wringing his ruana’s hem between his hands. “Heh, I tried it once,” he said. “But uh…Anyway, yeah, I was pretty small too. It was fun and, hey, practice makes perfect, right?”

 

“That’s what Abuela says,” Mirabel said. “And Mamí and Papí. And Tia Pepa and Tio Félix. And my teacher. I think adults just all say it.”

 

Bruno’s smile widened. “Guess so, kid.”






Mirabel was so sure her plan was going well. Bruno even managed a neat row of stitches. They were too big, but they were neat and way better than his first five attempts. As they worked, he told her funny stories he’d come up with when he was her age that set her off giggling so hard that she nearly dropped her sewing. 

 

Bruno didn’t laugh, but he smiled at her like she’d done something great. It was the way people usually looked at Luisa and Isabela. There was no pity or confusion to his smile. He looked her in the eye…At least for a few seconds. He kept glancing away. But he’d done that with everyone, so Mirabel didn’t think it was a problem with her. She hoped not.

 

“Do you like it here?” she asked as Agustín called them down for lunch.

 

Bruno looked surprised by the question. Before he could answer, Casita opened the nursery door for them, the tiles rippling in welcome.

 

“Lunch time!” Agustín called again. “And I didn’t even break any plates!”

 

“Yeah,” Mirabel heard Tio Félix scoff. “Because I carried them.”

 

“Does your papá always break things?” Bruno asked as they went downstairs.

 

“Yup,” Mirabel said. “Plates, glasses, chairs…Himself. Bees hate him, just you wait and see. He’s gonna go chop wood later and I bet he’ll get stung.”

 

Bruno stopped in the doorway of the dining room, watching as Agustín tripped over one of the seats and landed flat on the ground.

 

“I can believe it,” he muttered as Félix hurried to help her papá up. Giggling, Mirabel went to help too.






The week carried on like that. There was a strict routine with the Madrigals: breakfast was always early and they all had chores to do. Bruno hadn’t gone back into the village yet, but he learned how things worked in La Casa Madrigal.

 

Bruno saw pretty fast that the magical members of the family left right after breakfast to help around the village with…Pretty much everything and anything. Julieta sometimes came back to make lunch; if not, Félix handled it, or they had leftovers. However, Julieta would always be back to make dinner. Sometimes Pepa came home to rest, be it a nap or just to put her feet up. Perfectly understandable and recommended given her condition. Bruno would have been more concerned if she didn’t rest, though he knew it wasn’t his place to say so.

 

Félix and Agustín, with Mirabel’s help, cleaned Casita and allowed Bruno to help too. On days when the house didn’t need cleaning, the men accompanied their wives on their respective duties. Mirabel, oddly enough, stubbornly refused to go with them, following Bruno around the house like a baby duckling, telling him anecdotes and explaining what her family members did throughout the day. She was still showing him how to sew and, on days when she didn’t, she asked him about painting.

 

She asked about his parents once. Bruno gave an awkward chuckle, more like a squeak, and changed the subject fast.

 

Given his lack of sleep, he saw Luisa working out at all hours, very early in the morning and very late at night. Once, just before dawn, he saw her doing pushups in the garden. 

 

Isabela, as far as he could gather, was something of a decorator for the town. Bruno had heard Félix call her “Our angel,” and Señora Alma call her “mi querida,” and “mi flor,” or “our perfect Isabela,” which he honestly thought was very cute. Again, he was reminded of Señora Rojas and her granddaughters, who she’d always given sweet nicknames to.

 

Unlike Señora Rojas however, Señora Alma was stern. She did not tolerate anyone interrupting her during her morning speeches, nor did she want anyone to misbehave at the dinner table. Camilo, who never seemed to sit still, was on the receiving end of many lectures, as was Mirabel. Villagers sometimes came by to ask her advice or to ask for a favour; if they had a problem, it was Señora Alma they went to first and she always seemed to have the answers.

 

So: she was stern, she was no-nonsense and she was capable. She really was their leader. Nothing seemed to phase her. This was a small village in an isolated valley; it was hardly living among the wealthy elite of Bogotá or the royal courts of times past, but it was obvious that Señora Alma was a regal woman, queen of her own tiny kingdom.

 

And he couldn’t shake the feeling that he was bothering her. Every morning, she walked right past him, her eyes roaming over him without stopping, as if he wasn’t there at all. She didn’t address him. She frowned when anyone said his name.

 

Well, it had been Julieta’s idea to let him stay in their house, not Alma’s. Perhaps she’d only agreed to be polite.

 

Just keep your head down, Bruno told himself. So long as he didn’t get on her bad side, it would be fine. She’d already welcomed him to her village, she was letting him stay in her home, regardless of her personal feelings. So Bruno would do his best to just…Not bother her.

 

He knew how to keep out of the way. He was an expert on keeping his mouth shut. 

 

Once upon a time, he might have wondered what he’d done wrong. Years and years ago, when he was still a child, he might have demanded to know what he’d done wrong and how to fix it.

 

He wasn’t that child anymore.

 

The scars on his back twinged in memory and Bruno kept his mouth shut and his head bowed as Señora Alma frowned at him.






All the while, he didn’t sleep. He did his damn best to stay awake. Well, he did sleep, but not much at all. He was left feeling light-headed as the week went on, spacing out and snapping back to reality when Mirabel called his name. His usual headache was ever-present, a steady thud-thud-thud, like someone was knocking on his forehead. The lack of sleep probably didn’t help, but Bruno was determined to keep the green dreams at bay for as long as he could.

 

There’d been no green dreams, thank God. But his dreams, when he finally succumbed to sleep, were weird.

 

(Because that’s the thing: Bruno thought he was handling it all okay. Just because he wasn’t crouched in a corner, screaming at shadows, didn’t mean he was okay. Just because he wasn’t standing on the edge of a bridge didn’t mean he was alright. He wasn’t trying to die, but a part of him was so sure the massacre was his fault. If he just hadn’t seen it…)

 

He dreamed he was running from something in the dark. There was shouting, hoofbeats; he could smell smoke. 

 

Before him was a glowing door. He never got close enough to see it properly; it was too far away, shimmering like a star. As he ran, it faded away.

 

Then something lashed his back until it was coated in blood and it kept going even when he stumbled and fell, unable to keep running. Other times it cut his arms and legs, and Bruno awoke with a choked gasp every time, heart pounding, head swimming, too tense to try and sleep again.

 

All things considered, it was a wonder he lasted to the end of the week before it went wrong.






It was simple. So simple.

 

Agustín dropped a plate.

 

Bruno had quietly offered to help him clean the dishes and Pepa, who was originally meant to help, gratefully went to lie down instead.

 

And Agustín dropped a plate.

 

It shattered on the ground, crash, and Bruno quickly knelt to pick up the pieces. But he stumbled, too tired to truly focus; he gripped a shard too tightly, it cut into his palm, drawing blood and…and…

 

He was twelve and kneeling on the floor as the blood trickled down his wrist and dripped onto the floor. The cook was shouting, the other boy was apologising for dropping the plate, and all Bruno could focus on was the blood.

 

He slipped a shard into his pocket when they weren’t looking. The pain in his hand didn’t really bother him. Not at all. In fact, it sparked an idea. An awful idea. Because when he cut his hand, something in his mind…Lessened. Something in his mind said it would help.

 

That night, he cut his leg and the pain in his head seemed to fade.

 

“Oh, mierda, Bruno, let me help!” Agustín’s voice sounded muffled.

 

“Diablo!” the Mother Superior shrieked as she brought the belt down. Bruno, eight years old, screamed and sobbed as blood ran down his back.

 

“I didn’t mean to!” he sobbed. “I’m sorry!”

 

He’d dreamed that one of the more popular girls, Dukine, wouldn’t get adopted by that rich couple who’d been coming around after all: quiet, awkward Valerie would instead. 

 

He’d quietly told Valerie and, sure enough, the rich couple had chosen her.

 

But Dukine had heard him and she went running to the Mother Superior.

 

“You should be ashamed of such wickedness, cursing poor Dukine!”

 

He’d just been trying to help Valerie…

 

“Bruno? Bruno are you okay?” Agustín’s face was blurred and Bruno couldn’t breathe. There was blood coating his hand and…

 

He was sixteen and he’d been living on the streets for two weeks. He stood on the edge of the bridge, dispassionately watching the water below.

 

And he jumped.

 

He was sitting on a chair. Why was he on a chair? Hadn’t he been on the ground? His hand hurt, his head was pounding and he couldn’t breathe.

 

Julieta was there, holding a tamale. She was talking and Bruno couldn’t understand a word. He just doubled over with a sob, his arms wrapped around himself.

 

Juan’s blood soaked the ground, Bruno saw it, he saw it all. He’d been too slow to turn away. He ran through his burning village and he saw it all. He saw his dead neighbours, people he’d known for fifteen years. People who had never done any harm. He saw the church’s roof collapse, sending out waves of embers. 

 

Warm arms wrapped around him, arms that weren’t his and weren’t Juan’s. A hand stroked his hair and a gentle voice said, “It’s okay, mi amigo, I’m here, I’m right here, you’re safe.”

 

Was he? Was he safe? Had he ever been safe? He’d thought he’d been safe before and that had been a lie.

 

Bruno closed his eyes, shuddering, his cut hand twitching.

 

“What the hell was that?” the man on horseback hissed and Juan pushed Bruno back.

 

“Run. Run, Bruno!”

 

“It’s just me, it’s just Julieta. C’mon, Bruno, you know me. We’re friends. You’re in Casita, you’re in Encanto. You’re not- you’re not there anymore. They can never hurt you again, I promise. They’re gone. You’re safe. It’s 1945, you’re in Encanto, you’re in Casita; I’m Julieta, Agustín’s right here too…”

 

“Brujo!”

 

“Bad Luck Bruno, that’s what you are; you’re just bad luck.”

 

“Diablo! How dare you?”

 

“Devil-spawn, you’ll curse us all!”

 

“Chico del río, you’re more trouble than you’re worth.”

 

“I’m here, just listen to my voice, Bruno; can you do that?”

 

There were arms around him, a hand in his hair and a quiet voice in his ear. He knew that voice, though it was a new voice. It was a woman, calm and gentle.

 

Julieta.

 

Slowly, oh so slowly, Bruno opened his eyes.

 

The shattered plate was still on the floor and he could see drops of blood. Agustín sat next to him, a hand on Bruno’s shoulder. Julieta was hugging him tightly, quietly murmuring to him.

 

He tried to stop shivering.

 

“I…I’m s-sorry,” he croaked. “I don’t know…” Why now? He’d been okay, hadn’t he? 

 

“Oh, Bruno,” Julieta said softly, sadly. “You have nothing to be sorry for.”

 

And wasn’t that always the strangest concept? Bruno leaned against her and, slowly, the shivering stopped.

 

“I didn’t bother Dolores, did I?” he mumbled.

 

“She’s in her room,” Julieta said. “Don’t worry. It wouldn’t have bothered her anyway.” She pulled back a little to look him in the eye. “I mean it. We want to help. All of us do.”

 

“Ready to eat something?” Agustín asked. He picked the tamale off a plate and held it out.

 

Bruno nibbled at it, his stomach churning, and watched with dull eyes as the cut healed itself.

 

“We’d better clean that up,” Julieta said, still gentle.

 

Bruno felt like a ragdoll as he let her lead him over to the sink to clean the blood off his hand, washing the evidence away. Behind them, Agustín cleared the broken shards and, when Bruno turned around, the blood was gone from the floor too.

 

“Do you want to talk about it?” Agustín asked quietly.

 

Bruno made a strangled noise, half a laugh and half a sob.

 

“I wouldn’t even know where to start,” he admitted.

 

“We have time,” Julieta said, her arm around his shoulders. 

 

Bruno looked at their gentle, earnest faces and it took all his strength to not burst into tears again.

 

He let Julieta lead him back to the table and sat before he could fall over entirely. 

 

He couldn’t tell them everything. He couldn’t. Curse aside, he hardly knew them.

 

But he’d told Juan once. He’d trusted Abuelo Juan then. Maybe he could try and trust Julieta and Agustín now. 

 

At least with some of it. Maybe.

 

Truth be told, he rather wanted to run to the guest room and barricade the door. He was torn between exhaustion and mortification.

 

Julieta squeezed his shoulder, her smile infinitely patient. Agustín’s eyes were bright and friendly.

 

So Bruno began to talk. He didn't need to tell them everything after all.

Notes:

Forgive me, but we have some angst to cover

Next up, Julieta and Agustín learn a little more about Bruno. Félix and Agustín convince Bruno to join them in town

Chapter 9: Get Up Off The Roof

Summary:

Bruno begins to open up a little to Julieta and Agustín. While Julieta worries, Agustín comes up with a plan to help Bruno.

Notes:

TRIGGER WARNING for discussion of a suicide attempt and child abuse

Chapter title taken from the song "Achilles Come Down"

Julieta's Big Sister Instincts: Activate!

Songs I listened to while writing:
Achilles Come Down, by Gang Of Youths
Soldier, by Tomee Profitt and Fleurie
Pieces, by Icon For Hire
Disappear, from Dear Evan Hansen
Blossoms, by The Amazing Devil
Who Wants To Live Forever, by Queen

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“You may feel no purpose nor a point for existing, it's all just conjecture and gloom. And there may not be meaning, so find one and seize it; do not waste yourself on this roof. Hear those bells ring deep in the soul, chiming away for a moment. Feel your breath course frankly below and see life as a worthy opponent. Today, of all days, see how the most dangerous thing is to love. How you will heal and you'll rise above.” - Achilles Come Down, Gang Of Youths




“I, uh, I don’t know where to start,” Bruno said.

 

“Anywhere,” Julieta said, squeezing his hands. Truth be told, it helped him focus. She bit her lip and asked, “What were you remembering?”

 

“A lot,” Bruno admitted, not managing to look her in the eye. He stared at their joined hands instead. Agustín set a cup of tea next to him.

 

“It was, um…I was sixteen and- and I jumped off a bridge.” His voice was quiet, so quiet, barely above a whisper. He shut his eyes and waited for the shouting, the reminders that such an act was a terrible sin; he waited to be called crazy, unhinged, dangerous.

 

Instead, Julieta hugged him.

 

“I’m so sorry,” she said softly, squeezing him tightly. Bruno’s arms were pinned to his side, he couldn’t hug her back. It was a struggle not to burst into tears again. Agustín squeezed his shoulder, his expression devoid of any disgust or anger; he looked sympathetic and very sad.

 

“Didn’t work obviously,” Bruno mumbled against Julieta’s shoulder.

 

“Good,” Julieta said, suddenly fierce. “I’m glad it didn’t.” She pulled back to look him in the eye and Bruno felt frozen to the spot. As much as he wanted to look away, he couldn’t.




He jumped, but the bridge wasn’t nearly high enough, the river’s current wasn’t strong enough. A passer-by pulled him out. No one had seen him jump though, and he managed to convince the doctors that he’d dropped his wallet over the side, that he’d slipped and fallen over the rail when he tried to grab it.

 

He walked right out of that hospital without anyone stopping him, slipping away before anyone could question him further or notice the holes in his story.

 

They’d asked about contacting his parents and a part of Bruno had the terrible urge to laugh. They’d surely lock him up if he started laughing though, so he bit his lip and said they were away for a wedding.

 

Then he got out of there and, as he walked through the streets, Bruno felt numb. His coat was far too big for him, but as the sun set he was grateful for it. He couldn’t seem to stop shivering, but he didn’t feel cold or ill. 

 

He found a quiet alley and hid behind some grates and old cardboard boxes. He tried to pretend he knew where to go next, that he had a plan. 

 

He didn’t. Of course he didn’t. He couldn’t even summon enough energy to panic again. He just lay there, looking up at the stars and he tried, very hard, to pretend this wasn’t his life.




“Thank you for telling us,” Agustín said and Bruno was horrified to see tears in his eyes. “You…” He sighed and shook his head. “You shouldn’t have to keep all that to yourself.”

 

It was only one story, not even a very long one at that, and Bruno felt worn out. He just shrugged in response. Julieta was still hugging him and Bruno wondered if he should ask her to let go. 

 

He wasn’t sure he wanted to. 

 

For quite a long time, he’d been terrified of letting anyone touch him at all. Once, very early in his job at Juan’s shop, Juan had clapped him on the back and Bruno had completely panicked, dropping the tray of mugs he’d been carrying and locking himself in the bathroom to hyperventilate, trying to remind himself that Juan was just being nice. He wasn’t like the nuns and the belt. 

 

And Juan, God bless him, had sat outside the bathroom, calmly talking about anything and everything until Bruno opened the door.

 

Slowly, bit by bit, Bruno had gotten better about letting people touch him. Some days, he still flinched. Some days, he couldn’t stand it at all and it made his skin crawl. But, more and more, he’d gotten used to it. He’d stopped expecting to be hit. Hugs didn’t feel restricting, another person’s hands stopped feeling like chains.

 

Like right now. Without Julieta holding on, he thought he might fall off the chair entirely. 

 

He just felt so tired. 

 

“Sorry,” he said. Instinct, habit; embarrassment and genuine regret for worrying them.

 

“You have absolutely nothing to be sorry for,” Julieta said. “Anyone who ever made you feel that way should be the ones begging for your forgiveness.”

 

Bruno had the sudden image of Julieta facing down the Mother Superior and the other nuns, rolling pin in hand, waving it threateningly like a sword. Or slapping those men who tried to mug him when he was seventeen, or any of the countless people who called him brujo or bad luck. She wasn’t a big woman (though still taller than Bruno), with small hands and kind eyes, but she suddenly looked like she could take a dragon on, fury in her eyes and in the clench of her jaw.

 

And none of that fury was directed at Bruno. How very strange. 

 

“Good luck with that,” he mumbled. Julieta’s smile was so sad. Agustín squeezed his shoulder again and Bruno didn’t flinch.

 

He’d consider that a personal victory.

 

“They’re the ones who will have to answer for it one day,” Julieta said with certainty, still with that spark of fury in her warm brown eyes.

 

The priest in his village had said something similar once, when Bruno had let slip that the nuns had been…less than kind to the children in their care. He hadn’t told the man much at all, he hadn’t even told him about their behaviour to Bruno specifically.

 

But the padré had still gone quiet, his expression grave as he said; “They will have to answer for it one day, my son. Harming a child is a terrible sin.”

 

Bruno had to wonder if that was true. His relationship with God was complicated to say the least. He wished he could have that faith back, that it hadn’t been beaten out of him by women of God Himself and only driven away again and again as life carried on. He’d never quite gotten it back, even after all these years.

 

He wasn’t really sure what he believed in, when he stopped to think about it.

 

Bruno lived in a world where he dreamed of the future in shades of green and those dreams came true; he lived in hell on earth for decades. He’d found peace and had it stolen again. And now he’d stumbled into a magical village, his life saved by magical strangers, living in a magical house. All of it provided by a Miracle, by one man’s sacrifice. It certainly sounded like an act of God. At any rate, it was certainly a miracle. What was Bruno to make of all that?

 

But Julieta looked so confident that he nodded along in agreement. At any rate, he knew Julieta believed it. 

 

His thoughts were going in circles again, getting jumbled. If Bruno brooded too much he’d get stuck like this.

 

“I’m gonna go to bed,” he mumbled, forcing himself to stand. He hadn’t touched the cup of tea. 

 

“Okay,” Julieta said, taking his hands again and squeezing tightly. 

 

She called after him when he was halfway across the courtyard; “Bruno?”

 

“Hm?” He stopped and looked back.

 

Her smile was gentle and kind. “Sleep well,” she said. She looked a little too knowing.

 

“You too,” Bruno said and went to his little guest room, gently shutting the door behind him.






Julieta had never been a violent woman, but if she ever found anyone who contributed to Bruno feeling that way, she may just beat them with her rolling pin. At the very least, she’d send Pepa their way.

 

Sixteen years old, and he’d tried to jump off a bridge. She’d seen his arms. How many times had he tried to die?

 

Félix said there were scars and welts on his back. Who had done that to him?

 

Bruno Expósito…Well, the obvious conclusion was that he was an orphan, a foundling. But Julieta couldn’t rule out the possibility that one of his parents was an orphan, that it was their surname. Either way, Bruno had said he didn’t want to use his surname. He clearly wasn’t fond of it.

 

Either his parents had done that to him, or someone at an orphanage had. Both options made her feel sick.

 

How could someone do that to another person? To a child? Julieta couldn’t comprehend it. You didn’t have to be a healer to know abuse was wrong, for heaven’s sake. 

 

Sixteen…She tried to imagine Isabela, Luisa or Dolores in Bruno’s place and it was a struggle not to start crying there and then.

 

She sat down heavily, her face in her hands.

 

“How could they do that?” she asked, her voice breaking. “It’s- it’s sick, it’s evil.

 

Yes, Bruno was around her age, but he was also tiny. Isabela and Dolores were taller than him. How small had he been as a teenager, as a child? Smaller than Mirabel, smaller than Camilo? 

 

Just how cold-hearted did you have to be to strike a child, to scar them for life?

 

Agustín was eerily quiet. When Julieta looked up, her husband’s expression was carefully blank, but she could see uncharacteristic anger in his usually warm eyes. His fists were clenched.

 

“I think he needs a day out,” he said abruptly.

 

Julieta shook her head, uncomprehending. “What?”

 

“Sitting around Casita all day can’t be helping,” Agustín said. “So maybe Félix and I can take him out, show him around again? He hasn’t been to the village since Pepa and Mirabel took him.”

 

“He might not want to,” Julieta cautioned, though she had to admit the idea had merit.

 

“Maybe,” Agustín said with a rueful shrug. “But no harm in asking, right?”

 

That was true. And maybe it would help. If Bruno was going to live here, he needed to see more of Encanto than Casita. And Julieta knew Agustín and Félix: they were one hell of a duo, always laughing together and finding ways to entertain themselves, even on the dullest of days. 

 

Her husband had a big heart and so did Félix. Surely they could get Bruno to smile too.

 

“Right,” Julieta said with a tired smile. “No harm in asking him at all.”

 

Of course, the whole idea hinged on Bruno saying yes, but they’d cross that bridge when they came to it.

Notes:

Next up, Agustín and Félix persuade Bruno to go into the village with them. Mirabel insists on tagging along. Some villagers are nosey.

So here's what Julieta knows so far: Bruno's full name is Bruno Expósito and he tried to kill himself when he was sixteen and she's guessing at least once more after that, judging my his arms. (Little does she know.) She knows, thanks to those scars, that he has self-harmed in the past. She doesn't know he was in an orphanage nor anything about how he got there; while she's sure he's an orphan, she also knows there's a chance that "Expósito" was the surname of his parents. She also knows he doesn't like his surname or want to use it. He has the same first name as her brother but, unlike Alma, she has no problem using his name.

Here's what Mirabel knows: Bruno doesn't like his surname or want to use it. He has the same first name as her uncle. Considering he got quiet when she asked about his childhood, she assumes his parents were bad ones. While she knows what "Expósito" means, being a ten-year-old it doesn't entirely occur to her that Bruno didn't have a family.

Here's what Bruno knows: the Madrigals have a "Lost" uncle, who was "lost" the same day "Abuelo Pedro" died. This mysterious uncle has a glowing door, but it's blank, unlike the others. Considering the context, he knows "lost" could also very well mean "dead," but that Mirabel's maybe been told a child-friendly version of the story (and he's not wrong in that regard). After all, he has no reason to think a dead relative's door would disappear or go dark. As far as he's aware, Alma doesn't like him.

Chapter 10: Early Mornings

Summary:

Julieta checks in on Bruno, while Agustín and Félix have a suggestion to make.

Notes:

I was hoping to fit the actual day out into this chapter as well, but it was getting long enough as it is. Instead, have some sibling bonding 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
Sunrise, by Our Last Night
Saturn, by Sleeping At Last
Cardigan, by Taylor Swift
Dream, by Imagine Dragons
Never Too Late, by Three Days Grace

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“When the night is cold, and you feel like no one knows what it's like to be the only one buried in this hole. You can make it to the sunrise. You can make it to the sunrise. Searching for a way to escape the madness; a dire need for change as we fight for better days.” - Sunrise, Our Last Night




Bruno was dreaming, though that was nothing new. He dreamed of a glowing door in the distance, of shouting and fire. He dreamed of falling into a pit of glowing green sand, sinking under the surface no matter how hard he tried to claw his way back out.

 

He dreamed of Juan, dead on the ground.

 

He dreamed of his long-gone nameless father, lying in a red river.

 

He dreamed that he was running in the dark and could never stop. If he stopped, he was dead. If he stopped, he was doomed.

 

“Brujo, brujo, brujo!”

 

I’m not, he thought desperately, as he had so many times before. It was so dark he couldn’t even see his hand in front of his face. I don’t know what I am.

 

Then someone took his hand and, suddenly, he was standing in Casita’s kitchen and Julieta was kneading dough, flour smeared across her apron.

 

“They’re the ones who will have to answer for it one day,” she said, so firmly, so sure of herself.

 

“I don’t know about that,” Bruno admitted.

 

Julieta didn’t look up from her task, but she smiled. 

 

“I do,” she said.

 

And Bruno woke up, tangled in the sheets, sweat sticking his hair to his forehead. The sun was just beginning to rise.

 

The chest of drawers rattled slightly; one floor tile rose and fell with only a small little squeak of a sound.

 

A question: Are you okay?

 

Bruno tried to untangle himself and fell off the bed. He lay there in a heap, heart still racing, his head hurting more than ever.

 

“Is anyone in the bathroom?” he asked with a yawn.

 

In response, a change of clothes was thrown at him from the drawers and the bedroom door opened.

 

“I take it that’s a no,” Bruno muttered, pushing himself to his feet. There was no way he was getting back to sleep and, truth be told, he didn’t really want to anyway.

 

But first order of business: shower. He felt disgustingly sweaty. Besides, maybe the hot water would help clear his head.






Julieta was an early riser. Well, all of the Madrigals were out of necessity, but she was always the first one awake, closely followed by Mirabel.

 

Still, she couldn’t say she was exactly surprised to realise Bruno was up before her.

 

As she passed the window, she spotted him sitting on the back patio, looking out at the garden. The light breeze ruffled his hair and Julieta was relieved to see he looked far less tense than he had yesterday. He looked, dare she say it, peaceful. At the very least, as he turned his face up towards the sun, it was the most relaxed she’d seen him.

 

She glanced at the list of things she needed to make today, pinned to the corkboard as always. She mentally ran through her checklist for breakfast…

 

And decided she had some time to spare. After what she learned last night, surely she could take a few minutes to chat with their guest, her new friend (she hoped they were friends) and make sure he was okay?

 

She hummed to herself as she made two big mugs of chocolate con queso and went outside to Bruno.






“Buenos días,” Julieta said, way too chipper for this early hour, and Bruno nearly fell down the steps. He scrambled to catch himself and even he could feel how awkward his smile was.

 

“Buenos días,” he echoed, eyebrows raising when he saw the mugs in Julieta’s hands. “Um…?”

 

She raised one in offering. “Do you like chocolate con queso?” she asked.

 

Bruno nodded, so she pressed it into his hands and sat next to him with a flick of her sky-blue skirt. She wasn’t wearing her apron yet.

 

Bruno sipped the drink and sighed in relief when the bumps and bruises from his tumble this morning vanished. Julieta was watching him carefully, her fingers tapping the rim of her mug.

 

“How are you feeling?” she asked gently. “After last night?”

 

“Eh…” Bruno shrugged. He’d been better. He’d been a lot worse. 

 

Julieta just smiled in an understanding way, sympathy in her gaze. No pity or anger to be found.

 

“Is it overstepping to say I’m glad you’re here?” she asked and finally took a sip of her own chocolate con queso. 

 

“Que?”

 

“I mean it,” Julieta said. “I’m glad you made it over the mountain. I’m glad you lived. I know it’s only been a week but…I hope we’re friends? Or that we can be?”

 

And Bruno just- it was like his brain momentarily went on the fritz. He just stared at her, swallowing heavily. 

 

I’m glad you lived.

 

Bruno…He wasn’t so sure about that himself just yet, but…But only one other person had ever said that.

 

“Gracias,” he said, his voice more like a croak. Then he realised he hadn’t answered her question, so he nodded and said, “Uh, sí. About the- the friends…Thing.” Friends thing. Wow. That didn’t sound stupid at all.

 

Her smile widened into an utterly beaming grin, her eyes shone.

 

“Good,” she said. She sipped her drink again and glanced at him sideways. “In the interests of friendship, I feel I should warn you that Agustín and Félix are going to invite you into town today.”

 

Oh God. Bruno gulped down some more of the chocolate con queso, trying to think of a response or at least a good excuse.

 

“And I think you should go,” Julieta added.

 

It wasn’t that Bruno thought she was wrong, it was just…Okay, he thought she was wrong. He really wasn’t up to facing a crowd right now.

 

“You need to see more than just Casita,” Julieta said, still gentle.

 

Well, maybe, yes. Bruno wouldn’t be living here in three months.

 

“Maybe they can show you where the new houses are being built?” Julieta suggested.

 

That…Was probably a good point, actually. Bruno had no idea where these new houses were and Alma had said to choose one. He couldn’t do that if he didn’t even know where they were.

 

But- but the crowd. Everyone had stared so much when Pepa and Mirabel showed him around. Bruno wasn’t sure he had the fortitude or patience for it.

 

“Agustín and Félix won’t force you,” Julieta said. “And if anyone bothers you, they’ll make them back off. If you really don’t want to, no one will make you, I promise.”

 

Could she read minds or something? Maybe Bruno was just that obvious.

 

Julieta looked so earnest, so hopeful. Bruno would have felt like the biggest ass in the world for turning that smile into a frown.

 

So he sighed, gulped the rest of his drink down and nodded, feeling like he was walking into a battle.

 

But Julieta’s smile grew, she looked so relieved and, as they walked back into Casita, she squeezed his shoulder and said, “You’ll be alright.”

 

Bruno could almost believe her.

 

She also immediately roped him into helping prepare breakfast, so at least that was a distraction.

 

“We’ll be eating inside today,” Julieta said, so Bruno went to set the dining table.

 

Not for the first time, his gaze went to the family tree on the wall. No doubt, it was another thing magically provided by the house itself. It was beautifully painted; honestly, it was just the sort of thing Bruno would choose to paint himself. 

 

The only detail he couldn’t figure out was the image between Julieta and Pepa, on the trunk of the tree: a faded green hourglass. It seemed like an odd choice.

 

Still, who was he to judge? Artists always used symbols in their work, Bruno included. Next to Camilo was a little unopened bud, clearly meant to be the new baby.

 

He went back to Julieta and Mirabel came racing down the stairs, calling a cheerful, “Good morning, Abuelo!” to Pedro Madrigal’s portrait. Bruno hadn’t really looked at it; it was on the side-stairs and he tended to go up the main staircase, it was right next to his room and he had a direct line to the bathroom that way.

 

Bruno wondered if that portrait was also magical or if someone had actually painted it. He wondered if (and who) he’d dare ask.

 

“Morning!” Mirabel said as she hurried into the kitchen. “It smells great, Mamí!”

 

“Gracias, Mira,” Julieta said. “Help us serve it up?”

 

Mirabel nodded with such a serious look on her face that you’d swear she’d been asked to carry priceless treasure. Well, Julieta’s food was delicious.

 

The rest of the Madrigals began to make their way downstairs, led by the smell of breakfast (and their schedules, no doubt). Camilo immediately raced for the table.

 

Agustín took a seat across from Bruno, closely followed by Félix. They both had hopeful smiles on their faces.

 

“Buenos días,” Agustín said cheerfully. Seriously, were they all morning people? Bruno envied their energy.

 

“Buenos días,” he said as Alma came in and took her place at the head of the table.

 

“Listen,” Félix said. “We were wondering, do you wanna come into town with us? We can show you around properly?”

 

They both looked hopeful. Bruno glanced at Julieta and she gave him a thumbs up. Mirabel and Camilo were listening with obvious interest.

 

Once, when Bruno was nineteen, he’d dived off a cliff into the ocean. Not in any sort of attempt on his life, but just for the fun of it; he’d seen some locals doing the same thing and wanted to try it. He remembered how quickly his heart had beat and how nervous he’d felt when he looked down at the waves.

 

But he also remembered how much fun it had been once he dived in.

 

He felt like that again, now.

 

So, just like back then, he crossed his fingers and took a deep breath.

 

“Sí,” he said and Agustín and Félix grinned at him. “That sounds like fun.” He thought he sounded pretty confident at least.

 

“Can I go?” Mirabel instantly asked.

 

“Me too!” Camilo said, pushing Mirabel back into her chair to look around her at Félix, giving his father big pleading eyes.

 

“Ay, okay, okay,” Félix laughed. “You can both come.”

 

Bruno was stupidly relieved about that. Sue him, but kids were easier to handle than adults.

 

He still knocked on the table. He needed all the good luck he could get.

Notes:

Did Bruno and Julieta just accidentally start an early morning tradition for themselves? Yes, yes they did 👀👀

And the family tree is finally shown! Bruno has yet to actually look at Pedro's portrait

Next up, the day out and nosey villagers

Chapter 11: Gossip

Summary:

Bruno explores the village with Mirabel, Camilo, Félix and Agustín. Some villagers simply don't know when to back off. Bruno just wants to feel safe again and has an idea of how to start.

Notes:

Trigger warning: Mirabel glimpses some of Bruno's self-harm scars, though she doesn't realise that's what they are, nor is the subject brought up. Still, stay safe 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
Superheroes, by The Script
Breathin', by Ariana Grande
I'm Still Here, from Treasure Planet
Exit Wounds, by The Script
I Wanna Get Better, by Against The Current

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“All his life he's been told he'll be nothing when he's old. All the kicks and all the blows, he won't ever let it show. 'Cause he's stronger than you know, a heart of steel starts to grow. When you've been fighting for it all your life, you've been struggling to make things right, that's how a superhero learns to fly. Every day, every hour, turn the pain into power.” - Superheroes, The Script




Mirabel marched along happily, Camilo at her side. Bruno had his hood up and his head bowed, his arms tightly crossed as they reached the town.

 

Was she imagining things, or were more people staring than usual?

 

Mirabel was a Madrigal: Giftless or not, people often glanced at her. People outright stared at her family. And, of course, her family was already hard at work throughout Encanto; Mirabel could see Luisa carting those donkeys around again. 

 

These stares were different. They seemed more curious. 

 

They were whispering. Had they done that last time?

 

Mirabel glanced back at Bruno. Her Tio Félix was pointing out his parents’ house and asking Bruno if there were any shops he wanted to visit. Her papá and Tio seemed at ease, so maybe Mirabel was just imagining things?

 

But then Camilo muttered, “What’s their problem?” frowning at anyone he caught staring.

 

“I dunno,” Mirabel admitted, rubbing her arm. They were all staring at Bruno and whispering, some of them were pointing. She knew he was a newcomer and that was rare, but was it really such a big deal? People called Dolores a gossip, but at least her cousin didn’t stare and point at people like that! Mirabel would have been scolded for being rude if she did that. She thought that Abuela might even tell Isabela off if she pointed at whispered and stared like that. Abuela was all about manners after all.

 

Honestly, it was kind of starting to freak Mirabel out. It was clearly freaking Bruno out.

 

Frowning, she fell back into step with him and Camilo followed her lead. He stuck his tongue out at Osvaldo and Osvaldo nearly dropped his cupcake in surprise, but Mirabel fought back a grin. If Abuela heard about that, she’d definitely tell Camilo off for being rude, but Camilo didn’t seem to care.

 

“Are you gonna paint your house?” Camilo asked Bruno. “Mira says you like painting.”

 

“I do,” Bruno said. His voice was really quiet and he kept his head bowed, so his hood practically covered his whole face. Mirabel could just see some strands of his hair and the tip of his nose. “And…Maybe? I haven’t really thought about it.”

 

“Well, we have an arts and crafts shop,” Agustín said cheerfully. “Why don’t we pop in on the way back?”

 

Bruno nodded, arms still tightly crossed. His sleeve rolled up a little and Mirabel glimpsed scars criss-crossing his forearms. There were a lot of them, some big and some small. There was a long one overlapping them all. Had he been in some sort of fight?

 

Mirabel wasn’t used to scars. Her mamá’s food typically took care of that, but she’d seen scars before, usually on the older people in the village and on the rare newcomers; there was a woodcutter who'd been cut so deeply on his shoulder that even Julieta's food couldn't totally avoid scarring. Her papá had a scar on his leg from when he was really little, before his family came to Encanto. He’d fallen out of a tree and badly cut himself on the way down.

 

She couldn’t imagine Bruno climbing trees or fighting though. He was a lot smaller than her papá and he wasn’t broad and strong looking like Félix.

 

Bruno caught her eye and went so pale that Mirabel was worried he’d faint. He shoved his sleeve back down, shoved his hands into his pockets and walked faster.






Somehow, Bruno wasn’t surprised to see Luisa at the construction site. She was carting around huge sacks, wooden beams, bricks and helped make the cement. He could have sworn he’d seen her with donkeys on the way here. Hadn’t she taken a break yet?

 

“Hola, Luisa!” Agustín called, waving.

 

“Hola, pá!” Luisa called. She looked cheerful enough, if a little tense. How far did her super-strength go? Did she ever feel strained or sore? 

 

There were ten new homes being made in total, all in a neat little row, not far from the river, with a meadow at their backs. The first two were finished and would soon be taken by two newly-wed couples, one with a baby on the way.

 

“Three won’t be taken,” Félix said, pointing to the very last three. “So, take your pick, hombre.”

 

They were mostly just the bare beginnings of outlines and walls, a mess of supplies and bricks. It was hard to imagine they’d be homes so soon. And, from the looks of things, they’d all be identical anyway, rather like Bruno’s village.

 

“Um, the last one I guess?” Bruno said. It was closest to the river; the soft sound of rushing water could be heard. It was a sound Bruno had always liked. 

 

Félix went to tell the construction workers to mark the house as taken and that was that.

 

It was so different from literally anywhere else Bruno had been. Getting a home had never been so easy. Even in his village, he’d rented rooms above the tavern before he could afford his tiny home. 

 

So, what was the bargain? What did they want? He had to pay somehow. That was just how the world worked. 

 

Bruno had slept under bridges, in alleyways, in fields and barns. He’d rented tiny, cramped apartments that were far too expensive and were overcrowded. He’d rented a small bedroom from an elderly couple until their grandson was sent to live with them. He’d stayed in a creaky cabin by the sea, rented rooms in taverns and even stayed in quite a nice hotel over a weekend, just outside Bogotá. His small house back home, only three rooms in total, had been the one place that had ever truly been his; no roommates, no landlords, no neighbours arguing loudly at all hours, no one muttering “Weirdo,” as he passed.

 

He’d never, never just been given a home. 

 

They looked like they were nice houses too. Not particularly big, but bigger than he’d had before. It wasn’t like he’d need (or even wanted) a lot of space anyway. 

 

Mirabel and Camilo were pestering Luisa, so Bruno stepped closer to Agustín and said, “So, what’s the payment?”

 

“Hm? Payment?” Agustín looked honestly lost.

 

Bruno nodded to the row of houses. “Y’know, for all that. I know you don’t really use money around here, but I can work. What needs doing?”

 

“Nothing,” Agustín said. He adjusted his glasses, frowning a little.

 

“I’m serious,” Bruno said, shaking his head. “Whatever it is, I don’t mind.”

 

“There’s nothing,” Agustín insisted. “If anyone needs help and you can, then we can let you know, yes. But no one’s expecting anything. You just got here. If you want to help out, that’s okay, but you don’t need to rush.” 

 

Bruno’s frown deepened. It just didn’t sound right. Was this another Madrigal thing he didn’t understand? 

 

“Bruno,” Agustín said, gentler now. “No one’s going to force you to do anything.”







They’d just stopped at Julieta’s stall when Señora Pezmuerto approached. Agustín knew her well; the entire Encanto knew her well. They all called her Fish Lady, a nickname she was still (thankfully) oblivious too.

 

“You’re the newcomer,” she said to Bruno, getting right into his personal space. Julieta glanced over, frowning, as she handed a man with a broken wrist a buñuelo. One bite and his wrist snapped back into place with a spine-tingling crack.

 

“Er…” Bruno gripped his own arm, stepping back sharply. “Sí.”

 

Señora Pezmuerto looked him up and down, looking somehow disappointed. Félix stepped closer.

 

“Huh,” she said. “I thought you’d be taller.”

 

“What?” Bruno shook his head, baffled. “W-why?”

 

“Just imagined you taller,” she shrugged. “Anyway, welcome to Encanto.”

 

“Oh…Thanks.”

 

Agustín sighed in relief as she turned to go. Okay, it wasn’t the most polite greeting or welcome, but it certainly wasn’t the worst.

 

No sooner had she left than Bruno stiffened and suddenly bent over with a pained hiss, clutching his head. Bent over like that, his hood completely obscured his face.

 

“Bruno!” Félix reacted first, taking Bruno’s arm and bending down to see him better. “Mierda, are you okay?”

 

“Don’t repeat that,” Agustín told the kids on reflex, even as he took Bruno’s other arm, ushering him into the shade.

 

“Bruno!” Camilo and Mirabel ran to him, eyes wide and frightened. Julieta was rushing over.

 

“‘M fine,” Bruno mumbled. Félix helped him stand back up straight; Bruno’s eyes were tightly closed and he was grinding his teeth. Everyone had stopped to stare and Agustín frowned at them. They turned away, doing a bad job of pretending they weren’t watching and listening.

 

“Here,” Julieta said, holding out an arepa. “It’ll help.”

 

Bruno bit into it, but his pained expression didn’t change. It didn’t lessen in the slightest and Agustín’s concern sky-rocketed. 

 

Finally, Bruno opened his eyes, staring after Señora Pezmuerto with a dazed look on his face.

 

“Does she have a fish?” he asked. His voice sounded off. Agustín couldn’t quite put his finger on it. 

 

“Oh, you’ve heard about her already, huh?” Félix asked with a rueful smile.

 

“That’s Señora Pezmuerto. Everyone calls her Fish Lady,” Camilo said, arms crossed. “She’s a fish killer.”

 

“Camilo!” Julieta scolded. “Keep your voice down, young man!”

 

“But she is, her fish always die.”

 

“They do,” Mirabel agreed.

 

Bruno shook his head (and immediately winced, one hand pressed to his forehead) and the dazed look left his eyes.

 

Julieta gripped his shoulder. “Don’t you feel better?” she asked worriedly.

 

“No,” Bruno said, almost apologetically, as if he thought he’d done something wrong.

 

Agustín’s heart sank. The only times he’d seen Julieta’s healing fail had been if she didn’t want to heal someone (a very rare occurrence) or if the injury or illness in question was chronic, something the other person was born with.

 

Ouch, Agustín thought, wincing in sympathy as Bruno gripped his head. He saw the realisation on Julieta’s face, the flicker of empathy in her warm eyes. Even Mirabel and Camilo put two and two together, frowning.

 

“Should we go home?” Mirabel asked.

 

“It’ll be back to normal in a few minutes,” Bruno said, closing his eyes again. “Don’t worry.”






The thing was, other than that fright, other than the awkwardness of Señora Pezmuerto, Agustín was reasonably happy with how things were going. When they reached the arts and crafts shop, Bruno finally pushed his hood down, a smile on his face as he looked around.

 

“Good call,” Félix muttered to him and Agustín smiled in relief.

 

It was a small shop, rather cramped, but brightly decorated. Bruno walked along the rows of shelves with more confidence, studying sketchbooks, pens, paints and coloured pencils. Camilo shape-shifted into people from different paintings and posters and Bruno grinned at him.

 

“What about him?” Bruno asked, pointing to a painting of a rather solemn, bored looking prince.

 

“Piece of cake,” Camilo declared. He spun on the spot, turning into the character and pulling a face of exaggerated disgust. Bruno snickered, his hand over his mouth. Mirabel said, “Show off,” but she was smiling.

 

They left with a new sketchbook, pencils and pens for Bruno, some pencils for Mirabel and a promise to get Camilo something before they went home. 

 

Outside, they nearly walked directly into Osvaldo.

 

“Hola!” he said cheerfully. “You’re Bruno?”

 

Bruno nodded, already looking wary. Mirabel and Camilo flanked him like miniature bodyguards.

 

“Is it true your village burned down?” Osvaldo asked, still so cheerful. “That’s awful.”

 

Agustín wanted the ground to open up and swallow him. Or, preferably, he wanted it to swallow Osvaldo instead.

 

“Man!” Félix snapped. “Back off!”

 

“Oh, I don’t mean to be rude!” Osvaldo said quickly. “I just heard it was attacked. People were saying everyone was wiped out!”

 

Bruno had gone very still and painfully silent. His eyes glazed over, his hands shook and Camilo linked his arm with Bruno’s, glaring at Osvaldo.

 

To Agustín’s surprise, Bruno straightened up and glared at Osvaldo too.

 

“Seriously?” he asked, deadpan, the snarkiest Agustín had heard him yet. “I just- seriously?

 

“I don’t mean to be-”

 

“Well it was rude, so save it,” Félix snapped, getting in between Bruno and Osvaldo.

 

For the first time, Agustín saw a spark of rage in Bruno’s eyes. So far, his eyes had been sad, with occasional glimpses of light when the kids made him laugh. Just last night, he’d seen those eyes turn dark and dead, consumed by fear and loss.

 

Now they blazed with life.

 

“I’m going back to Casita,” Bruno said stiffly. He began to walk away, Mirabel and Camilo at his heels. Only a few steps away, he paused and looked back at Osvaldo. “And as for you, Señor- if you ever experience such a loss, I pray that others will treat you with more tact than you’ve shown. I’m not your next topic of gossip, this is not a telenovela. If I told you what I saw, you wouldn’t sleep for a week. I know I haven’t.”

 

He marched away, clutching his purchases to his chest. Mirabel hovered at his side and Camilo paused to stick his tongue out at Osvaldo again before he ran after them.

 

Osvaldo looked stunned. He looked wrong-footed, as if he genuinely couldn’t understand how what he’d said was wrong.

 

Agustín knew which threat would work best; “Alma will hear of this,” he said and watched the blood drain from Osvaldo’s face.

 

“I was just asking,” Osvaldo protested, eyes wide. 

 

“He’s a person,” Félix said flatly. “Our new neighbour, not a source of gossip. Forget Alma, I’ll be telling your wife about this.”

 

If possible, Osvaldo grew paler. Agustín didn’t stay to listen to Félix read Osvaldo the riot act: he just hurried after Bruno and the kids.






Smoke, fire, gunshots. Screams, pleads for mercy. Buildings collapsing, blood on the ground.

 

Bruno walked faster and faster, his eyes stinging, his blood hot in his veins.

 

Juan, dead on the ground. The church collapsing. Frightened sobs and pained shrieks.

 

“Bruno?” 

 

Running and running, unable to stop, not daring to look back as his life collapsed behind him.

 

“Bruno!” Camilo’s voice rose and Bruno came back to reality, his heart pounding.

 

“I’m sorry,” Mirabel said quietly. “You don’t need to be scared, we’re here.”

 

But Bruno wasn’t just scared. Slowly, ever so slowly, anger was creeping in. When that man had spoken, Bruno had wanted to punch him in his stupid smiling face.

 

“Osvaldo’s always like that,” Camilo said, looking unimpressed. 

 

“Didn’t anyone ever teach him manners?” Bruno asked and even he was surprised at how harsh his voice sounded.

 

“His wife tries,” Mirabel said. Bruno pitied the poor woman. 

 

God, he’d thought the worst thing that would happen today would be that damnable green flash. He’d been certain, so bone-deep certain, that everything was about to go wrong, that they’d see the glow even with his eyes tightly shut. 

 

A green flash for a soon to be dead goldfish. As if that was important! 

 

These stupid, damnable green flashes and dreams, these cursed visions. Why couldn’t they ever help him? Well...Bruno's footsteps slowed as he considered it. The day flashes had led him here. Which begged the question, why were the day flashes so frequent recently? They'd led him here and now they wanted to show him a dead fish? How did that make any sense? One was surely much more important than the other.

 

“What’re you gonna draw first?” Mirabel asked, voice forcibly bright. 

 

“Osvaldo’s face,” Bruno said, nose in the air. “I’ll throw darts at it.”

 

The kids laughed and Bruno smiled despite himself. Agustín caught up with them, panting and nearly tripping over his own feet.

 

“I’m sorry,” Agustín said, looking wretched. “I didn’t…I really didn’t think anything would happen, Bruno. I’m so sorry, I promise not everyone is like that.”

 

Bruno had seen them all staring and pointing, he’d heard the whispers. Maybe they were all like Osvaldo. Señora Pezmuerto hadn’t exactly been the warmest person either. Were they always going to treat him like a circus act? Was he ever going to fit in here? Was he ever going to fit in again?

 

But…But Julieta didn’t. Pepa didn’t either. Nor did Mirabel, Camilo and Dolores, or even Félix and Agustín. They’d all been kind. 

 

Agustín had helped him last night, had tried to help him again today and his face was still free of any judgement. He looked so upset, so let down, sort of embarrassed.

 

“It’s not your fault,” Bruno said, sighing.

 

“Maybe we can hang out tomorrow instead?” Agustín suggested.

 

“Maybe,” Bruno said as Félix came running. Honestly, he wasn’t so sure about that. At least, not in the village. 

 

Were these people going to turn him back into a hermit? He’d spent so long trying to overcome his fear and habits. He felt like he’d been thrown back decades in terms of improvement. One step forward and a hundred steps back. He jumped at every shadow; he couldn’t sleep, he kept getting flashbacks. Of course, it had only been a week, but…But…

 

He didn’t feel safe anymore. That was the kicker.

 

What will it take to feel safe again? Bruno wondered as they headed back to Casita. Anger and terror mixed together in his mind and he stepped over a crack in the pavement. 

 

He’d once worked in a café and the manager (a prim older woman) had said, “Step on a crack and you’ll break your mother’s back.”

 

Bruno bit back the urge to remind her that he didn’t have one. But he’d always avoided cracks anyway, trying to find any good luck he could. 

 

As Casita came back into sight, Bruno thought he knew just what he’d draw first- or rather, who he’d draw first. 

 

Juan had always helped him before. Maybe a reminder would help him again. 

 

“Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo.”

 

He’d promised to live. One way or another, he’d find a way to live. 

 

“If you don’t go with Papá and Tio Félix tomorrow, can we hang out?” Mirabel asked and Bruno smiled.

 

“Of course, chiquita,” Bruno said and Mirabel walked next to him with a spring in her step.

 

At least he could still make someone smile.

 

“Maybe we can both draw?” Mirabel asked eagerly, her grin widening. 

 

“Can I join?” Camilo asked, looking curious.

 

“Sí,” Bruno said, willing himself to relax. “Of course.”

 

They high-fived, whooping in triumph, as if Bruno had just promised them a trip to Bogotá. For whatever reason, the kids liked him; Bruno wasn’t going to question it, he liked them both too. And, well, he was allowed to have favourites, so he’d admit to himself that Mirabel was his favourite.

 

Besides, when it came to art, Bruno knew what he was doing. He could definitely make it fun for them.

Notes:

In which Osvaldo has successfully pissed off some of the nicest people around. Alma and his wife will not be impressed

I enjoy the headcanon that Julieta's healing won't work if she doesn't WANT to heal you, so I worked it in. I already had the headcanon that she can't heal chronic illnesses/chronic pain or any side effects from the Gifts. Of course, the others don't know Bruno's headaches come from his visions...Yet 👀👀

Bruno, you're not supposed to have favourites at all, actually 😉

Next up: Bruno, Mirabel and Camilo have an arts and crafts day, Osvaldo is forcibly taught some tact, and Bruno and Dolores have another late night chat as Dolores listens to poetry

Chapter 12: Arts and Crafts

Summary:

Bruno, Mirabel and Camilo have a creative afternoon. Osvaldo attempts to apologise and Casita shows her protective side.
Bruno finally talks about Juan.

Notes:

I was hoping to fit Bruno and Dolores's next late night chat in this chapter too, but it was already getting quite long, so we'll catch up with them next time instead (along with some Alma POV on the whole Osvaldo fiasco)

Accidental family bonding time: commence!

Songs I listened to while writing:
The Promise, by Emma Blackery
Secret For The Mad, by Dodie
The Light Behind Your Eyes, by My Chemical Romance
Colours, by Halsey
Overthinking, by Orla Gartland

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Because you are so beautiful, whoa-oh. I promise you this, I promise you this. And you are more than capable, whoa-oh. Just believe in yourself when nobody else is listening. And I may not even know your name, but I promise you I've felt the same as you do right now; you'll make it somehow.” - The Promise, Emma Blackery




Bruno wasn’t there when Félix told Alma what had happened. Their guest had been very quiet during dinner, mostly nodding along when Mirabel and Camilo talked at him, rather than to him. But he didn’t seem to mind too much. He was smiling at least; a small smile, but it was a genuine smile. Félix would count that as a victory.

 

Dolores, judging by her frown, knew exactly what had been said. Of course she did. She looked at Félix with concern and Félix smiled reassuringly, patting her shoulder. He’d handle it.

 

And so he did, catching Alma after dinner.

 

“Osvaldo put his foot in his mouth again,” he said, arms crossed. “He asked Bruno if it was true that his whole village had been wiped out and burned down. Very cheerfully too, might I add.”

 

Alma’s expression turned steely, her eyes narrowed.

 

“I see,” she said stiffly. “I’ll have words with him.”

 

Félix huffed, smirking despite himself. “I think his wife will beat you to it. I told her already.”

 

There was the faintest glimmer of amusement in Alma’s eyes. “Good,” was all she said and she went to her room.






Bruno was awake before dawn again and wandered out to the back patio. Luisa was already in the garden, jogging on the spot. As Bruno sat on the steps, she suddenly dropped and did push-ups, clapping each time she rose.

 

“Impressive,” Bruno told her.

 

She didn’t pause in her exercise. “Thanks,” she said with a faint smile, jumping back up to jog again. 

 

It was hard to believe she was only fourteen. She was so tall, taller then a lot of adults and easily the most muscular girl Bruno had ever met. He had to wonder how much of that muscle was natural and how much was magical.

 

“How long have you been up?” he asked.

 

“Oh, not long,” Luisa said. Bruno doubted that: she was sweating and red-faced, strands of her hair escaping her bun and she sounded out of breath. “What about you?”

 

“Not long,” Bruno echoed.

 

Luisa gave that faint smile again. She finally slowed down, stretching her arms above her head as the sun began to rise. 

 

“Do you have to exercise all the time? Or is it just, y'know, for fun?” Bruno dared to ask, knees tucked up to his chest. 

 

“Well…” Luisa shrugged with a somewhat embarrassed smile, not quite looking at him. “I like exercise.”

 

“I’m pretty hopeless,” Bruno said, flexing his own skinny arm and she giggled, a genuine grin crossing her face. “Can barely lift a plate.”

 

She giggled again, ducking her head. It was the most he’d spoken to her so far; she was usually very quiet. Bruno would have expected someone who took up so much space to be louder, but Luisa seemed content to let other people do the talking. Bruno could relate.

 

“I’d better shower,” she said. “See you at breakfast.” She darted back inside, waving over her shoulder. Bruno waved back and she was gone.

 

He turned towards the sun, watching it creep over the mountain.

 

Somehow, he wasn’t very surprised when Julieta appeared a few moments later, two mugs of chocolate con queso in her hand. She handed one to Bruno and sat on the steps with him, her ankles crossed. She hadn’t styled her hair yet and it fell in thick curls down her back; she looked younger with her hair loose but, as she frowned, she looked very much like Alma.

 

“I didn’t get to say it yesterday,” she said. “But I’m sorry about what happened.”

 

Bruno sighed, staring at his drink. “Are they always like that?”

 

“No,” Julieta said firmly. “I promise. Please don’t let it scare you off. There’s good people here, Bruno.”

 

“Well, I already know that,” Bruno said, throwing her a bemused glance. “There’s you.”

 

She lit up then, beaming, eyes shining. 

 

“Gracias. There’s you too,” she said. For a while they simply watched the sun rise before Julieta spoke up again; “So, arts and crafts, huh? Be prepared for the kids to make a mess.”

 

Bruno snorted, finishing his drink. “Be prepared for me to make a mess.”






Thankfully, the thought that Bruno was technically babysitting didn’t cross his mind, or he likely would have panicked at the thought of being left in charge of two kids.

 

But it didn’t occur to him as babysitting, as some sort of responsibility or duty. He just thought of it as entertaining Mirabel and Camilo, as a way to keep himself distracted that didn’t involve harming himself.

 

Baby steps. Progress.

 

Apparently, progress was arts and crafts. If nothing else, Bruno knew he was good at art. And what kid didn’t like being allowed to make a mess?

 

Bruno loved painting and drawing; he loved art of all kinds. It had always been an escape, a distraction; a skill he was admittedly proud of. He also loved writing stories, but somehow doubted that Mirabel and Camilo would want to sit and write all afternoon.

 

So: art time it was. 

 

They covered the kitchen table with an old sheet, which was already paint stained. Mirabel and Camilo brought down every tube of paint they could find, every pencil, crayon and pen and every last scrap of paper- crepe paper, normal paper, brightly coloured paper. There was glue, glitter, thread and sequins galore. Bruno found some scissors and Mirabel found her paintbrushes. 

 

And they got to work.

 

Camilo made himself a lopsided paper-crown, covered in glitter and sequins. It sat somewhat awkwardly on his curls, not big enough and in danger of falling off. He didn’t seem to mind. In fact, he loudly proclaimed himself “King of Casita!”

 

In response, Casita rattled the floor, knocking Camilo off balance and the crown off his head.

 

“Rude,” Camilo huffed while Mirabel cackled.

 

Mirabel had stuck several sheets of paper together with glue and sellotape (probably more than necessary) into one long line. On each sheet, she drew parts of the village: Casita and the beautiful garden on the first page, then the houses closest, the fields and mountains, the shops, on and on until she drew the town square on the last page. Throughout the scenery, she drew her family: Dolores with hand cupping her ear, a curious pout on her face. Luisa, carrying a donkey and Isabela surrounded by flowers. Pepa, in the fields with a rainbow above her head. Alma, speaking with villagers. Camilo, grinning and waving at the viewer; Félix and Agustín laughing together. Julieta was at her stall, holding a plate of food with a proud smile. Mirabel herself was standing just outside Casita, looking at the village. To Bruno’s surprise, she even drew him, sitting on the grass. She drew the villagers as well; that boy Bruno had seen smiling at Isabela and his grandmother, some people lining up to see Julieta, the padré outside the church. Above it all, she drew rows and rows of butterflies. She drew the candle on Alma’s windowsill and painted it in bright yellow with large rays like the sun. Then she moved on to the rest of the work, painting with utmost concentration, her tongue sticking out as she worked, holding her brush as steady as she could.

 

“That’s really pretty,” Bruno told her and she grinned happily.

 

“I’m not that short,” Camilo protested.

 

“I beg to differ,” Bruno muttered with a smirk. Camilo instantly made himself taller, smiling smugly. Well, Bruno supposed that was only to be expected.

 

As for himself…Well, he drew Juan. Mirabel went for paint and Camilo went for bright paper, glitter and sequins, but Bruno chose the coloured pencils, keeping his lines soft as he sketched, erased and sketched some more until he was finally happy. His tongue poked out of the corner of his mouth as he worked; a habit he’d always been aware of, but never managed to break. His co-workers used to tease him relentlessly for it.

 

It was a simple portrait, just Juan grinning with one hand raised in greeting. It was a familiar pose, one that greeted everyone who came into the old man’s shop as he cheerfully said, “Hola!” 

 

Julieta had suggested choosing his own surname. If Bruno had to pick, he’d choose Puerta. But somehow that didn’t feel fair. 

 

Maybe he’d just stick to never using a surname again. It wasn’t like he strictly needed one, not anymore.

 

“Who’s that?” Mirabel asked, peering over his shoulder.

 

“Juan,” Bruno said, swallowing heavily. “He was…He was my friend.” He saved my life. He was the closest thing to family I’ve ever had. 

 

“Everyone called him Abuelo,” Bruno added.

 

“Did he paint too?” Camilo asked, crossing his arms on the table and resting his chin on them.

 

“Nah, he was a potter- he was good at it, really good at it, but he’d always get someone else to paint them instead.” Bruno was just thankful his eyes stayed dry, even as his voice wavered and nearly deserted him entirely. “He was…He was kind.”

 

And that was it, wasn’t it? The crux of it. Above all, right down to his soul, Juan Puerta had been a kind man. 

 

“He saved me,” Bruno said, keeping his eyes firmly on the drawing. He saved me more than once. “He was like family.”

 

Hesitantly, Mirabel asked; “What about your parents?”

 

Old grief washed over him; well-known and ever-lasting, but not nearly as soul-crushing as it used to be, more like a dull ache. He smiled sadly. “I don’t have any, chiquita.”

 

Both kids stared at him like he’d just said something incredibly shocking. Surely they knew what an orphan was though, right? 

 

“I’m sorry,” Mirabel said softly.

 

Bruno was saved from answering by a knock on the door. The three of them exchanged bewildered glances and hurried to the front door, Bruno keeping the kids behind him.

 

The front door opened by itself, revealing Osvaldo and a woman nearly as tall as him. The woman was carrying a dish covered with a cloth.

 

“Um…” Bruno stepped back, eyeing Osvaldo warily. Despite his height, Osvaldo managed to look small; very small and very sheepish, staring at his shoes like a scolded child. 

 

“Hola,” the woman said. “I’m Ofelia Ortiz, Osvaldo’s wife.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno said.

 

Ofelia held the dish out with an apologetic smile. “I’m really sorry about yesterday,” she said. Camilio took the dish, peering back the cloth. He whooped with glee and cried, “Tres leche!” 

 

Ofelia elbowed Osvaldo and Osvaldo smiled sheepishly at Bruno.

 

“Lo siento,” he said. “I didn’t mean to be crass.”

 

Bruno wasn’t exactly in a forgiving mood, nor did he want to cause trouble. He felt stuck. Should he tell Osvaldo to ever so kindly piss off, or just accept the apology to keep the peace? He didn’t want to cause trouble. Above all, Bruno wished to fly under everyone’s radar; to just blend in.

 

He settled for nodding. Mirabel squeezed his hand while Camilo sniffed the cake with a happy smile.

 

Ofelia smiled, still looking terribly embarrassed. “I was sorry to hear about everything,” she said. “I hope you’re settling in well.”

 

“Er, yeah,” Bruno said, feeling more awkward by the second. “I’m fine.” And the award for biggest liar goes to Bruno Expósito! Your prize is apparently cake.

 

“Can we have the cake now?” Camilo asked.

 

“Uh, let’s wait until your parents are back,” Bruno said quickly. No way was he pumping them full of sugar without permission.

 

Ofelia looked pointedly at Osvaldo. He gulped and looked at Bruno again, not quite looking him in the eye, blushing pink to the tips of his ears.

 

“I’m sorry,” he said again, rubbing his arm. “I hope to see you around the village again.”

 

Were you given lines? Bruno wondered. Or was that uncharitable of him? Emotions warred inside him; to forgive or not to forgive? 

 

Well, he could always act in the meantime. 

 

“Gracias,” he said and even he could hear how flat he sounded. So much for his acting career, eh? He turned to Ofelia and added, “And gracias for the cake, I’m sure everyone will enjoy it.” He sounded more sincere that time.

 

Then Casita promptly closed the door in their faces and Bruno, Mirabel and Camilo let out startled yelps.

 

Casita, it seemed, was most certainly not in a forgiving mood.

 

“Jeez, Casita, what gives?” Mirabel asked, looking around in astonishment. “You never do that.”

 

In response, Casita ushered them back towards the kitchen. 

 

Mirabel shook her head and smiled at Bruno. “Casita likes you,” she said.

 

Smiling for real this time, Bruno fondly patted the kitchen doorway. “Well,” he said. “That’s good, because I like Casita too.”

Notes:

When in doubt: arts and crafts

Casita really said "Not today, bitch."

Next up: Dolores and Bruno chat while Dolores listens to poetry and we see Alma's POV about the Osvaldo incident

So now Mirabel and Camilo know Bruno is an orphan. (And consequently so does Dolores) How long until the adults learn for definite? 🤔

Chapter 13: A Strange Connection

Summary:

Alma confronts Osvaldo, but isn't so skilled at confronting her own feelings. Dolores, meanwhile, is forced to confront hers when she hears Mariano. Through it all, Bruno tries to keep his head down.

Notes:

The promised Alma POV and Dolores and Bruno hang-out. How's our favourite matriarch doing?

Songs I listened to while writing:
Still, from Anastasia: Broadway
Dream, by Imagine Dragons
Speechless, from Aladdin (Live Action)
Close The Door, from Anastasia: Broadway
Scars To Your Beautiful, by Alessia Cara
Comfort Crowd, by Conan Gray

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“She's nothing but a child. A waif who needs protection, I feel a strange connection I can't allow. She says it's all a game, she trembles like a flower; but in her, there's a power. I see that now. I am nothing but a man with nothing but his orders to fulfill. "I'm innocent!" she cries, but then you see her eyes and something in them tells you that she absolutely lies! Until your heart replies, "But, still! Still...Still!"" - Still, Anastasia: Broadway




When Félix told her that Osvaldo put his foot in his mouth again, Alma’s first thought was; Oh for heaven’s sake does he ever learn?

 

Osvaldo was a cheerful man and well-meaning. Did that make his utter lack of tact better or worse? Alma could never quite make up her mind in that regard. She just knew that she was increasingly tired of hearing people sigh, “Oh, Osvaldo, mind your tongue.”

 

The fact that he so cheerfully called Mirabel’s ceremony a “total bummer,” always set her blood boiling, even if she didn’t show it.

 

She was Alma Madrigal, the leader and protector of the Encanto. Their people relied on her, on her leadership; they relied on the Miracle. Alma did her best to be a good, steadfast leader, to earn the Miracle each day, to help those around her.

 

But goodness, did she sometimes wish to slap some sense into Osvaldo. Literally if she had to.

 

Their guest was very quiet and went to his room early that night, and Julieta’s eyes sparked with outrage when Agustín told her what had happened. Pepa sighed, pinching the bridge of her nose and a hot breeze blew through the room.

 

“I’ll have words with him,” Alma told Félix.

 

Her son-in-law, despite the tension, looked amused. “I think his wife will beat you to it. I told her already.”

 

Ofelia Ortiz was a kind woman, sweet and bubbly, always baking something.

 

She also had no patience for nonsense; she was one of the only people who ever seemed to make Osvaldo understand when he’d hurt someone. Alma could only imagine the tongue-lashing he was receiving right then.

 

“Good,” Alma said and went to her room, trying to hide the amusement aching to break free. 

 

She was a leader, not a gossiping old woman. It wasn’t proper to be amused over such a thing.

 

Besides, she needed to plan what to say to Osvaldo in the morning. They were a community, they were meant to help each other; she didn’t want Br- their guest to think they viewed him as some sort of entertainment. 

 

Bruno, she thought to herself, unable to ignore the ache in her chest. His name is Bruno, just say it.






She kept telling herself she’d use his name; she kept promising herself she’d say his name, yet when she went to see Osvaldo and Ofelia, she still avoided it.

 

As she approached the Ortiz house, she could hear Ofelia’s raised voice through the open window and the smell of baking; “Honestly, if you’d lost everything would you want a stranger asking you about it in the middle of the street? What were you thinking?”

 

And Osvaldo, protesting, “I was just trying to say hello!”

 

Sighing, Alma knocked on the door. 

 

Ofelia opened it, flour smeared across her red-chequered apron, strands of her brown hair escaping from her bun.

 

“Oh!” she gasped. “Señora Alma!” The poor woman was blushing terribly. "Buenos días.”

 

“Buenos días,” Alma returned in her most gracious tones. “How are you, Ofelia?”

 

Ofelia smiled tiredly. “Well, I’m terribly embarrassed for a start. I’m making a tres leche for Señor Bruno.”

 

“I’m sure he’ll appreciate it,” Alma said. She had no idea if Bruno enjoyed sweets, but it was the thought that counted, no? “May I come in?”

 

“Sí, sí.” Ofelia stepped aside, ushering her in. The smell of baking was much stronger now; the promised tres leche no doubt.

 

“He will be at Casita all day,” Alma told Ofelia. “If you wish to stop by.”

 

“Oh, we do,” Ofelia said, shooting a narrow-eyed frown at Osvaldo.

 

For such a big man, Osvaldo was doing his best to look very small, shrinking into a corner with a sheepish smile.

 

“Ah, hola, Señora Alma,” he said with an attempt at a jaunty wave. “How- how are you?”

 

Alma clasped her hands before her and raised her chin. “I am well, gracias. But I need to speak to you about yesterday. Félix told me all about it.”

 

“Oh…” Osvaldo was blushing bright pink.

 

“We are not like the outside,” Alma said sternly. “We help each other here. We want to make a good impression.” If they didn’t work together, would the candle flicker again? If they chased someone away so soon after arriving, would everything Alma worked for crumble? “To show him that he is safe here and welcome.” Her family were working as hard as ever, always eager to help and eager to please, to earn the Miracle and do what they did best. But if they failed in this, in this new duty, what would happen? “I was most disappointed to hear there had been an altercation.”

 

“I’d heard rumours,” Osvaldo said, shame-faced. “I just- I didn’t mean to sound rude.”

 

To be rude, you mean, Alma thought.

 

“I’ll apologise,” Osvaldo added quickly. “Today.”

 

“Good,” Alma said. “Remember, he is one of us now. We all have to live together, so let’s make sure to do so in harmony.”

 

Harmony, she thought to herself as she left, off to the village to perform her duties. We need harmony. We will always help those around us.

 

Perhaps that was why she found her gaze continually jumping to Bruno that evening. Mirabel and Camilo had proudly showed their artwork off to the family as soon as they arrived home and Alma gave a small smile. Her grandchildren were talented, no doubt about it. She wondered just how long Mirabel had worked on that painting. Bruno, with a slightly tense laugh, just clutched his sketchbook close to his chest. Camilo had made himself a crown, and crowns for Pepa, Félix and Dolores. He’d even made a much smaller one, made from bright yellow crepe paper, which he pressed into Pepa’s hands.

 

“It’s for the baby, Mamí,” he said with a bright grin.

 

Pepa sniffled, eyes watering. Her cloud appeared, dark and threatening to drizzle.

 

“Pepa,” Alma called. “You have a cloud.”

 

“I know,” Pepa said, hugging Camilo tightly. The cloud began to drizzle as Alma suspected and Félix did his best to shoo it away.

 

They all had a slice of Ofelia’s cake after dinner. Isabela was telling Alma all about the bouquets she’d done for the padré and how she’d promised Señora Guzman to help with her garden tomorrow. Alma watched her proudly, patting Isabela’s hand.

 

“That’s my sweet girl,” she said warmly.

 

She looked down the table, watching her family. Pepa was beaming and Félix had his hand on her stomach- the baby was kicking again- Agustín was asking Mirabel about her painting. Dolores ate quietly as usual and Camilo was talking at Luisa and Julieta, rather than to them, boasting about his artwork.

 

Their guest sat at the very end of the table, head lowered. He’d finished his slice of cake and now he was lightly tapping a tune on the edge of the table with his fingertips. He brushed his hair back, looking up with a shy smile when Julieta called his name and-

 

And Alma’s heart stopped.

 

For a moment, just a moment, she could have sworn he looked like…like…

 

She took a drink of water, firmly pushing the thought away, frowning to herself. She was being ridiculous.

 

He caught her gaze and his eyes widened; he looked away quickly and his hair fell back into his face, obscuring his eyes from view.






That night, Alma stood in front of the candle, clutching her locket. She looked at the small, painted image of her beloved Pedro’s face.

 

The candle burned steadily; no flicker, no dimness. It burned as pure and bright as ever, like a little golden star. Their shield against the world. Pedro’s last gift to her.

 

Pedro…

 

She looked at his picture, at his warm brown eyes and gentle smile that never changed, that never would change.

 

“Ay, Pedro,” she sighed softly, so softly that she barely heard herself.

 

She was just missing him. That was all. She needed him and thought of him every day, praying he would guide her, to help her make the right decisions for their village.

 

Alma was always thinking of him, always catching glimpses of him in her everyday life. She'd hear his laugh in a crowd, or see someone with his hair, or a young man with a spring in his step, or someone simply showing kindness to a stranger.

 

She always thought of him, one way or another. Perhaps that was why, for that split second, their guest had almost looked like him.

 

Bruno, she reminded herself yet again, and it still hurt. His name is Bruno. 

 

She was so tired…

 

Sighing, Alma closed the locket and went to her bed.






True to his word, Bruno had given her four little coins and Dolores loved the sound they made when they clinked together. She even put them in a little jar and listened to them rattle. It was a fun sound.

 

There was another sound she liked even better: Mariano’s voice as he practiced his poetry.

 

She went downstairs, smiling to herself. She could hear him writing, muttering to himself; “No, that line won’t work…”

 

Dolores went to the kitchen to make herself tea and nearly walked right into Bruno. She squeaked, side-stepping him.

 

“Don’t you ever sleep?” Dolores asked him, bemused. “You were up so early too.”

 

“Huh?” Bruno blinked at her. It was so odd: his eyes looked tired, his expression was tired, but he seemed all wired up, tense and thrumming with energy. “I sleep plenty.”

 

Liar, she thought, but didn’t push it.

 

He was holding a mug of half-drank tea, walking back to his room. Dolores stepped past him into the kitchen and got to work on her own drink.

 

“Do you want to join me?” she asked. One lovely thing about him was that he was quiet.

 

“You don’t mind?” Bruno asked. Dolores shook her head, so Bruno came back into the kitchen. He sat on the counter, just like last time, swinging his legs. Dolores tried not to giggle; Mirabel always did the same thing.

 

She’d heard what he told Mirabel and Camilo earlier; about his friend saving his life, how he didn’t have parents. She’d suspected he was an orphan, of course, given his surname and she’d already known his mysterious friend (Juan, Bruno had called him) had saved him. But it just…It made her sad, okay? She couldn’t imagine it. Didn’t he have any family at all?

 

Dolores was used to her big, loud family. Sometimes they drove her crazy, but she couldn’t ever imagine losing them.

 

“Is it the poet again?” Bruno asked as Dolores joined him on the counter.

 

“Sí,” Dolores said, tilting her head in the direction of Mariano’s voice.

 

“Are they good?”

 

“They are,” Dolores said with a fond smile. “And getting better all the time.”

 

Bruno didn’t ask any more questions. He just smiled and sipped his tea, surely lukewarm by now. Dolores listened to Mariano’s poems, still smiling to herself.

 

“Thank you for the coins,” she whispered.

 

“Hm?” Bruno looked surprised, but he grinned at her and that awful tension was gone from his shoulders. “Hey, it’s no problem, kid.”

 

Within the hour, as usual, Mariano fell silent. Dolores quietly wished Bruno good night. At her door, she waited to see if he’d actually go back to bed, admittedly relieved when she saw him walking back to his room only a minute after she left the kitchen.

 

Casita rattled the stairs and Dolores rolled her eyes, taking the hint.

 

But as she opened her door, she heard Mariano climb out of bed and begin to write again.

 

And she heard it.

 

“Oh, but what rhymes with Isabela? Isabela, the most perfect flower…No, the most perfect rose? C’mon, Mariano, think!”

 

It was a slap in the face. Tears stung her eyes and, for a moment, she couldn’t breathe.

 

Dolores practically dove into her room, slamming the door behind her so she wouldn’t have to hear any more.

Notes:

Sorry, Dolores 😅

Casita: "Damn it, Bruno, get your butt up here!"
Dolores, totally getting it wrong: "Okay, jeez, I'm going to bed!"

Up next, more Bruno and Dolores bonding and the green dreams return with a vengeance

Chapter 14: Green Dreams

Summary:

Dolores and Bruno begin to bond, but the green dreams return with a vengeance.

Notes:

So, it's been said before that Bruno pretty much has a constant headache and it's been shown that the "day flashes" and "green dreams" make it worse. It's been mentioned before that the migraines and fevers have left him bedridden.
With that said, strap in.

Songs I listened to while writing:
Penelope Featherington, from The Unofficial Bridgerton Musical
Waiting For Superman, by Daughtry
In My Dreams, from Anastasia: Broadway
Sleepsong, by Bastille
Echo, by Jason Walker
Anybody Have A Map, from Dear Evan Hansen
Leave A Light On, by Tom Walker

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Oh, you go to sleep on your own and you wake each day with your thoughts. And it scares you being alone, it's a last resort. All you want is someone onto whom you can cling. Your mother warned of strangers and the dangers they may bring. Your dreams and memories are blurring into one. The scenes which hold the waking world slowly come undone. You'll come undone.” - Sleepsong, Bastille




For a solid week, Bruno did not see Dolores in the kitchen. Well, that probably meant she was getting some sleep, right?

 

But she seemed so…down. Distracted. Bruno wasn’t quite sure how to put it, but something seemed off.

 

When he dared ask Julieta during their morning talks, Julieta looked lost.

 

“Lola’s always quiet,” she said, which- yeah. That was true.

 

He just couldn’t shake the feeling that something was wrong.

 

It took an embarrassing amount of courage to ask Dolores directly. He caught up with her just after lunch; she was about to leave Casita, her head bowed, her eyes downcast.

 

“Is everything okay?” Bruno asked her, careful to keep his voice down. Not just in case anyone was eavesdropping (Camilo) but to spare her poor ears. Maybe that was the problem, assuming Bruno wasn’t imagining things. Maybe she was just overwhelmed.

 

Dolores looked startled. She stared and stared at him, her eyes getting progressively wider.

 

“Dolores?” Bruno was getting more concerned by the second.

 

Her lip trembled and she swallowed hard. “I just…Overheard something I didn’t want to,” she whispered. “I, um…There’s…There’s someone I like. And he likes someone else.”

 

Oh hell, Bruno thought. Relationships were so not his forte, but Dolores looked so sad. He couldn’t just stand here; he had to say something, anything.

 

“I’m sorry, kid,” he said. “Whoever this guy is, he’s insane to not like you.”

 

She didn’t look convinced. Her eyes darted to the side, just as Isabela walked past with Alma, leaving a trail of rose petals in her wake.

 

“I don’t know,” Dolores said. “Not many people do.”

 

“Then they’re all idiots,” Bruno said firmly. Dolores was so sweet, how could people not like her? “Look, I know I’m new around here, but I think you’re pretty great.”

 

“Oh,” she whispered. “I- gracias.”

 

It didn’t magically make things better, of course. Dolores was still upset and who could blame her? She didn’t say a word at dinner, staring at her plate like it held the secrets to the universe.

 

But that night, she walked into the kitchen, a determined look on her face.

 

“How about hot chocolate this time?” Bruno suggested, if only because he was already making himself some.

 

Dolores nodded and took a seat on the counter. Bruno made their drinks and joined her.

 

This time, they talked. Not about anything important and, in fact, Dolores did most of the talking, taking Bruno by surprise. 

 

“Right now, Mamá and Papá are betting if the baby is a boy or girl again,” she said. “Hm! Camilo’s playing with his toys but he should be sleeping. Tio Agustín just fell out of bed.” (That last one made Bruno grin.) “Tia Julieta woke up, she’s giggling at him. Everyone else is sleeping. Well, everyone else in Casita is sleeping, some villagers are still up. Señora Guzman is reading and Señor De la Cruz is swearing because he’s spilled his wine. Apparently it was 'the good wine.'

 

“Oh dear,” Bruno said, his smile widening. “Poor guy.”

 

“Hm. And I can hear the crickets. I’ve always liked them.”

 

“Yeah? Me too.”






As Dolores made her way to bed, she decided she could see why Mirabel was always following Bruno around like a little duck. She was almost tempted to do the same.

 

He’d noticed she was sad. If anyone else had noticed, no one said anything, but he did. Dolores loved her family dearly, but she was well aware they tended to sweep things under the rug; they ignored their problems until they built up and couldn’t be ignored anymore.

 

But Bruno asked her what was wrong. He listened. He didn’t tell her she’d get over it soon and find someone else. He listened, he was sympathetic- and he didn’t even know it was Isabela that Mariano liked. 

 

She wondered about telling him, about telling someone, anyone. She wasn’t sure she could say it out loud yet. Maybe soon. It just...It hurt to much to say right now.

 

For now, she was happy for the distraction. For now, she was happy to have someone listen.






His dreams were green.

 

He dreamed of a little boy who looked like Félix, surrounded by animals.

 

“Uh-huh!” the child said to a toucan, sitting on his arm. His grin was wide, delighted and astonished. “I understand you!”

 

He dreamed of Pepa fitting a veil onto Dolores’s hair and shooing her cloud away with a huffed, “Not today!”

 

He dreamed that Isabela was surrounded by new plants, wild and unusual things, with smears of pollen on her hands and on her skirt. She looked happy. Her laugh was giddy and disbelieving. 

 

The little boy again, sternly telling a jaguar, “Don’t eat those.”

 

Like a chastised pet, the jaguar slinked away from the rats it had been eyeing. The little rodents squeaked and ran…Right into Bruno’s hands.

 

He dreamed of Señora Alma’s candle, shining as always, before the light suddenly grew, bright as a star, nearly blinding.

 

He dreamed of a golden butterfly and a golden door that blazed like the sun, shining among all the green.






Bruno was not on the back steps. Julieta blinked in surprise and stepped outside, looking around the garden. No sign of him.

 

She knew she should be happy that he was probably sleeping in for once, but she couldn’t shake the sudden concern, the persistent nagging that something was wrong.

 

Biting her lip, she went back inside. 

 

The second she stepped into the courtyard, Casita panicked.

 

Every window rapidly slammed open and shut, the door to Bruno’s room flung open and the floor rose in a wave, pulling Julieta along at top speed. She stumbled and nearly went headlong, having to clutch Bruno’s doorway.

 

“Casita!” she gasped. “Careful, I- Bruno?”

 

He was shivering terribly, lying on his front with one hand dangling off the bed. He made a tiny, pained noise and Casita’s floor rumbled again.

 

“Bruno?” Julieta hurried to him. She could hear her family coming out of their rooms, complaining about the noise, but she ignored them. She knelt by Bruno’s bed, peering at him worriedly. He was sweating, flushed, his eyes squeezed shut and his face screwed up in pain.

 

“Too loud,” he mumbled, his voice slurring.

 

Oh no, Julieta thought, gently pressing a hand to his forehead. Sure enough, his temperature was scalding.

 

“Julieta?” Pepa was suddenly by her side and Julieta looked up to find her whole family staring from the doorway.

 

“Bruno!” Mirabel cried, darting forward.

 

“No, careful, amor,” Julieta said, careful to keep her voice hushed, but the damage was done and Bruno doubled over with a pained groan, gripping his head.

 

“I’ll get him some food,” Félix said and hurried away.

 

But Julieta remembered what had happened at her stall and had the awful feeling it wouldn’t work.

 

“Bruno?” she whispered. “Hey, amigo, it’s just Julieta.” She gulped, ignoring Mirabel’s frantic questions. (“Is he okay, Mamá? You’ll help him, won’t you? He’ll be better?”) “Bruno, how long have you gotten migraines like this?”

 

“Hm…”

 

“Bruno, please, I’m sorry but it’s important.”

 

“Uh…” His voice sounded so hoarse and Julieta took his hand. “S-since I was…Uh…Five I…I t-think…”

 

It was something chronic then. Which meant it was something Julieta couldn’t magically heal.

 

A sense of helplessness washed over her and she ignored Félix trying to pass her an empanada. 

 

But magic or not, Julieta was a healer. She straightened up and looked at her family.

 

“Casita, close the shutters,” she ordered. Casita did just that, dimming the room. “I’m going to need cold water and a towel for his forehead.” She’d try the cold first and, if that didn’t work, heat. “And a basin.” Better safe than sorry. If she remembered correctly, ginger could help if she could get Bruno to eat, and she knew she still had some. On second thoughts...

 

"And please get my medical texts," she said, turning to Agustín. She just needed to be sure, she hadn't read them in so long, hadn't needed them in so long. She needed to know what she was doing.

 

“Can I help, Mamá?” Mirabel asked, looking near tears.

 

Julieta tried to smile for her. “Get a pitcher of water and a big glass, please, mi amor. Ask Casita to make sure it’s cold.”

 

Mirabel ran for the kitchen, pushing past the others. Agustín and Félix leaped to follow Julieta’s orders.

 

“The rest of you…” Julieta sighed. “I’m sorry, but please go. He’ll need quiet.”

 

For once, none of the kids protested. Alma hesitated and glanced back over her shoulder, but she left with Isabela, Dolores, Luisa and Camilo, quietly shutting the door.


As soon as the door closed, Julieta heard Camilo complaining that he wanted to help and Alma ushering him away.

 

“And me, hermana?” Pepa asked. Casita ushered the stool to her and she sat.

 

“You’re going to help me,” Julieta said. She squeezed Bruno’s hand, pushing his tangled hair off his face. “Are you still with us, mi amigo?” she whispered.

 

“Hm.” 

 

Julieta would take it. At least it was some sort of response.

 

“Don’t worry,” she said gently. “We’ve got you.”

Notes:

Bruno: *uncle instincts activate*
Julieta: *big sister instincts activate*
Casita: *fully freaking out*

Interesting visions there, Bruno 🤔

Next up, Julieta and Pepa do their best to look after Bruno; stories are shared and Alma tries to help

Chapter 15: That Storm Will Break

Summary:

Julieta and Pepa work together when Bruno's migraines leave him bedridden. Bruno accidentally reveals more of his past and Alma takes a step forward.

Notes:

Small trigger warning: brief mention of vomit

In which Pepa second-guesses herself, Julieta takes the lead, Bruno let's some things slip and Alma takes a small step forward

Songs I listened to while writing:
Welly Boots, by The Amazing Devil
Once Upon A December, by Anastasia
Find My Way Back, by Eric Arjes
Safe And Sound, by Taylor Swift
Afraid, by The Neighbourhood
Chords, by The Amazing Devil

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

You'll say, “I've been so scared. You left me here behind, do you not care? How the fuck am I supposed to carry on without you here?” And just when you're about to give up every hope you have, you'll turn around. Perched by the stairs, someone's gone and left behind a brand-new pair of scarlet welly boots.” - Welly Boots, The Amazing Devil




Pepa didn’t have much experience with sick people, not since she was five-years-old. There were the rare times when Julieta would need time to heal people, but they were few and far between (and usually after incredibly serious injuries).

 

She couldn’t remember if she’d ever seen anything like this; someone feverish, in pain, unable to even open their eyes.

 

As Julieta instructed, she lay the cold damp cloth on Bruno’s forehead, but he barely even reacted. Every single sound, no matter how quiet, seemed to hurt him. His fists kept clenching, his expression one of pain. He was limp as a ragdoll and Pepa kept thinking, Clear skies, clear skies, clear skies. 

 

Pepa was not a stranger to feeling helpless, but this particular situation was entirely new.

 

“You’re okay,” she whispered, wondering if even that soft assurance was hurting him. “You’re alright, I promise.”

 

But was he alright? Clearly not. Julieta was the healer, not Pepa. Honestly, even as she followed her sister’s instructions, Pepa wasn’t sure if she was doing it right at all.

 

Mirabel had not been happy when Julieta told her she couldn’t stay. She got that stubborn look on her face, she kept looking at Bruno like she expected him to drop dead. In the end, Agustín had to drag her away, reassuring her that everything would be “right as rain, Miraboo, don’t you worry!” If Pepa was anxious she could only imagine how the kids felt, even less used to lingering illnesses than the adults.

 

She couldn’t imagine how Bruno felt. If he’d been feeling anxious she’d know what to do; Pepa and anxiety basically went hand in hand. But this? She’d just have to hope she was doing the right thing.

 

All she could do was follow Julieta’s instructions, trying to reduce his fever. The cold would help, Julieta said. If it didn’t, they’d try warm water instead. 

 

Pepa hadn’t been too sure what the basin was for, until Bruno clapped his hands over his mouth with a yelp. Julieta quickly helped him sit up and Pepa looked away as the poor man vomited, wincing at the pained noise he made when he was done.

 

Julieta held a glass of water to his lips and Bruno sipped it, shuddering. He opened his eyes a crack and immediately shut them.

 

“How’d you handle all this before, eh?” Pepa asked, half-teasing and half-hoping for a genuine answer, some concrete instructions that she and Julieta could follow. If anyone knew how to handle Bruno’s migraines, surely it was the man himself.

 

Bruno gave a weak huff of laughter, his hands pressed over his eyes. He was still shuddering with each breath.

 

“V-very badly,” he mumbled. “Heh. It was- was worse when I was on the streets. Really, uh…Just had t-to hope for the best then.”

 

“What?” Pepa cried. Her cloud appeared, thundering. Bruno bent over and Pepa was horrified to see tears on his cheeks.

 

“Lo siento, lo siento!” She waved at the cloud, her own eyes stinging. “Oh, shoo!” 

 

You should leave, she thought, furious at herself. You’re making it worse, you hurt him. 

 

But…But what he’d just said…

 

He didn’t seem to even realise what he’d just said. He flopped back down bonelessly, hands tangled in his hair. Julieta gently pulled them away, her eyes wide with horror.

 

“The streets?” Julieta whispered.

 

Bruno gave her a thumbs up, eyes closed. “Hm.”

 

“Oh, Bruno…” Her sister’s voice wavered, she looked near tears.

 

“How did you not die?” Pepa demanded. 

 

Bruno turned towards the sound of her voice; one green eye peered at her through his curtain of hair, too bright and bleary with pain.

 

Too late, she remembered his arms and clapped her hands over her mouth.

 

Leave, she told herself. Leave, you’re going to make everything worse.

 

But Bruno smirked at her, shaky and half-hearted though it may be. 

 

“Not for lack of trying,” he mumbled, closing his eyes again. His breathing evened out and Pepa wasn’t totally sure if he’d fallen asleep or passed out.

 

But with him out of it, her cloud reappeared, flashing ominously, rumbling, threatening rain any second.

 

“I didn’t…” She swallowed, trying to clear her throat. “I didn’t mean it like that, Juli.”

 

“I know,” Julieta reassured her. She pulled her into a side-hug, stroking her back. “Oh, Pepa, I know. It’s alright.”

 

“No it’s not,” Pepa said hoarsely. The baby kicked and she laid her hands on her stomach. “I’m making it worse.

 

“No, you’re not,” Julieta said firmly. “We’ll see if his temperature has come down at all in a while and, if it has, we’ll stick with the cold towel. Okay?” Her smile was half-hearted. “Hey, maybe the rain will even help?”

 

“Not funny,” Pepa sighed, stroking her braid. Clear skies, clear skies. 

 

Julieta glanced at the basin. “Are you okay to clean that or shall I?”

 

Pepa’s stomach lurched unpleasantly. “Er, you, please.”

 

Julieta patted her shoulder and took the basin away. Pepa sat by Bruno’s bed, wishing she could read minds or just sense if he was feeling better. He didn’t look any better. How long did migraines last without magic? A day? A few days? Weeks?

 

Fog twisted around her ankles as she breathed in and out, chanting “Clear skies,” under her breath. Her cloud left but the fog stayed. She’d take it. At least the fog wasn’t going to hurt anyone.






Julieta was going to cry. She was surely going to shatter right here and now. 

 

Sixteen, and he jumped off a bridge. Living with a chronic illness on the streets. How in the world had Bruno survived? What else had he not told them?

 

She had the awful feeling they were only scratching the surface.

 

When Agustín quietly asked how he was, Julieta could only shake her head and say, “Not well at all.” She took a deep breath and went back to his room. 






Not much changed that first day. Bruno’s fever stayed, he could barely open his eyes. Every single sound made him wince. Around dinnertime, he didn’t protest when Julieta made him sit up, looking slightly baffled as he had some changua. 

 

“Did I s-say something stupid? I said something earlier, didn't I? We were...We were talking?” he mumbled, looking at Julieta warily. He looked like he was going to fall asleep any second.

 

“No, nothing stupid,” Julieta said, pressing a hand to his forehead. As far as she could feel, there was no difference in his temperature, he still looked utterly miserable, but at least he was looking at her.

 

Pepa came back with a fresh pitcher of water, a small rainbow flickering to life above her head when she saw Bruno was sitting up, eyes open.

 

“Hey,” she said quietly. “How’re you feeling?”

 

“Uh…” Bruno squinted at the bowl of changua. “Like e-everything’s on fire.”

 

That sounded like a fair enough assessment to Julieta. 

 

As he lay back down, he asked, “You swear I didn’t…” He gulped, massaging his forehead. “Didn’t say anything stupid?”

 

“It was nothing stupid,” Julieta repeated. “But we’ll talk when you’re feeling better.”

 

Bruno winced, sighing heavily. He turned over, his back to them and Julieta heard him mumble, “Was ‘fraid you’d say that.”

 

Pepa bit her lip, stepping forward. “Bruno-”

 

She was cut off when the door opened, swinging open silently. To Julieta’s surprise, their mamá stood there, her hand raised to knock and looking a little surprised herself. In her other hand was a delicate porcelain cup. Julieta breathed deeply, inhaling the familiar scent of ginger tea.

 

Alma stepped into the room and glanced at Julieta, quickly re-taking the reins. “You said ginger should help, sí?” she asked, careful to keep her voice down.

 

Julieta nodded and Alma went to Bruno’s bed, setting the tea on the chest of drawers. Bruno glanced at her over his shoulder, eyebrows furrowed. When he realised who was standing over him, his eyes widened.

 

He opened his mouth to speak, but Alma beat him to it.

 

“Feel better,” she said, nodding at him. She left without a backwards glance, sweeping past them. The door stayed open, as if Casita was surprised too.

 

Pepa closed the door, looking faintly surprised. Surely Julieta wasn’t the only one who noticed how Alma tended to avoid even looking at Bruno. 

 

Certainly, Bruno must have noticed, because he looked gobsmacked. 

 

“You should drink that,” Julieta said. “It’ll make you feel better.”

 

“Doubt it,” Bruno mumbled, but this time he managed to push himself up on his own. His arms were shaking and he kept his eyes closed as he drank, but as he finished the ginger tea he looked relieved.






They couldn’t stay up all night and Bruno was dead to the world after the cup of tea anyway. So Julieta and Pepa reluctantly went to finish their own dinner and get some rest, while Félix insisted he’d sit with Bruno for a while.

 

Pepa hesitated in the doorway, biting her lip.

 

“Casita,” she said. “You’ll let us know if he needs help, won’t you?”

 

The floor clattered in agreement, so Pepa followed her sister, smiling at Félix as he took her previous place on the stool, a book in his hands as he settled in to make sure Bruno stayed in one piece.

 

They’d have to talk to him when he was feeling better.






Bruno’s dreams were not green, but they were jumbled and confusing; frightening the way they always were when his headaches turned into migraines. Shadows crept up walls, a river turned red and a piercing wind whistled down the mountains. Waves of sand rose and fell, shimmers of green streaking through it.

 

“Run. Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo.”

 

“Then you live. You live for him.”

 

“Brujo! Diablo!”

 

“I promise you will be taken care of. We look after each other here.”

 

“I’m glad you lived.”

 

A swarm of golden butterflies flew overhead in circles. Other colours bled into the river, jewel-tones of purple, yellow, green, pink and blue. Hidden in the dark, cracks grew and disappeared, depending on how Bruno looked at them.

 

And then there was a gentle hand on his forehead and Bruno opened his eyes to his dark room. Julieta was standing over him, hair tangled, eyes wide in concern.

 

“Casita woke me,” she whispered. “Are you okay?”

 

Was he? Bruno blinked, unsure of the answer.

 

“I think so,” he settled on and Julieta smiled.

Notes:

Next up, Pepa, Julieta and Bruno further discuss his backstory and share some happier stories

Chapter 16: Far Away, Long Ago

Summary:

Bruno, Julieta and Pepa further explore Bruno's story and share some happier memories.

Notes:

I believe in Madrigal Triplets supremacy ✌️

TRIGGER WARNING: mention of attempted suicide and mention of murder

Songs I listened to while writing:
Maybe, from Annie
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Journey To The Past, from Anastasia
Flares, by The Script
Secrets, by OneRepublic
Never Too Late, by Three Days Grace

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Someone holds me safe and warm. Horses prance through a silver storm. Figures dancing gracefully across my memory. Far away, long ago, glowing dim as an ember. Things my heart used to know; things it yearns to remember. And a song someone sings, ‘Once upon a December.’” - Once Upon A December, Anastasia




The next day, Bruno’s eyes were clearer and he was sitting up by himself, against the pile of pillows that Casita had (literally) thrown at Pepa for him. He’d even managed to keep down the breakfast Julieta brought him.

 

Which meant it was time to talk.

 

“So,” Julieta began, wiping her hands on her apron, though her hands were clean. “I don’t know how much you remember, Bruno, but you mentioned living on the streets yesterday and…” She had to take a deep breath to steady herself. “You mentioned trying to kill yourself more than once.”

 

Next to her, Pepa was looking at Bruno with watering eyes.

 

Bruno himself groaned, hiding his face in his hands and slouching over. “You said I didn’t say anything stupid,” he said.

 

“Homelessness and suicide are not stupid,” Julieta said firmly. “And neither are you. Bruno, we’re your friends. I promise we just want to make sure you’re alright.”

 

“I’m fine,” Bruno said, not quite meeting her gaze. He rubbed his thumbs back and forth over the blanket. “I’m fine now.”

 

“But you weren’t before,” Pepa said softly. Her cloud was dark, heavy with rain that didn’t fall yet. A sudden sharp wind blew through the room, disappearing as quickly as it came.

 

“...No,” Bruno agreed. “I wasn’t.”

 

Julieta bit her lip and forced herself to ask; “How long? How long were you on the streets?”

 

“Uh, on and off,” Bruno said. He pulled his knees up to his chest, his gaze distant. “Not sure exactly how long overall, I didn’t always pay attention. But I was, uh, kicked out of the orphanage when I was sixteen.”

 

Orphanage. Julieta closed her eyes, her fists clenching. Sixteen and he’d been left all alone. And, as it turns out, her new friend was an orphan after all. 

 

“I’m so sorry,” she said, her voice wavering. Sixteen. Sixteen. Younger than Isabela and Dolores were now. How in the world could someone leave a child to fend for themselves like that?

 

Pepa took a deep, shaking breath. Her cloud grew and rumbled, flashing with lightning, but there was still no rain. 

 

“It wasn’t all bad,” Bruno added quickly.

 

“How could it not be all bad?” Pepa hissed and her cloud flashed again. “You could have died out there!”

 

“Well, um…” Bruno’s smile was the most awkward Julieta had ever seen it. “I went cliff-diving when I was nineteen, that was fun. And I’ve been to Bogotá. I couldn’t believe how big it was; they had a museum with free entry and I spent the whole day there looking at the paintings.”

 

It broke Julieta’s heart, but it caught Pepa’s interest. Her sister sniffled and wiped her eyes.

 

“Yeah?” Pepa asked, tilting her head. 

 

“Uh-huh. Once I was drawing people near the café where I worked and there was this family- the father saw my drawing and actually bought it off me, so…” He shrugged, his smile a little shyer, but a little more real. “I definitely wasn’t expecting that.”

 

Julieta knew what he was doing. He was trying to distract them, trying to cheer them up. 

 

How are you still kind? she wondered. Don’t you hate them? Aren’t you angry? How did you learn to trust people again? 

 

Where had he gotten his big heart from? 

 

“And the rest?” she asked, dreading the answer. “You tried to-”

 

“I’d rather not get into that,” Bruno interrupted, quietly but firmly.

 

Did Julieta even have the right to press him? She fell silent with a reluctant nod. 

 

“I’m here,” she said instead. “We’re all here. If you ever want to talk about it.”

 

He finally met her gaze and nodded. “Gracias,” he said, still so quiet.

 

For a while, all three of them were quiet. Bruno brushed his hair back, taking a deep breath.

 

“So, what about you two?” he asked. “I mean, I know you have magic and I know how, but…I don’t think I really know that much about you.

 

Well, that was fair enough. Her and Bruno’s morning talks were usually about the day before, or their plans for the day ahead. Their topics were never very serious.

 

“Well, we’re twins,” Julieta said. “Triplets, really. Our brother…” The ache was old and familiar. She wondered if it would ever go away.

 

Pepa’s cloud grew further, covering the entire ceiling. It rumbled and flashed, but Bruno didn’t flinch. His green eyes were filled with sympathy.

 

“Mirabel mentioned he was gone,” he said. “I’m so sorry. Was it…I’m sorry, was it the same people who killed your padré?”

 

“Killed…? Oh! Oh no, it’s not like our papá,” Pepa said, shaking her head. “He’s missing. He was lost the night mamá and papá had to flee their home.”

 

“Oh.” Bruno winced, cheeks flushing. “I’m sorry, Mirabel said he was ‘lost’ the same night as her abuelo and I saw the blank door, so I just assumed…”

 

“It’s an easy assumption to make,” Julieta said, smiling despite herself. Her poor little brother. Where was he? How was he? Did he even suspect he had a family waiting for him?

 

Was he still alive? His door would surely vanish if he wasn’t, right?

 

“We used to pretend he’d come running over the mountains one day,” Pepa said, glancing out the window. “When we were kids. We convinced ourselves that he’d just appear, and- poof! Everything would be perfect.”

 

Bruno smiled at her, sympathetic and maybe even a little nostalgic himself.

 

“We kind of did the same thing in the orphanage,” he said. “Only, we’d pretend about our parents or our whole families. The usual stuff like, Who are they, where are they, I bet they’re really rich and looking for me! One girl always said she bet she was a missing princess. One of the boys really loved football, so he wanted his papá to be a professional footballer.” His grin grew. “It was mostly to cheer the smaller kids up, or anyone who didn’t remember their families. Some of the older kids hated it.”

 

The image of all those little children, playing make-believe, hoping for parents, made Julieta want to find them all and wrap them up in a hug. Those kids were all fully grown now, her own age maybe, but she still wished she could find them and keep them safe like they deserved.

 

“What about you?” Pepa asked with a shy smile. “What did you pick?”

 

Bruno shrugged. “Well, I already knew my papá was dead, so no chances there. He was killed during the war, there was a massacre; but my mamá…Well, they weren’t sure if any of the other bodies were related to me at all. There were too many and some of them had been burned. Maybe one of them was her, maybe they weren’t. I could never really…Really settle on one idea for her, y’know? She kept changing in my head as I grew up. I just…” He followed Pepa’s gaze out of the window. “I hoped she was okay. That maybe she just hadn’t been in their village when it happened or something. Then she’d find out I hadn’t been killed too and she’d come find me. I wanted…” He knocked on the headboard six times in rapid succession and crossed his fingers. “I wanted her to be nice. And I wanted siblings. I just didn’t want to be the youngest.”

 

“Oh?” Julieta’s eyebrows rose. “Why not?”

 

Bruno gave her a flat, dead-pan stare. “Julieta, I’m barely five-four. I was always the runt, I didn’t need to be the baby as well.”

 

“Aw, poor little néné,” Pepa cooed. Bruno threw a pillow at her, grinning when it hit her in the face. Pepa threw it right back, but Bruno caught it with a smug smirk.

 

“How old are you two again?” Julieta asked with a sigh, trying to hide her smile.

 

“Forty-five, hermana mayor; you should remember, we’re the same age,” Pepa said. She gave an exaggerated gasp, her hand on her heart. “Oh, is your old age getting to you?”

 

“Eh, around the same,” Bruno said, tapping his chin. “But I can’t be sure. Think I could pass for thirty?”

 

“Someone’s got his energy back,” Julieta observed happily. She took his hand and squeezed it. Bruno squeezed back and his eyes were clearer, much clearer; they had more light in them than they did even a few minutes ago.

 

“Guess so,” Bruno said a little shyly. He looked between them and smiled. "One time I said I wanted a twin and Dukine said that was 'cheating.' I said you can't cheat in make-believe and she wanted to be a princess, so who was really being unfair? I won that argument."

 

Pepa grinned at him. "Take her," she said, winking at Julieta. "But no take-backs."

 

"Hm..." Bruno looked like he was considering it.

 

"I'm sitting right here," Julieta said.

 

"Hush, Julieta, I'm making a deal."

 

Julieta rolled her eyes, settling back in her seat. "Maybe I'll just go with Bruno after all," she said. "He doesn't make fun of me."

 

 

 

 

“Anything else you wanna know?” Pepa asked a short while later, after Félix brought them all cups of tea and a plate of biscuits from Señora Guzman. “We’ve got some time to kill.”

 

“Hm…” Bruno looked between them. Julieta, used to Camilo, did not trust that mischievous smirk for a second. “Julieta, Pepa was telling me about this party when you were eighteen.”

 

“Oh, Dios, please don’t do this to me,” Pepa said, eyes widening.

 

By contrast, Julieta’s eyes narrowed. “What did you tell him?” she demanded.

 

“Nothing. I said nothing. He heard nothing.”

 

“No, you definitely told me about how Julieta was too drunk to finish her cooking for the next day, so you had to try and finish it.”

 

“You told him about that!?” Julieta shrieked, her face flushing. “Pepa!”

 

Pepa laughed with a vicious glee, ducking to avoid Julieta’s slapping hands. “No, come on, it was just a bit of fun!”

 

“I don’t drink,” Julieta said, turning to Bruno, still slapping Pepa’s arm. “I swear I’m the responsible one. She’s the brat.”

 

“Brat!? Oh, okay, how about the time you went swimming with Agustín and lost your-”

 

“We don’t speak of it!”

 

Bruno was laughing so hard he fell back, hands over his mouth as his shoulders shook. 

 

“N-no, no!” He laughed. “Please carry on.”

 

“I hate you,” Julieta told Pepa. “I will hate you forever.”

 

Pepa blew her a kiss. She sat on the bed next to Bruno and hauled him back up, flinging an arm around his shoulders. “Alright, amigo, let me set the scene. It’s a hot summer’s day-”

 

“Because of you,” Julieta grumbled.

 

“Hush, Juli, it’s story-time. Anyway, we were like…Sixteen? Julieta and Agustín decided to go swimming together, they weren’t even dating yet…”

 

Julieta watched them laughing together, occasionally joining in on the story (if only to protest against it); she watched Pepa’s cloud shrink and vanish entirely as she talked. She watched Bruno snickering like a schoolboy, eyes shining. He looked so much better, almost entirely well again. The shadows under his eyes still bothered her and he was still paler than usual…But he was awake, he was laughing with them. He’d even trusted them with more of his story.

 

She was going to make sure she kept that trust, that she kept earning it. 

 

She was also going to make sure that Pepa regretted ever breathing a single word of those embarrassing stories. Julieta had plenty of dirt of her own.

 

For now, she was content to watch her sister and her friend, and see the worry leave Pepa’s eyes and the light coming back to Bruno’s.

Notes:

The sibling energy is real and it is chaotic already

Next up, the kids are happy to see Bruno feeling better and we have a bit of a time-skip (only a few days) and some much-needed Luisa and Isabela content

The pieces so far: (Trigger warning for mention of self-harm and suicide)

Here's what Julieta knows: Bruno's full name is Bruno Expósito and he tried to kill himself when he was sixteen and now she knows it was more than once and that he's been homeless. She knows (having seen his scars) that he has self-harmed in the past. She now knows he was in an orphanage and that his father (and presumably his mother/family) were killed in a massacre. She also knows he doesn't like his surname or want to use it. He has the same first name as her brother but, unlike Alma, she has no problem using his name.

Here's what Pepa knows: Bruno's full name is Bruno Expósito and now she knows he's tried to kill himself more than once and that he's been homeless. He has the same first name as her brother, but she has no problem using it. Sometimes he looks familiar to her, but she can't place why (and it's only jumped out at her once or twice now). She knows of his scars, but hasn't really looked. She now knows he was in an orphanage and that his father (and presumably his mother/family) were killed in a massacre.

Here's what Mirabel knows: Bruno doesn't like his surname or want to use it. He has the same first name as her uncle. He doesn't have parents. She's seen the scars on his arms, but doesn't know what they're from.

Here's what Camilo knows: Bruno doesn't have parents and has the same name as their uncle.

Here's what Dolores knows: All of the above.

Here's what Bruno knows: the Madrigals have a "lost" uncle, who was "lost" the same day Pedro died. This mysterious uncle has a glowing door, but it's blank, unlike the others. He now knows that "lost" really does just mean missing and that this uncle was not killed with Pedro after all. The uncle is Pepa and Julieta's triplet. Considering Alma brought him tea to help with his migraine, he's now not completely sure what to make of her, but he's still wary.

Chapter 17: The Beauty And The Brawn

Summary:

The kids are happy to see Bruno back on his feet.
Meanwhile, Bruno ponders family, surprises Isabela and begins to worry about Luisa.

Notes:

🎵The beauty and the brawn do no wrong🎵
Or do they?

Small trigger warning for mention of Bruno's self-harm scars

In which Isabela is not used to being told off (even very mildly), Bruno wonders about his family and expectations vs reality, and Luisa needs a goddamn break

Songs I listened to while writing:
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Fake Smile, by Ariana Grande
Princesses Don't Cry, by Carys
Caught In The Middle, by Paramore
Fake Happy, by Paramore
Hiding In Your Hands, from Dear Evan Hansen (bonus track)

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“But wait! If I could shake the crushing weight of expectations, would that free some room up for joy? Or relaxation, or simple pleasure? Instead, we measure this growing pressure. Keeps growing, keep going. 'Cause all we know is pressure like a drip, drip, drip that'll never stop.” - Surface Pressure, Encanto




The next day, Bruno rejoined the Madrigals for breakfast. When he looked in the mirror, he saw that he was still paler than usual and the shadows under his eyes looked like bruises. Well, Bruno was used to it. It wasn’t like he’d ever really looked healthy.

 

Félix gave him a thumbs up and a grin when he saw Bruno setting the table with Julieta. Isabela walked into the dining room, arm in arm with Alma and smiled at him. With a wave of her hand, a trio of flor de mayo appeared in front of Bruno’s plate.

 

“It’s good to see you’re well again,” she said.

 

“Gracias,” Bruno said, smiling a little shyly. Out of all the Madrigal kids, he hadn’t really spoken to Isabela much (even less than he’d spoken to Luisa), but she was always so polite and sweet, and plainly the apple of Alma’s eye.

 

Indeed, Alma cupped Isabela’s face in her hands and kissed her cheek with a proud smile as the rest of the family arrived. There was a flash of- of something on Mirabel’s face when she looked at her abuela and big sister. A shuttered look, her eyes going dark for a moment.

 

But then she saw Bruno, squeaked and ran at him, flinging her arms tightly around him, closely followed by Camilo.

 

“Oh!” Bruno stumbled back under the combined force of their hug. For a moment he faltered, completely frozen.

 

“You’re okay,” Mirabel said against his shoulder and she sounded a little teary. “You’re okay.

 

It hit him then, that they probably hadn’t seen someone seriously ill before. Not with Julieta around.

 

The realisation spurred him back into motion and he clumsily hugged her and Camilo, patting their backs.

 

“Yeah,” he said. “Yeah, kid. I’m okay.”

 

Sniffling, Mirabel clung to him. Camilo pulled back to grin at him and momentarily shifted into a shorter version of Bruno before turning back to himself, still grinning.

 

“It’s been so boring,” Camilo complained. “You owe us more crafts!”

 

“Camilo,” Félix sighed.

 

Bruno, however, grinned and ruffled Camilo’s hair. “Deal,” he said. “Mirabel? You okay?”

 

She finally pulled back, shuffling from foot to foot. She pulled something from her pocket and held it out to him with a shy smile.

 

It was a little card, bright yellow and handmade. In big pink capital letters it read, GET WELL SOON! It was drawn with different butterflies and chameleons. When Bruno opened it he found another message in sprawling letters; Get well soon, we miss you! Love from Mirabel and Camilo

 

Don’t start crying, you idiot, Bruno sternly told himself. Don’t do it.

 

He settled for hugging them both tightly, squeezing his eyes shut until he was sure he could control himself.

 

“You are okay, right?” Mirabel whispered. “Promise?”

 

“Lo prometo, Mirabel.”

 

As Bruno took his seat, he glanced out the window and saw a rainbow arching over the village. He caught Pepa’s gaze and found her beaming at him, a shimmer of sunshine around her head. He grinned back and tucked the card into his pocket.






As he helped Félix with the dishes after breakfast, Camilo and Mirabel hung around, chatting away. Mirabel sat on the counter, swinging her legs and occasionally helping to put a plate away. Camilo marched around, sometimes doing handstands (ignoring Félix’s warning to behave) and shapeshifting as the mood took him.

 

“Hey, Bruno?” Camilo shifted back from the boy he’d seen smiling at Isabela. (Mariano? Marco? Something like that.)

 

“Sí, Camilo?”

 

“Were you in a fight?”

 

“Huh?” Bruno was completely lost. He looked at Félix, but Félix looked just as baffled. Bruno finished drying the plate and handed it to Mirabel. “Er…No, buddy. I was just sick.”

 

“No, before. Mira said you’ve got scars.”

 

Bruno froze, his blood running cold. Félix swore under his breath, elbow-deep in soapy water. Mirabel gave Bruno a sheepish smile, cringing back.

 

On autopilot, Bruno held his arm. His heart was pounding and he had to take a deep breath before he could speak.

 

“Uh, y-yeah. Yeah, Camilo. I was in a fight.”

 

“Did you win?” Camilo asked with an eager grin.

 

“Camilo,” Félix said, a warning edge to his voice. “That’s enough.”

 

“I…” Bruno’s grip on his arm tightened, his nails dug into his sleeve, pressing on his scars. He felt a little light-headed, but his smile wasn’t completely forced. “Heh. Yeah. I guess I did.”

 

“Cool,” Camilo said, looking impressed.

 

“Sorry,” Mirabel whispered, looking at the floor.

 

“No, I…It’s okay,” Bruno said. His voice sounded far-away to his own ears. “Just, um, that’s- that’s private, okay, niños?”

 

They both nodded. Mirabel looked solemn, Camilo looked a little excited, like he’d been let into a secret club.

 

“I’m so sorry,” Félix whispered as they finished the dishes. “I’ll talk to him.”

 

Bruno nodded, but his mind was racing.

 

Were you in a fight? Did you win?

 

Well, in a way, he was. And…Yeah. Bruno supposed he had won.

 

At the very least, he was still going. That counted for something, right?






Bruno was under strict orders from Julieta to rest, so he was Casita-bound. Not that he minded. If anything, he preferred it. He had the oddest sense that Casita was happy about it too.

 

He already knew the house liked him (and that was still such an odd thought) and he liked Casita. 

 

Before leaving, Luisa smiled shyly and said, “I’m glad you’re okay.”

 

Bruno smiled at her. He pushed his hair back and it immediately fell back into place. “Thank you,” he said. He was back to his usual headache, the typical dull ache always in the back of his mind. Unfortunate and a nuisance, but nothing he couldn’t handle; in fact he usually managed to ignore it.

 

Luisa’s smile widened slightly and she left, trailing after Julieta. He heard her say something about the new houses and a leaning wall.

 

Just as he turned towards his room, he spotted Isabela getting ready to leave. She flipped her hair, which smacked Mirabel in the face. Isabela, who had been so sweet at breakfast, scowled at her little sister when she noticed her.

 

“Get out of my way,” she snapped. Her previously sweet, pretty expression was gone, replaced by a nasty frown and narrowed eyes. Dislike radiated off her.

 

And, look, Bruno didn’t want to get involved, that wasn’t his place but…

 

“She’s just standing there,” he blurted out. Isabela turned and stared at him in surprise, and Bruno flushed in embarrassment. He knew he had no place stepping in between them (that was down to their parents), it was just that…Well, Mirabel hadn’t been doing anything wrong. She’d just been there.

 

The silence stretched on and Bruno wished for some wood to knock on.

 

Eventually, Isabela huffed.

 

“Exactly,” she said, throwing Mirabel one last frown, ice cold. Then, like a mask falling into place, she walked away gracefully, her head held high and that sweet smile back. As she walked out of the front doors, flowers grew around the doors, and then she was gone.

 

Mirabel was standing still as a statue, clutching her bag so tightly that Bruno was afraid she’d snap the strap clean in half.

 

“Mirabel?” He stepped closer, biting his lip. “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to-”

 

“No one ever tells Isabela off,” Mirabel mumbled. She looked at him with an unreadable expression, her eyes big and shiny. Strangely shy, she added, “Gracias.”

 

“Oh, uh…” Bruno shrugged. “Anytime, chiquita. I guess.”

 

Mirabel smiled then, more like her usual self.

 

“See you later,” she said and dashed off. Casita closed the doors behind her and Bruno was alone. Well, not really alone, considering Casita was sentient, but the point stood.

 

He went to his room and lay down on the bed. Maybe it was just a sibling thing, but Isabela had looked so angry. Bruno should have kept his big mouth shut.

 

But Mirabel looked so surprised when he spoke. Maybe even a little relieved.

 

In that case, it was worth it.

 

Without much else to do, Bruno reached under the bed and pulled his threadbare bag out. His baby blanket was hidden inside and Bruno held onto it, his thumb rubbing over his name and the little caterpillar. 

 

He’d always wished he had siblings but siblings were a lot more complicated than a child’s daydreams made them out to be. He wondered if he’d fight with his siblings, if they’d like each other. Would they get on? 

 

Granted, these questions hinged on him having any to begin with. For him to have siblings, his mother would have to be alive, or they’d have to be older than him and have escaped the massacre themselves. Who knew?

 

Bruno knew it was a good thing he’d only been a baby, too young to remember all the horrors of that night, but he wished he could remember any member of his family. His papá died to protect him and Bruno didn’t even know his name. The unfairness of it was always there in the back of his mind, nagging at him.

 

And besides, now he’d lived through his home burning down all over again. What was a little more horror on top of that, if it meant he’d have some answers?

 

He held the blanket tighter, closing his eyes. He’d given up on his family years ago in all honesty. Finding them seemed so impossible when he didn’t know the first thing about them, or if they were even alive in the first place. His daydreams had faded as he grew. Maybe it was just being surrounded by a happy family after so much recent trauma, but right now Bruno couldn’t get the idea out of his mind. Who knew, maybe his mother would have some answers about the green dreams.

 

Good luck with that, he thought to himself.

 

No, he wouldn’t be finding a dead woman any time soon. But there were still good things in his life; he had friends here, he’d have a home of his own again soon. This valley was protected by magic. So long as Bruno could keep the green dreams a secret and keep his bad luck at bay, it wouldn’t all come tumbling down again.

 

The green dreams…

 

His recent ones had been…Surprisingly good. There’d been a little boy. A boy who looked like Félix…

 

Oh! His eyes snapped open and he sat up, still clutching the baby blanket to his chest. A little boy who looked like Félix and had spoken to animals…He’d seen the baby! The unborn baby! 

 

It seemed Mirabel would get her wish for another boy after all.

 

Bruno smiled to himself and put the blanket away, hiding the bag back under the bed. What else had he seen? Dolores getting ready for a wedding, her wedding. Isabela with new flowers and plants. He’d only seen her grow roses and flor de mayo so far, but Bruno hadn’t spent much time with her, so he could hardly say what she was capable of. And there’d been…Rats? Something about a door? 

 

Bruno would hardly turn down some little rodent friends. Sue him, but rats were adorable.






He was sitting in the garden reading when Luisa came running back to Casita, red-faced and sweating, her hair escaping its bun.

 

“Luisa?” Bruno closed the book, a recommendation from Agustín. “You okay?”

 

“Mamá needs more food,” Luisa said, darting past. She came running back out, carrying a whole box of food. “It’s a long line today.”

 

“Do you need some water?” Bruno asked worriedly, getting to his feet.

 

“Oh, no, I’m fine,” Luisa said. “I need to hurry, the donkeys got out.”

 

“Well…” Bruno knew he was meant to be resting, but Luisa looked weirdly frazzled. “How about I bring those to your mamá and you can find the donkeys?”

 

Luisa froze. Her grip on the box tightened. “I can handle it,” she said quickly. 

 

“I know,” Bruno said. “But if you’ve got a lot to do, I don’t mind helping. I’ve just been sitting here.”

 

“You’re meant to be resting.”

 

“I’ve rested plenty. Had a nap and everything. Super rested.”

 

She glanced towards the village. “You’re sure you don’t mind?”

 

“Sure as sure can be.” Bruno gave her a thumbs up, making sure to smile.

 

Hesitantly, as if handing him delicate china (or a bomb) Luisa gave him the box of food. “Gracias,” she said, staring at her shoes. “I’ll, uh- I’m gonna get the donkeys.”

 

“Do you need- oh, she’s gone.” Bruno blinked at the empty spot where she’d been and watched in awe as she raced away. That girl was fast. Bruno followed behind her and he heard people call after her as she hurried through the village.

 

“Luisa, can you move the bridge?”

 

“Luisa, por favor, can you help fix the barn?”

 

“Luisa, the donkeys got out again!”

 

“I know!” Luisa called. “I’m on it! And I’ll get the bridge and barn when I get back.”

 

“Luisa, can you help with the new houses?”

 

“Sure!” she said with a grin and then she picked up the pace, vanishing around the corner in search of the wayward donkeys. Bruno stood there in the road, clutching Julieta’s food and feeling somehow off-kilter.

 

Move the bridge? Were they serious?

 

“I need her help with moving my furniture later,” he heard a man huff.

 

Do it yourself, Bruno thought, staring blankly ahead.

 

“Bruno?” Dolores was suddenly there, a hand on his shoulder. Her eyes were wide as always, her head tilted to the side. “Are you okay? Your heart’s going so fast.”

 

“Is your prima always so busy?” he asked.

 

“Hm? Luisa?” She pouted slightly and sighed. “Sí.”

 

That didn’t sit right with him. She was just fourteen.

 

“That’s not fair,” he said.

 

Dolores smiled sadly. “I know,” she said. She nodded at the box. “Let’s go to Tia’s stall.”

 

Bruno walked in step with her and, with every step, he reminded himself to not judge the villagers too harshly. He didn’t know them. He didn’t know Luisa’s limits either.

 

Still, it didn’t sit right with him. 

 

Mind your business, Bruno told himself. You’ve already overstepped.

 

It wasn’t really his business. They weren’t his kids. But maybe he should mention something to Julieta? Then again, maybe not. She surely knew.

 

You’re tying yourself in knots over nothing.

 

Indeed, his worries soon vanished to be replaced by new ones. Julieta took one look at him and groaned, “Ay, Bruno! Get back to bed!” 

 

“Hola,” Bruno said sheepishly. He held out the box like a shield.

 

She all but snatched the box and shooed him while Dolores giggled at his affronted frown. 

 

“Hombre imposible,” Julieta muttered, but she was faintly smiling and she patted his back, so Bruno supposed he was off the hook.

Notes:

Next up, a small time skip and we finally get some Alma and Bruno content, while Mirabel works on a present for Bruno

Chapter 18: Crossing A Bridge

Summary:

Mirabel makes Bruno a present. Alma faces some of her demons as she and Bruno finally talk.

Notes:

Me, dragging Alma through her character arc: "Come on, it's not so bad!"

Mirabel and Bruno are the dynamic duo 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
Crossing A Bridge, from Anastasia: Broadway
Close The Door, from Anastasia: Broadway
Still Here, by Digital Daggers
State Of Grace (Taylor's Version), by Taylor Swift
Abre Los Ojos, from Encanto
Chords, by The Amazing Devil
Brave, by Sara Bareilles

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Maybe we're sharing this beautiful night. Me on the left bank, you on the right. Almost in sight...Crossing a bridge. Every light is like a promise, every light could be a clue. One of them might be you.” - Crossing A Bridge, Anastasia: Broadway




It had been nearly a week since Bruno recovered, back to his normal dull headaches. When he admitted to Julieta and Pepa that the headaches never really went away, Pepa’s cloud thundered and Julieta got a stubborn look on her face and ever since then she kept nagging Bruno to look after himself and make sure he got plenty of rest.

 

Which he did. It was hard to tell Julieta no.

 

Who ever thought he’d be nagged into looking after himself?

 

Julieta just looked smug about it. Bruno did the mature thing and stuck his tongue out at her.

 

When he was around Julieta and Pepa, or Mirabel and Camilo, or even Dolores, it was easy to forget everything. Sometimes he could almost pretend he’d always lived in Encanto, that his home had never been destroyed.

 

It never lasted long. Part of moving on meant facing everything. Although he’d told Pepa, Julieta and even Agustín some of his life story, he couldn’t quite bring himself to talk about his village.

 

He looked at Juan’s portrait, which he’d pinned to the wall, and hoped Juan would understand. Bruno simply wasn’t ready to talk about that night yet. Someday. Just not yet. Maybe when the mere idea didn’t bring flashbacks rushing to mind and didn’t make his heart speed up.

 

“Run. Run and don’t look back. God go with you, mijo.”

 

“Then you live. You live for him.”

 

His father had died in a river forty-five years ago, bent over Bruno to try and keep him safe. They’d washed up on the bank and his father had still been curled around him. Bruno had only lived because authorities came looking for survivors. Somehow, Bruno had survived the night; he was found, he was taken to the orphanage. He lived.

 

Only a few weeks ago, Juan had died to give him time to run. Bruno’s eyes had flared green, painting a direct target on his back. Their attackers had been made aware of him, no doubt suspecting some sort of trick or witchcraft. Who knew what they’d have done to him if they’d gotten hold of him? Would they have believed Bruno when he told them he couldn’t control it?

 

Doubtful.

 

But Bruno had gotten away thanks to Juan. He’d made it through the jungle and over the mountain. He’d lived again. Despite his own efforts to the contrary, he’d lived.

 

Maybe Juan was right. Maybe his survival meant something. The hopeful part of him would like to think so. 

 

Still, when Félix came to invite Bruno along to church with the rest of them, Bruno stayed home. This was something he’d have to puzzle out on his own, without the help of a God he wasn’t sure he even believed in anymore.

 

He could worry about religious faith once he’d gotten some faith in himself and the world.

 

It was only when the rest of the Madrigals had left that he realised one of his ruanas was missing.

 

“Uh, Casita?” Bruno frowned at his wardrobe and the ruana did not magically reappear. “Have you seen my other ruana?” The missing ruana was a plain, soft green and about three-sizes too big for him, which Bruno preferred. Pepa had thrown up her hands in exasperation, but the tailor hadn’t batted an eye. Mirabel had declared it “a bit too boring.”

 

Casita rattled the floor. He had the distinct impression that Casita was giggling.

 

“You’re not gonna tell me, are you?” Bruno asked, arms folded. His bedroom door swayed, a clear No.

 

“Is it something bad?”

 

No again.

 

Bruno sighed and picked up his book. “You’re lucky I trust you.”

 

He headed for the garden, ignoring how the staircase clattered as he passed. He stopped in the kitchen for some of the orange juice Julieta had made that morning and went outside to finish the book and enjoy the sunshine. After all, Julieta did have a point when she said he needed to relax.






Mirabel wondered if Bruno had noticed the missing ruana. He surely must have by now, but he didn’t say anything, which was probably for the best. That way she didn’t have to think of a lie.

 

The ruana was safely in the nursery, hidden among her piles of fabric. She had a plan, you see. Not just a plan, but A Plan. Super important stuff. 

 

That ruana was way too boring. Mirabel needed to fix it. At least Bruno’s other ruana’s (only two others) had a pattern, even if they were faint and also kind of boring by Mirabel’s standards. 

 

During dessert that night, Mirabel turned to him and asked, “So, what’s your favourite animal?”

 

“Hm?” Bruno didn’t look too surprised; Mirabel usually asked him a lot of questions. “Um, I like rats,” he said. “And mice. But mostly rats.”

 

“Why?” she asked.

 

“They’re cute,” Bruno said with a shrug. “And they’re actually really smart too.”

 

Rats. Okay, Mirabel could work with that.

 

That night, she sketched and sketched and sketched until she had a pattern she was happy with. Then she got to work.






It took two days for Mirabel to complete the ruana. As soon as she finished, she sprinted to Bruno’s room, hurried along by an excited Casita.

 

“Bruno!” she called. “Bruno, Bruno! I’ve got a surprise!”

 

He opened the door at the sound of her voice and Mirabel jumped off the last two steps, running right to him and pushing the ruana into his hands.

 

“Ta-da!” She beamed up at him and Bruno shook out the ruana in bemusement. His eyes widened when he saw the pattern.

 

Mirabel had embroidered little grey rats around the hem of the ruana; little soft grey rats with dark green eyes, seemingly chasing each other. It was much less boring now. Inside the hood, she’d embroidered a single green B. 

 

Bruno just continued to stare and Mirabel grew suddenly anxious. She’d taken his ruana without permission after all. What if he hated it?

 

She lowered her head, shuffling nervously.

 

“I’m sorry,” she said. “I- if you’re mad, I-”

 

She was cut off when he hugged her tightly. Mirabel clung to him, sighing in relief. Okay then, he wasn’t mad.

 

“You’re brilliant, kid,” Bruno told her, ruffling her hair with a bright smile. It was the biggest smile Mirabel had seen from him. “Absolutely brilliant, you know that?”

 

He wore the new and improved ruana for the rest of the day and Mirabel stuck to his side like glue. He didn’t seem to mind at all.

 

Mirabel could do a good job after all. 






Alma Madrigal took one look at the ruana and her eyebrows rose in surprise. Bruno avoided her gaze; she wasn’t frowning or glaring this time, but he still had no idea what to do around her. She didn’t seem to like him, that hadn’t changed, so he figured the best thing to do would still be to stay out of her way.

 

Which begged the question why she’d brought him tea when he was sick, if he bothered her so much.

 

Then again, maybe she was just like that. Just helping sick or injured people. If she was the village leader then it may have been part of her job. Just another chore.

 

And maybe Bruno was completely overthinking the small gesture. 

 

It had just…Been a surprise. A big one. A small gesture, a big surprise. 

 

She wasn’t frowning anymore, but she still didn’t look at him much. Almost never in fact. He wondered if Isabela had told her what he said to her. He hoped not.

 

(Maybe they would have continued to avoid each other, if it hadn’t been for what happened the very next morning.)






Another day, another load of laundry. It was still early in the morning, just after breakfast. Their guest had claimed the bathroom first, then Félix. Then it would be Pepa’s turn; in the meantime, Alma was gathering anything that needed washing. 

 

She knocked on the door of the guestroom. 

 

“Uh, sí?” Bruno called.

 

“It’s just me,” Alma said, fighting to keep her voice neutral. “Have you anything for the wash?”

 

“Oh! Right, just a second, por favor, Señora Alma.”

 

But Casita did not give him a second. The door swung open on its own and Alma’s heart froze in horror as she got a clear look at Bruno’s back.

 

Félix had not lied about the welts and scars. Alma just hadn’t imagined there’d be so many. The scars overlapped each other, some big and some small; some more raised than others. They were clearly old and yet Alma felt a sudden fury ignite in her all the same.

 

She’d seen his arms when he first arrived. She hadn’t seen this.

 

Who had done that?

 

His hair was still dripping wet and when he realised the door was open, he gave a strangled gasp and immediately grabbed his nearest shirt, buttoning it so quickly that he missed half of them, leaving it lopsided. He gaped at her, frozen, eyes wide and expression utterly horrified.

 

Alma’s heart was ice, her blood was fire; her heart beat faster and faster.

 

Quietly, she stepped into the room and closed the door.

 

“Who did that to you?” she whispered. She could not raise her voice. If she did, she might start yelling. 

 

“I…I, uh…It’s n-not…” He turned away from her. “Um…”

 

“Bruno, who did that to you?”

 

They both froze in astonishment then. Bruno looked at her over his shoulder, his fists unclenching, his eyes wider than ever.

 

There were many things Alma ran from, (not that she truly acknowledged that) but this would not be one of them. Abuse was not something she would ignore. Had Julieta seen these? Could she heal them? But if her hija couldn’t heal his other scars, it only stood to reason she couldn’t heal these either.

 

It felt so unfair to her. An acknowledgement that was hidden there, in the back of her mind, fighting to break free. He’d escaped, only to be stuck with physical reminders of whatever he’d been through forever. 

 

Was that why he looked at her with such fear? Did he think she would do that to him?

 

“You…” Bruno turned to face her fully, still staring in surprise.

 

Alma set the basket of laundry on his bed and turned to him.

 

“Who did that to you?” she demanded again, calmer now.

 

“It- it uh, it was the nuns.” He shook his head, pushing his wet hair back. “But d-did you just, uh-?”

 

Steeling herself, Alma put her hand on his shoulder, her lips pressed together in a thin, stern line. Bruno’s stammerings cut off and he froze under her hand, still as a statue.

 

Alma took a deep breath and looked into his wide green eyes.

 

“Then they were cruel, evil women to do such a thing,” she said firmly. “They were not women of God.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno said quietly, eyes widening further. 

 

“It was an orphanage, sí?”

 

“I, uh- yes.”

 

“I see.” Alma stepped back, holding her hands in front of her. “They will answer for it one day.”

 

His lips twitched, an almost-smile. He looked very small and very sad. Somehow younger than he really was. How old was he exactly? She’d guessed he was around Julieta and Pepa’s age, but was he younger? Older? Perhaps absurdly, it felt rude to ask. At least, it felt like a ridiculous change in subject.

 

“Julieta said the same thing,” he muttered, glancing away. He crossed his arms. “...Thank you.”

 

Alma nodded. She felt somehow off-balance. Still in shock, she supposed. She hadn’t seen such physical evidence of violence in a long, long time. 

 

“De nada,” Alma said. She picked up her basket and turned to go. At the door, she paused. “I meant what I said when you first arrived. You are safe here, Br…” She swallowed. “Bruno. You will not come to harm.”

 

She didn’t give him a chance to answer. She left quickly, but she still faintly heard his quiet, “Gracias.”

 

There, she’d done it. She’d said his name. She’d spoken with him.

 

Alma felt lightheaded.

 

She went to the dining room and sat down, clutching her locket. Had she handled that badly? Had she made it somehow worse, or had she helped at all?

 

“Ay, Pedro,” she whispered. “Help me, mi amor. I do not wish to harm him.” 

 

And she truly didn’t. His name made her heart ache, his tortured expression made her stomach churn with guilt. Alma was a stern woman, a no-nonsense woman; a leader, a matriarch, a protector. She wouldn’t wish harm on a defenceless man, alone in the world.

 

She helped those around her. That was how they earned their Miracle and made sure Pedro’s sacrifice was not in vain. 

 

Alma was not Julieta, warm and inviting. She was not Pepa, telling stories and laughing. In this, she felt terribly out of her depth. It felt like standing in the middle of a shaking, unsteady bridge.

 

But she’d made the first step, even accidentally. She would have to keep going. Somehow, she always did.




No one was in the courtyard. No one noticed the candle momentarily shine brighter.

 

Hidden inside Casita’s walls, never seen and utterly unknown by the Madrigals…A crack healed.




Dolores turned away from the town, head tilted. “Hm!” she squeaked to herself. Call her crazy, but she could have sworn she heard something in the walls for a moment…

 

Then she was distracted by the shrieks of children playing, of Mariano reading to his mother and the strange sound was forgotten.

Notes:

Me, the author: "Well, FINALLY!"
Casita, fed up with my shit: "✨Finally✨"

Next up, Alma has a job for Bruno in town. Bruno finally meets Mariano properly and spends some time with Luisa.

Chapter 19: No Mistakes, No Pressure

Summary:

Alma has a job for Bruno in town to finally put those artistic talents to good use.
Bruno officially meets Mariano and may or may not trick Luisa into taking a break.

Notes:

Time to put Bruno's art skills to good use! (And, unknowingly, his uncle instincts)

Songs I listened to while writing:
Waiting On A Miracle, from Encanto
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Enchanted, by Taylor Swift
Breakfast Questions, from Encanto
Dreams, by The Cranberries
6/10, by Dodie

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“All I need is a change; all I need is a chance. All I know is I can't stay on the side. Open your eyes, open your eyes, open your eyes. I would move the mountains, make new trees and flowers grow. Someone please just let me know, where do I go? I am waiting on a miracle, a miracle.” - Waiting On A Miracle, Encanto




There’d been a shift in La Casa Madrigal and Julieta could tell Casita was pleased.

 

Alma no longer frowned whenever she saw Bruno, her eyes did not skip over him as if he wasn’t even present. They were still hesitant around each other (mostly just saying “Good morning,” or “Hello,”) but her mother no longer looked pained by the mere mention of his name.

 

Others would mistake it for anger, but Julieta knew her mother. The differences were small and hard to spot, but Julieta had been able to see how much Alma had struggled with his name. 

 

But something had happened. Something had changed. Now Alma looked at him and wished him good morning. Sometimes she still tensed up, sometimes she still skipped his name and addressed him without it. Either way, the difference was obvious and Bruno seemed less afraid of her now too.

 

Julieta was relieved to see it.

 

As usual, she and Bruno were sitting on the back steps before breakfast. Today she made tea instead of chocolate con queso.

 

“So, mi madre finally spoke to you?” she asked.

 

“Sí,” Bruno said. He winced and added, “She may have seen my back and freaked out.”

 

Julieta winced with him. She could only imagine how Bruno had felt, or her mother. 

 

“She didn’t…” Yell, scare you, push for answers?

 

“She said the same thing you did,” Bruno said, looking thoughtful. “That they’d answer for it one day.”

 

Julieta still believed they would, with all her heart. If there was any justice in the world, they’d answer for it.

 

Julieta had the Gift of healing, given to her by a Miracle, by her father’s sacrifice. How could she not believe in karma, all things considered? Maybe it wouldn’t happen today, tomorrow, or even any time soon…But she wholeheartedly believed that anyone who ever dared to lay a hand on her friend would answer for it.






Two days later, as the younger kids headed for school, Alma approached Bruno.

 

“You said you are an artist,” she said.

 

“Uh, yes,” Bruno said, biting his thumbnail. “Do you need something painted?” He couldn’t imagine what Casita would need painted; the house seemed to keep itself bright and pretty and Agustín and Félix usually handled the cleaning.

 

“We have a mural in town,” Alma said, commanding as ever. “It needs touching up. Perhaps you could help?”

 

He’d glimpsed that mural once or twice, but he’d never actually stopped to look at it. It was near Julieta’s stall. 

 

Alma was looking at him expectantly, her eyebrow raising as his silence continued.

 

“Sure,” Bruno said. He knocked on the doorframe, one two three four five six. “Yeah, I can do that.”






The mural really was only a stone’s throw from Julieta’s stall. It took up most of a wall and was titled Los Madrigals. It showed Alma holding her candle, Julieta with a plate of food and Pepa with a cloud and sunshine. Beneath them were the kids and they were all surrounded by flowers, birds, butterflies, rays of light and even parts of the village. It was colourful, but Bruno quickly saw what Alma meant when she said it needed a touch-up; parts of the mural were noticeably faded, some of the paint had chipped away. Her candle’s light was a mere blur of yellow.

 

There was no sign of Félix or Agustín. That…didn’t seem right.

 

Bruno stepped back with a frown, studying the mural again. It was an easy job, all things considered. 

 

He’d taken off his ruana and pulled his hair back in a messy ponytail, reluctantly rolling his sleeves up.

 

One of the local men, Alano Cortes brought an armful of brushes and some canvas to cover the ground. He was followed by a handsome young man, the same boy Bruno had spotted smiling at Isabela, who Camilo sometimes shifted into and pranced around as.

 

“Hola!” the boy said cheerfully, carrying massive cans of paint. He wasn’t even breaking a sweat. “You’re Señor Bruno, sí?”

 

Bruno nodded and the boy beamed.

 

“I’m Mariano Guzman,” he said. “My abuela is friends with Señora Alma.”

 

Ah, so his name was Mariano. Bruno hadn’t been sure; he’d just known it started with an M.

 

Alano Cortes’s smile was more shy. “It’s good to see you’re well,” he said. Shyly, he added, “I was part of the group that found you.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno said, eyes widening. He suddenly felt very small. “W-well, I- thank you. For your help.”

 

Alano shook his head. “I didn’t do much,” he said, setting the brushes down and spreading out the canvas. “It was Julieta and Dolores doing most of the work, truth be told.”

 

“They always work hard,” Mariano added. “You know, one time when we were little, I got terribly lost in the jungle and Dolores found me all by herself!”

 

Bruno couldn’t help but smile. The kid was so earnest and, honestly, the mental image was adorable. 

 

Alano left a moment later, but Mariano hung around, watching Bruno fix up the mural as if he was the one doing magic. At her stall, Julieta healed a man with a dislocated arm; Bruno winced as it snapped back into place, but Mariano didn’t bat an eye. He supposed the villagers were just used to it. 

 

Mariano made himself useful by handing Bruno brushes or paints and helping clean the brushes Bruno was done with. He was a chatty kid, talking about the latest romance novel he’d read with his mother, bemoaning the tragic ending. He talked about a book of poems his abuela had gotten for him and the inspiration they’d given him. He asked Bruno about the outside world and seemed in awe of his description of Bogotá.

 

Around lunchtime, Bruno took a break, stretching his arms out. Big as the mural was, he was happy enough with the progress he’d made so far. He’d need to get a ladder to reach everything, but for now he could already see the improvement. 

 

He wondered if Alma would be angry if he managed to work Félix and Agustín in…

 

His train of thought was interrupted when Isabela and Dolores approached, carrying a small plate of Julieta’s food and some water. Mariano straightened up, smoothing his shirt with a smile.

 

“Hola,” Isabela said with her usual sweet smile. She tucked her hair behind her ear and gestured to the plate Dolores was carrying. “Mamá instructed us to make sure you’re not starving yourself.”

 

Sure enough, when Bruno glanced behind the girls, Julieta was watching him like a hawk.

 

Trying not to grin too widely, Bruno took the plate. “Gracias,” he said. He raised his voice so Julieta could hear; “Gracias, Julieta!”

 

“Eat up!” she called back. “You’d better clear that plate!”

 

Bruno saluted her and tucked in. Dolores giggled, ducking her head. Isabela rolled her eyes, looking impossibly fond as she gently set the water down.

 

“That dress looks lovely,” Mariano said to her. “Is it new?”

 

“Oh, sí,” Isabela said. She twirled on the spot and a shower of rose petals fluttered around her. Mariano’s cheeks looked a little pink as Isabela smiled at him.

 

Bruno was right next to Dolores and even then he barely heard her quiet, “Hm!”

 

He glanced at her and saw how her eyes watered, how her smile stiffened. Behind her back, her fists were clenched.

 

Wait, Bruno thought. His eyes widened as the pieces began to fall into place.

 

Someone Dolores likes who likes someone else. A poet she listens to while we talk. The week she’d been missing…Mariano was just talking about writing a poem and…And…

 

Oh Dios.

 

Dolores liked Mariano and he liked Isabela. 

 

His chest tightened, he felt suddenly awful on her behalf. 

 

Mariano seemed like a nice kid, but he was plainly an idiot to not like Dolores back, thank you very much.

 

Bruno barely bit back a sigh and handed her a cocada.

 

“That’s him, huh?” he whispered so quietly he barely heard himself, knowing she’d hear just fine.

 

She popped the cocada in her mouth and nodded. Biting her lip, she linked her arm with Bruno’s.

 

“That’s him,” she whispered. Her lip trembled. “Abuela will be happy if he asks to court Isa. His abuela’s on the council.”

 

“I’m more concerned if you’re happy, kid.”

 

Dolores sighed. “I’ll be fine,” she said, but she didn’t sound happy at all.






Bruno did what he could for the mural that first day, but he felt terribly distracted after that. Poor Dolores. That poor, poor kid. 

 

He knew it was none of his business, not really, but a part of him wanted to grab Mariano by the shoulders and ask, “Are you blind?” 

 

She was such a sweet kid…

 

Luisa came to fetch him, her hair starting to come loose from its bun. “Home time!” she said cheerfully, bouncing in place. She somehow managed to make even that look like exercise. 

 

Bruno looked around, blinking in surprise to realise the sun was setting. “Yikes,” he said. He started to clear up with Luisa quickly jumping in to help.

 

“Alano said we can just keep all this at Casita,” she said. She looked at the mural and smiled. “It looks better already. Abuela will love it.”

 

“Thanks, kid,” Bruno said. They began to walk back to Casita. “So, how was school?”

 

“Well, we were learning about Greek myths today,” Luisa said, her eyes brightening and a spring coming into her step. “It was pretty cool, actually! It was all about Hercules and Cerberus, and-”

 

“Hey! Luisa!” A middle-aged man was leaning out of his window. “I need a hand, come here!”

 

Her steps faltered. “Oh, um- I can be back in a few minutes-”

 

“I need help now,” the man said, scowling. 

 

Crash!

 

“Bruno!” Luisa dropped the rest of the paint and steadied him as he bent over double, clutching his head. “Oh, Dios, are you okay?”

 

“‘M fine,” Bruno mumbled as the cans of paint he'd been carrying rolled away from him. His breathing was shallow and his legs shook. He scrambled for the supplies he’d been carrying.

 

“It’s your head again, isn’t it?” Luisa fretted, still holding his arm. “C’mon, we’re going home!” She grabbed everything else, supporting it with one arm and pulled him along. “Mamá will make sure you’re okay, promise, we’re not far from home now.”

 

“Gracias, niña,” Bruno said. Luisa was staring grimly ahead, her determined gaze fixated on Casita.

 

“Hey! Luisa!” the man yelled.

 

“I’m sorry, but I need to help our guest first,” Luisa said firmly, picking up the pace and, for once, not looking back.

 

Smirking, head perfectly clear, Bruno glanced back at the man and (like the mature forty-something adult he was) stuck his tongue out. The man’s expression went slack with shock and, when Luisa looked back, Bruno made sure his heavy-lidded gaze was on the ground.

 

Maybe it was a bit of a mean trick, but if it meant Luisa went home and had dinner, then Bruno would consider it a victory…Even if it meant Julieta made him lie down with a cold cloth pressed to his forehead and Camilo solemnly asked if he could have Bruno’s ruanas if he died.

 

Félix slapped Camilo on the head. “Mijo!” he scolded. “Come on!”

 

“I’m not dying yet, Camilo,” Bruno said, flicking Camilo on the forehead. “And I may not be that big, but even my ruanas are too big for you, little guy.”

 

Dolores looked at him knowingly but, when Bruno caught her gaze she just smiled and pressed her finger to her lips.

Notes:

Mariano: "This is all a moo point."
Bruno: "A moo point?"
Mariano: "Yes, it's like a cow's opinion. It doesn't matter. It's moo."
Bruno: "...Have I been in Encanto too long, or did that just make sense?"
Dolores: 🥰🥰🥰

In which Bruno takes a leaf out of Julieta's book and forces people to look after themselves

Next up, Bruno finishes the mural and everyone has an opinion

Chapter 20: Growing

Summary:

Bruno finishes updating the Madrigal mural and everyone has an opinion.

Notes:

More artist!Bruno content 👏👏

Songs I listened to while writing:
The Family Madrigal, from Encanto
Caught In The Middle, by Paramore
Better Place, by Rachel Platten
Try, by P!NK
Here Comes A Thought, from Steven Universe
Maybe, by Sick Puppies

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“We swear to always help those around us, and earn the miracle that somehow found us. The town keeps growing, the world keeps turning, but work and dedication will keep the miracle burning. And each new generation must keep the miracle burning.” - The Family Madrigal, Encanto




That night, Bruno summoned all his nerve and approached Alma after dinner.

 

“Should you not be resting?” she asked when he walked into the living room.

 

“I’m fine,” Bruno said. It was true, he was. No one needed to know he’d faked that headache to make Luisa rest. “I have a question about the mural.”

 

“Ah, do you need more supplies?” Alma asked. “I confess, I don’t know much about art, but whatever you need, I’m sure we can find it.”

 

“It’s not that,” Bruno said. He couldn’t meet her eyes anymore; anxiety mounting, he looked at the ground instead, clutching his ruana’s hem. “It’s, um…Well, I was wondering- maybe I could add Félix and Agustín? T-they’re Madrigals, so…So it just s-seemed fair.” He hated stammering, he hated stuttering; he always felt like a child again when his voice wavered like this. He’d always been told off for stuttering, muttering, mumbling and stammering. 

 

Alma was quiet. Bruno braced himself for the worst.

 

Instead, she said, “That…May be a good idea,” slowly, as if the thought had never occurred to her. 

 

Bruno glanced at her, his hair falling in his eyes. “So, you’re okay with it?” he asked.

 

Alma gave a thoughtful nod, her book still open on her lap. “If you think you can manage it,” she said. “I don’t want our mural to be a mess. If it does not turn out well, I want it painted over, understood?”

 

That seemed like a fair exchange to him.

 

“I wouldn’t make a mess,” he promised.

 

“Then you may try,” Alma said in that regal way of hers, as if she was a queen giving orders and not a woman agreeing with a suggestion.

 

Still, it was all the permission Bruno needed.

 

The next day, after breakfast, he followed the Madrigal adults into town. Félix helped carry all the art supplies. Agustín found a ladder (which he was forbidden from carrying; Mariano brought it over instead) and, just like that, Bruno had everything he needed for the mural.

 

He tied his hair back, shrugged his ruana off, rolled up his sleeves and got to work. He even managed to ignore how having his sleeves up made his skin tingle, as if he had pins and needles.

 

Once again, Mariano stayed to help and chat. If the kid noticed anything, he didn’t comment. He didn’t even look at Bruno’s arms once.

 

Bruno would still like to call him an idiot for not noticing Dolores (and anyone else who didn’t like her), but he was earnest and kind. 

 

Bruno studied the empty spaces on the mural, next to Pepa and Julieta, and an empty space below Pepa as well. He could always leave that empty; (surely the baby would be added when he was born) but he had plenty of room to add Félix and Agustín.

 

Smiling to himself, he climbed the ladder and began to sketch the outlines he’d need.






If he’d just been touching up the mural, it would have taken three days tops. Since he was touching it up and adding in two more people, it took a little over a week. 

 

It was now officially Bruno’s second month in Encanto.

 

Of course, people noticed he was adding Félix and Agustín.

 

Julieta squeezed his hand and Pepa hugged him so hard she nearly knocked him over. Félix lifted him right into the air and Agustín hung around to watch, beaming the whole time. 

 

“Does Abuela Alma know you’re doing that?” Señora Pezmuerto demanded, hands on her hips.

 

“Considering I asked her permission, yes, I’m pretty sure she knows,” Bruno said as he painted Agustín’s glasses.

 

Señora Pezmuerto stormed off in a huff, muttering to herself about how the old mural was just fine, what did they need to add more for? Bruno swore he even heard her mutter something about how unfair it was to leave fish out of the mural's little blue river.

 

Mariano sighed, leaning against the (thankfully dry) wall. “Her fish died last night,” he said, giving Bruno a long-suffering look. “She’ll be like this for the next month.

 

Ah, so the fish had finally died, huh? Of all the day flashes for Bruno to get, that one had been ridiculous.

 

Some villages had crazy cat ladies. This one had a crazy fish lady. Bruno supposed every village, town and city in the world had its oddities. Just look at him: he could surely be considered one.

 

He watched her go and shrugged, firmly deciding that it was Not His Problem.






Señora Pezmuerto was not the only villager to comment on the work in progress. Señora Sofia Guzman, Mariano’s abuela, officially introduced herself and said she thought it was, “A lovely idea.”

 

Señor De la Cruz gave a disapproving hum, but he said, “Well, if Alma’s sure,” and left it at that.

 

Padré Martinez watched curiously, but didn’t comment. His toupee was utterly awful; it reminded Bruno of a dead squirrel and it was so obviously a toupee. Whoever sold it should have been ashamed of themselves, it was terrible work. The padré was surely owed his money back. Or whatever he'd traded for it. Bruno didn't dare ask.

 

Alano Cortes just gave a thumbs up and offered to get more paint if it was needed.

 

Really, Bruno couldn’t understand the fuss. Félix and Agustín were Madrigals. Why should they be left out?

 

In the end, he was happy with the result.

 

The mural’s colours had all been touched-up, as vibrant as they would have been originally. Still titled Los Madrigals, Bruno had added more flare to the candle, emphasising its shine and the butterfly design. He’d made Alma’s expression less of a scowl and more of a thoughtful frown. He’d added more weather around Pepa; not just a cloud and sun, but raindrops, rainbows and a lightning strike. He’d added the sun-pattern of her favourite dress to her painted counterpart. Félix was next to her with a bright yellow umbrella and cheery grin; Agustín was next to Julieta, waving at the viewer. He’d added a pattern of herbs to Julieta’s sleeves and made her smile bigger, more welcoming.

 

As for the kids, he’d added the colourful embroidery to Mirabel’s outfit and made Camilo look less cocky and more mischievous. Luisa still held a dumbbell above her head, but Bruno painted her smiling instead of frowning in concentration. Dolores had previously looked startled and outright nervous; Bruno had added her hair-ribbon and tried to make her look more inquisitive. As for Isabela, he added more flowers around her and added her jewellery, making her dress a slightly brighter pink (it really had faded terribly in parts).

 

Everything else had really just needed some adjusting; the flowers, birds, butterflies and little houses around the mural’s edge and the rays of light. He’d left the spot under Pepa empty, next to Camilo, for the baby to be added later.

 

“Ooh!” Mirabel came running from Julieta’s stall the second she saw him put his brush down. “It looks so good!” She was practically vibrating with excitement. “You got my embroidery!”

 

“I did,” Bruno said. Normally he’d ruffle her hair, but his hands were covered in paint.

 

“Why’s that part empty?” she asked, pointing.

 

“For the baby to be added, chiquita.”

 

On queue, Mirabel groaned; “I don’t want any more girls!”

 

Bruno remembered the green dream and barely bit back a smile. “You know what, kid? I’ll take that bet too. I think you’re right about it being a boy.”

 

Mirabel smiled, looking terribly smug, as if Bruno's agreement had somehow settled the matter.

 

One by one, the rest of the Madrigals arrived. They all looked happy, but it was Alma’s request and Bruno’s stomach tightened with nerves as he spotted her approaching.

 

She looked as imposing as always, followed by her councillors. Her face remained impassive as she studied the mural. In the gathering crowd, Señora Pezmuerto looked smug, like she expected an argument. Bruno spotted Osvaldo, who was studying the mural curiously. Next to him, Ofelia was smiling.

 

Julieta edged closer to Bruno, her arm brushing against his.

 

Finally, Alma gave a single, approving nod.

 

“Better,” she said with the ghost of a smile. “Much better.”

 

Bruno breathed out in relief and dared to smile at her. To his surprise, she returned it.






Alma couldn’t say she was exactly surprised to find Bruno in the kitchen that night. After all, she’d heard Julieta bemoaning his insomnia before and Bruno protesting that he couldn’t exactly help it.

 

No, what surprised her was that he was asleep.

 

He was sitting at the kitchen table, an empty mug before him. He’d fallen asleep with his head cradled by his arms, slumped over. His cheek was pressed against a book he’d been reading; a lamp still blazed.

 

His hands still had faint smears of paint on them. His pyjama sleeves were too long, reaching halfway down his hands, but she could still see the colours.

 

Had he fallen asleep somewhere more comfortable, Alma would have let him be. As it was, she poured herself the glass of water she’d come for and gently shook him awake.

 

“Br- niño,” she said. “Wake up.”

 

“Huh?” He raised his head an inch or two, blinking slowly, his eyes dazed. “Wha’?”

 

“Go to your bed,” Alma said. 

 

Bruno blinked at her, still looking half-asleep. He yawned and got to his feet, rubbing at his eyes.

 

“Uh, right,” he mumbled. “Buenas noches, Señora Alma.”

 

“Buenas noches, Bruno.”

 

It still hurt, but not as badly as it had before. 

 

Alma went back to her room and she could feel a soft happiness radiating from Casita’s very walls.

Notes:

✨Growth✨

Next up, more Mirabel and Bruno content. Bruno has a rough few days, so Julieta and Félix hatch a plan

Chapter 21: Dos Ratas

Summary:

Bruno's having a rough few days. Mirabel tries to distract him, while Julieta and Félix hatch an idea to help.

Notes:

🎵7 FOOT FRAME, RATS ALONG HIS BACK🎵

We've got some sad!Bruno content, with some fluff. It's time to project onto the rat man (again)

Songs I listened to while writing:
Scars To Your Beautiful, by Alessia Cara
Inkpot Gods, by The Amazing Devil
Before The Line, by Dodie
I'll Be Good, by Jaymes Young
The End, by My Chemical Romance
Famous Last Words, by My Chemical Romance
Disappear, from Dear Evan Hansen

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Oh, what these, these aren’t tears. It’s just the rain that wasn’t brave enough to fall. And what they hear isn’t laughter after all; it’s just your voice learning for once to stand up tall. And when the rain came down, I made a vow out to the gods, “Please let her live just one more day.” ‘Cause she is so much more than all her scars.” - Inkpot Gods, The Amazing Devil




It was one of those days.

 

Bruno awoke feeling dazed, unable to properly focus. When Casita clattered worriedly, Bruno only managed a hum in response.

 

It wasn’t just that he felt sad. He felt like he was being physically weighed down, like his limbs weighed a ton. Even lifting his head took an effort. 

 

He’d been in Encanto for two months now and that realisation kept nagging at him in the back of his mind. He’d escaped a massacre and ended up taken in by a magical family.

 

How was that fair? Why him? What did he do to deserve it? Why not any of his neighbours? 

 

Bruno blinked listlessly at his wardrobe, trying to remember when he’d even stood up. His throat was dry; he felt like he’d swallowed sand. Had he been dreaming of sand? He couldn’t remember.

 

He sat back down on the bed, staring at the floor. Getting up suddenly seemed like a pointless thing to do. 

 

A part of him said, Get up, go sit with Julieta, tell her you’re not feeling well.

 

That part was drowned out by the buzzing in his mind, slowly drowning out all other thoughts besides, There’s no point anyway.

 

Just one of those days…

 

Bruno lay back down, pulling the covers up over his head and closing his eyes.






“Bruno?” Julieta called, softly knocking on the door. “Are you up? It’s nearly time for breakfast.” Was it another migraine? Casita hadn’t nearly flung her across the courtyard this time, but the floor had shuddered with worry.

 

Julieta opened the door and peered inside. Bruno was just a little lump under the covers; they were over his head.

 

“Bruno?”

 

“Hm?”

 

Okay, he was awake.

 

She crept closer, closing the door behind her. “Are you okay?” she asked, standing over him.

 

He was quiet, very quiet. For a moment, she wondered if he’d fallen back asleep. Maybe she should just leave him be.

 

But then he mumbled, “I don’t know,” his voice breaking.

 

“Oh, mi amigo,” she murmured, pulling the stool next to bed and sitting down. Bruno pulled the covers off his head and something about his whole expression was off. His eyes seemed darker; they were missing the spark Julieta had seen growing over the last few weeks. He looked utterly exhausted; his eyes were dry, but he looked like he was about to start crying.

 

“Is it a migraine?” Julieta asked, careful to stay quiet. 

 

“No, I just- I don’t know,” Bruno said, looking away from her. He sounded so tired, so small. “This just happens sometimes, everything’s…Everything’s wrong.

 

“Okay,” Julieta said. She smoothed her skirt, concern growing in her with every passing second. “Why don’t you tell me what you’re feeling?”






According to Bruno, he sometimes "just got like this.” He said his mind felt clouded; that he switched between feeling numb and feeling terribly sad, like nothing could ever be right again. He said it felt like there were weights holding him down, that even sitting up took a monumental effort, because everything suddenly seemed pointless.

 

Sometimes it just happened. It came and went. He’d felt like this when he first escaped the massacre, fleeing through the jungle.

 

He’d felt like this many times throughout his life.

 

Julieta already knew he was anxious; that had been plain to see. But this was new.

 

She would have just chalked it up to trauma, had it not been for Bruno’s explanations.

 

Depression? Surely it is, she thought. That’s what it sounds like anyway. Another thing she couldn’t cure and, admittedly, something she wasn’t very familiar with. She knew there wasn’t exactly a cure for it, but there were ways to help.

 

It looked like she needed to break out her medical texts again.






Mamá said to let Bruno rest, but he’d been doing nothing but resting. Even Abuela seemed worried, and Mirabel could have sworn that Abuela didn’t like Bruno until he did the mural. She’d been nicer then.

 

So Mirabel had let her mamá handle…Whatever was going on. She said Bruno wasn’t well. Tia Pepa, who needed to rest more than ever, sometimes sat with him or dragged him out into the garden. Papá wouldn’t let her go join them though.

 

“It’s grown-up stuff, Miraboo,” he said.

 

“I’m ten!” Mirabel protested. “That’s grown-up!” But he just smiled like she’d said something funny and tried to distract her, usually taking her to get ice-cream or to see the new houses, or visit Mamá’s stall.

 

It didn’t distract her for long.

 

It had been three days since Bruno got sick and the longer it went on, the more worried Mirabel felt.

 

“Tia Julieta will make it better,” Camilo said confidently, but it didn’t make Mirabel feel confident.

 

So today, when Papá and Tio Félix were cleaning, she took her sewing and ran to Bruno’s room.

 

He was sitting on his bed and he had his sketchbook open on his lap; he was tapping his pencil against the page, but he hadn’t drawn anything.

 

He looked surprised to see her. His hair looked limper somehow; the shadows under his eyes were darker, like he hadn’t slept much. 

 

Mirabel held out her sewing shyly, smiling hopefully. 

 

“Wanna practice?” she asked.

 

Bruno looked sad. Even when he smiled at her, he looked sad. Mirabel wondered how sick he was.

 

“Sure, kid,” he said quietly. He didn’t sound quite right either, but Mirabel jumped onto the bed and began to show him a row of small, neat stitches. She was going to turn it into a candle pattern.

 

Bruno watched. He still looked really tired and he didn’t say much at all, but he was paying attention.

 

When Tio Félix poked his head around the door, Mirabel expected to be in trouble for disturbing Bruno. Instead, her Tio smiled.

 

“Alright, Bruno?” he asked.

 

Bruno shrugged. He still had his sketchbook open on his lap; while Mirabel had been sewing, he’d started to draw a river. 

 

“Think you can handle some lunch?”

 

Bruno nodded, so Tio Félix gave a thumbs up. “Mirabel, can you gimme a hand?” he asked.

 

Reluctantly, Mirabel set her sewing aside and went to help Tio Félix. When they were in the kitchen, he turned to her and asked; “So, Mira, do you know what animals Bruno likes?”

 

“Huh?” Mirabel tilted her head to the side and adjusted her glasses. “Oh, he likes rats best.”

 

“Yeah?”

 

“Yup. He says they’re really clever.”

 

Tio Félix’s smile widened. “Rats,” he repeated and gave a chuckle. “Well, alright then.”

 

Adults, Mirabel firmly decided, were weird.






When Bruno emerged for lunch, Félix jumped into action.

 

“So, Bruno-” Félix flung an arm around his shoulders, ignoring Bruno’s squeak. This was for a good cause; Bruno would thank him later. “Mira mentioned your favourite animals are rats?”

 

“Huh?” Bruno tugged on his hair. “Sí...” His eyes narrowed. “Why?”

 

Félix grinned. “Just curious. Not many people would pick them.”

 

Bruno shrugged, not quite meeting his gaze. He was gripping his arm tightly and Félix’s eyes flickered down, trying to make sure his nails weren’t digging into his scars, which Julieta had warned him to watch out for. They weren’t, so he let it be.

 

“They’re sweet,” Bruno continued. “And really intelligent.”

 

“That so?” Félix’s smile widened. “Tell me more?”




Later, Julieta would roll her eyes as she finished drying the dishes.

 

“Subtle, Félix,” she’d sigh, putting the last plate away. “Very subtle.”

 

And Félix would grin, unrepentant. “Well it worked, didn’t it? Now we know for sure and we can put the plan into action.”




The very next day, Félix left Casita bright and early, saying something about an errand. Pepa had once more dragged Bruno into the garden and Mirabel and Camilo were kicking a football back and forth.

 

Bruno still felt like he was in a fog, it was hard to concentrate most of the time. It wasn’t quite as bad as it had been only yesterday, but it was far from good.

 

He wished it would just go away.

 

He was so lost in thought that he didn’t hear Félix’s cheerful greeting; he only noticed that Félix had come back when Camilo ran to him.

 

Félix was holding…something. It was covered by a cloth. A box maybe?

 

Although Bruno could have sworn he heard something squeak.

 

“I’ve got a surprise for you, Bruno!” Félix called happily. He marched over, Camilo dogging at his heels. 

 

“A what?” Bruno scooted forward on his seat, utterly baffled. Pepa was smirking, sunshine around her head. A rainbow appeared in the sky. Mirabel and Camilo looked as lost as Bruno felt.

 

“Ta-da!” Félix whipped the cloth away to reveal he was carrying a cage. 

 

Inside the cage, grooming itself, was a little grey rat. It was utterly adorable; small, chubby, with big black eyes and a splotch of black fur on one ear that almost resembled a heart. And, hiding behind it, so quiet and small that Bruno nearly missed it, was another rat; a little white and pale-grey one.

 

“Oh,” Bruno whispered. All of a sudden, he felt very close to crying.

 

“They’re both girls,” Félix explained. “They’re only a few months old. It was all Julieta’s idea really; she read that pets can be a big help with…Well, with everything.” He glanced at the kids and gave Bruno that beaming grin. “Juli got a book on how to care for them and I got some food when I went to collect them, so no worries on that front! The store-owner said they’re really social, so to get a pair at least; hope that’s okay, bro.”

 

“They’re so cute!” Mirabel gasped, stars in her eyes.

 

“Ooh,” Camilo cooed, leaning in to get a proper look.

 

Carefully, Félix handed the cage to Bruno. The little rats squeaked and looked at him. The bigger one, the grey one, began to climb the bars of her cage, her little pink nose poking between the gaps. The little white and grey one crept forward cautiously, squeaking.

 

They were utterly perfect.

 

“You didn’t have to,” he said and his voice shook. The tears escaped before he could stop them and Pepa squeezed his shoulder with a sympathetic smile.

 

“Well, I wanted to,” Félix said with an easy-going shrug. “We’re friends.”

 

“Don’t you like them?” Mirabel asked worriedly.

 

“I love them,” Bruno said, wiping his eyes. He did, he already did. The grey rat climbed back down and she kept staring at him, her nose twitching. The smaller one stopped squeaking and stared as well.

 

“What’cha gonna name them?” Camilo asked.

 

“I have no idea,” Bruno said with a shaky laugh. “Maybe you two can help me think of something?”

Notes:

I promised rats and I (eventually) delivered

If anyone wants to yell about Bruno with me, I'm on tumblr! @sokkas-first-fangirl

Next up, a bit of an interlude chapter before we move onto The Big Stuff 👀👀

Chapter 22: The Sun Is Rising

Summary:

In which Bruno's rats are officially named and Bruno has some quiet, important realisations about his life.

Notes:

Rat Dad has his fur babies. Nature is healing 🐀

Just a short, peaceful interlude with rat and family content before we move onto The Big Stuff

Songs I listened to while writing:
The Sun Is Rising, by Britt Nicole
Alive, by Sia
On My Own, by Ashes Remain
Rise Up, by Imagine Dragons
Keep Holding on, by Avril Lavigne
Breakaway, by Kelly Clarkson

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“You're gonna make it. You're gonna make it. The night can only last for so long. Whatever you're facing, if your heart is breaking, there's a promise for the ones who just hold on. Lift up your eyes and see, the sun is rising.” - The Sun Is Rising, Britt Nicole




The bigger rat was officially christened Esma and the smaller one was Luz, by the time everyone else returned to home. Other names suggested by Camilo were: Biter 1 and Biter 2, Bruna and Brunita, Climber and Sleepy, and Greedy and Tiny.

 

Félix and Pepa looked like they were barely biting back giggles. Mirabel gave Camilo a long-suffering look and merely said, "No."

 

Bruno was admittedly tempted by Greedy and Tiny, but they were such cute little ladies that they deserved cute names to match. Luz was suggested by Félix and Esma was the name of one of the characters in the book Agustín had given him to read, which Mirabel declared was, "Super pretty."

 

Camilo said, "Okay, I guess," and that was that.

 

“Do you like them?” Julieta asked hopefully.

 

“They’re perfect,” Bruno said, smiling from ear to ear. Luz was sitting on his hand, flattening herself into a pancake. Esma was on Camilo’s shoulder, sniffing him. Camilo seemed happy with the attention Esma was bestowing on him, smiling from ear to ear and giving her a little piece of cheese.

 

“Aww!” Luisa cried, hurrying over. “No one said you were getting pets!”

 

“No one told me either,” Bruno said, laughing for the first time in days.

 

“They’re cute,” Isabela said, looking surprised at her own approval. 

 

“Everyone always thinks rats are gross,” Bruno said, stroking Luz. “But if you give them a chance, they’ll show just how clever they are.”

 

“No rats in the kitchen,” Alma said firmly. “Or at the table.”

 

Well, that was fair enough.






To Bruno’s surprise, Agustín was nearly as enthusiastic about the rats as he was.

 

“I really wanted one when I was a child,” he explained. “But my mamá was allergic- we found that one out the hard way. I had to return the poor little guy.”

 

“You can be their babysitter then,” Bruno said, watching Esma and Luz run around in their cage. 

 

“They can’t be any worse than the kids,” Agustín said with a wry smirk. Félix burst out laughing and Bruno ducked his head, trying to hide his grin.

 

“They’re not that bad,” Bruno said.

 

“You say that because they behave for you,” Félix said, poking his arm. “They think you’re cool. We’re just their boring old fathers, they’ll never listen to us again.”

 

As if to prove Félix’s point, Camilo came running and flung himself at Bruno, jumping onto his back and nearly knocking him over.

 

“Can I help train the rats?” he asked eagerly. “We could teach them to play games!”

 

Félix smirked as if to say What did I tell you?

 

Agustín was feeding Esma and Luz little bits of fruit. Bruno, wheezing from Camilo tackling him, managed a smile.

 

“Sure, kid,” he said. “Sounds fun.”






Bruno’s “low mood” as he phrased it, didn’t magically go away. But Esma and Luz made it easier. When he didn’t want to get out of bed he thought, You need to feed them, and getting up felt easier then.

 

He’d only had them for a few weeks, but they looked at him like he was their whole world.

 

It was startling to realise that he was.

 

He fed them, he cleaned their cage, he was training them; he let them run all over his room and pet them whenever they pleased. These two fuzzy little creatures needed him.

 

It left him feeling dazed, but not in a bad way.

 

As per usual, Julieta came and joined him on the back steps in the early morning. This time she’d made them coffee. Esma and Luz were sleeping in his pockets. Julieta saw Esma’s tail poking out of his pocket and grinned in amusement.

 

“They were a good idea,” Bruno told her. “Gracias.”

 

“I’m glad they’re helping,” Julieta said with a smile. “Just keep them out of my pantry.”

 

“No promises,” Bruno said with a smirk.

 

Julieta shoved him and Bruno shoved her back. Luz woke with a squeak of protest, but it only made Julieta and Bruno laugh.

 

“Hey, Julieta?”

 

“Sí, Bruno?”

 

He stroked Luz’s head and looked out at the village, at the sun rising over the mountains.

 

“I’m glad I’m here,” Bruno said and he doubted he was imagining the relief in Julieta’s eyes.

 

“I’m glad you’re here too,” she said and they watched the sun rise.

Notes:

Look at Bruno go 💕

Next up, final arc begins! Bruno and Mirabel have an some important conversations

Chapter 23: Wanting For More

Summary:

Bruno and Mirabel have a heart to heart. As the month wears on, Julieta worries about what will happen when Bruno lives alone.
Secretly, mother and daughter are in agreement: neither of them want Bruno to go.

Notes:

It begins 👀👀

Mirabel playlist! https://open.spotify.com/playlist/3ikUXwWS8O4bt3Zo8ZHJDT

Songs I listened to while writing:
Waiting On A Miracle, from Encanto
She Used To Be Mine, from Waitress
Waving Through A Window, from Dear Evan Hansen
I'll Try, from Peter Pan 2
Waiting In The Wings, from Tangled: The Series
Love Like You, from Steven Universe
Secret For The Mad, by Dodie

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And then she'll get stuck and be scared of the life that's inside her, growing stronger each day ‘til it finally reminds her to fight just a little. To bring back the fire in her eyes that's been gone, but it used to be mine. Used to be mine…She is messy but she's kind. She is lonely most of the time. She is all of this mixed up and baked in a beautiful pie…She is gone but she used to be mine…” - She Used To Be Mine, Waitress




The new houses would be finished by the end of the month and Mirabel wanted to cry. 

 

She did not, she absolutely did not want Bruno to leave.

 

Maybe it was selfish of her, but she loved being someone’s favourite. She loved Bruno. He was like another Tio; funny like Tio Félix, warm and sweet like Papí. He listened to Mirabel, he took her seriously. He actually liked spending time with her! Even when she probably should be leaving him alone (like when he was upset), he never told her off, or told her to go away. He’d always sit with her; he’d watch her sew and tell stories, or draw with her. Yesterday, he’d drawn a beautiful butterfly that they’d seen in the garden. He’d given the drawing to Mirabel.

 

He looked at Mirabel like she was special.

 

Bruno got her. He was the odd one out too.

 

He liked Camilo a lot and Dolores, and he liked Luisa; he even seemed to like Isa (ugh), but Mirabel was his favourite. He didn’t seem bored with her, he didn’t nag. He gave her the cherry off his slice of cake at dessert after Camilo stole hers. 

 

More than anything, Mirabel wanted him to stay. To stay in Casita, to stay with them all. To stay with her.

 

Bruno didn’t glare and snap like Isabela. He didn’t frown like Abuela. He didn’t need to do chores all day like Luisa, Camilo, Dolores and Tia Pepa. He didn’t tell her that she Had Nothing To Prove like Mamí and Papí, or dodge talks about magic like Tio Félix. He liked Mirabel the way she was.

 

Was it really so wrong of her to want to keep that?

 

She wanted him to stay. She hoped he wanted to stay too. If he did, maybe she could convince Julieta to talk to Abuela. Everyone else liked Bruno; even Abuela liked him now! Wouldn’t they want him to stay too?

 

Mirabel felt like she was going around in circles. She felt like, if she tried to voice all her feelings, she’d open her mouth and nothing would come out. She wasn’t sure how to explain everything she was feeling and what she wanted. Mostly, she just knew she was sad.

 

So Mirabel did what she always did when she was sad: she hid.

 

She went to one of her favourite spots, up on Casita’s roof (with a little help from Casita) and she sat and watched the fluffy white clouds.

 

Mirabel wasn’t up there for long when she heard the bricks shift to form a makeshift staircase and Bruno’s confused stammering.

 

“Uh, Casita, I’m not sure I’m supposed to come up h- oh! Hola, Mira.” Bruno looked utterly baffled. He was wearing the ruana Mirabel embroidered and, despite everything, it made her smile.

 

“Hola,” she said. She couldn’t seem to inject any enthusiasm into her voice.

 

Bruno noticed. Of course he noticed. That was why Mirabel liked him so much.

 

He carefully made his way to her, sometimes glancing over the edge with a nervous gulp. Esma poked her nose out of his pocket and Luz was squeaking in his hood. Bruno sat next to Mirabel, cross-legged.

 

“You okay, kid?” he asked.

 

So many answers were on the tip of her tongue: I’m fine, never better, I’m okay, I’m just a little tired, I needed a break, I’m good, I’m great, how are you?

 

What she said was: “I don’t want you to leave.” Her voice broke, her eyes watered and she had to take a deep shaking breath, trying to stop herself from crying for real.

 

“Aw, chiquita,” Bruno sighed, pulling her into a hug. That was another thing: she liked being called chiquita. She liked being the only Madrigal kid with her own personal Bruno nickname. Everyone got called kid or kiddo, even Mirabel, but only she was chiquita. 

 

And just like that, Mirabel was sobbing against Bruno’s shoulder like some stupid baby, clinging to him, trying to keep him there. He held her close and rubbed her back in circles; he’d gotten a lot better at hugs over the last few weeks. He didn’t flinch so much anymore.

 

“You like me,” Mirabel sobbed. “You like my embroidery, you don’t i-i-ignore me, you d-don’t tell me to be more like Isabela; y-you didn’t even care t-t-that I don’t- I don’t have a Gift. I h-hate those new houses, I hope they all fall down, I want you to stay here!

 

I like you best, you like me best, you’re my friend, I want you to stay, I never ever want you to go. We’re the odd ones out together, you and me. 

 

“Oh, chiquita,” Bruno repeated and he sounded so sad. His chin rested on her head and he sighed. “Of course I like you, you’re brilliant, Mira. Absolutely brilliant. Anyone who says otherwise is un idiota.”

 

She always felt like she was fighting for attention in her big, special, chaotic family, her oh-so-important family. There were so many standards to meet and she always seemed to be doing something wrong; she was in the way, falling short by miles. She just wanted them to be proud of her, just once. 

 

She didn’t need to fight for Bruno to be proud of her. He just was. 

 

Her parents always said they were, but…But next to Luisa and Isabela…The beauty and the brawn, as the villagers called them. The ones who never did anything wrong. Señorita Perfecta and strong, reliable Luisa. How could Mirabel ever measure up? 

 

Besides, Julieta was always so busy and Agustín had his own chores, or he helped Julieta (or needed her help). A lot of the time, Mirabel felt like she was by herself. It was Mirabel and Casita.

 

Only now it was Mirabel, Casita and Bruno. Mirabel preferred it that way. 

 

She kept crying and he didn’t call her a baby. He just hugged her and hummed, and stayed with her until she calmed down.

 

“I wish you were my tio,” Mirabel mumbled against his shoulder and he went stiff. Then he sighed again, heavy and deep, and ruffled her hair.

 

“I don’t want you to go,” Mirabel repeated.

 

Bruno pulled back slightly. His smile was sad.

 

“Can I tell you a secret, chiquita?” he asked. Mirabel nodded, pulling her glasses off to wipe at her eyes and nose.

 

“I don’t want to go either,” Bruno said quietly.

 

Mirabel flung herself at him again, nearly knocking him flat. Bruno’s laugh was quiet, a little startled, more of an “Oof!” than anything. 

 

But he hugged her. 

 

He still hugged her.

 

Mirabel loved him for it.






As the days passed, Casita’s mood took a turn. Whenever Bruno so much as ventured to the garden, Casita tried to pull him back in. It was like poor Casita thought he’d get hurt if he so much took a step outside.

 

Julieta watched and gave a small smile, feeling a strange mix of sadness and fondness in her chest. Casita had taken to Bruno right away, trying everything to help him adjust and keep him safe and healthy.

 

Healthy…Safe and…And healthy…

 

Oh Dios, Julieta thought, eyes widening as she gripped the counter. The migraines! How in God’s name could she forget about the migraines? He’d been bedridden for two days and, by Bruno’s own admission, he’d had worse. He’d been in a depressive fog for weeks as well, only recently back to his usual self.

 

Was that what Casita was so worried about? Bruno living alone and falling ill again?

 

Now that the thought was in her mind, Julieta was worried too.

 

He’d lived alone before, she knew that. He’d told her so. Sometimes he’d had roommates, sometimes he didn’t. He’d lived alone for fifteen years in his village. He knew how to survive.

 

But life wasn’t just about surviving.

 

Julieta would never forgive herself if something happened and she wasn’t there.

 

She remembered everyone she couldn’t save and Julieta refused to add Bruno to that list. He was her friend, he was Pepa’s friend; Félix and Agustín liked him, they wanted to spend more time with him. Her little Mirabel positively worshipped him; Camilo loved him and so did Dolores. Luisa and Isabela liked him. Her mamá had been impressed by the mural, slowly warming up to him. Casita loved him too, that much was plain. Right that very second, Julieta had the feeling that Casita was keeping a protective watch as Bruno counted Luisa’s push-ups with her.

 

It had been Julieta’s suggestion to take him in. 

 

Julieta knew Bruno could handle himself. He was a survivor. He didn’t need her to baby him or fret about him, he wasn’t a child…

 

But he did need someone to protect him.

 

Julieta had stepped up and insisted on taking him in three months ago. She was prepared to step up for him again.

 

Now that the idea was there, she was afraid of what would happen if she left him alone again. What if his migraines got worse? What if he blacked out and hit his head? What if his depression grew worse and he…

 

He was her friend.

 

Julieta untied her apron and went in search of Alma. Through the open windows, she heard Bruno cheer; “One hundred! Luisa, that’s awesome!”

 

Luisa replied, “Oh, it’s nothing.”

 

“Kid, I can’t even do one.

 

She smiled fondly and told herself to calm down. Even if Alma didn’t agree to the suggestion brewing in her mind, Julieta would always be in his corner. 

 

“Mamá?” Julieta called, knocking on Alma’s door. “Can we talk, por favor?”

Notes:

I would die for Mirabel and that's that

Next up, the Madrigal adults have their own important conversation...And Bruno has a green dream 😉

Chapter 24: Find A Way

Summary:

The adults discuss Bruno's upcoming departure from Casita. Julieta worries, Alma reflects and Bruno's green dreams return.

Notes:

I was gonna post this tomorrow, but your girl has ✨no self control✨

Songs I listened to while writing:
Quartet At The Ballet, from Anastasia: Broadway
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
River Lullaby, from Prince of Egypt
So Big/So Small, from Dear Evan Hansen
Deep In The Meadow, from The Hunger Games
Safe And Sound, by Taylor Swift
Red Ribbon, by Madilyn Bailey

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Someone holds her safe and warm, someone rescues her from the storm. Simple things but one thing’s clear: it's fate that brought us here. Painted wings (home, love, simple things), silver snow (family, simple things), whirling like a ballet.” - Quartet At The Ballet, Anastasia: Broadway




The Madrigal adults all gathered in Alma’s room. To Julieta’s mild surprise, she saw Dolores go to her room when she realised the adults were gathering; she knew all too well that her niece usually listened to the Adults Only meetings, often reporting back to Isabela and Luisa.

 

“So what’s this about?” Pepa asked, one hand on her stomach. She yawned and shifted in her seat. Alma shot her a quick, concerned glance. She was due towards the end of the month.

 

“Bruno,” Julieta said. “I’m worried about him.”

 

“But he’s doing better, isn’t he?” Agustín asked, immediately looking worried, leaning forward in his seat. “Did he say something? Is he alright?”

 

“He’s fine,” Julieta said. At least, she was pretty sure he was. “It’s just…The idea of him being alone again…I don’t like it. He’s been here for three months and he’s been such a help, he-” He fit right in, the kids adore him, he’s kind, helpful and funny. “He’s tried to help right from the start, looking after the kids and doing the mural. And the kids love him!”

 

“Julieta,” Alma sighed.

 

“Hear me out, Mamá,” Julieta pleaded. “Please. I know how far he made it on his own, I know he can handle himself, even after everything- that’s what you’re going to say, sí?”

 

Slowly, Alma nodded, looking faintly surprised. Julieta knew her mother well; she could surely guess at every argument Alma would make and try to get her own view in before Alma could put her foot down.

 

She had to try.

 

“If something happened to him I could never forgive myself,” Julieta said, looking her mother in the eye. “I know you struggled with him, but you see how kind he is, don’t you? Even Casita’s been protective lately.”

 

“That’s true,” Pepa said thoughtfully, tugging on her braid. “He went outside to chase those rats of his and Casita nearly threw all three of them back inside.”

 

“Casita doesn’t want him to leave either,” Julieta said quickly, picking up steam. “He’s my friend, I know I can’t baby him, but I want him to be safe. I want him to be happy. And it…It feels like…” Her hand rested on her heart as she struggled to find the right words. “Bruno- it’s like he belongs here.”

 

“The mountains let him in for a reason,” Félix added, unusually quiet. Julieta nodded, smiling gratefully.

 

Alma looked thoughtful then, turning to the candle. It shone bright and steady as always, illuminating them.

 

“What if he gets another migraine attack and ends up hurt? What if he spirals when he’s left alone?” Julieta asked. 

 

“We wouldn’t let that happen, amor,” Agustín said gently.

 

“But it could. We can’t make him take a roommate, especially someone he doesn’t know; but he knows us. He told me he’s glad he’s here.” The memory still made her feel lighter; it still made her smile despite the current conversation. “Do you have any idea what a big step that was? I think…I think he genuinely trusts us.” The idea that she’d actually earned his trust, despite all he’d been through, was humbling, and Julieta could admit that it made her proud too.

 

“I don’t know, mija,” Alma said, her hands on her laps. “He can’t stay forever; he would only be ten minutes down the road. He has his own life to live.”

 

With us! Julieta wanted to scream. He can live with us!

 

Instead she took a deep breath and forced herself to speak calmly: “Maybe not forever. But surely a little longer? Until we can be sure he’ll be okay? We should ask him, I think he’d be happy to stay a while longer. There’s no harm in it, Mamá, it’s not like we have no space for him!”

 

“I’m with Juli,” Pepa said, both hands on her stomach now. Julieta wondered if the baby was kicking, or if the conversation just had Pepa feeling protective. “Bruno’s our friend. He’s one of us now, right? We help people and that includes him. I want him to stay.”

 

“We’ve come this far,” Félix said firmly, arms crossed. “Bruno’s come far. Seems a shame to cut our time together short, no?”

 

“Mirabel worships him,” Agustín said with a fond smile. “So does Cami. Luisa’s been raving about those little rats and Dolores still has those coins he gave her. You know, I saw Isabela feeding the rats yesterday? She couldn’t stop giggling. He’s a good influence.”

 

The floor shook as Casita agreed; the shutters swayed and every drawer in the room opened and shut. 

 

“Casita agrees,” Julieta said, staring her mother down. “I know you’re worried, Mamá. I know it still hurts. But you worry too, don’t you?”

 

Alma was still as a statue, her face carefully blank. Julieta wondered if anyone else saw the concern hidden in her eyes. Surely Pepa did at least? Alma knew how to keep a stiff upper lip, but Julieta knew her mother’s tells, every micro-expression, every twitch. 

 

Julieta knew her mother.

 

So she had a sneaking suspicion she knew what lay at the heart of Alma’s hesitance.

 

“We’re not replacing our Bruno,” Julieta said softly. She stood and went to Alma, leaning down to take her hands. Alma flinched; it was small, so small that anyone else would have missed it. Just like that, Julieta knew she was right. “It’s just a name, Mamí. But he’s a good person and you know what he’s been through. We’ve helped. At the end of the day, we’ve helped. We’ve done our duty as you always tell us. So let’s continue to do that. We can still help him and he can still help us. We can keep each other safe.”

 

“You know, I rained on him yesterday and he only laughed,” Pepa said, smiling. “He just…He didn’t care. He laughed it off and told me to let it out.”

 

“Smart man,” Félix said in approval. “I knew I liked him for a reason.” Pepa snorted and the sun shone more brightly outside.

 

“He’s so good with the kids,” Agustín added. “Right from the start, he’s been good with them.”

 

“He has a good heart,” Julieta said, looking Alma in the eye. “Isn’t that what matters most? The mountains let in those that need protection; those who can better our community. Bruno needs our protection and he has made an impact. A good one.”

 

She hadn’t seen Mirabel smile so much in a long time.

 

“I know you care about him too,” Julieta said, gripping Alma’s hands tighter.

 

Alma sighed so heavily that her whole body shuddered with it. She pressed her lips together in a thin line, bowing her head.

 

“Sí,” she said hoarsely. “I know he has a good heart.” She cleared her throat and continued, more like her usual self; “He is…Kind. Gentle. I know he is, mija.”

 

“We can’t force him, you’re right about that,” Julieta said. “But what’s the harm in asking?”

 

Alma was quiet, staring at their joined hands. In that moment, she looked every one of her years, and so very tired. And guilty. 

 

“Mamí,” Pepa said gently. Her smile wavered and she reached out to put her hand on Alma’s shoulder. “It’s just a name. At the end of the day, it’s only a name.”

 

“We’re not turning our backs on our Bruno,” Julieta said. “But…But he’s ours too now. And we can help him.”

 

Alma took a deep breath. She pulled away and stood, walking to the candle, keeping her back to them.

 

“I need to think about it,” she said.

 

Julieta knew a dismissal when she heard one.

 

She was the last to leave.

 

“Please, Mamá,” she said, standing in the doorway and staring at her mother’s back. “We swore to always help those around us, remember? I will help my friend, one way or another.”

 

“Ay, Juli,” Alma sighed. She shook her head and gave a sad chuckle. “You always had a big heart too.”






Alma had a lot to think about, but all she could think was, Bruno, Bruno, Bruno.

 

Her Brunito, her baby; her youngest. He’d been so terribly still and quiet at birth. He’d stopped breathing and Alma had prayed as she never had before, terrified of losing him when she only just got him.

 

Then he’d cried and she’d fallen back against the pillows, sobbing in relief.

 

“If he lasts the night, he should be fine,” the midwife said, but she looked doubtful. Alma had wanted the earth to open up and swallow her. Surely she wasn’t being told that her baby would die?

 

Had she done something wrong? Had she done something to hurt her babies?

 

Pedro, holding Bruno against his chest, gave the woman a stern look.

 

“He will,” Pedro said firmly. There was fire in his gaze. “Mi bébé is a fighter.”

 

Pedro stayed up with him all night. Julieta and Pepa were in their cribs next to the bed, where Alma could reach out for them, but Pedro held Bruno all night. If their son stopped breathing again, Alma didn’t know. Pedro never told her.

 

Here’s what she knew instead: she knew she woke with the dawn to find Pedro sitting awkwardly on the windowsill, gently singing the lullaby he’d written for their triplets. Bruno was still in his arms and this time their son was wriggling, weakly waving his tiny fists, staring up at his papá and cooing softly, looking at Pedro with such wonder, an expression mirrored by Pedro: open fragile wonder, infinite love and relief. The sun bathed them both in gold and Alma had started to cry.

 

Pedro handed Bruno to her. Julieta and Pepa woke up and Pedro gathered their daughters, gently placing them in Alma’s arms.

 

“Three little caterpillars,” Pedro said proudly. “And one stubborn little boy.”

 

Alma gripped her locket and stared out at the mountains. They’d let this Bruno in, granting him safety; the safety he so sorely needed. He’d fled his home in the dead of night, narrowly escaping death, saved by a brave man. 

 

Alma knew the feeling all too well. She wouldn’t wish it on her worst enemy.

 

Her Brunito’s door still glowed steadily, but unformed: no carving. Somewhere out there, her boy was safe and happy. She had to believe it. He had a family; he’d been taken in and adopted by a kind couple. Maybe he even had children of his own. He had friends, a job he enjoyed. He was happy. He had to be.

 

Would she ever know? Alma couldn’t go find him and ask. She couldn’t help him. 

 

She hadn’t saved him all those years ago. Pedro had. He’d been bent over Bruno, shielding him as the machete came down; he’d looked at Alma as the blow struck.

 

For five years, Alma thought they were both dead, until the triplets’ fifth birthday; until that third door appeared with a B engraved on the doorknob. A glowing door that no one else could open. Alma had tried and the door hadn’t budged.

 

Pedro had saved their boy after all. 

 

Alma could not save him, if he even needed saving.

 

But…But there was someone she could save. If he’d like her to.

 

Alma suspected that this Bruno, their guest (their friend) would be amenable to the idea of staying longer.

 

“We’re not replacing our Bruno.”

 

Logically, Alma knew that. If her son could see her now, surely he’d urge her to help. All the same, emotions did not run on logic. A part of her felt like she was failing her Brunito all over again, like she was somehow giving up on him.

 

But this wasn’t just about her, was it?

 

He has such a shy smile, she thought, which was perhaps a little absurd of her. What did his smile have to do with anything, really? But the thought was there and it wouldn’t leave.

 

Bruno Expósito was a good man; a troubled man, shy and quiet, clever and creative. He had a big heart.

 

And Alma…Well. She was fond of him.

 

Everyone else wanted him to stay.

 

Next to her, her chest of drawers rattled and shook.

 

“You care about him, don’t you, Casita?” she asked quietly. The drawers rattled again, harder now. She had the nearly overwhelming sense of, Protect, love, happiness.

 

Despite it all, Alma managed a small smirk.

 

“You will not allow him to leave, will you?”

 

A harder shake and now the wardrobe shook too. 

 

“I see,” Alma said, turning to the candle. 

 

Alma Madrigal, leader of the Encanto. Alma Madrigal, a grieving widow. Alma Madrigal, a mother and grandmother. 

 

Alma, who could never truly stand to turn away when someone needed a helping hand.

 

Keep the miracle burning. Honour Pedro’s sacrifice. Earn the magic. Keep your home and family safe.

 

But it wasn’t just that, not truly. No, Alma cared about Bruno for his own sake, as himself.

 

Julieta had painted a frightening image. Alma did not want that boy to have any more scars.

 

Not if she could help it.

 

Alma held her shawl tighter around herself and went in search of her daughters and sons-in-law.

 

They had an offer to give.






Bruno hadn’t meant to nap, honestly. He’d been reading on his bed when his eyes began to droop and he thought, I’ll just rest them for a minute. He hadn’t slept well the night before.

 

He was asleep in minutes.

 

His dreams were green.




There was a massive party in Casita, so big that not all the guests could fit inside. Bruno could see many more in the garden, milling about on the grass. It looked like the entire village was there. Fireworks went off and Mirabel was holding his hand, beaming up at him.




The little boy he’d seen before, the unborn baby, rode a jaguar through the streets, laughing.




Mariano stopped dead in the street and threw his head back, declaring, “I love you, corazón!” He was given odd looks and he shooed away the onlookers. “Excuse me,” he said sternly. “This is a private conversation.”




There was a blank, glowing golden door getting closer and closer. A hand reached out for it.




Pepa, heavily pregnant Pepa was in the fields, wearing her favourite sun-patterned dress. She turned to go and suddenly gasped, bending over with a grimace, clutching her stomach.

 

“Seriously?” she gasped. “Now?”

 

Labour pains, Bruno realised with a jolt. She was going into labour.

 

She turned to him and held out her hand, lip trembling. A farmer ran, calling over his shoulder about a midwife.

 

Bruno took Pepa’s hand.




He woke up with a jolt, his eyes stinging, his head pounding and his body aching all over.

 

Bruno scrambled up and his book fell off his chest, onto the floor. 

 

His shutter swayed with a squeak.

 

“I’m okay, Casita,” he murmured, trying to catch his breath. Okay, okay, he needed to focus. What had he seen? Mariano acting weird, the unborn baby riding a jaguar of all creatures, a glowing door, a party and…And…

 

Pepa! Pepa in labour!

 

It seemed the baby was coming very, very soon.

 

Bruno had been there, in the green dream. He’d have to keep an eye on Pepa.

 

Bruno leaned back with a groan, rubbing his eyes as the piercing headache dulled down. He could handle this. He could work with this. It could be much worse.

 

There was a knock on the door and Julieta called out, sounding oddly excited; “Bruno? Mi amigo, are you in there?”

 

“Sí,” Bruno called back. “Is everything okay?”

 

“It’s perfect.” She sounded ready to burst with glee. “Can you come out? We need to talk to you about something important.”

Notes:

Hm, wonder what they decided? 😉

Next up: the Madrigal adults and Bruno talk and the kids react to the news

Chapter 25: Home

Summary:

The Madrigals extend an offer. A bridge is crossed, cracks are healed and a family is nearly complete.

Notes:

This was a tricky one to get right, but in the end I'm happy with it. Look at this family go 💕

Trigger warning: Bruno has a panic attack, but it's quickly helped. Still, stay safe 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
This Is Home, by Switchfoot
Can You Hold Me, by NF and Britt Nicole
Whispers In The Dark, by Skillet
I'm With You, by Avril Lavigne
Walk Me Home, by P!NK
You Will Be Found, from Dear Evan Hansen
Pieces, by Red
Not Alone, by Red

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And I got my heart set on what happens next, I got my eyes wide, it's not over yet. We are miracles and we're not alone. Yeah, this is home. Now I'm finally where I belong, where I belong. Yeah, this is home.” - This Is Home, Switchfoot




Bruno wasn’t sure what he was expecting, but it certainly wasn’t to find all of the Madrigal adults standing outside his door. The guest bedroom door. Whatever. The point stood, they were all standing there and staring at him, and his mind immediately jumped to, What did I miss? Did I do something? Did the kids break something?

 

But surely if something was wrong, Julieta wouldn’t have sounded so happy when she called for him? Pepa was smiling, arm in arm with Félix. (Bruno tried not to glance at her stomach, the green dreams of the baby immediately coming to mind.) Agustín looked positively giddy. Alma, however, looked nervous. She was wearing her black shawl and tightly holding her locket.

 

Julieta took both of Bruno’s hands before he could even ask what was going on.

 

“We have an offer,” she said happily.

 

“Do you need something else painted?” Bruno asked.

 

“No, no, it’s- well…” Julieta smiled at him, earnest and hopeful. “We know the new houses will be finished soon.” Bruno tried not to think about it too much. “And we know you’ve already picked one out, but-”

 

“You can stay here,” Pepa cut in.

 

“Pepa!”

 

“You were dancing around it, Julieta; just ask.

 

What? What were they talking about? What was going on?

 

Surely Bruno had completely misunderstood.

 

“W-what are you talking about?” he asked, trying not to wince when he stammered. Again with the damn stammering…

 

“You don’t have to leave,” Julieta said, still holding his hands. She shot Pepa one last impatient look and Pepa rolled her eyes. Julieta turned back to him, smiling again. “If you’d prefer- well, we’d like you to stay here.”

 

“...I don’t get it,” Bruno said blankly.

 

“We want you to stay with us,” Agustín said brightly.

 

“For how long?” Bruno asked. His heart was starting to pick up speed, his head felt funny; sort of floaty and unable to focus.

 

“As long as you’d like, hombre,” Félix said with a thumbs up and big grin.

 

“Preferably forever,” Pepa added. “But no pressure.”

 

Utterly dumbfounded, Bruno glanced at Alma. She nodded, eyebrows raised as if to say, What can you do?

 

“Bruno?” Julieta squeezed his hands and Bruno tried to focus on that, to anchor himself. “We mean it. We want you to stay.” She sounded so certain of everything when she added, “You belong here. You belong with us.

 

How many times, growing up, did Bruno wish to hear those words? How many times had he so desperately wished that someone, anyone, would want him to stay? To stay in the world, to stay put? He’d wandered from place to place for so many years, finally finding his own little place in the world.

 

He remembered Juan clapping him on the back and saying, “You’re one of us, boy. You belong here now.”

 

Those words had played over and over again in Bruno’s mind for weeks afterwards.

 

Panic fought for dominance, demanding his attention. His immediate instinct was, This is too good to be true, it’s going to come crashing down again, it’ll be taken away and you’ll be all alone again.

 

But there was the magic that kept threats out…

 

But Bruno was bad luck. He was el brujo, el chico del río. He saw bad things and then those bad things happened. Sooner or later it would go wrong, wouldn’t it?

 

His green dreams had been…Surprisingly good here. As if the magic was wearing off on him. As if bad things simply didn’t happen here, which he knew wasn’t true; bad things happened everywhere, all the time. He just hadn’t seen one yet. 

 

What if he saw something bad and then they hated him?

 

Juan didn’t hate you, part of him whispered. He didn’t know until the end, but he saw your eyes glow and he still loved you. What if your papá was the same? What if he had green dreams too? He still loved you.

 

He couldn’t breathe.

 

He’d been dreading leaving. He hated the thought of not seeing them every day, especially Mirabel and Julieta. And now…Now they wanted him to stay?

 

Bruno had been through hell on earth for thirty years. He’d given up on happy endings when he’d ended up in that little mountain village. A life painting pottery, quietly living among the villagers, with his co-workers, Juan and his neighbours, were the best years of his life. It was simple, it was peaceful. He’d just been odd old Bruno, muttering to himself as he worked, coming up with stories, painting at Juan’s shop and helping his neighbours with the odd task here and there. Poor, sickly Bruno, who people didn’t accuse of being a witch or bad luck. Just odd. Just ill and in need of “special consideration” as Señora Rojas put it.

 

Then that had all been taken away.

 

When Bruno ended up in Encanto (and he still couldn’t remember much of that mountain climb, fever obscuring his memories), he’d expected to fade into the background again. Even when the Madrigals let him stay in their magic home, he hadn’t expected much. He was just a guest and soon he’d leave and then he’d try to keep his head down and stay out of trouble.

 

Instead, he’d found friends. People who liked him, cared about him. Julieta and Pepa had nursed him through the migraines, Félix bought him Esma and Luz. Mirabel was a joy to have around, Camilo was always making Bruno laugh. Dolores was a sweetheart, Luisa was such a gentle girl for all her muscles; Isabela was kind and Agustín doted on the rats. Alma had terrified him at first, his blood turning to ice with every frown and glare, but then…She was probably the biggest surprise of all. Bruno would even call her a friend now too.

 

He hadn’t expected to find a home.

 

They’d said to choose a house when he arrived. Now they were offering him a different sort of home and Bruno felt completely off balance. 

 

A part of him wanted to jump for joy. Part of him wanted to cry. Another part of him wanted to run.

 

“C-can I ha-have a minute?” he choked out and ran back into his room, ignoring Félix calling his name.

 

As soon as the door was closed, Bruno’s legs gave out. He slid down the door to the floor, his heart thundering, his head spinning. He couldn’t catch his breath. 

 

It was too good to be true which meant it was going to be taken away again, and if it was taken away then Bruno wouldn’t recover this time, he’d never smile again, he’d-

 

“You know, I hate aborrajados?” came Julieta’s calm voice. It sounded like she was sitting on the other side of the door. “Don’t tell Agustín I said that, they’re his mamá’s favourites. I wanted her to like me so badly that, when I first met her, I brought a big dish of them. She loved them, so I kept making them. She asked for more and I made them again and again. She was always happy with them, she always insisted on sharing. I had so many that I felt sick. And to this day, I still hate the blasted things. I haven’t eaten one in years.”

 

Bruno wasn’t sure if the sound he made was a laugh or a sob.

 

“Arepas are my favourite,” she continued. “They were one of the first things I ever cooked on my own, without supervision or help. They looked dreadful, but my Gift worked of course. But I remember how proud I was, how grown-up I felt. It was the first time I really felt like I could do this, you know? Like I could handle my duty, that I could help people.”

 

Bruno knew what she was doing. He wiped his eyes and leaned his head back against the door. He knocked quickly- one, two, three, four, five six- and once on his own head.

 

To his surprise, Julieta knocked too.

 

“You remind me of my friend Juan sometimes, y’know?” Bruno mumbled. “He did this too when I first panicked around him.”

 

“He sounds like a kind man,” Julieta said softly.

 

“He was.”

 

“So are you.”

 

Bruno was quiet.

 

“And what about you?” Julieta asked after a moment. “Did you ever have a moment like that? When things felt right?”

 

“I guess so,” Bruno said, staring at the wall. “I, um…I was supposed to help with the pottery at first. I was okay at it, I guess. But I always preferred drawing and painting, so when I got to try it again…That felt right. And…And getting my house. It was tiny, but it was mine.

 

Julieta hummed in acknowledgment and Bruno swore he could hear her smile.

 

“What else?” she asked.

 

“Mornings with you,” he admitted. “Messing about with Mirabel and Camilo. Chatting with Dolores. Painting the mural. Just… Here.” He closed his eyes, gripping his knees. “Here feels right.”

 

“I think so too,” Julieta said. “I know we can’t force you, but we want you to stay. I mean it, Bruno; you belong here.”

 

Still sitting on the floor, Bruno opened the door.

 

Julieta was sitting on the other side; they were back to back and, when the door creaked open, she looked over her shoulder and smiled. Her eyes looked a little watery. She scrambled to face him and held her arms out, her smile hopeful.

 

Biting back another sob, Bruno fell into her hug, holding on tight. Julieta clung to him and Bruno…He felt safe.

 

“I love you, mi amigo,” she whispered. “We all do.”

 

Bruno pressed his face against her shoulder; his breathing hitched and shuddered.

 

“You too,” he mumbled, “I love you too.”






Pepa’s cloud still hadn’t gone away. Alma had given up pointing it out; Pepa would shoo it away and it would almost immediately re-appear. Félix had a protective arm around her shoulders and Agustín paced nervously.

 

Julieta had sent them all away as soon as Bruno ran back into his room. Alma couldn’t say she was surprised; Julieta was fiercely protective of that boy.

 

But then Julieta finally called for them, sounding jubilant. 

 

They hurried from the kitchen back to the courtyard. Julieta had an arm around Bruno and both of them were smiling. Bruno’s smile was shy, a little crooked. Julieta’s was utterly joyful.

 

Alma knew the answer before Julieta even said it.

 

“He’s staying!” Julieta declared proudly. Pepa squealed and ran to them as fast as she could, pulling Bruno into a hug. Félix whooped and hurried after her, Agustín at his heels.

 

Alma followed more sedately, a small smile tugging at her lips.

 

She didn’t hug him, but she tentatively reached out and held Bruno’s face in her hands. He looked at her nervously.

 

“Good,” she said simply, and Bruno relaxed. “That’s good.”

 

She stepped back as her daughters gushed, as Félix announced they needed to celebrate and Agustín clapped Bruno on the back, pulling him into another hug.

 

Alma looked towards her room and her eyes widened. The candle was on her windowsill as always, but it shone brighter than she’d ever seen it.

 

As soon as she saw it, all of Casita danced in celebration.




The candle blazed, their missing child was staying and more cracks slowly but surely vanished, hidden in the dark.




Dolores and Isabela were waiting for them outside the school and Mirabel eyed them suspiciously. Dolores was beaming like a crazy person, bouncing in place. When she saw Mirabel, Camilo and Luisa she squeaked and ran to them, herding all three of them towards Casita.

 

“Vamos, vamos,” she urged. “We need to go home.”

 

“Dolores, seriously, what’s going on?” Isabela demanded, hands on her hips. “We have chores!”

 

“This is more important,” Dolores said.

 

“Did Mamí have the baby?” Camilo asked eagerly and Luisa gasped, looking at Dolores with wide eyes.

 

“No,” Dolores said. She wouldn’t answer anymore questions; she just pressed her fingers to her lips and hummed, smiling all the while.

 

It must have been good news, whatever was going on, because Casita’s doors opened as soon as they were within sight of the house. A big rainbow was arching over the house. Tia Pepa hurried into the garden, waving at them with both hands.

 

“Kids!” she shouted. “Come on!”

 

The second they were close enough, Casita pulled them all inside. Mirabel could sense nothing but pure joy coming from their home.

 

“What’s going on?” she asked as they were ushered into the kitchen. Tia Pepa was grinning, Dolores ran ahead of them and sunshine started to radiate from Tia Pepa.

 

The adults were all in the kitchen. Mamá and Félix were cooking and Mirabel could see everyone’s favourite dishes were being prepared. Abuela was even helping them, a rare sight indeed.

 

“We’ve got some good news!” Julieta said, serving up another dish.

 

“Are you having a baby too, Mamá?” Luisa asked.

 

Julieta laughed. “No, no, bébé. Nothing like that.”

 

“It looks like you’re stuck with me,” Bruno said with a shy smile, his head slightly bowed. 

 

Mirabel’s breath caught. Wait, did he mean…?

 

“Bruno’s staying,” Pepa said happily, clasping her hands together. 

 

Camilo whooped, punching the air. Luisa squealed happily and Isabela smiled prettily, her hands on her heart. Dolores giggled at them, bouncing on her toes.

 

Mirabel felt stuck. Her bag dropped to the floor and she gaped at Bruno.

 

“Really?” she asked quietly, hopefully. Oh please, please, please let it be real, she thought.

 

Bruno nodded. He pushed his hair back and it immediately fell back into place. When he did, Tia Pepa tilted her head, giving him a bemused little pout, but she was soon smiling again.

 

And Mirabel? Well, she screamed and ran to him, tackling him into such a tight hug that she nearly knocked him off his seat. Bruno only laughed at her, hugging her just as tightly.

 

“Mirabel,” Abuela sighed. “Indoor voice, please.”

 

For the first time in her life, Mirabel ignored Abuela. She just clung to Bruno, half on his lap, babbling, “You’re staying, you’re staying!”

 

It was the best surprise she’d ever had. And she hadn’t even needed to ask her mamá to make him stay! They’d done it all on their own!

 

Bruno was staying, he was staying, he was going to live here all the time; he wasn’t going to that stupid new house, he was staying in Casita! Mirabel wanted to laugh; she wanted to dance and shout and cry, she wanted to scream from the rooftops that Bruno was staying!

 

“Good,” Mirabel said firmly, resting her chin on his shoulder. “You belong here.”

 

“Yeah,” Bruno said quietly as he held onto her. He sounded awed. “It looks like it, huh?”

Notes:

This AU now has a very self-indulgent playlist: https://open.spotify.com/playlist/5asOz4TbWQDJHkpPefUiAL

Next up...Well, the pieces start to fall into place 😉💕

Chapter 26: Sparks Filled With Hope

Summary:

May 21st would change everything for the Madrigals.

The puzzle pieces begin to fall into place as the newest Madrigal gets ready to greet the world.

Notes:

✨Let's ggggggoooooooo!✨

Songs I listened to while writing:
Flares, by The Script
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
In My Dreams, from Anastasia: Broadway
Dos Orguitas, from Encanto
Little Wonders, by Rob Thomas
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
The Proof Of Your Love, by For King And Country

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Did you lose what won't return? Did you love but never learn? But did you see the flares in the sky? Were you blinded by the light? Did you feel the smoke in your eyes? Did you, did you? Did you see the sparks filled with hope? You are not alone, ‘cause someone's out there, sending out flares.” - Flares, The Script




May 21st would change everything for the Madrigals, though of course they didn’t know it at first. With hindsight, Bruno would wonder if he should have suspected something, because his dreams were strange, yet surprisingly peaceful. It wasn’t a green dream, nor a nightmare. Just odd.




He was standing in that jewel coloured river again, with a swarm of golden butterflies flying towards the horizon. Standing in the centre of the river was a man made of golden candlelight.

 

Pedro Madrigal. It took Bruno a moment to place him, his features obscured by the light. Besides, Bruno hadn’t even looked at his portrait all that much, usually sticking to the main staircase, closer to his room.

 

Pedro stood there in the river, watching the butterflies fly away. He shimmered and glittered just like the candle.

 

Smiling, Pedro turned to Bruno and held his hand out, glowing more than ever.




Bruno woke up, feeling disoriented, his eyes heavy like he hadn’t slept at all.

 

Well, at least it wasn’t a green dream. There was always that.






His next clue was that Pepa was wearing her favourite sun-patterned dress at breakfast, like she had in her last green dream. She stretched her arms above her head and declared, “One last rainfall for the fields before the baby arrives!”

 

The baby was due in a week and Bruno froze in his seat, remembering the last dream.

 

Pepa, heavily pregnant Pepa was in the fields, wearing her favourite sun-patterned dress. She turned to go and suddenly gasped, bending over with a grimace, clutching her stomach.

 

“Seriously?” she gasped. “Now?”

 

Surely not, right? Surely not today?

 

“Ay, I can’t go with you, amor,” Félix was saying apologetically. “I promised my parents to help clear their attic today.”

 

“I can go,” Bruno said quickly. They turned to him in surprise and Bruno took a deep breath, knocking on the table and his own head. “Knock, knock, knock on wood,” he muttered, before meeting Pepa’s gaze. “I can go with you,” he repeated more calmly. “I’m not doing anything else today.”

 

She grinned at him, reaching over to lightly punch his shoulder. “Thanks, Bruno,” she said, and that was that.

 

Bruno just hoped he was wrong, that it wasn’t today. 

 

Then again, when had his green dreams ever been wrong? He hadn’t seen Félix present in the dream.

 

Ay, Dios have mercy on his soul; he had no idea what he was doing. He just knew he wasn’t leaving Pepa by herself, not if there was even the slightest chance that she’d go into labour today. 

 

She’d been there for him. Bruno would be there for her too. Simple.

 

He hoped it would be simple.






Pepa wouldn’t be leaving until the afternoon, so they had some time to kill. Félix set off for his parents, Camilo ran into town to find his friends; Alma was off with the councillors, Julieta was at her stall and Agustín went to meet up with friends as well. Isabela had agreed to decorate the church for an upcoming Christening, Luisa was off chasing donkeys again and Dolores had gone to her room, looking down. Bruno wondered if Mariano was waxing poetic about Isabela again, or if they were talking in town right this minute. 

 

He didn’t envy that poor kid’s Gift at all. Maybe he should find something to cheer her up on the way home later.

 

Either way, that left Bruno with Mirabel while Pepa claimed the bathroom for, “the bubblebath of the century,” as she called it. Well, Bruno certainly wasn’t going to risk her wrath by trying to take the bathroom before her, though he still couldn’t understand why a magical house only had one bathroom. Perhaps Casita just enjoyed the chaos.

 

And that was when the world turned on its axis, when the little pieces began to add up and the clues began to click into place.

 

Bless Mirabel’s heart, but she’d always been a smart kid.







They were passing a ball back and forth as they sat on the grass. Esma and Luz tried to chase the ball and Mirabel kept giggling as the rats scampered around. 

 

And then the green flash hit.

 

“Ah!” Bruno clutched his head, his eyes squeezed shut as the pain flared. There was-




The candle blazed brighter and brighter, shining like the sun. All of Casita was dancing.




“Bruno!” Mirabel sounded terrified, her little hands resting on top of his, tangled in his hair. “Bruno, are you okay?”

 

He tried to answer, but-




Isabela was surrounded by new plants, some that Bruno recognised and many that he didn’t. She looked surprised, but so very happy.




“Bruno, please answer!”

 

It sounded like Mirabel was crying.

 

And Bruno, he did something he tried to never do when green flashes hit, because the last time he did, Juan died.

 

He opened his eyes.

 

The world was still tinged green and he was met with Mirabel’s wide, tear-filled gaze. Her mouth dropped open, her next breath was a strangled gasp and Bruno pushed back with a terrified yelp, falling onto his back, panic flooding through him as the green receded and the world returned to normal.

 

He’d opened his eyes, oh God, he’d opened his eyes before the green faded, Mirabel saw, she saw it, she saw it, everything was going to go to hell now. He’d just wanted to reassure her that he was okay and now he’d ruined everything. He braced himself for the stones, for the shouts, for the angry fists…That never came.

 

Instead, Mirabel hugged him, half on top of him, pinning him to the grass.

 

“Are you okay?” she asked quietly, her voice shaking.

 

“I’m sorry,” Bruno said, frozen in her skinny arms. “I’m so sorry, chiquita.”

 

“For what? You didn’t do anything!” She pulled back with a pout, staring and staring at his eyes. “You…You have magic?” She sounded so confused. “Why didn’t you say so?”

 

“It’s- I don’t-” Bruno pushed himself up on trembling arms.




“Brujo!”

 

“Bad Luck Bruno!”

 

“Diablo!”

 

“Jinx!”




“Your eyes were glowing, if that’s not magic then I dunno what is.” She looked so much like Julieta when she frowned, her hands on her hips. 

 

“It’s…It’s not like your magic,” Bruno said, staring at the grass. He was shaking all over, his breathing coming in short, frantic gasps. “I can’t c-control it, chiquita. I-it’s not…It’s not good.”

 

“...It hurts you, doesn’t it?” Mirabel asked sadly. “Your head. It hurt you.”

 

Slowly, his head indeed still swimming, Bruno nodded.

 

“I’m sorry.” Mirabel sounded wrecked, so very small.

 

“What?” Bruno frowned at her. “What for?”

 

“I don’t want you to be hurt,” she said, straight-forward as always. She bit her lip. “Maybe Mamá can help?”

 

“I don’t think so,” Bruno said. 

 

Mirabel’s frown deepened. “That’s why you were sick before, isn’t it?” she asked, looking over her shoulder like she expected someone to be listening. Though surely if Dolores had left her room, she’d have come running by now.

 

Bruno sighed and held his hands out for Esma and Luz. They ran to him, climbing onto his hands. 

 

“Sí,” he said. “That’s, uh, that’s why.”

 

“And Mamá couldn’t make it better,” Mirabel realised sadly.

 

“Afraid not, Mira.”

 

“That’s so unfair.” She tucked her knees up to her chest, looking sad and curious. “But- but why didn’t you say something?”

 

“It’s…complicated,” Bruno said haltingly. Esma and Luz climbed into his pockets. “People, um…They knew before and they weren’t- nice about it.”

 

He wasn’t going to tell a ten-year-old all the horrible details, but Mirabel’s expression hardened, like she was taking a guess.

 

“Then they’re stupid,” she said firmly.

 

Bruno wasn’t sure what to say to that. He just shrugged, twisting a blade of grass around his finger. His breathing slowed somewhat, but it was still too quick. 

 

“Are you gonna tell?” Mirabel asked.

 

Bruno barely managed a tired, sad smile. “Guess I’ll have to.”

 

“I won’t tell yet,” Mirabel promised. She held out her pinky finger.

 

Trying not to laugh, trying not to cry, Bruno linked his pinky finger with hers. Mirabel solemnly said, “Pinky promise, cross my heart and hope to die.”

 

“M-maybe leave that last part out,” Bruno said quickly.

 

“Then pinky promise. I won’t tell until you want me to, okay?”

 

It took all his will-power not to burst into tears then and there. Instead, he pulled her into a tight hug, his chin resting on her head.

 

“You’re the sweetest kid in the world, you know that, Mira?”

 

She giggled happily, clinging to him with all her might.

 

“Love ya,” she said with a bright grin and if a few tears spilled then, that was Bruno’s business.

 

“Love you too, kid.”






The thing was, Mirabel was indeed a smart kid. 

 

As she and Bruno went back inside, her mind was whirling.

 

Bruno had magic. He had magic that hurt him. It hurt him and Julieta couldn’t make it better. It hurt him and people had been mean to him about it.

 

Was that where his scars came from? Was that why he’d been in fights?

 

Her own fists clenched and she swore she’d punch anyone who was mean to him now. Because he was her friend, he was staying, he was Mirabel’s Bruno and she was not going to let anyone scare him again, thank you very much. She may not be strong like Luisa, but she was willing to throw a punch if she had to.

 

Bruno…Had…Magic…

 

As Bruno poured her some orange juice and made her a sandwich, Mirabel couldn’t stop thinking.

 

It hit her then, all at once: her missing Tio’s name was Bruno.

 

Mirabel nearly dropped her sandwich, freezing in place.

 

Tia Pepa swept into the kitchen, smiling and smelling like her favourite lavender soap.

 

“Vamos!” she said. She held her favourite sad book, blanket and umbrella. “Mira, Dolores is in her room if you need her, okay?”

 

“Okay,” Mirabel whispered. She felt very odd, like she was floating.

 

Bruno didn’t have parents. Bruno had magic.

 

Bruno ruffled her hair and grabbed his dark green bag from the counter. “See you later, kid,” he said.

 

“Bye,” Mirabel said, her voice sounding very far away.

 

Did Bruno look so sick and tired all the time because his magic hurt him?

 

Her Tio’s name was Bruno, her Tio’s name was Bruno, her Tio’s name was Bruno…

 

Shaking, Mirabel jumped off her seat and ran after them.

 

When Bruno sat on the counter he swung his legs, like Mirabel. When he was concentrating, his tongue poked out of the corner of his mouth, like Mirabel. When he was curious, he tilted his head like Pepa. His smile was warm and kind like…Like…

 

Like Julieta’s. Like the portrait of Abuelo Pedro.

 

It was hard to tell because Bruno looked so pale and ill, but…But did he look like Pedro? She couldn’t be sure.

 

“Bruno!” she called and Casita hurried her along. “Bruno, wait!”

 

He was half-way down the garden path and Mirabel practically jumped out the front door, screaming his name.

 

“Mira?” He turned around, eyes wide. Tia Pepa was further ahead and she turned back, hands on her hips, foot tapping impatiently.

 

“One last question!” Mirabel was panting from the sprint to catch up. She held Bruno's arm tight enough to bruise, her heart pounding, her mind reeling.

 

What if, what if, what if...

 

“Y-you said you don't have parents,” Mirabel said. “You were found as a baby, right?”

 

Bruno gave her a confused sort of smile. “That's right, chiquita.”

 

Where were you found?”

 

“Bruno!” Tia Pepa called from down the road. “C'mon!”

 

Mirabel stared at him pleadingly. Bruno glanced from her to Tia Pepa, gripping his bag strap tightly.

 

“Please,” Mirabel said desperately. “I won't tell anyone if you don't want me to, I swear.

 

Bruno sighed as Pepa called more impatiently. “I was found in a river, Mira,” he said.

 

Mirabel let him go, frozen in place as her suspicion grew into certainty.

 

Numbly, Mirabel turned back to Casita. There was a funny ringing noise in her ears, she couldn’t seem to get enough air.

 

She fell to her knees in the courtyard and Casita rattled in concern.

 

“Casita,” Mirabel gasped, her sweaty hands on the tiles. “I- this is gonna sound crazy-”

 

But was it? Was it really crazy?

 

“Is Bruno Tio Bruno?” Mirabel whispered.

 

There was a brief pause, as if Casita was holding its breath.

 

And then all of Casita danced and jumped and Mirabel was swept up in a feeling of pure and utter relief, joy and love.

 

It was all the answer she needed.

 

“D-Dolores!” Mirabel jumped up and ran for the dancing stairs as her cousin came running, alerted by all of Casita celebrating. “DOLORES!”

 

“What’s going on?” Dolores squeaked, gaping at their home as it swayed and danced. Casita pulled Dolores to the stairs and turned the stairs into a slide, pushing Dolores down to Mirabel. Mirabel grabbed her arms to steady her as she nearly tripped and she held onto her prima, sudden tears stinging her eyes.

 

“Mirabel?” Dolores cupped her face in her hands. “Mira, what’s wrong?”

 

Mirabel held Dolores’s wrists, looking into her cousin’s wide eyes.

 

“Lola,” she choked out. “Lola, I have something to tell you.”

 

Some promises, even pinky promises, had to be broken.






As the girls ran into town in search of Julieta, Bruno’s vision came to pass.

 

He and Pepa had barely arrived at the fields when Pepa bent over with a pained groan and water trickled down her legs. The farmers shouted in alarm and Pepa’s eyes widened.

 

“Seriously?” she gasped. “Now?”

 

“Pepa?” Bruno stepped forward. Her lips trembling, Pepa held her hand out and Bruno took it, squeezing tightly.

 

“Impatient little thing,” Pepa gasped. “It’s meant to be another week.”

 

“I’ll get the midwife!” one farmer shouted, running as fast as his legs would carry him.

 

“I’ll find Félix!” another shouted and, with a jolt of fright, Bruno realised that left him and Pepa alone.

 

Cowards, he internally cursed, helping Pepa as she slowly lowered herself to the ground, breathing out heavily.

 

“Don’t go,” she said, still squeezing his hand. “Please don’t go.” It started to rain.

 

“Not a chance,” Bruno told her, even as his own voice shook. “I promise, I’m not going anywhere.”

 

He had absolutely no idea what he was doing; he could only pray for the first time in years that help would arrive quickly.

Notes:

To quote Six: "Sorry not sorry 'bout what I said, I'm just tryin' to have some fun." 😁

Poor Casita can finally relax!

Next up, Mirabel and Dolores find Julieta and baby Antonio makes his grand entrance 💕

Chapter 27: Antonio

Summary:

Antonio makes his way into the world as the truth slowly comes to light.

Notes:

Trigger warning for childbirth. Nothing graphic, but stay safe 💕

Fun fact: Antonio's birth is partially inspired by the story of my best friend's birth. She arrived within the hour, in the car no less! Her mother never let's her live it down 😂

Songs I listened to while writing:
I've Been Waiting For You, from Mamma Mia 2
My Love, My Life, from Mamma Mia 2
I Need You, from Encanto
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
I'm Still Here, from Treasure Planet
Everything Stays, from Adventure Time
Long Live, by Taylor Swift

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“You thrill me, you delight me; you please me, you excite me. You're all that I've been yearning for. I love you, I adore you. I lay my life before you. I only want you more and more. And finally it seems my lonely days are through; I've been waiting for you.” - I’ve Been Waiting For You, Mamma Mia 2




Bruno had no idea what he was doing. He was quite sure that sentiment could sum up a large portion of his life.

 

But the point stood that he was kneeling on the grass, holding Pepa’s hand as she went through contractions. He was sure he’d never been so out of his depth before and that was saying something. But he wouldn’t leave her. Absolutely not. There was no way he was leaving her alone.

 

“This baby is gonna get an earful,” Pepa huffed, wincing. “Completely off schedule! And I- shit!- thought Camilo was bad by being early, at least I was home when he came!”

 

“Can we get you home?” Bruno asked worriedly.

 

Pepa swore as another contraction hit, gripping his hand tight enough to bruise. She flopped back against him, panting.

 

Well, that answered that question.

 

Come on, Bruno thought desperately, looking around the empty field. Come on, hurry up. 

 

Pepa’s cloud grew and a cold breeze knocked into them. Sighing, Bruno grabbed Pepa’s umbrella and held it over them. Pepa snickered, her head leaning back against his shoulder.

 

“Well, it’ll be one hell of a story, huh?” she said. Before Bruno could answer, her grip tightened again and she shrieked, “FUCK!” so loudly that Bruno’s ears were ringing. He wondered if even Dolores could hear it in her soundproof room.

 

Dolores. God, it would be handy if she was out and about right now, she’d be able to get help too.

 

For now, Pepa was stuck with Bruno and all he could do was follow her instructions.






“Mamá!” Mirabel screamed, racing through the streets, hand in hand with Dolores. “MAMÍ!”

 

“Mira?” Julieta nearly dropped a plate of food, rushing away from her stall. “Mira, baby, what’s wrong?”

 

Mirabel pulled away from Dolores, throwing herself at Julieta. Her mamá hugged her tightly and Mirabel clung to her with all her might, gasping for breath.

 

“I-it’s Bruno!” she gasped. “Mamá, he’s-”

 

“Is he okay?” Julieta’s voice was sharp and worried. “What happened?”

 

Dolores squeaked, eyes wide. She grabbed them both and pulled them into the nearest alleyway, ignoring Julieta’s baffled questions and protests. She was bouncing on the spot, wringing her hands.

 

“Bruno is Tio Bruno, he has a Gift and Mirabel saw it, that’s why he’s so sick all the time; she asked Casita and Casita was still dancing when we left, it’s him; Tia Julieta, it’s definitely him, he was found in a river and Mamá’s in labour right now!” Dolores said rapidly, quietly, her eyes getting bigger and bigger as she spoke.

 

“...Whoa,” Mirabel muttered, still clinging to her mother.

 

Julieta went very pale.

 

“What?” she whispered. She shook her head, swallowing. “W-what? I…Dolores, you’re not making sense…”

 

“It’s him,” Dolores said firmly.

 

“It’s really him,” Mirabel added. “His eyes were glowing!”

 

Julieta looked completely lost. She leaned against the wall, her hands still resting on Mirabel’s back. She looked like a puppet with its strings cut, as if Mirabel was the only thing keeping her standing.

 

“I…I need you to explain what happened,” she said slowly. “Properly. I need to understand.”

 

“I need to find Papá,” Dolores squeaked, agonised. “Mamá’s having the baby.”

 

“Ay, Dios mio,” Julieta muttered. She sounded out of breath.

 

“Mamá?” Mirabel looked at her worriedly.

 

With one last hum and squeak and one more agonised look, Dolores ran from them, off in search of Félix.

 

“Mamá?”

 

Julieta looked down at her. She suddenly seemed much younger and Mirabel was startled to see tears in her eyes.

 

“Mira,” she said hoarsely. “Amor, I need you to tell me what happened. Tell me everything.”






At last, the midwife came running. One of the farmers was behind her and he stopped some distance away.

 

She was a tall woman with greying hair and a stern face, but she certainly looked concerned.

 

“Ay, Pepa, I don’t think you’re going anywhere,” she said apologetically as she knelt at Pepa’s feet.

 

“No shit,” Pepa hissed, red-faced and sweating.

 

The midwife looked at Bruno, but before she could say anything, Pepa spoke up; “He’s staying.”

 

The midwife sighed. “This isn’t for men-”

 

“I’m staying,” Bruno snapped. Any other time he would have been mortified and apologised, but not now.

 

The midwife sighed again, rolling up her sleeves. “Have it your way. Let’s get this baby into the world, hm?”







Dolores ran for her abuela and abuelo’s house; she could hear Félix clear as day, helping them clear out their attic.

 

She got there just as one of the farmers did and the farmer looked relieved to see her.

 

Dolores darted ahead of him to pound her fist against the door.

 

Mamá’s having the baby and Bruno is Tio Bruno, what do we do, oh God, what do we do, how do we explain all of this? What will Abuela do?

 

Félix’s mamá, Beatriz, opened the door.

 

“Lola!” she cried happily. “How are you?”

 

“I need Papá,” Dolores said quickly. “Mamá’s having the baby and she’s still in the fields. We need to go now.






“Push!” the midwife said. “Come on, Pepa, push!”

 

The umbrella lay abandoned and Bruno was quite sure that Pepa had broken his hand at this point. She was muttering “Clear skies,” to herself and the wind kept picking up and dying down; the rain had stopped, but dark clouds coated the fields.

 

“You’re okay,” Bruno said, wondering if it was even true. “You’re alright, Pepa, I promise.”






Julieta couldn’t breathe.

 

“His Gift hurts him,” Mirabel said.

 

Bruno had been sick since he was five…

 

“He was found in a river,” Mirabel said.

 

Her papá was murdered in a river. Her baby brother would have been found in the river…

 

His eyes glowed, Mirabel saw it. He couldn’t control it, he told her so. It hurt him.

 

Julieta couldn’t cure the side-effects of Gifts…

 

His name was Bruno, he was around forty-five years old but, by his own admission, he couldn’t be sure. He had no idea who his family was, but his papá had been murdered when he was a baby. He’d been sick since he was five and they got their Gifts when they were five.

 

And Casita…

 

Casita loved him.

 

“It’s him, Mamí,” Mirabel said desperately. “I know it’s him.”

 

Bruno was…

 

Bruno…

 

Bruno was her brother?

 

Her lost triplet, their missing third, the brother she thought of every day. 

 

He’d been right under her nose all this time.

 

“Oh my God,” Julieta gasped, hands over her mouth, as the truth crashed down on her. Her knees grew even weaker and she would have fallen if it hadn’t been for Mirabel.

 

Bruno was her brother, he was her brother.

 

And Pepa was in labour.

 

Julieta looked towards the fields and she saw the dark clouds. She took a deep breath and looked down into Mirabel’s big brown eyes.

 

“Oh, Mira,” she sighed. “You’re a miracle, you know that?”

 

Mirabel smiled at her, teary-eyed, and Julieta lifted her right up and ran with her in the direction of the fields.

 

For the first time in her life, she left her stall completely unattended. When people shouted after her, she called, “Just take what you need, it’s an emergency!”

 

She had a pair of siblings to find.

 

Bruno and Pepa, Pepa and Bruno…Her triplets, her little siblings, they were together.

 

God, she’d never let him go again.







Bruno could have cried in relief when he heard Félix shouting, “Pepa! Pepita!”

 

“Over here!” Bruno called and Félix sprinted towards them, Dolores at his heels.

 

Félix collapsed to his knees next to Pepa and took her other hand. Dolores sat next to him, eyes wide and staring at her mother in worry.

 

And not a moment too soon. 

 

Only minutes later, the baby arrived, squalling and waving his tiny fists. He was as dark as Félix with a little nose and chubby cheeks, utterly adorable and perfect in every way. He had a small thatch of dark hair and Bruno didn’t doubt his eyes would be a warm brown when they opened.

 

“A boy!” the midwife declared and Pepa collapsed against Félix, sobbing in exhaustion. A massive rainbow appeared as the clouds vanished; then another rainbow and another, a whole row of them arching over the village.

 

Pepa was still holding his hand.

 

“Pepa, he’s beautiful,” Bruno whispered. He couldn’t understand why he was crying.

 

“Mira wins the bet,” Félix chuckled, wiping at his own eyes. Dolores looked at the baby in wonder.

 

“Gracias,” Félix said, turning to Bruno. “For staying with her.”

 

“Of course,” Bruno said as the midwife handed the baby to Pepa.

 

Dolores scooted in closer. “What’s his name?” she asked.

 

“Antonio,” Pepa said proudly, gently running a finger over the baby’s cheek. “Antonio Madrigal.”

 

“Maybe one of the farmers has a blanket,” the midwife said, starting to stand up.

 

Bruno looked at Pepa, Félix, Dolores and Antonio, all crowded together. The sun shone brighter and brighter, the rainbows were the clearest Bruno had ever seen. Pepa was literally glowing with happiness.

 

There was a new life in the world and Bruno knew for a fact that Antonio Madrigal would grow up safe and happy.

 

He reacted on instinct, his hand diving into his old bag and closing over a well-known and loved bundle of fabric.

 

“Here,” he mumbled, holding his blanket out to Pepa. “You can use mine.”

 

Pepa sniffled, eyeing it curiously. “Why do you have a baby blanket?” she asked.

 

Bruno shrugged, feeling absurdly shy. “It’s what I was found in,” he said, eyes on the ground.

 

Pepa went utterly silent. So softly, she said, “Muchas gracias, mi amigo.”

 

Félix gently wrapped Antonio up and Pepa clutched Bruno’s hand again.

 

“I’ll get it back to you exactly as it is now,” she swore. “I promise, it’ll be good as new.”

 

Relief flooded through him. “Thank you,” he said. He wiped at his eyes again, sighing in relief when they finally stayed dry.

 

And then Dolores flung herself at him, hugging him so tightly that Bruno was nearly knocked onto his back.

 

“Oh! Lola?” He hugged her, peering down at her in surprise. She had her face against his shoulder and her arms were trembling. “Are you okay?”

 

“I’m glad you’re here,” she whispered. “I’m so glad you’re here.”






One of the farmers brought a cart and Félix was carrying Pepa to it when Julieta arrived, carrying Mirabel.

 

“Pepa!” Julieta screamed. “Hermanita!”

 

“I’m okay!” Pepa called back, still glowing. “And it’s a boy!”

 

“I knew it!” Mirabel cheered. Julieta stopped and Mirabel jumped from her arms, running to them. She cooed over Antonio and kept grinning at Bruno.

 

Dolores had her arm linked with his, smiling all the while.

 

“Gracias a Dios,” Julieta breathed, hand on her heart. She kissed Pepa’s cheek and Félix got her settled.

 

“Bruno was with me,” Pepa said, cuddling Antonio as Félix climbed into the cart next to her. 

 

Julieta was staring at him so strangely, as if she was seeing him for the first time. She moved towards him slowly, never taking her eyes off his face.

 

“Julieta?” He was immediately worried.

 

She cupped his face in her hands, giving him a wobbly smile.

 

“Let’s go home,” she said gently. To Bruno’s surprise, she kissed his forehead. “We have a lot to talk about.”

 

They all clambered into the back of the cart. As one of the farmers drove them back to Casita, another promised to round up the rest of the Madrigals.

 

Julieta held Bruno’s hand the entire time.

Notes:

Welcome to the world, Antonio!

Next up: Well, you know what's coming next 💕

Chapter 28: Bruno Madrigal

Summary:

Bruno may have given up on finding his family years ago, but he's about to learn that they never gave up on him.

It may be forty years late, but it's finally time to get Bruno to his door.

Notes:

So this was gonna up tomorrow, but I finished editing and have ✨no self control✨

This was one of the first chapters I had planned out when I first thought of this story, so I hope it lives up to the hype!

I made myself cry while listening to Journey To The Past again ✌️

Songs I listened to while writing:
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Crossing A Bridge, from Anastasia: Broadway
Journey To The Past, from Anastasia
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
Abre Los Ojos, from Encanto
Flares, by The Script
Little Wonders, by Rob Thomas
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
Titanium, by Madilyn Bailey
Safe And Sound, by Taylor Swift

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Home, love, family. There was once a time I must have had them, too. Home, love, family; I will never be complete until I find you. One step at a time, one hope then another, who knows where this road may go? Back to who I was, on to find my future! Things my heart still needs to know. Yes, let this be a sign! Let this road be mine! Let it lead me to my past and bring me home...At last!” - Journey To The Past, Anastasia




When they arrived at Casita, Félix immediately brought Pepa and Antonio upstairs, while Julieta rushed to get her sister some healing food.

 

Bruno leaned against the wall, the adrenaline draining out of him. For once, he felt like he could actually sleep. Indeed, he found himself yawning and rubbing his eyes. Dolores and Mirabel hurried after the adults (though Mirabel kept glancing back at him) and Bruno went to the kitchen to grab some water.

 

Well then. Pepa had the baby. Thank God, they were both okay. 

 

He just didn’t expect Antonio to actually be born in the field. One thing to be said for life in Encanto, it was never boring.

 

Sitting on the counter, Bruno’s green dreams kept coming to mind. His dreams of Antonio had shown a little boy talking to animals and riding a jaguar as if it was a donkey. He meant what he said to Mirabel: he knew he had to tell the Madrigals about the dreams, so maybe the dreams of Antonio were a good place to start? They were nice dreams, some of the best he’d ever had. 

 

Antonio had certainly been fighting for attention.

 

Okay, he needed to plan this. Maybe he wouldn’t bring it up today, tomorrow would probably be better when everything was a little more settled but…But he’d do it. He’d tell them. 

 

Bruno just hoped they’d understand.

 

He was startled out of his reverie when the rest of the Madrigals came running into Casita.

 

Camilo immediately sprinted for the stairs, screaming, “Mamí, Mamí, Mamí!” and Bruno stood in the kitchen doorway, wringing the hem of his ruana between his hands.

 

Luisa spotted him first.

 

“Is everything okay?” Luisa asked, clenching and unclenching her fists. “Tia Pepa and the baby? They’re okay, right?”

 

“They’re okay,” Bruno said and he saw Alma sigh in relief. Blossoms appeared in Isabela’s hair. “It’s a boy. His name’s Antonio.”

 

“The midwife said you stayed with her,” Alma said.

 

“Uh, sí.” Surely she wasn’t upset about that?

 

Alma smiled at him and patted his shoulder. “Bless you, niño,” she said and hurried upstairs, calling for Pepa and Julieta. Isabela went after her and so did Luisa, but Agustín paused half-way up the stairs.

 

“Aren’t you coming?” he asked Bruno.

 

“I think I need a minute,” Bruno admitted. This day had been a lot. He just needed a breather and he’d head up.

 

Agustín nodded in understanding (and perhaps a little amusement) and followed his daughters. Bruno went back to the kitchen and sat on the counter again, swinging his legs and taking some much-needed deep breaths.

 

The shelves jumped and Bruno patted the wall.

 

“You know what, Casita,” he said. “I’ll never be bored again.”

 

The shelves jumped again, apparently in agreement and Bruno leaned back with a smile.






A rainbow was hovering above Pepa’s head and the sun shone on her ceiling, surrounded by even more rainbows. Her family crowded around her and, as she ate, all the aches and pains slowly melted away.

 

“You’re a life-saver, Juli,” she sighed. She needed a bath, she needed a nap, she’d need to feed Antonio soon. She wondered if he’d be as loud as Camilo had been, or quiet like Dolores. She couldn’t wait to find out.

 

Pepa looked around with a frown. “Where’s Bruno?” she asked.

 

“Taking a breather,” Agustín said with a laugh.

 

Pepa giggled with him, beaming down at Antonio. “Ay, I can’t blame him. I probably crushed his poor hand.”

 

“I don’t know how you ladies do it,” Agustín said.

 

“Um, about Bruno,” Julieta said, her eyes darting around between them all. “There’s something I need to tell you.”

 

Mirabel and Dolores sat up straight, their eyes on Julieta.

 

“Is everything alright, mija?” Alma asked, forehead creased.

 

“It’s…It’s wonderful,” Julieta said. She certainly looked happy, but also incredibly nervous. “But he needs to be here for this.”

 

“I’ll go get him then,” Félix said, standing off the bed.

 

“Oh, can you bring the blanket back to him?” Pepa asked. She handed it to him and Félix took it carefully.

 

“Why on earth would he have a baby blanket?” Alma asked, stepping forward. Julieta went still as a statue, her eyes widening.

 

“It’s the one he was found in,” Pepa admitted softly and Julieta gasped. It made her hold Antonio even closer, the idea of her baby being lost turning her blood to ice. The fact that Bruno had let her use it for her own child, the only link to his family that he had…Pepa couldn’t put it into words. The fact that he trusted her with it- well, that was a miracle in itself, wasn’t it?

 

Alma was staring at the blanket. She took another step, her eyes narrowing.

 

And then her eyes widened. She went so pale that Pepa was afraid she’d faint.

 

“Mamá?” Her voice came out sharper than intended.

 

“Mamá,” Julieta said quickly. “That’s what we need to talk about, it’s-”

 

“Let me see that,” Alma said hoarsely. She didn’t wait for a response, she just snatched the blanket from Félix’s hands.

 

“Mamá, careful, it’s all Bruno’s got of his family!” Pepa said. Antonio squirmed, whining in her arms.

 

“Mamá?” Julieta went to her and Pepa’s concern only grew; Julieta looked like she was about to cry. Mirabel was biting her lip and Dolores was watching intently.

 

Pepa’s eyes narrowed. What in the world was going on?

 

For a moment, the only noise in the room was Alma’s rasping breaths. She had completely unfolded the blanket, staring at it with wide eyes, her mouth hanging open.

 

She bent over with a pained cry, clutching the blanket to her chest.

 

“Mamá!” Pepa cried.

 

“Alma?” Félix helped her sit on the bed and Alma was trembling all over, sobbing as she held the blanket. “Dios mio, Alma, what’s wrong?”

 

Julieta had begun to cry.

 

“I-I made this,” Alma said, her voice breaking. “I made this.”

 

What?

 

Pepa froze, staring at her mother. She made it? No. No, she couldn’t have. Because if she did that would mean…

 

That would mean that Bruno was…

 

She looked at Julieta. Her big sister wiped her eyes and nodded.

 

“Oh my God!” Pepa gasped and a sharp wind burst through the room.

 

“What’s going on?” Luisa asked, her voice high-pitched and frightened.

 

Alma was still sobbing.

 

“Mirabel figured it out this morning,” Julieta said shakily.

 

“Figured what out?” Isabela demanded.

 

Alma unfolded the blanket, smoothing it out across her lap. Pepa leaned forward, studying it properly. It was a pale green, soft and worn with age. And there, in the bottom corner, was Bruno’s name and a little dark green stripey caterpillar.

 

A blanket that matched her own yellow one. A blanket that matched Julieta’s blue one.

 

The blankets they’d all been swaddled in, the night Pedro died and they were given their Miracle.

 

The night they were separated.

 

Pepa curled over Antonio. She barely even registered that she was crying. She felt disconnected from her body, from reality itself. There was a dull ringing in her ears, her breathing came in short gasps and all she could think was, Bruno, Bruno, Bruno, Bruno.

 

Bruno was her brother. He was their Bruno all this time.

 

“Little caterpillars,” Alma said, her voice still terribly hoarse, like every word was a battle. “That was what Pedro called you the moment I told him I was pregnant.” Her huff of laughter shook and wobbled, more like a sob. “The name stuck. Three little caterpillars…” Her gaze turned distant. “And one stubborn little boy,” she murmured, her thumb brushing over Bruno’s name, over the caterpillar. 

 

“He’s ours?” Pepa whispered. She felt like she was standing on thin ice; one false step, one wrong move and she’d crash beneath the surface. 

 

She couldn’t bear to be disappointed now.

 

“Bruno’s our uncle?” Camilo gasped. He grinned at Pepa, bouncing in excitement. “Mamí, that’s awesome!” He looked around at all the shell-shocked adults, his smile wavering. “It…It is good, isn’t it?”

 

Alma stood on shaking legs. “Where is he?” she demanded, swallowing hard and wiping her eyes. 

 

“I’ll go get him,” Félix said and he ran out the door.

 

As he ran, Casita hurried him along, the tiles pushing him to the stairs.

 

Pepa still found herself holding her breath, wondering if this was all some wonderful dream.





“Bruno!” Félix was shouting. “Bruno, where are you!?”

 

Bruno ran from the kitchen, nearly colliding with Félix. “What’s wrong?” he asked. “Is it Pepa? Antonio? What happened?”

 

Félix was staring at him, eyes big and intense. His expression hardened and he grabbed Bruno by the arm, dragging him towards the side stairs.

 

“Come with me,” he demanded.

 

“Well, you’re not giving me a choice!” Bruno said. “Félix, what’s going on?”

 

They stopped in front of Pedro’s portrait and Félix pushed Bruno right in front of it, his hands on Bruno’s shoulders, keeping him in place.

 

“Dios mio,” Félix breathed, his eyes going so wide that Bruno was worried they’d pop out of his head. “Ay, Dios mio!” he repeated, voice raising.

 

“W-what?” Bruno pulled away, anxiety building. “Félix-?”

 

“Bruno?” Julieta called, leaning over the railing. She beamed at him, tears in her eyes. “Can you come here?”

 

Bruno pushed past Félix, heart pounding. Julieta took his hand and Félx followed them towards Pepa’s room.

 

Alma was standing outside the bedroom door, holding Bruno’s baby blanket tightly in one fist. What scared Bruno the most was that she’d plainly been crying.

 

“Bruno,” she said quietly, intensely. “Where did you get this?”

 

“Hm? I was found in it.” Bruno reached for it. With a shaking hand, Alma gave it to him. To Bruno’s surprise, she reached for his free hand, holding on tight. She was staring at him, hardly blinking, eyes roaming over his face.

 

“Where were you found, niño?” she asked.

 

Bruno couldn’t quite put his finger on it, but there was something about her tone that was truly beginning to scare him.

 

She was asking where he’d been found, but she sounded like she knew the answer.

 

“In a river,” Bruno said, holding his blanket, the only clue he had. Alma closed her eyes, tears leaking out.

 

“Ay, Pedro,” she whispered, shoulders shaking. “Mi amor, you saved him.”

 

“What’s going on?” Bruno demanded, his voice going high as his anxiety rose. His eyes darted between their joined hands to Alma’s tears. Why was she crying, what was going on? What did Pedro Madrigal have to do with anything? 

 

Why was she looking at him like that? Like he was something precious…

 

Julieta brushed Bruno’s hair out of his eyes. “I told you before that my triplet is missing,” she said. “Mine and Pepa’s brother.”

 

“Yes,” Bruno said slowly. His palms were sweating, his heart beat against his ribcage like a bird, wanting out, out, out!

 

Julieta cupped his face in her hands. Alma was still holding his hand and Bruno’s grip on his blanket tightened.

 

“Our brother’s name is Bruno,” she said gently and- and-

 

And Bruno couldn’t understand. He just shook his head, closing his eyes. If I can’t see you, you can’t see me. It didn’t make sense. It was just a coincidence, that had to be all. Bruno’s family were all either dead or God-knew-where. He’d given up on finding them decades ago. They were just daydreams, shadows and nothing more.

 

“I-it’s just a c-coincidence,” he muttered. He couldn’t stop shaking, his teeth chattering. Why was it so cold in here?

 

“I’d recognise that blanket anywhere,” Alma said and she still sounded so tired, so unusually old. She didn’t sound like a leader. She sounded like an old woman, a mourning mother. “I made it myself. Three of them. It was the hardest I’d ever tried when it came to knitting. It wanted it to be perfect.”

 

Bruno could only shake his head, afraid to open his eyes. He knew it, he knew it; things were going too well. They’d realise they were wrong and change their minds about him after all. They’d be furious when they realised they were wrong and they’d hate him.

 

But if they were right…Oh God, if they were right…

 

His eyes snapped open as Alma began to pull him down the landing, towards that glowing door with no carving, hidden up a small staircase.

 

“A-Alma?”

 

“There’s one way to know for sure,” Alma said, her lips in a thin line, determination in her eyes. Bruno didn’t even have the strength to pull away from her; he just let her pull him along, fighting for enough air. Félix hung back, watching nervously. Julieta stuck to his side like glue.

 

Bruno didn’t want to let her down. She was his best friend, he didn’t want her to hate him.

 

They stopped in front of the door and Alma finally let go. Bruno stumbled back, holding the blanket to his chest like a shield.

 

Alma looked at him, raw desperation in her gaze.

 

“Open it,” she commanded, more like her normal self.

 

Bruno looked at the glowing golden door and shook his head. “I can’t,” he said. “It won’t-” It won’t work, I’ll break it somehow, you’ll see you have it wrong and you’ll hate me for getting your hopes up.

 

“Bruno.” Gently, Julieta turned him to her, her thumbs brushing over his cheekbones; she brushed his hair back and it immediately fell back into place. “Please,” she said quietly, so much hope in her eyes that it hurt.

 

Bruno didn’t want to let her down.

 

But he’d always been bad at telling her no.

 

Reluctantly, he handed the blanket to her. She held it like it was a priceless treasure and Bruno turned towards the door. He had the strangest feeling that Casita was holding its breath, waiting on edge. He felt like he was being watched.

 

The doorknob was engraved with a B.

 

Somehow, that was what gave him the courage to move.

 

Wiping his eyes, swallowing hard, Bruno reached out and touched the doorknob.

 

The staircase was immediately flooded with golden light and it was like the floodgates opened. It was like something grabbed him, freezing him in place, he couldn’t move, he couldn’t even blink. Warmth flooded him, green took over his vision, the sky darkened overhead, a cold wind swirled around them, his hair and clothes whipped around him in the unnatural wind and-




A much older Mirabel, an adult Mirabel, was holding the candle. She kneeled down to a small girl and held the candle out. They were standing in front of a golden door with no carvings.

 

“Do you promise to use your Gift for good?” she asked.

 

“Sí, Tia,” the little girl said.




Dolores sat in bed, exhausted and delighted, holding a pair of newborn baby twins. She cooed to them, gently rocking back and forth.




There was a birthday party, the banner said “55!” and Pepa flicked a crumb of cake at Bruno.

 

“Yeah, yeah, laugh it up,” she snorted. “You’re still the shortest!”




Bruno walked through the village, arm in arm with Pepa and Julieta, all of them laughing.




It stopped as suddenly as it started.

 

Bruno staggered back with a startled yelp, right into Julieta’s arms.

 

The door had changed. It was no longer blank and swirling; now it had a carving to match the rest.

 

The carving depicted a man surrounded by swirls and hourglasses, wearing a ruana. He had wild curls and his hands were raised upwards. At first glance, his expression was mean, a suspicious frown, but when Bruno looked more closely he saw that one corner of the man’s lips was raised in a smirk, making him look more mischievous. 

 

He looked powerful and confident, all the things that Bruno wasn’t, yet the carving read Bruno.

 

Julieta’s arms wrapped around him, she was sobbing against his shoulder and Bruno could only stare at the door in shock. His door?

 

For the first time since he was five, his mind felt clear. It didn’t hurt. There was no fatigue weighing him down, he didn’t feel weak or sick. 

 

For the first time since he was five, Bruno felt strong.

 

“Oh,” he whispered.

 

“Hermanito,” Julieta sobbed, clutching him tighter. “Mi hermanito.”

 

Félix hurried away, back to Pepa’s room. Slowly, carefully, Alma held Bruno’s face in her hands, like he’d break if she held on any tighter. He certainly felt like he was going to.

 

He was dreaming, right?

 

“You look like him,” she whispered, smiling shakily. “You look like your papá.”

 

His papá. His mysterious papá had a name at last.

 

Pedro Madrigal.

 

Which meant that Alma was…Alma…She was…

 

She pulled him into a tight hug, shuddering as she clung to him with all her strength.

 

“Mi bébé,” she breathed in awe. “My Brunito. You’re home.

 

Alma was his mother?

 

Bruno had a mother.

 

Shakily, on autopilot, Bruno’s arms loosely wrapped around her. The staircase was shorter, he realised with a start. They were nearly level with the other doors.

 

Julieta and Alma were both clinging to him, the candle blazed on Alma’s windowsill and all of Casita bounced and danced. Bruno was swept up in a feeling of joy, love, relief, hope, mine, mine, MINE, love, love, excitement, LOVE as Casita celebrated.

 

“Oh,” Bruno mumbled again. It was all he could manage. If he tried to say anything else, he was sure he’d start sobbing and never stop.






The children and Agustín were all sitting on Pepa’s bed. Agustín held Mirabel on her lap and Camilo was tucked under Pepa’s arm. Dolores twiddled her thumbs, hardly seeming to breathe. Luisa cracked her knuckles, shifting uncomfortably and Isabela kept making roses and watching their petals fall onto her lap.

 

Antonio slept soundly, oblivious to the rising tension around him.

 

But then, under the crack in her door, Pepa saw a golden blast of light. Dolores bent over with a strangled sob, her hands on her mouth and Pepa knew.

 

Relief flooded through her and she looked at her ceiling, at the shining sun and rainbows.

 

“Mira,” she said softly, fondly. “You’re such a clever little girl, you know that?”

 

Mirabel’s smile wobbled, her eyes overly bright as Félix came running back. He was grinning from ear to ear.

 

He said the words that Pepa had waited forty-five years to hear.

 

“It’s him,” Félix confirmed as Casita started to dance and Pepa could feel their home’s joy. “Pepi, amor, he’s your brother.”

 

Pepa clutched Antonio tight as Camilo cheered and Agustín crossed himself, as Mirabel beamed happily and Dolores wiped at her eyes. Pepa let herself sob in sheer relief as Luisa clapped her hands and Isabela gasped in joy.

 

Papá, can you see this? Pepa wondered. Are you watching? Bruno’s home.

 

She looked up at the sound of hurried footsteps, literally shining with joy as Julieta and Alma came running back, holding Bruno in between them.

 

He’s home, Papá.

 

We’re triplets again.

Notes:

✨At last✨

Hello, yes, have a very self-indulgent playlist: https://open.spotify.com/playlist/5asOz4TbWQDJHkpPefUiAL

Next up, the Madrigals are all lost in their feelings

Chapter 29: Wonders Surround You

Summary:

The Madrigals are all together again. The triplets hold onto each other in the middle of it all, and Bruno has no idea what to do.

Notes:

✨Reunions✨
✨Triplet content✨

Songs I listened to while writing:
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
Constant As The Stars Above, from Barbie: Rapunzel (still iconic)
Red Ribbon, by Madilyn Bailey
Inkpot Gods, by The Amazing Devil
Ruin, by The Amazing Devil
Medicine, by Daughter
Close Your Eyes, by Rhodes

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Ay, mariposas; don't you hold on too tight. Both of you know it's your time to go, to fly apart, to reunite. Wonders surround you, just let the walls come down. Don't look behind you, fly till you find your way toward tomorrow.” - Dos Oruguitas, Encanto




For a moment, everyone was frozen, simply staring at each other. For a moment, time seemed to stand still.

 

Then reality rushed back.

 

Mirabel moved first. She leaped from Agustín’s arms and threw herself at Bruno, hugging him so tightly that Pepa thought she heard a rib crack.

 

“I knew it,” Mirabel said with a watery laugh. “I knew it was you!”

 

Bruno clung to her, bent over so Pepa couldn’t see his face. It seemed like Mirabel was the only thing keeping him standing; she could see him shaking. 

 

Bruno. Her brother. Her triplet.

 

All those moments when she’d thought he’d looked familiar, and she hadn’t been able to place it. She’d brushed it off, thinking she was seeing things, but now…Oh, she could see it. He was paler, frailer, but there was a resemblance to Pedro there.

 

He was her brother, and the kids all swarmed him and Mirabel didn’t move an inch, simply clinging to Bruno like a little monkey.

 

Pepa swallowed heavily. “Bruno?” she called softly and the children all paused, glancing back at her. They backed away; Mirabel let Bruno go with obvious reluctance. Agustín gave him one last clap on the shoulder, teary-eyed. The entire time, Julieta and Alma had a hand each on his back.

 

Pepa had eaten Julieta’s food, she wasn’t hurting anymore; she could get up, she could go to him, run to him if she wanted.

 

Before she could move, Julieta and Alma began to lead him over. Félix carefully took Antonio and Pepa shakily held her arms out to her brother.

 

Bruno hesitated. He looked positively terrified, smaller than ever.

 

“It’s okay,” Pepa said. Quietly, she added, “I’m scared too.”

 

She was. She was overjoyed and terrified. What if someone tried to take him again? What if this was too much for him? What if he changed his mind and wanted to leave after all? How would Pepa possibly cope then?

 

But that quiet admission seemed to be what Bruno needed to hear to snap him out of whatever trance he was in. Slowly, he sat on the edge of the bed with shaking, jerky movements, like a puppet. He looked utterly shattered, completely lost.

 

He wasn’t lost anymore. He was home.

 

Pepa pulled him into her arms and Bruno breathed out shakily, clinging to her with all his might. He was shaking like a leaf and Pepa clutched him to her with a choked sob.

 

“I’m glad it’s you,” she said. “Bruno, I’m so glad it’s you.” She’d already loved him before this; he was funny, creative and plainly adored the kids. But now? Oh, now he was ten times more precious and Pepa’s heart ached with how much she loved him.

 

Her little brother.

 

God above, he’d been with her for Antonio’s birth. Her brother had been with her as Antonio was born, holding her hand the whole time. 

 

Every time Pepa was pregnant, every time she first held her children, she’d wish they could know their uncle. She’d wish he was here.

 

This time he was. He’d been here this whole time.

 

Bruno, her friend. Bruno, who Camilo and Dolores already adored. Bruno, who was not an Expósito, but a Madrigal. 

 

He’d told her he used to dream of having siblings, of having a twin. She hoped he was happy. She hoped, so much, that this was what he wanted. This was their happy ending, surely. 

 

She was hugging her brother.

 

Then she remembered something else he’d said, about his daydream siblings.

 

“I hate to break it to you,” Pepa said hoarsely. “But you're the youngest. Hope you don't mind.” She was still clutching Bruno tightly, one hand stroking his tangled hair and the other gripping his ruana. She couldn't possibly let him go now.

 

Bruno, his face hidden against her shoulder, tensed in her arms. For a moment, Pepa was terrified she'd upset him, that she'd frightened him off somehow. Maybe it wasn't the best time for a joke...

 

But Bruno burst into shaky laughter, somewhat hysterical and he didn't try to move away. If anything, he held on tighter.

 

“Oh, damn it,” he laughed and she could feel tears soaking into her nightgown. “That's just my luck.”

 

“You’re okay,” she whispered. “You’re okay, I’ve got you. You’re alright, I- you’re safe. You’re home.”

 

Bruno’s sob was strangled and small and Pepa’s grip tightened. Julieta’s breathing caught on a sob of her own and she joined them on the bed, her arms wrapping around them both. Alma wasn’t far behind and that spurred on the rest of their family; in seconds, Pepa found herself at the centre of a family hug, holding her siblings as tightly as she could.

 

Antonio was safe and sound in Félix’s arms and Bruno was safe in hers. 

 

This was, beyond a doubt, the best day of Pepa’s life.

 

“I love you,” she said. “Just- just please remember that, okay?”

 

It took a moment, but Bruno finally nodded, his face still against her shoulder.

 

“I will.” His voice was so small, so quiet. For now, it would have to be enough. 

 

It felt like a puzzle piece slipping into place. It felt right. She was hugging her brother at last and Pepa was never letting him go again.






Julieta knew that, sooner or later, the council would come knocking to ensure Antonio was okay and to announce his name to the village. Usually, Alma would go and gather them herself after the birth of another Madrigal grandchild, but no one had any intention of moving now.

 

Julieta couldn’t imagine getting off this bed ever again. She was holding both of her siblings in her arms. This, surely, was a miracle.

 

Was this a gift from god, the world, the magic or their papá?

 

Bruno, the friend she already loved so much, was their Bruno. Julieta’s baby brother, who she thought of every day. He was home. 

 

“Hermanito,” she breathed, just for the wonder of it. A word she so rarely ever said out loud, a word that often brought about a pang of yearning and grief. Now that word filled her with awe. She kept expecting to wake up, but Casita was still dancing around them, Pepa’s furniture jumped about and this was real.

 

Julieta was really holding her brother and her sister. The three of them were together, surrounded by their family. 

 

It's okay, he's safe, he’s safe, he’s here, it’s HIM, he’s okay, he’s home.

 

But she could feel him shaking and she could only imagine how overwhelming this was. If she was overwhelmed, how did he feel?

 

So she leaned in closer, as close as she could and whispered, “Are you okay?”

 

His hand clutched her sleeve and he turned his head towards her; one big green eye peered out at her from behind his hair, red-rimmed and swimming with so many emotions that Julieta couldn’t pin one down.

 

“I don’t know,” he admitted in a choked whisper. 

 

“That’s okay,” Julieta told him. She brushed his hair back, smiling when it immediately fell back into place. “We’ll figure it out.”






Bruno did not believe in fairytales. He’d given up on happy endings years ago. He’d given up on his family years ago. The happiest he’d ever been was when life was quiet, and then that was taken away and now…

 

Now he’d…He’d found his family. And he hadn’t even realised. He hadn’t been looking for them.

 

So this was why Alma hadn’t looked at him at first, frowning when his name was said, sometimes glaring. Because he had the same name as her missing son.

 

Because he was her missing son.

 

He couldn’t seem to stop crying. Luckily everyone else was too, but he kept his face hidden, needing everything to just calm down. He closed his eyes and clung to Julieta and Pepa. His grip on Julieta tightened when she shifted, but she just said, “I’m not going anywhere,” and he tried to relax. It was just…Julieta was safe. He knew he was safe with her. He needed her to stay right there, because if she let go of him he might just start screaming.

 

Julieta was his sister. Pepa was his sister. Bruno was a triplet. 

 

None of this made sense. None of this felt real. Was he dreaming again? Had he fallen asleep at the kitchen table again? That wouldn’t surprise him.

 

But this felt real and Bruno struggled to catch his breath; he couldn’t stop shaking, he felt like he’d been dunked in ice water. Real or not real? Things like this kept happening here, this was too good to be true and it was going to go wrong because he was Bad Luck Bruno, he was el chico del río and they’d see what a mess he was and decide they didn’t want him after all; he’d let them down, he was no wonderful Madrigal, they wouldn’t want him anymore and-

 

“Bruno?” Julieta was rubbing his back, her head bent down so she could whisper right in his ear. “It’s okay. I promise it’s okay.”

 

“We’ve got you,” Pepa said and Bruno tried to focus on them, to drown out all the other noise; the kids talking over each other, Félix and Agustín, even Alma. He took a deep breath and held it, his eyes tightly closed; he breathed out, gasping, and clung to Julieta and Pepa, trying to anchor himself.

 

This was real. This was actually happening.

 

Bruno had a family.

 

It was amazing. It was terrifying.

 

He didn’t know what to do.

 

“Don’t go,” he pleaded, not sure which of them he was even addressing. “Please don’t go.” If they let go of him now he’d break apart, he couldn’t handle this. He so badly needed everything to calm down so he could try and figure out how to handle this; he wanted to sit down in his room and get his bearings back, but he couldn’t possibly move now. Even without everyone crowding him, he doubted he could get his legs to work.

 

“We’re not going anywhere,” Julieta promised.

 

“Never,” Pepa said quietly, fiercely. “Never again.”

 

“Okay,” Bruno whispered, and when Julieta laid her hand on top of his, Bruno took it and held on tight.

 

His sister. His sisters. And Mirabel- she was his niece! 

 

There was a gentle hand in his hair and Bruno raised his head slightly, glancing back and locking eyes with Alma. She was crying as she smiled. Bruno had never seen her look so small.

 

She looked like she loved him.

 

She’d only stopped frightening him a month ago. They’d only so recently become friends, but…But she was his mother. The mysterious, ever-changing daydream that he could never fully settle on. She’d missed him. All his life, she’d missed him.

 

It made him feel terribly small and, somehow, it made him feel like he was so much bigger than her. 

 

Alma was trying. She was his mother.

 

And Bruno- he wanted to try. 

 

“You’re okay, mijo,” Alma said gently. Bruno wanted to believe her.

 

He managed a small, shaking smile. It wasn’t much at all, but it seemed to be enough for Alma. Her smile grew and, oddly shy, she kissed his forehead.

 

This much, at least, Bruno could try and handle.

 

He’d try. That was all he could promise for now.

Notes:

Poor Bruno's just a little overwhelmed right now 😅

Next up: Alma speaks with the council and we get the first Madrigal Triplet cuddle pile

(With that said, I'm on holiday as of Monday and it's unlikely I'll get another chapter of this story up this week. So, fingers crossed, I'll see you next weekend! 💕)

Chapter 30: Announcements

Summary:

Alma tells the village councilors about Bruno; among all her joy is the growing realisation of what Bruno's been through.

Meanwhile, Bruno, Julieta and Pepa have the first Madrigal Triplet cuddle pile and get some much-needed rest.

Notes:

I'm back from London! I finally saw Queen and Adam Lambert and it was absolutely phenomenal. I could gush about it for hours 😭💕

We're back with the fluff and the angst! Let's get this show on the road 😁

Songs I listened to while writing:
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
River Lullaby, from Prince of Egypt
Safe And Sound, by Taylor Swift
Ruin, by The Amazing Devil
Red Ribbon, by Madilyn Bailey
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Shattered, by Trading Yesterday
Not Alone, by RED

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“I can see all the fears you face; through a storm that never goes away, don't believe all the lies that you've been told. I'll be right here now, to hold you when the sky falls down. I will always be the one who took your place. When the rain falls, I won't let go, I'll be right here.” - Right Here, Ashes Remain




Julieta couldn’t say how long they all stayed like that. She didn’t care. She never wanted to move again.

 

But, inevitably, there was a knock on Casita’s door. A small, polite knock and then a louder one.

 

“Doña Alma?” came Señor Del La Cruz’s imperial tones. “Are you there? Is all well?”

 

Alma did not look pleased by the interruption. She smoothed down her hair and dress, and wiped her eyes. Her eyes lingered on Bruno and Julieta couldn’t remember ever seeing her mother look so relieved, so gentle. Not even when Isa was born. Not even when Mirabel first chirped, “Abuela!”

 

“Should we send them away?” Pepa asked.

 

“They’ll want to know if Antonio is well,” Alma sighed. She smoothed Bruno’s hair back, her hand lingering on his cheek. “I will explain to them,” she said. Bruno looked at her like she was speaking an incomprehensible foreign language, like he couldn’t understand what was happening. 

 

“I’ll be back,” Alma said. Even so, her reluctance was obvious as she stood and made her way to the door. With one last lingering look at her family, she left Pepa’s room and gently shut the door behind her.

 

When Julieta looked at the window, she could see a massive rainbow arching over the entire valley. Surely that should clue the council in that Antonio was okay. Granted, the fact that Alma hadn’t already gone to gather them was certainly unusual and a cause for concern…Julieta wished the precedent hadn’t been set; she wished it was normal for them all to spend hours together, uninterrupted after the birth of another Madrigal child. No announcements, no duties. Just them. Just the family. 

 

Speaking of family, Bruno was still shivering. He was hiding his face against Pepa’s shoulder again, clinging to Julieta and Pepa for dear life. Neither of them had so much as loosened their hold on him.

 

Julieta sighed. “I’m sorry, but can we have a minute?” she asked, turning to Agustín. “The three of us?”

 

Immediately, Mirabel and Camilo began to protest. Antonio stirred and whined in Félix’s arms.

 

“Shh, you’ll wake the baby,” Dolores said quietly, but sternly. Camilo fell quiet, glancing at Antonio guiltily. 

 

None of the kids looked particularly happy (Mirabel looked particularly miserable), but Agustín and Félix began to shuffle them away. Julieta couldn’t hear Alma; perhaps she’d brought the council into the living room or dining room.

 

Mirabel ran back to the bed and gave Bruno one last tight hug before running to Agustín and taking his hand.

 

As soon as the door was closed, Bruno sighed heavily, his whole body shaking with it. He was limp as a ragdoll, no longer shaking but clearly worn out.

 

“Don’t worry,” Julieta said. “I’m worn out too.”

 

“Tell me about it,” Pepa snarked. “Here, Bruno, scooch.” She nudged at him until he sat up, looking confused and dazed; he blinked slowly, like he was half-asleep. For all Julieta knew, maybe he was.

 

As soon as he was sitting up properly, Pepa scooted over. She immediately yanked Bruno back down so he was lying down in between her and Julieta. Pepa lay down and threw an arm over Bruno’s waist.

 

“Um?” Bruno’s eyes widened; he looked more baffled than ever. Honestly, Julieta wasn’t quite up to speed either.

 

“It won’t be long until Antonio needs feeding,” Pepa said cheerfully. Her eyes were still wet. “So I intend to get as much rest as possible.”

 

“Oh,” Julieta murmured. Her eyes stung again; she wiped them and lay down, holding her brother and sister close.

 

Madrigal Twins Cuddles, she and Pepa used to call them. That was Madrigal Triplets Cuddles now. 

 

Julieta’s grip tightened and she sighed in relief. Hesitantly, Bruno’s hand lay on top of hers; she turned her hand and held on tight. When he squeezed her hand she squeezed back, smiling.

 

She couldn’t seem to stop smiling at all.

 

“I love you two,” she said and, although she’d said it before, although Bruno had said it before, she still found herself holding her breath as she waited for a response.

 

Pepa yawned and said, “Love you.”

 

Bruno’s voice was quiet and Julieta couldn’t quite decide if he sounded frightened or relieved…But he still said it.

 

“I love you too.”

 

How could Julieta ever be expected to let go of either of them ever again? 

 

She had a new baby nephew, strong and healthy. She had her little brother back, alive, warm and safe in her arms.

 

Julieta was still smiling as she drifted off.






“Is everything alright?” Señora Sofia Guzman took the lead, ignoring when Señor Del La Cruz huffed impatiently. “Pepa and the baby? Everything went well?”

 

“As well as a birth can go in a field,” Alma said dryly. She knew that Sofia, Del La Cruz and Padré Martinez were examining her red eyes and puffy cheeks.

 

“Then…” Sofia trailed off uncertainly.

 

“We’ve had more than one surprise today,” Alma said. She stood and gestured for them to follow her from the living room. “Come along, mi amigos. This is something you have to see to believe.”

 

Sofia looked curious, the padré looked worried and Del La Cruz looked increasingly uncertain. Normally, Alma would have found them hours ago; she would have told them Antonio’s name and all about his and Pepa’s health. She couldn’t blame them for their concern, nor their confusion. No doubt, she was only confusing them even more.

 

As she led them to the stairs, the rest of her family trooped out of Pepa’s room, barring her triplets.

 

“Are they-?” she began, but Félix spoke first.

 

“They need a few minutes to themselves,” he said. He smiled down at Antonio. “And poor Pepi needs a rest.”

 

“Ah, the new arrival,” Del La Cruz said, his moustache twitching as he smiled. “What is his name?” He looked at Alma, but Félix answered.

 

“His name’s Antonio,” Félix said. “There’s enough leftovers for dinner, sí, Alma?”

 

“Indeed.”

 

“Let’s get cracking then, Gus.” Carefully, Félix handed Antonio to Dolores. Her family went downstairs; Mirabel, Luisa and Camilo kept glancing back at Pepa’s door. Eventually, Luisa herself sighed, took the two younger ones by the hands and led them away.

 

Isabela lingered at the last step. “Is everything okay, Abuela?” she asked.

 

“Everything is perfect, mí flor,” Alma said fondly. “Go with your papá; I will handle this.”

 

Isabela nodded with a sweet smile and followed the rest.

 

“Very mysterious,” Padré Martinez said with an uncertain chuckle.

 

Alma only nodded, leading the way to Bruno’s door. She knew as soon as they saw it; they let out three simultaneous shocked gasps. Padré Martinez crossed himself, mouth agape. Sofia held her hands to her heart and Del La Cruz’s eyes nearly popped right out of his skull.

 

“Oh,” Sofia breathed. “Oh, Alma…”

 

Alma smiled proudly. “It seems mi hijo is home at last,” she said, chin up, shoulders back. Her hand went to her locket. “He is with his sisters. In fact, he was with Pepa for the birth.”

 

Del La Cruz was examining the carving. “The Expósito boy,” he realised, holding his hat to his chest. “Dios mio!”

 

That rankled. Expósito. No, Alma would never allow him to be referred to as such again.

 

“Madrigal,” she corrected. “Bruno Madrigal.” At last, after all these years, the name was a relief.

 

“Oh, Alma,” Sofia said again. Proprietary forgotten, she hugged Alma tightly, her voice wobbling. “Oh, my dear, I’m so happy for you!”

 

“It’s another miracle,” Padré Martinez said gently. “He’s been under our noses all this time; he made it over the mountains all by himself.”

 

He had, he’d made it over the mountains, he’d made his way home to her, to all of them. Bruno was finally where he belonged.

 

In a flash, Alma remembered-




He was a small man, very skinny and pale with horrible dark circles under his eyes. His black hair was tangled and he cringed back, looking at Alma like he expected to be hit. She could see a pair of bloodstained trousers and some sort of ripped up, bloodstained cloth on the floor. She could see scars littering his arms and her heart went out to him, poor thing.




She’d never seen such a horrible migraine before, and her own grandmother used to get them a few years before she died. Bruno looked half-dead and the fear in Julieta’s eyes gave Alma pause. He was sick. Very sick. 

 

As much as his name hurt, as much as she was struggling, Alma couldn’t ignore someone in need like this.

 

Sighing, she began to make a cup of ginger tea.




His back. God above, his back. Félix had mentioned the scars and welts, but she hadn’t imagined there’d be so many. How could anyone ever raise a hand to a child? How could anyone who claimed to be a woman of God strike a child, scar a child?

 

“They will answer for it one day,” Alma swore and Bruno looked more lost than ever.




His scars…His arms…His back…

 

Someone had hurt her baby.

 

A fire ignited in Alma’s chest and her grip on her locket tightened.

 

Someone had hurt her baby!

 

“Alma?” Sofia touched her shoulder and Alma took a deep breath, fighting to steady herself as rage and grief fought for control.

 

She pushed it back. With decades of practice, she pushed it back and smiled warmly at her friend.

 

“It’s been an overwhelming day,” she said and Sofia nodded in understanding.

 

“We’ll leave you all to rest,” Sofia said.

 

“And we’ll handle the announcements today,” Del La Cruz said, inclining his head politely. “Will there be the usual celebration?”

 

“Yes,” Alma said with a nod. Of course they would celebrate. How could they not?

 

She saw them to the door.

 

“Thank you for checking on us,” she said, holding the door open for them.

 

“Congratulations again,” Sofia said, beaming. “Tell Bruno I said hello, won’t you?”

 

Padré Martinez smiled and shook her hand. No doubt, the church bells would be ringing soon.

 

Del La Cruz put his hat back on, but paused when he turned to leave. “Oh, yes,” he said. “What is Bruno’s Gift?”

 

With a start, Alma realised she didn’t know. They hadn’t opened his door yet, she hadn’t asked him what exactly happened when his eyes started to glow. There were hourglasses on the door though…Something to do with time? With sand? 

 

“I do not know,” she admitted. “I shall have to ask him.”

 

She closed the door behind Del La Cruz. Casita’s floor rattled.

 

“Ay, don’t worry, Casita,” she said. “I’m fine.”

 

When she entered the dining room, she saw that Agustín and Félix had set aside a plate for her…And their family tree had changed.

 

The hourglass was gone. Now, in between Julieta and Pepa, was a painting of Bruno, clutching his arm and smiling anxiously. In the painting, his ruana was patterned with hourglasses.

 

Her son was home. He had a Gift. He was upstairs right that very second, resting with his sisters. 

 

Soon enough, they would have a double celebration to plan. 

 

Smiling, Alma sat next to Isabela and tucked in. 






Julieta awoke to the sound of church bells ringing. They rang on and on; not announcing the hour, but in celebration.

 

Ah, she realised, blinking blearily at Pepa’s rainbow covered ceiling. The announcement has been made.

 

“Huh?” Bruno yawned and blinked blearily, raising his head an inch. Pepa swore softly and didn’t even move. “Wha’s goin’ on?” Bruno mumbled.

 

“They’ve announced Antonio’s birth and name,” Julieta explained, her voice soft with sleep. “They’re ringing the bells for him.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno lay back down, shutting his eyes.

 

“Hm…They’re also for you.”

 

Bruno’s eyes snapped back open. Julieta thought she saw a flash of emerald green.

 

“They’re what?

 

“Ay, hermanito,” she sighed fondly, pulling him closer. “We’ve still got a lot to explain, huh?”

Notes:

You didn't think this reunion would be all fluff, did you? 😏

Next up: Bruno's room and Gift as the Madrigals plan their double celebration

Chapter 31: Gifts

Summary:

The Madrigals have a double celebration to plan.

Bruno finally explores his room and isn't comfortable with everything he finds. It's time for the rest of the family to find out what his Gift is.

Notes:

I spent a long time trying to think up a nice new room for Bruno, he deserves good things 💕
However, there's always the vision cave...

Songs I listened to while writing:
King, by Lauren Aquilina
Hold Me Now, by RED
Can You Hold Me, by NF and Britt Nicole
I'm With You, by Avril Lavigne
Where Butterflies Never Die, by Broken Iris
Close Your Eyes, by Rhodes

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Fall asleep to dreams of home, where the waves are crashing, the only place I've ever known. Now the future has me. I see the fire in the sky, see it all around me. I said the past is dead, the life I had is gone. Said I won't give up until I see the sun. Hold me now 'til the fear is leaving, I am barely breathing.” - Hold Me Now, RED




It was the river again, the jewel-toned river he’d staggered through just outside the mountains.

 

Pedro Madrigal, a figure of golden candlelight, stood in the middle of the river. He looked at Bruno with a soft smile, his hand held out to him.

 

Slowly, haltingly, Bruno went to him and took his hand. It was warm and his grip was reassuring, his smile steady, his eyes fond.

 

It was familiar.

 

“It was you, wasn’t it?” Bruno asked, his voice echoing strangely. Golden butterflies fluttered overhead in circles. “The day I came here.” Something had pulled at him that day. When he’d lay down and decided he wasn’t getting up again; when he’d given in, knowing he was lost and injured in the jungle without proper supplies, certain he was going to die.

 

Something had tugged him. It had felt like someone taking his hand.

 

Like this.

 

Pedro’s smile widened. 

 

“I love you, mijo,” he said softly. His voice was gentle and warm; even without the golden glow, Bruno would have thought of candlelight. Something soft and safe, chasing the dark away.

 

“Is this real?” Bruno asked, his strange echoing voice breaking. He was five, he was twelve, he was sixteen, he was twenty-one, he was twenty-five, he was thirty and alone, alone, alone; alone and scared for so long. The only thing he knew for sure was that his mysterious father had tried to save him once, so long ago.

 

He was forty-five and lying on a river bank, on the edge of giving in, urged on by green flashes and something pulling him forward.

 

Maybe Pedro hadn’t stopped saving him.

 

Pedro was much taller than Bruno and when he hugged him he easily enveloped him. He kissed the top of Bruno’s head and bent over him, holding him tight as if Bruno was still a child.

 

Bruno found himself clinging to Pedro, trying very hard not to cry. As far as dreams went, this was the best he’d ever had.

 

“I’ll be there,” Pedro said, his voice as echoey as Bruno’s own. “From beginning to end, I’ll be there for you all, mijo.” He pulled back, looking at Bruno intently. “Live,” he said, a plea, an order. “That’s all I ask, Bruno. Live.

 

Then you live, Juan said. You live for him.

 

Run and don’t look back, Juan said. God go with you, mijo.

 

Live, Pedro said now. 

 

He wondered if Pedro had said the same thing all those years ago.

 

He thought of Mirabel, Julieta and Pepa; he thought of Camilo, Dolores and Luisa. He thought of Isabela, Agustín and Félix. Little Antonio. And…And Alma. Even Casita.

 

Bruno stood as tall as he could in his father’s arms and met his eyes.

 

“I will,” he promised. “I- I’ll try. I’ll keep trying.”

 

The butterflies grew in number, the sun shone and Pedro’s relieved tears sparkled like stars as he hugged Bruno even tighter.

 

“You’re safe,” he whispered as the butterflies descended, circling around them and blocking out everything else. “You’re home and you’re safe.”






Bruno woke to someone gently shaking him and calling his name. “Bruno? Bruno, wake up.”

 

And then, a little shyly, the same voice said, “Hermanito?”

 

Yawning, Bruno opened his eyes, the gentle flap of butterfly wings echoing in his ears. His hand felt warm.

 

Julieta was kneeling next to him, smiling. Her hair was escaping its bun, curling around her face. She still looked a little sleepy and Bruno couldn’t tell if the sun was rising or setting. The space next to him was cold.

 

“Where’s Pepa?” he mumbled, forcing himself to sit up and trying to flatten his tangled hair.

 

“Antonio needed feeding,” Julieta said. “I’m surprised he didn’t wake you when Félix brought him in. It’s nearly dinner time.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno said. Sunset then, not sunrise. He hadn’t slept the whole day away after all.

 

“Good dream?” Julieta asked, her hand cupping his cheek, keeping Bruno from turning away. She looked sleepy and happy, warmth radiating from her. It reminded him of the dream all over again.

 

Julieta, his best friend. Julieta, who was somehow his sister. 

 

Shyly, he smiled. “Yeah,” he said. “I- it was good.”

 

Her smile widened and she climbed off the bed, gesturing for him to follow. “Come on then,” she said. “I think we all need some proper food.”

 

Bruno followed in her wake, glancing uncertainly down the hall towards the- his door. What would he find in there?

 

Julieta saw him looking. “We can open it after dinner,” she said. “We’ll be with you. I mean, if you want us to.”

 

“I do,” Bruno said and she looked relieved. She linked her arm with his as they went down the stairs and Casita rattled around them.

 

He could hear voices coming from the dining room; Félix telling Camilo to sit down and Alma commanding everyone to behave. There was the clatter of cutlery and, when Bruno and Julieta walked in, everyone fell silent to stare.

 

Félix finished setting the last place at the table with a grin. Antonio was in a bassinet by Pepa, awake and cooing softly. There were two empty seats in between Pepa and Alma and Julieta led Bruno to them, beaming all the while.

 

He felt very small indeed as he sat next to Alma. He felt as awkward as he had the first day he met them all, tapping on the table and not daring to look up, letting his hair hide him from view.

 

A little foot kicked him lightly and Bruno glanced up to find Mirabel sitting across from him, smiling the way she always did. Bruno couldn’t help but smile back at her.

 

Taking a deep breath, Bruno sat up straight and looked around. Everyone was staring and smiling, looking between themselves and grinning widely like kids in class, sneaking notes behind the teacher’s back. They looked amazed.

 

Agustín broke the silence. “I hope you all had a good rest,” he said, looking between Bruno, Julieta and Pepa.

 

Bruno nodded. 

 

“I needed a nap,” Pepa said with a theatrical yawn. She winked at Bruno. “Though for an insomniac, you sure sleep deeply, huh?”

 

“Not usually,” Bruno admitted. “Guess, uh, adrenaline crash?” His head didn’t hurt. Nothing hurt. He didn’t feel tired, weak and sick; his limbs didn’t ache, his head wasn’t throbbing, his eyes weren’t stinging. He felt rested, wide awake. 

 

It was weird. A temporary thing, surely? Because of the magic when he touched the door? He’d probably be back to normal tomorrow, but for now Bruno was amazed by it. He’d forgotten what it was like to not hurt all the time.

 

Maybe, if he was lucky, it would stay this way for a few days.

 

Alma laid her hand gently on top of his. Bruno couldn’t get used to her smiling at him like that, like he’d done something amazing, like he was amazing.

 

“Good,” she said. “I’m glad you got some rest, mijo.” She said mijo with a hint of awe, patting his hand before pulling away. 

 

She gestured for everyone to start eating and they did. Bruno was just relieved they’d all stopped staring at him. Antonio gave a tiny squeal and Bruno peered over to see him waving his tiny fists.

 

“We will have the usual celebration,” Alma said and Bruno turned away from Antonio, baffled. “Of course…” She glanced at Bruno. “We have even more to celebrate now. The council will help with the arrangements, of course, but we mustn't slack off either. This night will be perfect.”

 

“I can handle the decorations, Abuela,” Isabela said. “Tio Bruno, do you like roses?”

 

Tio Bruno. It took him a moment to realise she was addressing him.

 

“Uh, yes, Isabela,” he said. 

 

“And orchids, chrysanthemums and lilies?”

 

He nodded again. Truth be told, his favourites were sunflowers, but he’d never seen Isabela grow anything like that. 

 

Although, he’d seen her grow some very strange plants in the green dreams. Maybe she’d learn something new? Was it possible for a Gift to change? 

 

Isabela smiled at him. “I can think of a few arrangements,” she said.

 

Camilo shifted into a perfect double of Isabela and flipped his hair back, making an exaggerated pout and fluttering his eyelashes. Sighing, Isabela rolled her eyes and turned away with a dismissive wave of her hand. 

 

“Camilo,” Alma sighed and Camilo shifted back to himself with a sheepish grin.

 

If Bruno snickered, that was his own business. He bit his lip to muffle himself, not wanting Isabela to think he was making fun of her.

 

Mirabel had no such qualms. She giggled outright, ignoring it when Isabela scowled at her. She didn’t even seem to care when Alma told her to behave; she just beamed at Bruno and tucked into her dinner.






As Julieta and Luisa began to clear the plates away, Alma turned to Bruno.

 

“Now that we’re all rested and fed, perhaps now we should see your room, Bruno,” she said, hands clasped lightly before her. 

 

Right. His room. Not the guest room downstairs, a whole new room; a magic room in a magic house.

 

It was one thing sleeping in a normal room. Sleeping in a magic room still sounded crazy, even after three months of staying here.

 

But he had to check on it sooner or later.

 

So he nodded, admittedly nervous about what he’d find behind that glowing carved door. The carving of himself looked so powerful and confident, intimidating and strong; in other words, it wasn’t like Bruno at all. The door looked foreboding, would the room be too?

 

As he stood, Mirabel hurried to his side and took his hand. “Can I walk with you?” she asked.

 

“Ah, Mirabel,” Alma said, her smile faltering. “Perhaps you should-”

 

“Of course, chiquita,” Bruno said, squeezing her hand. Her eyes sparkled with excitement and, truthfully, it helped calm his nerves. 

 

Okay, Bruno had a favourite, he may as well admit it. Maybe that made him an awful uncle, and wasn’t that thought going to take some getting used to? But Mirabel was a little ray of sunshine, always smiling and looking for something to do, with an endless supply of energy that Bruno envied. She always made him smile. How could he not love this kid to pieces?

 

Still holding Mirabel’s hand, Bruno went to the- his door. The stairs were smaller than they’d been before he touched the doorknob; the door was nearly level with all the others now. 

 

“So why hourglasses?” Camilo asked, nudging past Luisa as Bruno hesitated in front of the door. “Is your Gift sand?”

 

“Um, well…” Bruno gave a forced, awkward chuckle and didn’t answer. A Gift. Right. Not a curse.

 

Yeah, right.

 

He took a deep breath and opened the door.

 

“Huh,” he said blankly.

 

“Huh,” Mirabel and Camilo echoed.

 

There was a sh-sh-sh sound coming from the sand waterfall up ahead, at the end of an empty ante-chamber. The walls were dark green and painted with shining golden butterflies, the floor was plain sandstone and covered with thick green rugs; the doorway with the sand waterfall was shaped like a giant hourglass.

 

“Well, go on,” Pepa said, giving him a nudge.

 

He had that feeling again, like he was nineteen and standing on the cliff’s edge, watching the churning waves of the ocean below, listening to the gleeful shrieks of the other cliff-divers. All the while, he’d been shivering with nerves, wondering if he was about to do something very stupid and dangerous…Or would it be as exhilarating as it looked?

 

And it had been. Bruno had dived, he’d crashed into the cold waves and emerged soaked to the bone and laughing. The sound of his own laughter had startled him; he’d felt so light, so giddy and excited. It was the most fun he’d had in a long, long time. He’d jumped again and again, adrenaline coursing through him and he’d stayed in that seaside town for weeks.

 

But what about now? Would this be something he regretted, or would it all be worth it?

 

He was scared. Of course he was. 

 

Maybe that was okay.

 

Bruno walked towards the sand waterfall, his impossible family behind him, his wonderful little niece clutching his hand and staring at the golden butterflies with a wide, amazed smile. As they walked, the butterflies almost seemed to shift about in the gloom.

 

The sand waterfall turned off once they reached it, parting like a curtain, revealing the room beyond.

 

There were awed, happy gasps all around him, but Bruno couldn’t even make a sound. He could only stare and slowly make his way down the stone steps into the (almost obscenely huge) room.

 

All around the edge of the room and behind a barrier of emerald green glass was what looked like a small, shifting river of sand; the quiet sh-sh-sh was oddly soothing. The ceiling didn’t exist; far up above was a reflection of the evening sky, reflecting the clear weather outside. The walls of the room were painted a soft green, the exact shade his old bedroom in his village had been but Bruno could see emerald hourglasses studding the walls here and there, with no real rhyme or reason to it. He stepped closer, peering at one of them curiously, his eyes widening when he realised the hourglasses were made of genuine emeralds. 

 

There was an unlit fireplace straight ahead; the hearth was patterned with little colourful tiles; green, blue, yellow, pink, purple, red, orange, magenta and gold. It reminded him of the jewel coloured river. On either side of the fireplace were two big empty bookcases. There were more thick rugs on the floor and pillows and ottomans in front of the fireplace and a huge, squashy looking sofa with a thick blanket folded up on it; it looked knitted and soft, the wool all in shades of green, blue and yellow. A coffee table had a tea-set on it; there was a rather chintzy looking lamp next to the sofa. All in all, it was the perfect place to curl up and read.

 

The floor was hardwood and highly polished and there were two other staircases on the left and right of the room; one led to another hallway, which was dimly lit. The other led to another plain door.

 

“Wow,” Bruno whispered, his throat finally clearing as he stared around in awe. 

 

“It’s so pretty!” Mirabel cried. She grinned at Bruno, pointing towards the bookcases. “Look, you’ll be able to keep lots of books now!”

 

It was a good place to keep his art supplies too, Bruno thought. 

 

“Let’s check the others,” Julieta said. She led the way up the small staircase to the plain door. It opened up onto a bedroom.

 

Oh, Bruno thought, his eyes stinging as his gaze was immediately drawn to the large painting on the wall.

 

It was a painting of his village square; there was the church, the shops, the fountain and benches; the fruit stalls and flower stalls. There were people walking around; Juan and Señora Rojas, the padré, some of his colleagues from Juan’s shop; local kids and their parents and the headmaster of the small school. 

 

“Gracias, Casita,” he whispered and the floor rumbled in reply. Julieta squeezed his shoulder and Bruno forced himself to look away from the painting and take in the rest of the room.

 

It was the same soft green as the main room. On a raised platform with a small spiral staircase was the biggest four-poster bed he’d ever seen, covered in pillows, a thick duvet and an extra blanket, hung with heavy curtains. The curtains were patterned with hourglasses and swirls (sand, maybe?). There was an easel in the corner and a table covered with paints, sketchbooks, pens and pencils, jars and paint brushes. The big shuttered window was wide open, giving Bruno a view of the whole village. 

 

There were potted plants by the window: lilies and sunflowers. 

 

There was a desk pressed against the wall and a cushioned seat, a large wardrobe and chest of drawers. Near Bruno’s bed, he could see a play-area for Esma and Luz, a bigger cage and even nests outside of the cage, if he didn’t want to put them in there.

 

He wondered how his little rats would take to the new room. 

 

Finally, there was the ceiling: this time, it was an actual ceiling, painted midnight blue and patterned with hundreds of shimmering silver and gold stars.

 

Isabela was examining the flowers and Luisa was looking out of the window with Dolores. Félix gave a low, impressed whistle.

 

Pepa, holding Antonio in her arms, turned to Bruno with a hopeful smile. “What do you think, hermanito?” she asked.

 

Hermanito. He’d need to adjust to that too. It wasn’t a title he’d ever had directed his way before now.

 

“It’s beautiful,” he said honestly. It was beautiful and overwhelming. He’d never had so much space before. Surely he didn’t need all this room to himself? It was just him, Esma and Luz. Three massive rooms for one small man and two little rats? He could have fit his entire old house in here, easily.

 

Was it ungrateful to think like that?

 

Alma was watching him and Bruno couldn’t read the look on her face. Curiosity, certainly. Fondness. Maybe even a little nervous.

 

There was just one more room to check.






Down the dim corridor atop the second flight of stairs (a higher staircase than the one leading to his bedroom) was a large, circular door made of heavy sandstone, glinting with shards of emeralds in one large swirl. The whole corridor was sandstone, including the floor. 

 

It was a far cry from the rest of the room. It felt colder too. It looked ancient.

 

Félix pulled the round door open and they all stepped into a dark, chilly chamber. The entire thing was made of sandstone, just like the corridor. All around the edge of the room, piled against the walls, was a circle of sand. Unlike the one in the main room, this one didn’t move; there was no soothing sh-sh-sh noise. It was utterly silent in here.

 

It was cold. It was dark. 

 

It felt dead. 

 

Bruno hated it.

 

He stepped back sharply, towards the round door, eyeing the room warily. He half-expected something horrible to jump out of the shadows, though there was nothing to hide behind. Just an empty, dark room and a circle of sand. 

 

“Well…” Félix looked around dubiously, hands on his hips. “Not the most cheerful in here, huh?”

 

“It’s cold,” Mirabel said.

 

“It is,” Bruno agreed. He glared at the circle of sand, resisting the sudden urge to kick it. What was with all the sand anyway?

 

“Brunito?” Alma was at his side, her hand on his shoulder. “Your eyes were glowing when you touched your door.”

 

“And Mira said your eyes glowed before too,” Julieta added. She looked baffled by the room, looking all around her like she expected new furniture to appear.

 

“Cool,” Camilo breathed.

 

Alma was still staring at him. She looked concerned by Bruno’s continued silence. “Mijo,” she said gently. “Do you know what your Gift is?”

 

There was that word again. Gift. 

 

“I know,” he said quietly, reluctantly. “But it’s no Gift.”

 

“Bruno?” Alma sounded startled.

 

“It hurt him,” Mirabel explained sadly. “It hurt his head.”

 

“The migraines,” Julieta realised, eyes widening. Pepa winced in sympathy.

 

Bruno sighed heavily. He looked longingly at the open door, down the dim corridor to the warm room beyond. 

 

“It started when I was five,” he said, eyes trained on the light that didn’t even breach this damn chamber, that he felt himself hating more and more with easy passing second. It was so creepy in here, it set his teeth on edge; the whole chamber felt like a threat.

 

“I called them green dreams,” Bruno explained. “It’s almost always dreams, but sometimes I’d get them in the day. Then I called them day flashes or green flashes; they’re always shorter. Usually a few seconds or a minute.”

 

“Green dreams?” Luisa repeated. She rubbed her arms, shivering as the chamber only seemed to get colder.

 

“Because everything was green,” Bruno said. “And…” His heart was pounding, he shuddered and felt sick. 

 

Don’t say it, you’ll get hurt, don’t say it.

 

Keep quiet and you won’t get hurt. Keep quiet and nothing bad will happen.

 

But he’d promised, hadn’t he? He’d promised to tell them.

 

So Bruno told them, still holding his niece’s small hand, still looking towards the light of the main room.

 

“They always came true,” he said. “I can’t control when I have the dreams, but they always come back. I…I, um...” Say it, say it, say it! 

 

“I see the future.”

Notes:

Was it a dream, or actually Pedro? Either way, it's not quite the last we'll be seeing of him 👀👀

Bruno's got some conflicting emotions going on, and who can blame him?

Next up, Bruno and the adults discuss his Gift and we have the double party!

Chapter 32: Hermana Mayor

Summary:

The idea of looking into the future on purpose doesn't exactly sit well with Bruno. When he gets overwhelmed, he and Pepa have a heart to heart.

Pepa makes herself, and Bruno, a promise.

Notes:

Trigger warning: Bruno has some pretty intense flashbacks of abuse, and there's mentions of visions he's had involving death.

In which Bruno has a hard time, but gets some bonding time with Pepa and his new nephew

Songs I listened to while writing:
Castle Walls (No Rap Version), by Christina Aguilera 
Demons, by Imagine Dragons
I Need You, from Encanto
This Is Me Trying, by Taylor Swift
Teen Idle, by Marina And The Diamonds
I'll Be Good, by Jaymes Young
Human, by Dodie

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Everyone thinks that I have it all, but it's so empty living behind these castle walls. These castle walls. If I should tumble, if I should fall, would anyone hear me screaming behind these castle walls? There's no-one here at all, behind these castle walls.” - Castle Walls, Christina Aguilera 




The only thing keeping Bruno in his seat was Julieta’s arm around his shoulder. The kids had all been sent to Dolores’s soundproof room; the only child present was Antonio, cradled in Pepa’s arms. They were gathered in Alma's room.

 

“This is a wondrous Gift, mijo,” Alma said gently. “Truly, it is. Imagine how you can help people! The things you could see-”

 

Bruno’s fragile patience snapped.

 

“Are curses,” he said coldly. He didn’t look up, he just stared at his lap. He was almost vibrating with tension. Every instinct told him to run. “You don’t- you don’t understand. I’ll see something awful again and- and-” He couldn’t slow his breathing down, all he could see was fire, smoke, blood. All he could hear was gunshots, screams, the sounds of people dying.

 

A baby born dead. A harvest failing. A forest fire. A train crash. A young woman drowning.




All of it pushed into his head in shades of green, always bringing pain and fear. The migraines, the fevers, the aches and pains, the panic attacks. 




A trio of older kids, their eyes glittering maliciously, began to throw stones. “Brujo!” they shouted. “Diablo!”




“Bruno?” 

 

He thought someone was calling him, but he couldn’t be sure. He couldn’t speak, he couldn’t focus. He just closed his eyes, an age old trick and hoped it would pass.



The Mother Superior brought the belt down on his back again and again, the buckle cutting his skin, blood trickling down his back.




“Bruno!”




A pair of nuns locked him in the cold, dark attic for two days, ignoring when he pounded on the door until his knuckles were bruised; they seemed deaf to his cries.




Bruno had no control over it, he didn’t mean to see anything, he didn’t want to see anything, but that never mattered.




He was…Well, he wasn’t sure how old he was exactly. If he had to guess, he’d say twenty-six, or thereabouts. One of his roommates (and he was currently stuck with five in total) saw his eyes glimmer in the dark. Bruno had closed his eyes as he always did, but he hadn’t been fast enough. He hadn’t even seen the man, lurking in the kitchen doorway.

 

The man cornered him the next day. When Bruno tried to avoid answering, when he tried to say his roommate must have been dreaming or seeing things, the other man snapped.

 

He slammed Bruno’s head into the wall until black spots danced across Bruno’s vision. He rooted through Bruno’s meagre belongings, but found nothing “magical,” nothing that screamed “witchcraft.” He’d been furious, demanding that Bruno “Do it again, show me!” but Bruno couldn’t, he had no control, he didn’t know how to make the green flashes come.

 

As soon as Bruno could, he ran. He grabbed what belongings he could, ran right to the train station and left that town, never looking back.

 

He had a horrible concussion and ended up in hospital in the next town over, but it was easy to make the doctors and nurses believe he’d been assaulted. After all, he had been.




“Bruno!”

 

He snapped back to reality, shivering. Julieta was kneeling in front of him, her hands squeezing his shoulders. Pepa’s cloud was drizzling and Félix was holding Antonio now; the baby made an unhappy noise, his little fists waving.

 

“Bruno? Are you okay?” Julieta asked. Was he okay? He couldn’t remember.

 

“Is Antonio okay?” Bruno asked as Antonio made that little sound again.

 

“He’s okay,” Félix said. “Just practicing his noises, yeah?”

 

“Oh…” Bruno blinked, trying to focus. What had they been talking about again?

 

Why didn’t his head hurt?

 

“Mijo?” Alma sounded unusually hesitant. Her hand rested on top of his head, gently running through his hair. Bruno tried not to tense up, wince or flinch. He was…Okay. He was in Casita. No one was about to slam his head into a wall or beat him. 

 

“You seemed pretty far away,” Agustín said with a weak smile. Pepa was stroking her braid and muttering, “Clear skies, clear skies, clear skies.” It seemed to help her, because the cloud got smaller and turned a paler shade of grey. The rain stopped, but the cloud stayed.

 

Alma took a deep breath, her hand still in Bruno’s hair. “I’m sure you don’t only see bad things,” she said. “The Miracle wouldn’t harm you. Now that you’ve opened your door, perhaps you will be able to choose when you want to see something.”

 

In that case, Bruno would be sure to never see anything again.

 

His bitten nails dug into his palms as he clenched his fists. He stood up, gently pushing Julieta away from him.

 

“If you’re right,” he said quietly. “If I can choose not to see these things…Then I am never going to look at the future again.”

 

“Bruno-” Alma reached out and Bruno flinched away from fists, slapping hands, the belt, the stones, sharp nails digging into his skin as he was thrown into the attic her. Her expression completely shattered. 

 

Bruno ran. Not to his new room, but to the smaller room downstairs, where Esma and Luz were waiting.

 

As always, they started squeaking at the sight of him. Sighing, Bruno sat on his bed and held his hands out; they immediately came running. Esma jumped from his hand to his lap and Luz curled up on his palm, her whiskers tickling his skin.

 

“I’ll see something awful,” he whispered, gently stroking both of their little heads. “And then they’ll hate me. Then I’ll have to leave again, and-” His voice broke and he tried to keep his breathing steady. He wasn’t about to start crying, not now. He just…He needed to make them understand. Somehow. If he didn’t look, then nothing bad would happen. Knock on wood.

 

He knocked on the headboard, one two three four five six, and Bruno could breathe a little easier then.

 

Then there was another knock, a knock on the bedroom door and Pepa’s voice; “Bruno? You there?”

 

He nodded, then remembered she couldn’t see him. He had to clear his throat twice before his voice had any real volume to it; “Sí.”

 

“...Can I come in?”

 

His rats squeaked. Bruno rubbed his eyes.

 

“Sure,” he muttered. Then louder and clearer, “Y-yeah. You can come in.”






Bruno looked miserable. Pepa couldn’t blame him.

 

The thing is, Pepa wasn’t stupid. None of them were. Bruno’s back was covered in scars, he was plainly terrified of his Gift and he’d told Juli and Mamá that the scars were from the nuns at the orphanage.

 

The ones on his back were anyway. The ones on his arms though? The ones on his legs that she hadn’t seen, but he’d mentioned to Julieta and Agustín?

 

Well, Pepa would argue those were the nuns’ fault too.

 

“Hey,” she said softly. Antonio wriggled in her arms and she sat next to Bruno on the bed. “Thought I’d find you here.”

 

She couldn’t blame him for that either. This room had been his for three months. His room upstairs had only been there for a few hours. 

 

It was crazy to think it had only been a few hours. It felt like years had passed. Antonio was only a few hours old; she’d only known that Bruno was her brother since this morning.

 

She wouldn’t trade either of them for the world.

 

“I’m sorry if we overwhelmed you,” she said. Her cloud flickered to life briefly but when Pepa scowled up at it and hissed, “Shoo,” it went away.

 

If she was Julieta, she’d say something like, Mamá means well or We’ll work this out together, but she wasn’t Julieta. She was Pepa.

 

And she knew what it was like to be scared.

 

So Pepa made her brother a promise. A promise she probably had no business making (at least, Alma and the council, maybe even the villagers, would argue she couldn’t promise this), but a promise all the same. A promise she had every intention of keeping.

 

“You don’t have to look,” she said. “Not if you don’t want to.”

 

Bruno’s head snapped towards her, his hair falling in his eyes. Big green eyes with dark shadows under them, so much like Pepa’s own, now that she knew what to look for.

 

Just like he had three months ago, he looked terrified. He looked ready to bolt.

 

Pepa was not about to let that happen. No one, absolutely no one was going to chase her brother away, not when she finally had him back.

 

“You don’t have to look,” she promised again, holding his stunned gaze. “And anyone who says otherwise will have to go through me.”

 

Even his rats were staring at her in awe. Bruno looked like he was about to shatter into a million pieces.

 

“Gracias,” he said quietly. Antonio sneezed and Bruno looked at him with a small smile.

 

Heart pounding, Pepa shifted a little closer. “Do you want to hold him?” she asked hopefully. It was a question she’d yearned to ask when Dolores was born and again when Camilo was born. It was a question she knew Julieta wished she could ask too, each time her girls were born. How many times had they both sat together, quietly mourning their triplet’s absence? 

 

But he was here now. Pepa could finally ask.

 

Bruno’s already wide eyes only got even wider. He looked at Antonio like he was made of porcelain and about to break.

 

“I, um- are you sure?”

 

“Positive.” She bit her lip. “Only if you want to.” Please, please want to.

 

“I don’t know how to,” Bruno admitted.

 

Well, Pepa could fix that. “I’ll show you, okay? Just go wash your hands first.” She gave Esma and Luz a pointed look.

 

“They’re perfectly clean,” Bruno muttered, but he went and did as she said. When he came back, he was still shaking little droplets of water off his hands.

 

Pepa couldn’t even pinpoint all the emotions she was feeling as she gently got Antonio settled in Bruno’s arms. Her heart felt like it was going to burst. She wanted to cry, she wanted to laugh from sheer joy. She wanted to hold onto them both and never let them go again. 

 

She was sitting with her little brother, showing him how to hold her baby. Forget the Gifts, this was a miracle.

 

Bruno tensed for a moment but when Antonio stayed perfectly content, he breathed out shakily, some of the tension leaving his shoulders. He blinked rapidly, eyes overly bright, staring down at Antonio in open wonder.

 

Antonio’s tiny fist wrapped around one of Bruno’s fingers and Pepa leaned against Bruno, beaming at her son.

 

“That’s your tio,” she informed him quietly, joyfully. “That’s your Tio Bruno.” If they looked outside, they would have seen a rainbow appear over Casita.

 

Bruno really looked like he was about to cry then. The smile he gave Antonio was shaky, on the verge of collapse, but his arms were steady. Antonio was safe and sound.

 

Pepa would have been content to sit there in silence for the rest of the evening if need be.

 

Surprisingly, it was Bruno who broke the silence, but he kept his voice quiet as Antonio continued to stare at him.

 

“Pepa?” he asked. “When’s our birthday?”

 

Pepa had to close her eyes. The question felt like a slap in the face.

 

Clear skies, she reminded herself. Clear skies, clear skies.

 

“It’s October seventeenth,” she said, taking a deep breath and holding it before forcing herself to breathe out slowly. She wanted to march over those mountains and tear the nuns to shreds. She wanted to go back in time and destroy the men who killed Papá. She wanted to squeeze the candle between her hands until it finally melted away, because it summoned the mountains that hid her brother from her for so long. She wanted to find everyone and anyone who had ever harmed Bruno.

 

She opened her eyes and saw Bruno mouth the words October seventeenth to himself. She wondered if he’d ever just chosen a date to celebrate his birth or if he didn’t bother at all. He’d mentioned before that he hadn’t been totally sure of his own age.

 

She didn’t dare ask.


But Pepa made another promise. This promise she made inside her own head: this year, they were going to have the best birthday imaginable. She’d make sure of it.

 

"Gracias," Bruno said again. He smiled at Antonio, grinning outright when Antonio cooed. 

 

Pepa wrapped her arm around him, holding her brother close. "De nada," she said. 

 

Come hell or high water (or village demands), Pepa was going to keep Bruno safe this time.

Notes:

Pepa's protective instincts: Activate!

She is fully prepared to zap anyone who so much as looks at Bruno the wrong way

Up next, we see what Alma and the others talked about when Pepa went after Bruno and we finally get to the party!

Chapter 33: The Constellations Shift

Summary:

Bruno and Alma have clashing ideas about his Gift. As always, a morning with Julieta brings new realisations.

Casita has a "welcome home" present for Bruno.

Notes:

I really thought I'd fit the party into this chapter, but the kitchen scene really took over from me. Looks like the party will be getting its own chapter instead 🤔

Songs I listened to while writing:
In My Dreams, from Anastasia: Broadway
Wings, by Birdy
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
The Family Madrigal, from Encanto
Speechless, from Aladdin: Live Action
Fuckin' Perfect, by P!NK

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Oh, lights go down. In the moment we're lost and found. I just wanna be by your side, if these wings could fly. Oh, damn these walls. In the moment we're ten feet tall. And how you told me after it all, we'd remember tonight for the rest of our lives.” - Wings, Birdy




For a moment, there was stunned silence. 

 

Her Brunito just ran from her. Her little boy just flinched when she tried to touch him.

 

Had Alma truly frightened him so badly?

 

Her son just ran away from her.

 

Don’t be ridiculous, Alma told herself, adjusting her shawl. He hasn’t run away. He’s still in Casita. He’s home. He hasn’t gone anywhere.

 

She sighed and took a step forward, preparing to go after him.

 

Pepa stood up and her cloud made an appearance, rumbling briefly. Before Alma could say anything, Pepa gave an impatient huff and marched to the door.

 

“I’ll check on him,” she declared. She closed the door harsher than necessary.

 

Quietly, Julieta sighed. “We need to go slowly, Mamá,” she admonished gently. “He’s scared.”

 

Alma knew that. She was scared too. 

 

On instinct, her gaze went to the candle, burning brightly as always. It had to stay that way. Their Miracle, their protection. No Madrigal had ever rejected it before. Her own son rejected it! She couldn’t comprehend it.

 

But this was all so new to them all. It had only been a few hours.

 

Julieta was right, they needed to go slowly. Alma would not let anything mar this reunion, this new miracle they’d been given; another blessing. She prayed Pedro could see this, that he knew their son was home.

 

Bruno was scared, Alma knew that. He’d been scared since she met him. He’d been scared for a long time now.

 

Well, Alma was his mother. She’d make sure he had no reason to be afraid anymore.

 

There were the migraines to contend with as well. Concern grew in her heart as she remembered the sight of her son, barely conscious as Julieta and Pepa tended to him. His big sisters, unknowingly protecting him. None of the other Gifts caused such pain.

 

Because he wasn’t home, Alma told herself, even as she nodded in agreement with her daughter. Now that he’s opened his door, surely his Gift won’t harm him anymore. Surely now he’ll have control. 

 

They would take it slowly. Who knew what looking into the future entailed? Did Bruno have to be asked a specific question, or would he be able to look whenever he pleased? How far ahead could he see? Surely there was a limit…

 

But Alma was getting ahead of herself. They had a double celebration to plan. A new grandchild and the return of her son; it was a blessing beyond measure.

 

“Yes, mija,” Alma said. “You’re right. We’ll take things slowly with your brother.”

 

She wondered if the spark of happiness those words caused would ever die out. Your brother, my son. She hoped not. Alma hoped those words would always bring her joy. 

 

He was home and Alma could protect him now. She thought of all those scars and had to hide her clenched fists behind her back, as she dismissed Julieta, Félix and Agustín. Of course she could protect her son now; she was his mother. 

 

So they would take things slowly. One step at a time, they would introduce the idea of freely using magic to him; they would show him there was nothing to be afraid of. He was a Madrigal and their community counted on them for guidance and protection. She would find a way to show him this was a blessing, not a curse.

 

Bruno had been brave for so long. What was a little more bravery on top of the rest? He was Pedro’s son.

 

Alma looked at the Miracle and nodded decisively to herself.

 

They would have their celebration and then they would get back to work. After receiving such a blessing, they must work twice as hard to show their gratitude, to show they deserved this magic. 

 

Bruno had finally come home. Alma was going to make sure their home stayed safe for him.

 

For now, she would find him and apologise. They could take a break, focus on their joy for a while. For just a little while, she could allow herself to relax and bask in the love she felt for Antonio and Bruno, for her familia. 

 

Then they would continue to be leaders and protectors; they would earn their Miracle. They would set their usual shining example and stay safe. 

 

They would never lose their home.

 

Alma would never lose her child again.






Julieta woke early as always. As she got dressed and pinned her hair into place, a part of her still wondered if she was dreaming.

 

Pepa had the baby, Antonio was strong and healthy. And Bruno was her brother.

 

She couldn’t seem to stop smiling. She looked in the mirror and her smile only grew. She felt lighter than air, absolutely giddy with glee. No more missing pieces, no more unanswered questions: her family was complete.

 

Casita was more lively than ever as Julieta made her way downstairs, clattering tiles and swaying paintings. Casita nudged two mugs towards her and, still smiling, Julieta started on the usual chocolate con queso, humming to herself as she worked.

 

Bruno wasn’t up yet, one glance at the patio told her that. She hoped his rest was peaceful after all the chaos of yesterday. God knew that Julieta had barely slept a wink. She’d laid awake for hours, staring at the ceiling and thinking, He’s my brother. All this time he’s been my brother. My best friend is my little brother.

 

Agustín had been awake too and he’d whispered, “I’m so happy for you, amor.”

 

Julieta had hugged him hard and Agustín held her and stroked her hair until he dozed off.

 

Despite the lack of sleep, Julieta didn’t feel tired. She felt wide-awake, energy thrumming through her. She’d probably collapse once the adrenaline left her, but for now she felt like she could run through the whole village.

 

“Is he okay?” she asked Casita. The cupboard doors swung open and shut twice. An affirmative. 

 

“Is he sleeping?”

 

Another affirmative. Julieta looked at the chocolate con queso and decided she could just reheat it when Bruno woke up. As much as she wanted to spend time with him, she didn’t feel it was fair to wake him after everything.

 

She’d get a start on breakfast and see what the day brought them. 






Bruno woke up on a cloud. Or that’s what it felt like, anyway. 

 

He was curled up in a warm blanket, surrounded by green fabric and piles of pillows, on the largest and softest mattress he’d ever come across in his life. He yawned, face pressed against the pillow and pulled the blanket up tighter. 

 

It was only when one of the green things moved that Bruno realised it was a curtain. He was lying in a four-poster bed and he watched blearily as the curtains opened on their own.

 

“Gracias, Casita,” he yawned, rubbing his eyes. How’d he fit a bed this big into the guest room?

 

Wait…Oh, right!

 

He sat bolt upright, looking around the new room. His new room. It was as big, cosy and beautiful as it was yesterday. There was the painting of his village, there were the flowers and art supplies. Esma and Luz were fast asleep, sharing a nest. 

 

It hadn’t all been some crazy dream. 

 

“Oh,” Bruno whispered to himself, looking around with wide eyes. Okay, he wasn’t dreaming. No hallucinations. This wasn’t all brought on by migraines or fever- speaking of, his head still felt clear. Bruno felt… Okay. He felt good. 

 

He was used to waking up tired and sore, with his head pounding and his stomach churning. Right now, he didn’t feel sick at all. He thought he would by now. How long would this reprieve last? Did everyone get a sudden burst of energy when they first opened their doors? He’d have to ask.

 

The shutters opened and then waved in greeting.

 

Bruno smiled, trying to flatten his tangled hair. “G’morning, Casita.”

 

The shutters waved again and his bedroom door opened. Taking the hint, Bruno reluctantly climbed off the bed (seriously, he didn’t know comfort like that existed) and resisted the urge to wrap the soft blanket around him like a cloak. Instead, he pulled a ruana over his pyjamas and went downstairs.

 

This time, he took the side-stairs, lingering at Pedro’s portrait. Pedro’s smile was gentle and kind, his eyes warm. It was a simple portrait, all things considered; no flashy backgrounds or embellishments. Bruno knew it was old, but it was so vibrant that he would have guessed it had only been painted yesterday. Maybe Casita had provided it after all. 

 

There were faint golden butterflies behind Pedro. They looked like the ones from Bruno’s dreams.

 

Bruno stared at his father’s face. What had Alma said? “You look like your papá.” Bruno couldn’t see it. Well, maybe if he squinted his eyes and tilted his head. And maybe if it was dark. 

 

No, Bruno didn’t see it, but it was a nice thought. Honestly, it was comforting to hear that there was finally a relative he looked like. There was an actual family resemblance there (apparently) and Bruno knew who his father was.

 

“Good morning,” he said quietly, feeling a little ridiculous. He hurried down the rest of the stairs, not looking back.

 

He found Julieta in the kitchen, halfway through making breakfast. Bruno winced as he looked at the clock.

 

“I, uh, I overslept, huh?” he asked, rubbing his arm.

 

Julieta made a small, surprised noise. She looked over her shoulder and grinned, nodding her head towards a mug on the counter. “It’s still warm,” she promised.

 

Chocolate con queso. Bruno sat on the counter, swinging his legs as he drank.

 

Julieta was smiling at him.

 

“What?” Bruno asked.

 

“Mirabel does the same thing,” she said fondly.

 

Okay, yeah, that did something funny to his heart. 

 

“How’d you sleep?” Julieta asked.

 

“Uh- good actually,” Bruno said. “Weirdly good.”

 

“And your dreams…” Julieta bit her lip as she continued preparing all the food. “No green ones?”

 

“None,” Bruno said. Honestly, he wasn’t sure if he’d dreamed last night. He couldn’t remember. No green dreams, no nightmares. After his nap and dream of Pedro, his rest had still been surprisingly peaceful.

 

“Do you need a hand?” Bruno asked, pointing at the eggs and rice, not to mention the arepa boyacense.

 

“I’m fine,” Julieta said. Her expression was intent and Bruno knew that usually meant she was about to nag him about rest or eating. “So, you feel okay?”

 

“Yeah,” Bruno confirmed. He took his empty mug to the sink. “By the way, when does it wear off?”

 

“Hm? When does what wear off?”

 

“You know…” Bruno knocked on his head. “The energy and, um- y'know, not feeling tired or like my head’s being split open?”

 

Julieta froze, eyes widening. “Your head doesn’t hurt?” she asked, voice quiet and urgent. “Really? Not at all?”

 

Bruno nodded. “So, yeah, when does-?”

 

She hugged him so hard he nearly fell. “J-Julieta!?”

 

“Bruno, none of us felt like that when we opened our doors,” she said. She pulled back slightly, beaming at him. “Maybe Mamá’s right; now that you’ve opened your door and fully gotten your Gift, things will change. Maybe it won’t hurt you anymore and you can decide when you want to see something!”

 

Bruno had to sit down then. Julieta abandoned the breakfast to sit across from him, holding both of his hands. Bruno just stared blankly at the table, trying to wrap his mind around the implications.

 

He’d been in pain since he was five. No breaks, no improvements; it only ever went from bad to terrible, then back to its normal levels of bad. 

 

His green dreams and day flashes were out of his control. They came whenever they wanted and always hurt him in the process. Even when he saw something good, the side-effects didn’t change. Bruno always ended up weak and in pain, often bedbound and feeling like his skull was being crushed.

 

But if Julieta and Alma were right, then it was gone. This wasn’t a small reprieve, the pain might truly be gone. Gone forever. He might be able to decide to see a green flash. 

 

Bruno might finally have some control.

 

Alma had apologised yesterday, for pushing him. She’d been quiet and held his hands the whole time, looking at him beseechingly. 

 

Pepa says I don’t have to, he’d been tempted to say, childish as it may have sounded. Instead, he’d mumbled that he understood and relaxed when Alma smiled.

 

If this new relief was staying, then Bruno didn’t want to lose it. But Alma clearly had expectations. The whole family did. The whole village did. The Madrigals were expected to use their magic to help everyone. That would include Bruno now, wouldn’t it? Because, bizarrely, unbelievably, he was a Madrigal. Bruno Madrigal, not Bruno Expósito. 

 

He’d have to get used to that too.

 

If he didn’t want to see anything, how would everyone react? How would Alma react?

 

Funny, he’d never feared the consequences of not having green dreams before. 

 

He didn’t want to let them down, but…

 

But if this was his so-called ‘Gift,’ then shouldn’t Bruno get to decide if he wanted to use it or not? And if the dreams and flashes did still hurt him, why would he ever want to do that again?

 

The only good thing they’d ever done was lead him to Encanto. Why would Bruno ever willingly have a flash again? 

 

“Are you okay?” Julieta asked gently. 

 

“I think so,” Bruno said, raising his head to meet her gaze. Her eyes were warm and kind. Like Pedro’s in the portrait. 

 

He wondered if he should tell her about his dream yesterday, but it felt weirdly private. He could just tell her, “I dreamed about Pedro.” On the other hand…Was it really so bad to keep it to himself? 

 

Julieta brushed his hair back, tucking stray curls behind his ears and Bruno found himself leaning into it. Julieta’s smile widened and Bruno shyly smiled back.

 

She looked at the abandoned breakfast and shook her head with a small laugh.

 

“You know what,” she said. “I’ll take that offer of help after all.”






There was one more surprise in the cupboard, waiting on top of Alma’s plate.

 

A new plate. A plate painted with green hourglasses. A plate that read Bruno.

 

Bruno froze, wide eyes trained on it. His hands were surprisingly steady as he held it.

 

“Hermanito?” Julieta still sounded shy when she said that. Bruno had to remind himself she was talking to him. “What’s wro- oh!” She’d seen it and her eyes watered as she stared at the plate.

 

“Oh,” she repeated, much more softly, her hand on her heart.

 

“Guess this one’s mine,” Bruno said, a weak attempt at a joke. 

 

Smiling again, Julieta kissed his cheek. Bruno tapped his name, not totally able to hold back his own smile.

 

Well, how about that. He had a plate.

 

“Thanks, Casita,” he said and the whole kitchen rumbled, bounced and clattered in response.

 

Julieta giggled outright, her eyes shining.

 

“Welcome home,” she said and Casita rolled the rest of the plates into place on the table.

 

Gently, Bruno set his plate down next to Mirabel’s and Julieta’s.

Notes:

🍽️The plate🍽️

Next up, we are finally getting to this party, so help me god. Time for the villagers to be nosey again! And baby Antonio's a great shield 😉

Chapter 34: So Many Stars

Summary:

The Madrigals and the village gather in Casita for a double celebration: Antonio's birth and Bruno's return home.

Bruno makes sure that Mirabel gets the credit she deserves.

Notes:

We're back! The last two weeks have been utterly insane 😭

Let the celebrations begin! In which Alma needs her character development, so does Isabela and Bruno stands up for his favourite niece

Songs I listened to while writing:
Your Song, by Elton John
The Family Madrigal, from Encanto
Waiting On A Miracle, from Encanto
Slipping Through My Fingers, from Mamma Mia (Meryl Streep is a queen)
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Abre Los Ojos, from Encanto

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“I know it's not much, but it's the best I can do. My gift is my song, and this one's for you. And you can tell everybody this is your song. It may be quite simple but, now that it's done, I hope you don't mind; I hope you don't mind that I put down in words how wonderful life is while you're in the world.” - Your Song, Elton John




Pepa took one look at the plate and her weather went a little crazy: a rainbow appeared above her head, then her cloud appeared and started to drizzle, then her rainbow again. She hugged Bruno and Julieta tightly, wiping at her eyes.

 

Mirabel ooh’d and aww’d over the pattern and Bruno glanced at Mirabel’s plate with a little frown. It was so plain. So were Agustín and Félix’s. Everyone else’s plate had a pattern, relating to their Gifts.

 

Just like the mural, that didn’t sit right with Bruno. Sure, the others didn’t have magic and it was just some plates, but…But it seemed unfair. Like they were being singled out.

 

He was snapped out his brooding when Alma laid a hand on his shoulder. He tried not to jump, startled by the touch, but he was sure his smile looked awkward.

 

She smiled at him and at the plate. “Ah,” she said. “A gift from Casita?”

 

Casita rattled in agreement. With a small, pleased hum, Alma took her seat at the head of the table. Hurriedly, everyone else sat.

 

“Familia,” she said, regal as ever. “I will speak with the council today about preparations for the celebration. With any luck, we shall be ready within a day or two. Isabela will be in charge of the flower arrangements; Julieta will cook and I’m sure our neighbours will bring food along too.”

 

“They usually do,” Julieta said with a nod. 

 

“And Luisa, you will help with decorating a well; please bring the piano downstairs, won’t you? Then it’s just a matter of getting the word out and arranging entertainment,” Alma said. “Which the council and I will handle. However, I expect Casita to be spotless in the meantime, is that clear?”

 

Félix gave her a thumbs up and Agustín nodded. Mirabel’s smile was a little strained but she nodded too.

 

“Leave it to us, Alma!” Félix said cheerfully.

 

“I can help with that,” Bruno blurted out.

 

“Are you sure, mijo?” Alma asked, looking oddly startled.

 

“W-well…Yeah.” Bruno shrugged, trying to look casual. “I’m not, um, just gonna sit around watching everyone else, y’know? I wanna help.”

 

As soon as those words left his lips, I wanna help, she smiled and nodded in approval.

 

“Very well then,” she said. “Félix and Agustín will show you what needs to be done.”






Cleaning Casita proved to be interesting: the house shifted the heavy furniture for them and Félix kept up a running commentary the whole time. Mirabel stood on the tips of her toes to dust, Agustín was apparently banned from mopping or handling the knives and forks, and Bruno learned their routine quickly. The only room they were utterly forbidden from was Alma’s room: no one was allowed in there without permission. Knocking before entry was highly enforced in la casa Madrigal. Mirabel even knocked on Camilo’s door before going in, though of course he was in town.

 

Bruno took one look at Isabela’s flower filled room and felt his enthusiasm drain. Even the floor was covered in flowers. Her furniture had flowers all over it! How were they supposed to clean flowers? Were they expected to water the whole room? Bruno didn’t know the first thing about gardening.

 

“Ah, you don’t need to worry,” Agustín chirped. He gently closed the door and steered Bruno towards Luisa’s room. “Isa keeps her room spick and span!”

 

From the brief look Bruno had gotten, he didn’t doubt that.

 

His own room was less than a day old, so there was no real need to clean it. He tried to imagine dusting or polishing that awful cave and shuddered.

 

One thing was for sure, he wasn’t in any hurry to go back in there.






That evening, Alma announced the party would be held in two days. “To give us more time to prepare,” she said. 

 

A double celebration. A party for Antonio’s birth (which was apparently tradition) and a party for Bruno being here. Being home. 

 

He hoped the focus would stay on the baby. He’d never liked parties, they always made his migraines worse. He remembered he’d been invited (along with the whole village) to Maria Rojas’s quinceañera, Señora Rojas’s granddaughter (one of seven in total) and he’d spent most of the night huddled in a chair in the corner of their back garden, shuddering with pain as the music and loud conversation pounded in his ears, until he gathered the strength to stand and stagger back to his own house only down the street. 

 

Ismael Rojas, Señora Rojas’s only son, insisted on walking him home.

 

“I won’t have you fainting and cracking your head open, amigo!” he said, half-jesting and half-serious. 

 

Only…Bruno didn’t have to worry about migraines anymore. Hopefully. He wanted Alma and Julieta to be right, that they were gone for good, not just temporarily.

 

He supposed he’d have to wait and see.

 

Even without the migraines, Bruno just didn’t like crowds or being the centre of attention for a multitude of reasons. He was prepared to shamelessly hide behind Pepa if he had to.

 

Still, everyone else seemed really excited. Maybe some of that excitement would wear off on him and chase his anxiety away.

 

Knock on wood.






The day of the party dawned brightly and Alma left breakfast oddly quickly.

 

“I have something to attend to,” she said, which wasn’t unusual but her little secretive smile was.

 

Camilo looked at Dolores, but Dolores only squeaked.

 

“It’s a present,” she said and hurried away.

 

Bruno didn’t think much of it at all until Alma returned, carrying a soft-looking package. She found Bruno on the back steps with Esma and Luz; the rats were chasing each other in a circle.

 

Casita was spick and span, practically gleaming from top to bottom; Isabela had set up vases of flowers that morning and promised to get to “the big decorations” once she returned from the village.

 

“Hola, mijo,” Alma said.

 

“Buenas tardes,” Bruno said. He stood up, arms swinging awkwardly at his sides. “Um, what’s up?” Did he forget to do something, or did she need help with that package?

 

She held the package out to him and Bruno blinked in surprise, holding his hands out on instinct.

 

“Uh-?”

 

“It’s for you,” Alma said, placing her hand on top of his. “For tonight.”

 

Slowly, carefully, Bruno unwrapped it.

 

It was a light sea-green shirt (Bruno breathed out in relief when he saw the long sleeves). He’d seen similar shirts in the tailor’s window only a few weeks ago, but this one had a difference: embroidered in a darker emerald green, on the breast pocket, was an hourglass. One look told Bruno it would fit better than the majority of the shirts or ruanas he usually picked, which tended to be two or three sizes too big.

 

“I couldn’t order one made from scratch,” Alma said, sounding slightly regretful. “Not on such short notice. But it should fit you well enough and green suits you.”

 

She’s trying, Bruno reminded himself. You need to try too.

 

Besides, he was grateful. It was kind of her.

 

“Gracias, Alma,” he said softly. There was a flicker of- of something on her face, something momentarily darkening her eyes, before she gave a small smile and brushed his hair out of his eyes.

 

“You’re welcome, niño,” she said. “This will be a perfect night.”






Once Isabela got home, Bruno saw what she meant by “big decorations.”

 

She practically glided into the courtyard and, once she reached the centre, she spun around in a circle, arms outstretched, her smile bright. As she spun, flowers crept up the pillars and curled around the bannisters of the staircases. Flowers arched over the doorways and rested on the windowsills. From the open doorway and open windows, Bruno even saw flowers appear outside Casita, crawling up the walls and filling the air with their fragrance.

 

There were roses, flor de mayo, chrysanthemums, lilies, dahlias, hydrangeas, and daisies everywhere, all in soft pastel shades.

 

Félix gave a fond chuckle and clapped. Mirabel huffed and rolled her eyes, linking her arm with Bruno’s.

 

“Tio!” Isabela laughed. “No clapping!”

 

“Who can blame me, huh?” Félix said with a grin. Alma opened her arms and Isabela went to her, easily accepting her grandmother’s embrace.

 

“Señorita Perfecta,” Mirabel muttered with a scowl.

 

“You, uh…You two really don’t get on, huh?” Bruno asked. He could feel the tension radiating from Mirabel.

 

“Isa’s the one with the problem,” Mirabel said firmly. “Not me.”

 

Speaking of Isabela, she skipped over, leaving a trail of rose petals in her wake.

 

“What do you think?” she asked brightly.

 

“It’s beautiful,” Bruno said honestly. “Gracias, Isabela.”

 

“It’s perfect,” Alma added fondly, smoothing down Isabela’s hair (though Bruno couldn’t see a strand out of place). “I would expect nothing less from our perfect girl.”

 

Mirabel’s grip on his arm tightened and he thought he saw her lip quiver.

 

Okay, that did it.

 

“Oh!” Bruno exclaimed, slapping his forehead. “Mira, I just remembered- there’s a bit of a tear on the ruana you did for me, could you fix it? I’ll show you.”

 

She looked bewildered, but he tugged her away and, as they reached his door, she relaxed.

 

“...It’s not torn, is it?” she whispered with a little knowing smile. Smart kid.

 

“Nope,” Bruno said, popping the P. He parked her on the couch and threw the fluffy blanket over her. “But you looked like you needed a breather.”

 

She grinned at him as Esma and Luz jumped from his pockets to crawl onto her lap, nudging at each other for the best spot.

 

“Gracias, Tio Bruno,” Mirabel said. She said Tio so easily, as simple as breathing, as if she’d been saying it all along.

 

When Isabela said it, Bruno had done a double-take, reminding himself she was addressing him. When Mirabel said it, Bruno struggled not to cry. His smile was so wide it hurt. 

 

But he wasn’t about to cry in front of the poor kid, so he sat next to her and gently poked Luz until she scrambled over to him.

 

“Anytime, chicquita,” he said. “You know that by now.”







The party started as the sun went down. Bruno could see an entire crowd approaching and swiftly hid behind a pillar.

 

Dolores soon joined him as absolute hoards of people started to pour into Casita’s courtyard. He could see even more out in the garden, too many to fit inside.

 

Jeez, was all he could think. Other than that, his mind had gone blank.

 

“It’s a lot,” Dolores whispered. 

 

Bruno nodded. “Sí,” he whispered back. “Does this, uh…Is this normal?”

 

“Hm…Well, when we have parties we tend to do big ones,” Dolores said with a little sigh. “It can be a lot of fun, but it can be…Hm, overwhelming.

 

In that case, Bruno was content to live behind this pillar forever and ever, thank you. It could be cosy if he brought down a pillow and blanket.

 

“There you two are!” Félix appeared from the crowd like a sunbeam, dressed all in yellow. He grabbed them both, pulling them towards the main staircase. Little lanterns had been placed on every second step. “Come on, Alma’s about to do her speech!”

 

“Speech?” Bruno’s eyebrows rose. “What speech?”

 

“To announce Antonio’s birth,” Félix said cheerfully.

 

“But wasn’t his birth already announced? She said the council did it.”

 

“Ah, she’s got a whole thing to cover, it’s tradition. Besides, she’s gotta introduce you.

 

Oh. Right. There was…There was that.

 

Was it too late to hide behind the pillar again?

 

Félix got them through the crowd with ease and Bruno tried very hard to ignore how anyone who spotted him gasped, or pointed and whispered. A lot of them smiled, Sofia Guzman gave a small, encouraging nod while Mariano waved energetically. He saw Padré Martinez cross himself. A few people looked teary-eyed.

 

As soon as they were on the stairs, Bruno ducked behind Julieta. She reached back, her hand gently circling around his wrist, her thumb tapping against his pulse-point. She faced the crowd with a smile and whispered to him, “It’ll be okay.”

 

Pepa glanced back, Antonio safely cradled in her arms. “Don’t worry,” she said quietly as Alma took centre-stage (so to speak). “If anyone bothers you, I’ll sweep them away in a tornado.”

 

Bruno managed a genuine smile then, trying not to laugh at the image.

 

Alma, holding the candle, cleared her throat. Everyone fell silent, even the little children. The whole crowd was watching her with rapt expressions and Bruno didn’t know how Alma didn’t flinch under their gazes or run away. She stood there with a benevolent smile, her bearing regal but welcoming. Every inch the perfect leader.

 

Bruno tried to imagine standing in her place. He’d probably just topple down the stairs and the magic candle would fall from his hands and set the flowers on fire.

 

“Welcome,” Alma said, her voice carrying. “And thank you all for coming. As you know, my daughter Pepa has just given birth to my beautiful new grandson: Antonio Madrigal.”

 

There was some polite applause and people craning their necks to get a look at the baby. Pepa beamed at Antonio, Félix had an arm around her waist. Dolores smiled at her parents and new baby brother and Camilo stuck close to Pepa’s side, grinning at Antonio and poking his tongue out at him.

 

“It is another blessing on our family,” Alma said warmly. “A gift in itself.”

 

More applause and sounds of agreement. 

 

“And there is one more blessing,” Alma said. Past the serenity, even Bruno could hear the barely suppressed joy in her voice. “One more miracle. My friends on the council will have already told you-”

 

Julieta’s grip on his wrist tightened ever-so-slightly. “You can do this,” she whispered to him.

 

“-but my son, Bruno Madrigal, has been restored to us after forty-five long years. Three months ago, he survived terrible dangers and arrived here safely, home at last.”

 

The clapping turned to outright applause then and Bruno flinched back as people cheered. He saw Dolores wince slightly, but she kept smiling. Agustín glanced at him and gave a thumbs up. 

 

“You may ask how we know,” Alma said once the noise died down. “Well, aside from my son’s resemblance to his father-” She looked at Bruno with a small, fond smile then. “He still had the very same blanket I wrapped him in the night we were given our Miracle.”

 

But that wasn’t just it, was it? Mirabel had figured it out first. Yes, the blanket confirmed it, but Mirabel was the one to put the pieces together before anyone else even really looked at the blanket. She made sure Julieta and Dolores knew.

 

“And my son has a Gi-”

 

“Mirabel figured it out.”

 

Everyone fell silent. Everyone was staring.

 

They were staring at him.

 

Oh God, had he said that out loud? He did, didn’t he? Shit.

 

Julieta’s grip tightened but she was gentle as she tugged him forward to stand next to her, not behind her. On shaking legs, Bruno stood there in front of the whole damn village. His heart was pounding, his palms were sweating and he was quite sure he was going to throw up here and now.

 

“Mijo,” Alma said.

 

Bruno shook his head. “Mirabel figured it out first,” he said. His voice shook, but it carried. “She put the pieces together and she told Julieta with Dolores. So…So she made sure they could break it to me gently when we…When we all got home. And uh, everyone saw the blanket then. But Julieta still knew to be careful when she told me because of Mirabel.”

 

Mirabel was gaping at him, eyes big and wet. Isabela glanced between them with a small frown, but Luisa smiled. Agustín, his hand on Mirabel’s shoulder, was utterly beaming. Julieta was smiling softly, her eyes shining.

 

The villagers were all watching.

 

Alma looked at the candle, shining steadily, then at Mirabel. She took a deep breath and said, “Yes. Mirabel put the pieces together that same morning.”

 

When Bruno held his hand out, Mirabel didn’t hesitate to step forward and take it. She clung to him tightly, still staring at him like she was about to cry, but her smile was wide and bright as always.

 

Alma turned to face the village again, her chin up. “And my son has a Gift,” she said. “He has already opened his door. In fact, he’s had part of his Gift since he was five, just like his sisters. Just like all of the Madrigals.”

 

Mirabel’s grip tightened so much that Bruno winced.

 

“My Bruno can see the future,” Alma announced and she sounded so proud, so happy. The complete opposite of how Bruno had always viewed his green dreams.

 

And it seemed the gathered villagers thought similarly to Alma: there was a collective stunned gasp and then cheers and applause rang out, utterly deafening. Bruno wondered if the people outside could even hear properly, if they knew just what they were cheering for.

 

Alma gestured for him to come forward, to stand next to her with Pepa. 

 

He did, but he brought Mirabel with him. He felt himself standing taller, chin up. It wasn’t until he met Alma’s gaze that he realised he was copying her stance.

 

The candle glowed, shining like a star.

 

“You have a wondrous Gift,” Alma said softly. Bruno barely heard her over all the cheering and clapping. “And you are home. You are one of us, Bruno. I know you can do this.”

 

But what was ‘this’ exactly? Bruno didn’t dare ask. He just nodded and tried to smile.

 

Everyone was so excited, everyone was watching him and Bruno dearly wished to hide somewhere quiet.

 

“Chicquita,” he said. “I have a very important job for you.”

 

“Oh?” Mirabel blinked up at him.

 

Bruno grinned. “Don’t let me hide in my room.”

 

She giggled then, swinging their joined hands. “I think I can manage that, Tio.”

 

He’d have to hold her to that, because it was time for the party to begin in earnest.

Notes:

Fun fact: originally, Bruno wasn't going to interrupt Alma. In general, he's still (typically) way too anxious for that. But once I decided on what exactly she'd say, I knew there was no way that Bruno would let Mirabel be left out of the narrative like that

Best Uncle Bruno Madrigal strikes again 💕

Next up: baby Antonio makes a great distraction for nosey villagers as Bruno avoids the crowds

Chapter 35: Fiesta

Summary:

The double celebration of Antonio's birth and Bruno's return kicks off in earnest.
In which villagers are invasive, Antonio makes a great buffer between Bruno and the crowds, and some members of the family are happy to avoid the crowds with Bruno all together.
Alma doesn't need to know they skipped out, right? So long as they return for the fireworks.

Notes:

It's not a Madrigal party without villagers sticking their noses in Madrigal business

Trigger warning: Bruno has a small panic attack, but it passes quickly

Songs I listened to while writing:
Keep Holding On, by Avril Lavigne
The Family Madrigal, from Encanto
The Greatest Show, from The Greatest Showman
Firework, by Katy Perry
Edge Of Great, from Julie And The Phantoms
I'm Still Here, from Treasure Planet

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Keep holding on, ‘cause you know we'll make it through, we'll make it through. Just stay strong, ‘cause you know I'm here for you, I'm here for you. There's nothing you can say, nothing you can do. There's no other way when it comes to the truth. So keep holding on, ‘cause you know we'll make it through, we'll make it through.” - Keep Holding On, Avril Lavigne




As soon as Alma announced, “Let the celebrations begin!” Pepa herded Bruno and Mirabel to the stone bench outside the kitchen. She figured it was a decent spot: they could stay seated and watch the party without being in the shadows or in the thick of things. If Mirabel wanted to go dance, she could. If Bruno wanted to hide in the kitchen, he could.

 

And if Pepa wanted to sneak more food from the kitchen, or needed a quiet place to feed Antonio, she could do that too.

 

She’d dance later. For now, she kept a close eye on her brother.

 

“Mirabel figured it out,” he’d said. Indeed she had.

 

And he hadn’t let anyone forget it.

 

“Good job,” she told him. “They should know that Mira put it together first.”

 

Mirabel’s smile was bashful, but very pleased. She couldn’t seem to stop smiling and Pepa couldn’t blame her; it was a big deal. 

 

Mirabel was only a kid, only ten, but she’d realised who Bruno was first.

 

Well, if you wanted to get technical about it, Casita knew all along but Pepa wasn’t going to count the magical sentient house in that. No offence to Casita.

 

Pepa loved Mirabel to bits, God knew she did; she was such a sweet, bright kid and one of the few people who could make Camilo sit down and be quiet. But there was always a tiny, quiet part of Pepa that worried about…Well, about making Mirabel feel bad. Pepa’s Gift was so obvious and so hard to control. How many times had people taken even the barest flicker of a cloud so personally? Pepa’s Gift often felt like a leash, the bane of her existence, but (as Mamá had said before) Pepa had one. 

 

If she could give Mira her Gift to cheer her up, she would. Then she’d feel guilty, because Pepa didn’t even like her Gift, so why would she want poor Mirabel to be stuck with it?

 

Félix said she was letting her anxiety take over. He’d tell her to take a deep breath, step back, and work through her feelings one step at a time. 

 

Mamá would just say, “You have a cloud.”

 

Pepa wanted Mirabel to know she was included, to know she mattered. Just, you know, without overdoing it. No one wanted an overbearing aunt. 

 

But this was a good start, wasn’t it? Acknowledging that Mirabel worked out Bruno’s identity first was important. 

 

Another important thing was making sure no one crowded her brother.

 

Pepa’s eyes narrowed as a group of villagers approached: Osma Pezmeurto, Osvaldo Ortiz, Catalina Arias and Manuel Sanchez.

 

Osma, always the blunt one, immediately asked, “Can we see your room?”

 

Bruno choked on his own breath. “W-what!?”

 

Pepa had to wonder if Osma realised how such a question could be taken. She sighed, a cool breeze momentarily ruffling her hair.

 

“Well, that’s always part of the Ceremonies,” Osma said. “The parties always end up in your new room.”

 

“This isn’t a Ceremony,” Pepa said firmly. She couldn’t imagine her shy brother letting the entire village into his room, let alone when the room was still new to him. 

 

If Pepa wanted him to feel safe, then pushing a massive crowd on him was not the way to do it. 

 

“Oh.” Osma frowned in disappointment, arms folded. “But isn’t that part of the celebration?”

 

“Er, no,” Bruno said. His fingers were crossed. Mirabel copied him. “N-not this time, lo siento.”

 

“Well, will there be a proper Ceremony?” Catalina asked.

 

“I, um…I don’t think so…” Bruno glanced at Pepa.

 

“No,” Pepa said. Clear skies, clear skies. “This is the celebration we’re having. You want another party, go throw one.”

 

Catalina gave an offended huff and stomped off towards her husband. Osma shifted uncomfortably, arms still crossed.

 

“Well, it’s pretty cool you’re a Madrigal!” Osvaldo said brightly. “Not that it wasn’t cool to meet you before, but of course being a Madrigal is pretty amazing!”

 

Bruno glanced at Mirabel and Antonio and smiled, nodding in acknowledgment. 

 

“When can we see your Gift?” Manuel asked, stepping closer. “Seeing the future’s pretty damn impressive. You’ve gotta show that off!”

 

Oh, Pepa saw this coming a mile away. 

 

“I just got a new fish,” Osma said. “Can you tell me how long he’ll live?”

 

“I’m not a vet,” Bruno said, looking completely lost. Mirabel scooted closer to him.

 

“No, with your Gift,” Manuel said, a touch impatiently. “You can see everything, right?”

 

“Um…N-no…” Bruno shrank back against the decorative butterfly wall. Pepa swore she saw a spark of inspiration in his eyes. He sat up straighter, took a deep breath and said, “I don’t know how it works yet. Sorry.”

 

“Bummer,” Osvaldo said with his usual cheerful smile. “Have fun tonight!” He walked away towards Ofelia, humming to himself. Ofelia was giving him the usual You Better Have Been Polite frown. 

 

“So you won’t help?” Manuel demanded, frowning. “C’mon, Osma’s question is easy!”

 

“He doesn’t know how it works yet,” Pepa snapped. Her cloud appeared, swirling over her head. 

 

“Is everything okay?” came Alma’s voice, her usual cool imperial tone. She glided through the crowd like a queen, raising her eyebrow at Osma and Manuel.

 

“We wanted to know when Bruno’s gonna start looking at the future for people,” Manuel said. He didn’t manage to look Alma in the eye; he shoved his hands in his pockets, gaze flickering away from Alma to the sky. “That’s all, it was just a question.

 

Alma’s lips pursed. Osma gave her a somewhat sheepish smile. For a long moment, Alma just stared at them.

 

“It is a complicated Gift,” Alma said. She spread her hands in supplication. There was that diplomatic voice again. “It will take time to master it. But rest assured, we are the Madrigals; we will always be there to help, you know that.”

 

“Of course,” Osma said. She turned to Bruno. “Let me know when you’re gonna look.”

 

“...Sure,” Bruno muttered, staring at the ground.

 

She wants him to look into the future for a fish, Pepa thought. She’d never been more unimpressed in her life. A goddamn fucking FISH!? A cheap little goldfish from the local pet store! God Almighty, it wasn’t as if she’d brought home a dolphin! 

 

If Alma could read her mind, she’d wash Pepa’s mouth out with soap, adult or not.

 

Osma drifted away, glancing back at them. Manuel huffed but nodded in agreement with Alma and sulked away.

 

Pepa stuck her tongue out at his back. To her amusement, so did Bruno and Mirabel.

 

When Alma turned back to them, all three of them were sitting up straight, angelic smiles on their faces and Pepa’s cloud was gone.

 

“Give it time,” Alma said, squeezing Bruno’s shoulder. “We will work on it, Brunito.”

 

Before Bruno could say anything, Alma was distracted by Señora Guzman calling her over with Padré Martinez and Señor Del La Cruz. Bruno watched her go and sighed, shoulders hunching in.

 

“They’re not gonna let up, are they?” he asked quietly, looking at Pepa. “Even if I say no.”

 

Pepa took one look at the fear in Bruno’s eyes and once more hardened her resolve. She drew herself up, meeting his gaze.

 

“Too bad for them,” she said. “Because they’ll have to go through me.”






Maybe twenty minutes into the party, Pepa had the bright idea to pass Antonio to Bruno. After that, it was easy to distract people with, “Oh but look at the baby!”

 

It worked like a charm.

 

Señora Guzman (“Oh, call me Sofia, dear,”) cooed over Antonio. Padré Martinez told Pepa that Antonio was, “Absolutely beautiful,” and Señor Del La Cruz nodded in approval. He had the most perfect posture that Bruno had ever seen; it gave Alma’s a run for its money. 

 

“He’ll be a fine Madrigal,” he said.

 

“Why does he make it sound like a club?” Bruno whispered to Mirabel. She giggled, hands pressed over her mouth.

 

“We should make club passes,” she whispered back. “Exclusive Madrigal Club.”

 

Camilo came racing over, throwing himself onto the bench next to Mirabel. He grinned at Antonio, eyes shining as the baby waved his tiny fists and made little squeaking sounds.

 

“I can’t wait ‘til he can play,” Camilo said excitedly, bouncing in his seat. “I’m gonna show him the best games and the best hiding spots, just you wait!”

 

“I don’t doubt you, kid,” Bruno said.

 

Finally, the council members moved on. Alma gave Antonio a loving smile, straightened Camilo’s shoulders, adjusted Pepa’s necklace and tucked Bruno’s hair behind his ears. There was the briefest of pauses before she smoothed Mirabel’s hair and tilted her chin up with the slightest of smiles. 

 

Without a word, she followed the council.

 

Mirabel looked surprised, but delighted. It was such a small gesture, but her eyes were shining.

 

Bruno wasn’t sure if he wanted to smile for her or cry. Because he knew that feeling; trying so hard to earn approval that even the barest hint of it can change your whole day. 

 

But Alma was her abuela. She shouldn’t have to try so hard.

 

Why did she try so hard anyway? He knew Alma was strict and hard to impress; he’d figured that out within a day of meeting her.

 

But Alma was so…So soft with Isabela and warm with Julieta. With everyone else she was certainly stern and had high standards, but he wouldn’t necessarily call her cold. It was obvious she loved her family.

 

When it came to Mirabel, it was like there was a wall there. Alma was the adult in the relationship, shouldn’t she be making the effort?

 

Or was Bruno being unfair, jumping to conclusions about a situation he was brand new to?

 

He looked down at Antonio’s big brown eyes and couldn’t help but smile as the baby yawned.

 

“Yeah, buddy, me too,” he said softly. “This is exhausting, huh?”

 

God, it was exhausting. Parties simply weren’t his thing, let alone a party where everyone kept coming up to ask him questions. At least Antonio was a good buffer. 

 

He heard ‘Welcome home,’ from so many different people. People who insisted on shaking his hand or clapping him on the shoulder. A few old ladies even kissed his cheek and he tried not to flinch.

 

And so many more asked when he’d start using his Gift, when he’d look into the future. They had so many questions they wanted answered: Will my first grandchild be a boy or a girl, will Ricardo propose this year? Will the harvest be good, will my baby be healthy, will I get a dog or a cat? My pet bird is sick will he be okay? I want to ask a girl out, will she say yes? Should I go on a picnic next weekend, will hiking be safe, will my birthday party go well?

 

So, so many questions.

 

Bruno could feel himself starting to shake. His chest tightened, he couldn’t seem to swallow.

 

“To the kitchen,” Pepa whispered. He handed Antonio to her and ran.

 

Only a moment later, Julieta followed. He wondered if she saw him run or if Pepa somehow signalled her. No doubt, Pepa would be distracting Mirabel and Camilo.

 

Bruno was pacing up and down, tugging on the collar of his shirt, fighting for air.

 

“Easy,” Julieta said gently. She didn’t touch him and he was grateful for it. “Can you tell me what happened?”

 

“T-there’s just-” He forced himself to swallow, trying to clear the lump in his throat. “Everyone keeps touching me and crowding me, and they won’t stop asking about this stupid Gift! I don’t…I just want them to leave me alone. I- I keep expecting the migraines to start again, parties always made them worse, y’know? And they’re not helping. Some of their questions are so- so…So stupid! Estupido! They want to know if they should buy a cat or a dog, how should I know that!?”

 

“Oh dear,” Julieta sighed. She looked nothing but sympathetic. “They’re already pushing it, huh?”

 

“Sí!” Bruno nodded, continuing to pace. He knocked on the kitchen counter and table as he passed them, and his own head. “I like sitting with Pepa and the kids, why can’t they leave me alone and let me do that instead? And they keep asking to see my room, it’s creepy!”

 

Julieta nodded. She sat at the kitchen table and asked, “Well, do you like sitting with me?”

 

Bruno paused in his pacing, giving her a bemused smile. He tugged on his hair, no doubt only tangling it more. “You know I do,” he said.

 

She smiled and patted the table. Bruno sat across from her. When she held her hands out, he took them. Her thumbs rubbed across his knuckles and he finally managed to take a deep breath; he held it for six seconds and breathed out shakily.

 

Julieta kept holding his hands, her thumbs still rubbing across his knuckles gently, left to right and never changing pace.

 

“Then we’re gonna sit here,” she said. “You and me. We’ll stay here until you feel better, okay?”

 

“But you’re gonna miss-”

 

“Bruno, I don’t care about the party right now. I care about you.

 

What was he supposed to say to that? 

 

He knew what he wanted to say.

 

Bruno took a deep breath and managed to meet her eyes as he said, “Gracias, hermana.”

 

Her grin was bright enough to rival the sun, her grip on his hands tightening. 

 

“De nada, hermano,” Julieta said, her smile only growing.

 

A few moments later, Pepa joined them, Antonio still in her arms and Mirabel and Camilo trailing after her.

 

“Well, they’re nosey,” Pepa said in an over-dramatic voice. She gave an exaggerated sigh and sat next to Julieta. “But we already knew that.”

 

“Osvaldo was okay this time,” Bruno said with a tiny smile. “No questions about fire.”

 

“Ay, I could have strangled him for that!”

 

“Quite sure Ofelia did,” Julieta said with a smirk to match Pepa’s.

 

“Psst, Tio.” Camilo tugged on his sleeve and Bruno was sure his smile was sappy, but who could blame him? Camilo just called him Tio. 

 

Bruno also didn’t trust that innocent face for a second.

 

“When you see the future, can you look at my report card?” Camilo whispered. “So I know if I need to hide it from Mamí and Papí.”

 

Bruno snorted with laughter, ignoring the confused looks from Pepa and Julieta. His sisters. 

 

“Uh, sure, kid,” he snickered. “I’ll try. Or you could just study.”

 

Camilo blew a raspberry. “Boring!” he said.

 

Mirabel looked unimpressed. “You’re asking him about your grades, aren’t you?” she asked flatly.

 

“Mira!” Camilo wailed as Pepa thundered.

 

“Camilo Madrigal, don’t bother your uncle!”

 

“It’s a good question, Mamá!”

 

“If you’re so worried about your grades, then study!

 

Mirabel looked viciously gleeful as Camilo wailed about betrayal. Antonio squinted at them both; he may have only been a few days old, but he looked utterly confused.

 

“Mood,” Bruno muttered. Pepa continued to nag. Julieta giggled and turned to Bruno.

 

“She acts tough now,” she said, leaning forward with a conspiratorial smirk. “But she was worse at studying. She once threw her textbook out the window.”

 

“They don’t need to know that, Juli!”

 

“Ay, and Bruno didn’t need to know the stories you told. It’s called karma, Pepi.”

 

Bruno had to clap his hands over his mouth to keep from laughing too loudly. Mirabel and Camilo happily egged their mothers on, demanding more stories.

 

Bruno didn’t even notice his anxiety had completely drained away.

 

“Hm, I once poured glue all over a bully’s Maths book,” Bruno said. “Completely stuck the pages together. Pretty sure the nuns wanted to blame me, but they had no proof.”

 

“Don’t give him ideas,” Pepa said quickly.

 

“Cool!” Camilo said with a wide grin. Pepa sighed, looking down at Antonio.

 

You won’t be a troublemaker, will you?” she cooed. “You’ll be a little angel, sí?”

 

“Don’t worry, Tia,” Mirabel said earnestly. “I’ll make sure he behaves.” She even crossed her heart.






Dolores could hear her family in the kitchen. She knew they were all expected to stay in the courtyard, or at least wander around and socialise. They were supposed to sit in the living room or dining room and chat; they were supposed to wander the gardens and say hello to everyone. They were meant to dance and be joyful all night long. They’d already arranged to let Antonio and Pepa rest in Dolores’s soundproof room later, until everyone finally left. 

 

“It will be a perfect night,” Abuela said so many times, her eyes shining with anticipation.

 

Dolores didn’t want to let her down. Of course she didn’t. This was such an important night: not only did she have a new baby brother, but her missing Tio was home.

 

Truth be told, Dolores felt like an idiot for not realising sooner. But Mirabel had always been a smart, inquisitive little girl, and she quickly became Bruno’s little shadow. So she couldn’t say she was surprised that Mirabel put the pieces together first.

 

The party was loud, but it certainly could have been worse. She didn’t feel the need to cover her ears or take a few minutes in her room. Once the fireworks started though, she’d definitely need a break.

 

Overall, Dolores could honestly say she was having fun. She kept one ear on the conversations in the kitchen, smiling as her mamá and Tia teased each other and Tio Bruno’s heartbeat calmed down. He was feeling better. Good.

 

But then Mariano asked Isabela to dance and Dolores’s smile stiffened. She was standing right next to Isabela and, as usual, no one so much as glanced at her.

 

Isabela’s Shadow, the villagers used to joke when they were children. More like in Isabela’s shadow.

 

Isabela smiled graciously and took Mariano’s arm, letting him lead her into the dancing crowd. 

 

And of course she could hear every word of their conversation.

 

“You look beautiful tonight, Isabela.”

 

“Thank you. Blue suits you, is that shirt new?”

 

Dolores fled to the kitchen, hands over her ears.

 

Everyone looked up in surprise when she came in, but she didn’t care. She just took a seat next to Camilo and kept her hands over her ears, biting her lip.

 

“Mija?” Pepa stood, eyes wide. “Amor, is it your ears? Are you okay?” She was careful to keep her voice down and Dolores loved her for it.

 

Jerkily, she nodded. What could she really say? I really like Mariano but he’s only got eyes for Isabela, like everyone else in the village, and I’m tired of it. That wouldn’t go over well.

 

Camilo’s little hands rested on top of hers, his face screwed up in concern. Dolores managed to give him a small smile and she saw the relief in his eyes.

 

And bless her Tio Bruno: he immediately made her a mug of chocolate santafereño. Well, he made one for Mirabel and Camilo too, but he handed her the first one.

 

It was the biggest mug too.

 

And he knew. He knew, so he mouthed Mariano?

 

Dolores gave a tiny nod, sipping her drink.

 

He didn’t push her, but he squeezed her shoulder and Tia Julieta grabbed some of the extra food and put together a big platter for them all to share.

 

Dolores would let them know when the fireworks would be starting. For now, she wasn’t in a rush to return to the courtyard and neither were they. 

 

For now, it was nice to be away from the crowd.






“Abuela says it’s time for the fireworks,” Dolores suddenly said, tilting her head.

 

“Vamos,” Julieta said, standing and ushering them all to the courtyard. Bruno could see the rest of the family gathering in the middle of the courtyard. Alma was looking around, trying to spot them no doubt. She smiled when Julieta waved.

 

The villagers were all over the courtyard, gathered in groups and standing against the walls, on the stairs, on the second floor. So many more were outside, Bruno could see them through the open windows.

 

As Mirabel took his hand, he suddenly remembered another green dream.




There was a massive party in Casita, so big that not all the guests could fit inside. Bruno could see many more in the garden, milling about on the grass. It looked like the entire village was there. Fireworks went off and Mirabel was holding his hand, beaming up at him.




“Oh,” he whispered, eyes widening.

 

He barely even heard Alma addressing everyone again. He smiled down at Mirabel, squeezing her hands as the fireworks began.

 

Félix put his hands over Dolores’s ears, giving her a reassuring smile. Pepa covered Antonio’s ears as he let out a startled yelp, but thankfully didn’t start crying. Camilo whooped as the fireworks exploded overhead, sending out bright multi-coloured sparks.

 

Luisa’s smile was shy and she swung her arms, looking at the ground as the villagers clapped and cheered. Isabela clapped daintily, smiling and watching the fireworks, giving small happy cries as they soared overhead. Agustín clapped at first, but quickly put an arm around Julieta’s waist. They looked at each other and smiled; they weren’t as demonstrative as Pepa and Félix, but Bruno could easily see the love in their eyes.

 

“We need fireworks more often,” Mirabel said, swinging their joined hands.

 

“Maybe get poor Dolores some ear plugs,” Bruno said. “Does she have any?”

 

“Hm? No, I don’t think so. She has ear muffs though.”

 

He somehow doubted ear muffs would do much against fireworks and magical hearing, but Dolores looked genuinely cheerful, especially when she grinned at Antonio.

 

Alma was holding the candle again, standing right in the centre of the courtyard, her eyes shining and her smile jubilant. 

 

Bruno could ignore all the stares from the villagers for a while. For just a little while, they simply didn’t matter. 

 

This whole night had been overwhelming for multiple reasons, but Bruno’s anxiety seemed to finally be taking a break. Oh sure, he couldn’t wait to run upstairs and go to bed, but he could handle this.

 

He could block out the villagers, all that clapping and cheering, all those eyes and focus on the smiles on his family’s faces, Mirabel’s hand clinging to his own and the fireworks in the sky.

 

Pedro, he thought. Papá? If you’re really watching, I hope you can see this.

 

…Juan? I kept my promise. I think…I think I’m going to be okay this time.

Notes:

*forever crying over Pedro, Bruno and Juan*

Sometimes you just need a break from the crowd 💕

Next up, a small timeskip (only about a week). In which Bruno and Isabela have a talk, which prompts Alma and Bruno to have a talk. One goes better than the other.

Chapter 36: A Hurricane of Jacarandas

Summary:

Bruno has a gift for Mirabel, Agustín and Félix. But when he catches Isabela once more lashing out at Mirabel, an important talk ensues between the three of them.

This time, a good vision comes true.

What else can Isabela do?

Notes:

🎵A hurricane of jacarandas, strangling figs, hanging vines! Palma de cera fills the air as I climb and I push through! What else can I do?🎵

We're back! I was hoping the fit Bruno's conversation with Alma in here too, but things were getting wwwaaaayyyy too long. So next time we'll be creeping back into angst territory 👀👀

For now, Isabela gets to explore her Gift with the help of her long-lost uncle and cheerleader of a little sister

Songs I listened to while writing:
What Else Can I Do? from Encanto
Not Your Barbie Girl, by Ava Max
Kings And Queens, by Ava Max
Sit Still, Look Pretty, by Daya
What The Hell, by Avril Lavigne
Power, by Little Mix

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“I'm so sick of pretty, I want something true, don't you? You just seem like your life's been a dream since the moment you opened your eyes. (How far do these roots go down?) All I know are the blossoms you grow, but it's awesome to see how you rise. How far can I rise? Through the roof, to the skies, let's go!” - What Else Can I Do? Encanto




Mere hours after the party (finally) ended, Bruno snuck down to the kitchen. 

 

He had an idea and it wouldn’t leave him alone.

 

He had to stand on tip-toe to reach the plates he wanted and he nearly dropped them when he heard a little “Hm!”

 

Bruno whirled around and saw Dolores standing in the doorway. He offered her a sheepish grin.

 

She looked at the plates in his hand for a long (and frankly awkward) moment.

 

Then, smiling, she put her finger to her lips.

 

“I don’t know,” she whispered, pushing past him for a glass of water. Squeaking again, she left quickly.

 

Okay, at least she’d keep it quiet. Besides, Bruno should have everything ready by morning.

 

He hurried back to his room and spread the three plates out on his new art table: Mirabel’s plate, Agustín’s plate and Félix’s plate. Compared to the other plates, theirs were plain. Sure, they had a leaf pattern, but it wasn’t specialised, not like the others.

 

Esma squeaked at him. Luz slept soundly.

 

Bruno got to work.

 

On Félix’s plate, he painted little rainbows and yellow umbrellas. Bruno thought it suited him: Félix was cheerful and optimistic, always managing to make Pepa smile. He never cared when she made it rain; he just cheerfully held his yellow umbrella over them both, finding ways to cheer Pepa up again.

 

Agustín was a little trickier. Painting bees felt a little mean, though Bruno could admit he was sorely tempted, if only for his own amusement. He suspected Agustín would see the funny side too. But no; instead he painted musical notes (Agustín was brilliant on piano) and, after some consideration, he painted little needles with blue thread looping through them. According to Julieta, Agustín was a tailor by trade and still made a lot of his own clothes, as well as clothes for the family.

 

Finally, there was Mirabel’s plate. Hers was probably the easiest.

 

Bruno painted butterflies all around the edge of the plate: blue, purple and pink butterflies. In the centre of the plate he painted one big butterfly, getting all of the family’s colours on its wings, like Mirabel’s favourite skirt. 

 

That kid loved butterflies, always happily pointing them out when she spotted one. And, honestly? They suited her. If Bruno was going to associate cheerful, stubborn, colourful Mirabel with anything, it would surely be a butterfly.

 

When all three plates were done, Bruno sat back and examined them. There were no smudges, and the patterns looked symmetrical enough. He was happy with them.

 

He just hoped that Mirabel, Agustín and Félix would be too.

 

He also didn’t dare guess what time it was, but he was exhausted after everything.

 

As Bruno climbed into bed he said, “Uh, Casita?”

 

The floor rattled.

 

“Anyway you can help dry those plates faster? So they’re ready to use by breakfast?”

 

Another rattle, a sense of agreement.

 

“Gracias,” Bruno said, finally lying down.

 

He was out like a light.






When he woke up the plates were dry and, what’s more, they had fresh glazing.

 

Bruno whistled lowly, impressed. “Wow, Casita,” he said, tapping Agustín’s plate. “You really know how to work fast.”

 

The shutters swayed in agreement. His bedroom door opened and the floor rattled again, nudging him towards the door. It seemed Casita was excited this morning, impatient to get the surprise over with.







Mirabel took one look at the smiles on her mamá and Tio Bruno’s faces and paused suspiciously in the doorway. When adults smiled like that, it usually meant something was up.

 

Tia Pepa had smiled like that when she announced she was going to have a baby. But Mamá said she didn’t want any more babies (all while kissing Mirabel’s cheek and saying she was her baby) and Tio Bruno couldn’t have a baby by himself, so what was with the smiles?

 

Her papá smiled like that when he had a surprise, usually a present or a new song. 

 

Then she spotted the plates, all laid out on the table like usual. For a moment, she was confused. She couldn’t see her plate, or Agustín’s and Félix’s; instead there were three new plates, as colourful as the others and-

 

Oh! Mirabel’s eyes widened and she ran into the dining room, ignoring her mother’s “Good morning!” as she leaned her hands on the table, gaping at the new butterfly plate.

 

It was her plate! Her name was on it! All the plain old leaves were gone, replaced with butterflies and a huge multi-coloured butterfly in the centre. Its wings were blue, purple, pink, yellow, red, magenta, gold, orange and green. All the colours in their family.

 

Her mamá couldn’t paint. Neither could Papá.

 

Teary-eyed, Mirabel stared open-mouthed at her uncle.

 

“...Surprise?” he said with an awkward laugh, sipping his coffee. Julieta giggled gleefully, eyes shining. She looked younger somehow, weirdly like Isabela.

 

“Do you like it, mija?” she asked gently.

 

Mirabel nodded. She nodded again and again. Squealing, she threw herself at Bruno, flinging her arms around him in a tight hug.

 

“Careful, the coffee!” he yelped as some splashed on his wrist. Whoops, Mirabel hoped it wasn’t hot.

 

Julieta took the cup and Bruno hugged Mirabel properly. She clung to him like a koala (as Félix would say), grinning fit to burst.

 

“It’s so pretty!” she said. And it’s mine, it’s mine, it’s like the others now! Only hers was even more colourful than the others. None of the other plates had a design in the middle. 

 

“Gracias, Tio Bruno,” she said, pulling back to grin at him.

 

“De nada, chiquita,” Bruno said, ruffling her hair. His grin was a lot like Julieta’s. 

 

And that made it like Mirabel’s too.

 

The thought only made her smile even wider.

 

She couldn’t wait to see Félix and Agustín’s faces!






Julieta watched, beaming, as Félix swooped Bruno up into a bone-crushing hug. He hugged him so tightly that Bruno’s feet left the floor and he let out a choked, “Oof!”

 

Agustín looked suspiciously teary-eyed, but he didn’t crush her brother. His hug was more gentle and he sniffled as he clapped Bruno on the shoulder.

 

“What’s all this, Brunito?” Alma asked, peering at the brightly painted plates.

 

“Well…Everyone else has one,” Bruno said with a shrug. “It just, um…” He knocked on the table and his own head. “It’s only fair, right?”

 

Alma looked thoughtful. Pepa had a rainbow over her head.

 

Luisa, looking shyer than ever, whispered something in Bruno’s ear. Bruno nodded with a small smile. “Sure thing, kid,” he said.

 

“What did she ask?” Julieta asked as they finally began to eat.

 

“If I could add a unicorn to hers,” Bruno whispered.

 

Luisa had always loved unicorns as a little girl. They were her favourite fairytale creature, with mermaids as a close second.

 

Julieta hadn’t realised she still loved them so much. Enough to want one on her plate. 

 

A unicorn among dumbbells. Something mystical and beautiful among strength and force.

 

Julieta liked it. And if it was what Luisa wanted, then she should get it.

 

She looked at the delighted smile on her husband’s face; the same smile he’d had when Bruno added him and Félix to the mural.

 

Bruno was right: it was only fair. They shouldn’t be left out. They were Madrigals too.

 

It was an old argument. Alma had taken such a long time to warm up to Agustín at all. Although she’d taken to Félix straight away, she often seemed to just forget to include them. It was one of the few things Julieta didn’t back down on: her husband and brother-in-law should always be included, never forgotten.

 

Many people in town didn’t get the memo. Her own mother often forgot. 

 

They were just plates. It was such a small thing.

 

But, just like the mural, it stood for much more.

 

She looked at Mirabel, who kept beaming at that plate like it was a miracle of her own, and she wasn’t sure if she wanted to smile or cry. Maybe both.






Breakfast itself was uneventful. It wasn’t until everything was cleaned and put away, and everyone started on their usual duties, that things took a turn.

 

Bruno was heading back to the kitchen to fetch some more food for Esma and Luz when he heard Isabela speaking.

 

“Are you still looking at that plate?” she demanded. Bruno peered around the doorway and saw her standing over Mirabel. Mirabel was leaning against the counter, holding her plate.

 

“Yes,” Mirabel said, nose in the air. “It’s pretty.”

 

Isabela scoffed. “It’s just a plate. Don’t you have anything better to do?” Her smile turned downright nasty. “Oh wait, you don’t.

 

Scowling, Mirabel stood up straight, clutching the plate tighter. “Tio Bruno painted it for me,” she snapped.

 

“God knows why,” Isabela said.

 

That was more than enough.

 

“Because she deserves it,” Bruno said firmly, outright stomping into the kitchen.

 

Isabela looked mortified. Mirabel perked up at the sight of him. When he held his arm out, she ran to him. Bruno tucked her against his side, staring at Isabela.

 

Gone was the poised young woman, or the sneering girl of mere seconds ago. She smoothed down her immaculate dress, swallowing heavily. Her eyes were wide, her expression petrified. 

 

“Tio,” she said, her voice high-pitched. “I, um…”

 

“Save it,” Bruno said tiredly. “Unless you have something nice to say, don’t say anything at all. Pretty sure that’s taught to all kids.” Gently, he took Mirabel’s plate and put it away in the cupboard with the others. “C’mon, chiquita,” he said and led her away. 

 

The rat snacks could wait. They still had plenty, really. Enough for the rest of the day.

 

“How about some painting?” he asked Mirabel.

 

“Ooh, yes! I want to paint Casita,” she said, rushing ahead of him to his room. Casita’s floor tiles bounced in her wake.

 

“Tio?” Isabela stood in the doorway, hands clasped before her. She looked smaller, younger. “I…Are you gonna tell Abuela?”

 

“No,” Bruno said flatly. “But I should tell your parents. She’s your sister and she’s ten. What could she possibly have done wrong? You don’t talk to Luisa like that.”

 

“She’s just- I only-” Isabela couldn’t seem to get the words out. “You don’t get it!”

 

“Then explain,” Bruno said, arms folded.

 

“I can’t.

 

“Then you can explain it to your parents,” Bruno said and he went after Mirabel.






He would have told Julieta and Agustín. In fact, the entire time he and Mirabel were painting, he was planning on what to say.

 

He looked at his drawing of Juan, pinned to the wall and imagined just how bluntly his friend would put it. But being gruff about it probably wouldn’t be the best approach. 

 

There was a knock on the door and Bruno snapped back to reality. He looked at his painting, half-finished (the jewel coloured river with golden butterflies in the sky) and at Mirabel’s promised painting of Casita, with the entire family standing together outside.

 

“Can I come in?” Isabela asked through the door, her voice surprisingly timid.

 

Mirabel scowled and stuck her tongue out.

 

Bruno sighed. “Yeah,” he said. “Yeah, c’mon kid.”

 

Mirabel groaned at that but otherwise didn’t protest.

 

Isabela came in, fidgeting with her hands. Her hair hung over her shoulders, falling in her eyes. For once, she wasn’t smiling. She looked shy and very small.

 

“That was…That was mean of me,” she said, staring at the floor. “The plate thing. It- it was sweet. And it is pretty.” She sighed and looked at Mirabel. “Look, I’m…I shouldn’t have said that. It’s good that you like it. So, um-” She winced and finally said, “I’m…Sorry.”

 

Mirabel was openly gaping. Her sudden giggle was high-pitched and surprised.

 

“You just don’t want Tio Bruno to tell Mamá!” she accused, pointing at Isabela.

 

“It’s not…” Isabela sighed, stepping closer. “It’s not that.”

 

Bruno watched her curiously. She glanced at him and said, “I don’t want you to think I’m some bully.”

 

“I don’t,” Bruno said. “But I still need to tell your parents.”

 

Isabela nodded, tucking her hair behind her ears. “I know,” she said. “Well, I figured anyway.” She looked at Mirabel again, expression torn between remorse and impatience.

 

Mirabel just looked suspicious. 

 

“I’m sorry,” Isabela said, sounding a lot less stiff this time. More genuine. “It was nasty. I was nasty, okay?”

 

Slowly, cautiously, Mirabel nodded. “Okay,” she mumbled, looking lost. “I, uh- I guess I believe you?” It was more of a question than a statement.

 

Either way, Isabela looked less tense. She hesitated but, with a wave of her hand, a crown of roses appeared on Mirabel’s head.

 

Mirabel touched the flowers gently, mouth agape and eyes wide. “Oh,” she whispered.

 

It was pretty, but Bruno remembered the green dreams he’d had.

 

“Can you grow other stuff?” he asked.

 

“Of course,” Isabela said. “You saw the decorations yesterday.”

 

“No, I mean like other kinds of plants.”

 

“Oh,” Isabela said, slightly shaking her head. Her smile was strained. “No, I’m afraid not.”

 

“Oh,” Bruno said. “Well, you will.”

 

They both stared at him. Even Isabela looked openly stunned.

 

“What?” both girls demanded.

 

“It was in two green dreams,” Bruno said. “Before I opened my door. You were growing a bunch of different stuff; palm trees, cacti, sundew, jacarandas. That sort of thing.”

 

They were both still gaping.

 

“What?” Bruno asked. “I mean, it was a good dream! No one was hurt and you seemed really excited.” Panic beat at the back of his mind, demanding attention the more they stared at him in silence.

 

Finally, just as Bruno thought he’d truly have a panic attack, Isabela whispered, “I can do that?”

 

“Well, yeah,” Bruno said, shifting uncomfortably.

 

“How old was I?” Isabela asked, sounding somewhat frantic.

 

“Uh, you looked…About the same as you do now, actually,” Bruno admitted.

 

Isabela stared off into space, a dazed look on her face. Mirabel touched the flower crown again, watching her sister curiously.

 

Maybe Bruno should have kept his fat mouth shut.

 

“...I like cacti,” Mirabel said.

 

Isabela’s head jerked like she’d been slapped. She stared at Mirabel, eyes wide. “You do?” she asked.

 

Mirabel nodded. “They’re pretty cool,” she said. “They’ve got all sorts of different shapes and sizes, and some have flowers on them. I read a book in school about them, and how they absorb-”

 

“Absorb water quickly,” Isabela finished softly. “And hold onto it for a long time.” Almost shyly, she smiled. “I read that book too.” She looked at her hands and that dazed expression left: she looked curious and determined, a glint of excitement in her eyes.

 

“I want to try,” she announced. “Right now!”

 

With that, she ran from the room.

 

For a second, Mirabel and Bruno could only stare in shock.

 

Then they shook it off and ran after her.






They were in the back garden. Isabela planted her feet wide apart, chin up. She looked like she’d been issued a deadly challenge.

 

She took a deep breath, holding her hands out in front of her. 

 

Nothing happened.

 

“Come on,” she muttered.

 

Nothing.

 

Finally, impatience crept into her expression. Her eyes narrowed and she clenched her fists. “Come on!” she shouted.

 

And it worked.

 

Pop!

 

Only a few paces away was a little round cactus with a strange orange flower on top.

 

“Whoa,” Mirabel gasped. “Isa, look!”

 

“...I just did that,” Isabela murmured. She sounded shocked. She hurried towards the little cactus, kneeling down. Cautiously, curiously, she poked it and it grew to twice its size and grew two asymmetrical ‘arms’ and sprouted more orange flowers at its base.

 

For a moment, Isabela only stared, kneeling on the grass.

 

Then she squealed loudly, oddly like Mirabel and picked it up. She held it out proudly, eyes shining.

 

“Look!” she cried. “I did it!”

 

“You did it!” Mirabel cheered.

 

Laughing, Isabela stomped her foot and a whole row of different kinds of cacti sprung up across the garden, disappearing into the jungle. Gently, she placed the first cactus on the patio steps and turned back to the garden.

 

“What else can I do?” she whispered.

 

They both looked at Bruno.

 

Grinning, he shrugged. “Hey, it’s not my Gift,” he said. “You figure it out.”

 

Isabela’s smile widened. She stood with her shoulders back, fists clenched.

 

She threw herself into it full force.

 

Isabela jumped off the patio, racing through the garden. With each step, new flowers appeared behind her: bright, colourful orchids so different from her usual soft, pastel ones.

 

There was the promised jacaranda as she spun around, skirts whirling. She stomped on a rose and a row of sundew appeared in its place.

 

Bruno had to yank Mirabel away from it.

 

But, the entire time, both girls were laughing and cheering.

 

“What else!?” Mirabel cried. 

 

The garden was covered in bright, colourful plants; sharp and unusual things, beautiful and wild. Disorderly with no real rhyme or reason to it, but wonderful.

 

Just the sort of colourful, chaotic scene that Bruno would like to paint.

 

Isabela held her hands out to them. “Come here,” she said.

 

Surprisingly, Mirabel raced to her. Bruno followed just behind.

 

Honestly, he didn’t trust that smirk on Isa’s face one bit.

 

He was right to be suspicious: the ground suddenly shuddered beneath their feet as Isabela raised her hands to the sky and a palma de cera grew underneath them, pushing them up and up into the sky.

 

Bruno yelped and crouched down, hardly daring to move. They were going to break their necks. They were going to fall and smash their skulls open, then Julieta would bring him back to life to kill him again.

 

On the other hand, Mirabel whooped with glee. “Since when are you cool!?” she demanded of Isabela.

 

Isabela looked out at the village, eyes shining. Her hair fluttered in the breeze; the rose buds had fallen out. Or perhaps she’d taken them out when Bruno wasn’t looking.

 

“All this from a cactus,” she murmured. “Who knew?”

 

All of this within an hour. Bruno couldn’t help but be amazed.

 

But there was one pressing problem.

 

“Uh, Isa?” he asked. “How do we get down?”

 

Isabela smirked. 

 

Vines wrapped around their waists.

 

“Isabela, don’t you dare!” Bruno yelled.

 

Too late. Isabela leaped from the palma de cera, dragging Bruno and Mirabel with her. Mirabel screamed and laughed, clapping all the while; Bruno just screamed as they flew through the air.

 

It was different from Isabela’s usual vines. Normally they carried her gracefully, but this time she swung with her own strength, swinging from the tree to the roof, and from the roof to a massive pile of red, purple and blue flowers in the courtyard.

 

While they were suspended in midair, the vines disappeared, letting them drop in a free fall.

 

Isabela was laughing even louder than Mirabel.

 

As they fell, she grabbed both of their hands.

 

The three of them landed safely, cushioned by the bright flowers.

 

“I’m dead,” Bruno muttered, eyes shut and heart trying to beat right out of his chest. “I’m dead, I died, I’m dead.”

 

“We’re okay!” Mirabel said happily. “We landed, see!”

 

“Nope, not looking.”

 

“Scaredy-cat,” Mirabel huffed.

 

Bruno only opened his eyes at Agustín’s stunned voice; “What in the world!?”

 

He sat up, still certain he was about to have a heart-attack, to see Agustín and Félix standing in the front doorway, gaping at them. They looked completely and utterly gobsmacked.

 

Grinning, Isabela jumped to her feet. She held her cupped hands out and another cactus appeared.


“Papá!” she giggled gleefully. “Papí, look what I can do!

Notes:

Self-indulgent Isabela playlist! https://open.spotify.com/playlist/0I0iHz8k4qRE2eoW5uItOm

Next up, the family discusses Isabela's discoveries. Alma discusses Bruno's visions with him...

Chapter 37: Losing Sight

Summary:

The family reacts to Isabela exploring her Gift. Alma is spurred on to speak to Bruno about his Gift.

The magic is strong. They are strong, they are the Madrigals.

But Bruno can't help but feel it won't go the way Alma hopes.

Notes:

Chapter title is a reference to Alma's quote: "I was given a miracle. A second chance. And I was so afraid to lose it that I lost sight of who our miracle was for."

Songs I listened to while writing:
What Else Can I Do? from Encanto
She's So Gone, from Lemonade Mouth
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Various Storms And Saints, by Florence And The Machine
Chasing The Past, from Encanto
Dysfunctional, by Fallulah
All The King's Horses, by Karmina

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“The monument of a memory, you tear it down in your head. Don't make the mountain your enemy. Get out, get up there instead. You saw the stars out in front of you, too tempting not to touch. But even though it shocked you, something's electric in your blood.” - Various Storms And Saints, Florence And The Machine




Mirabel couldn’t keep the giddy smile off her face. Who knew that Isabela could be cool!

 

Their papá and Tio Félix were gaping at the cactus in Isa’s hands and the big pile of flowers they’d landed in.

 

“And look outside!” Mirabel said, pointing to the window. “Look what Isa can do!”

 

They did. They stared and did a double-take and gaped some more. Papá even took his glasses off to wipe them and looked again. Mirabel couldn’t help but giggle.

 

“Isa, that’s…” He laughed and shook his head. “That’s amazing!

 

“Where’d you learn to do all that?” Tio Félix asked. He hurried into the kitchen and they all followed him; he was heading outside for a better look.

 

“Just now, actually,” Isabela admitted. They stood together in the garden, looking at all the wild, colourful and spiky plants. “Tio Bruno saw it happen.”

 

“Wait, with your Gift?” Agustín asked.

 

“Hm…” Tio Bruno was gripping his arm. His smile was shy. “Well, y-yeah. It was a little while ago. I nearly forgot about it.”

 

“Well, I don’t think any of us will be forgetting this any time soon!” Félix laughed, gesturing to the garden. “Is that a palma de cera?”

 

Bruno shuddered, eyeing it distrustfully. “Don’t remind me,” he muttered, stepping away from it. Mirabel giggled at him. To her surprise, so did Isabela.

 

Agustín hugged Isabela tightly, even rocking her back and forth. Normally, Isabela would complain she was too old for it, or her own hugs would be looser and quicker. This time, she clung to Agustín, beaming at him. 

 

She looked really happy, but also like she might start crying.

 

Mirabel crept closer. “You’re okay, Isa,” she said. “Right?”

 

Even crazier, Isa smiled at her. 

 

“I am,” she said. She nodded and said, seemingly to herself; “Yeah. I…I am.” 

 

This time, when she waved her hand and made Mirabel a flower crown, it wasn’t just roses. This time it was bright yellow alstroemerias, blue hydrangeas and orange anthurium.

 

Isabela tapped her own head and another orange anthurium grew, replacing the rosebuds she’d removed. 

 

It clashed with her pale pink dress. Strands of her hair were falling in her face and over her shoulders, looking windswept and tangled.

 

Mirabel liked it.

 

She told Isabela so, and her sister looked stumped. After a moment of staring at Mirabel like she wasn’t sure what to do, Isabela just grinned and asked, “Want a cactus?”

 

Mirabel decided that yes, she would like a cactus.

 

Isa even made sure Mirabel’s cactus had a blue flower. Camilo was gonna be so annoyed he missed all of this!






Isabela made the huge pile of flowers disappear, but she was quick to show Agustín and Félix more new flowers and plants. She stomped her foot and the back wall of the courtyard was suddenly covered in a rainbow of bright flowers, all in shades of blue, purple, red, gold, pink and green. Snake plants appeared from the ground and vines crept up the pillars. They were new vines, thicker and studier than the ones Isa normally swung on. They were purplish in colour and covered in pollen; yellow, red and blue.

 

And there was the sundew again. Bruno would steer clear of that patch.

 

Some of the pollen got on Isabela’s hands and on the skirt of her dress, but she didn’t seem to notice. She ran around the courtyard, radiating joy, with more energy than Bruno would have guessed her capable of.

 

Needless to say, everyone else was in for a surprise when they got home. Well, except Dolores. She walked in calmly, studied the courtyard with approval and gave Isabela a quick hug.

 

“I like it,” she said. “It’s bright.”

 

Camilo, on the other hand, was indignant. “You had fun without me!?” he demanded.

 

“Yes,” Isa said flatly. But as Camilo kept up his theatrical complaints about betrayal and no one loving him, Isabela sighed and grew another vine for him to swing on.


Camilo quickly stopped complaining after that.

 

Pepa stopped dead in the doorway, her mouth hanging open. Antonio cooed, as if in approval.

 

“Whoa,” Pepa said.

 

Isabela fidgeted nervously, her smile hopeful. “Do you like it, Tia?”

 

Pepa looked around, slowly starting to grin. “Yeah!” she said. “You did all this? I didn’t know you could.”

 

“Neither did I,” Isabela admitted. She looked relieved when Pepa kissed her cheek.

 

Luisa almost didn’t notice at first. She came home yawning, giving everyone a tired wave. “Hey, how was everyone’s- what!?

 

Isabela, Mirabel, Dolores and Camilo snorted with laughter. Luisa stood frozen to the spot, mouth open and eyes wide.

 

“I- who- ISABELA!?

 

“That would be me, yes.”

 

“You…This is so cool!” Luisa stretched her arms out, gesturing to the now chaotic courtyard. “When did you do all this?”

 

“I just started today,” Isabela said, looking surprised but pleased. Luisa hugged her so tightly that Isa’s feet left the ground. Isabela let out a choked huff of laughter, patting Luisa on the back.

 

Then there was Julieta and Alma. They arrived together and it was hard to say who looked more stunned.

 

“Isa?” Julieta stepped forward carefully. “You…Amor, did you do all this?”

 

“I did,” Isabela said. Her eyes flickered to Alma. She tightly crossed her arms; it looked like she was hugging herself. She swallowed heavily, looking at the yellow pollen on her skirt nervously.

 

Bruno stepped closer to her, one hand on her back. She glanced at him and nodded gratefully, standing up straight, chin up defiantly. This close, Bruno could see the fear still swimming in her eyes.

 

Mirabel reached up and gently uncrossed Isabela’s arms so she could take her hand. Luisa stood just behind Isa, her hand on her sister’s shoulder.

 

Julieta looked at her daughters with wonder. Her smile was soft and delighted.

 

“Isa, amor,” she said, but Alma cut her off.

 

“Oh, Isabela, your dress,” she said. “What is going on here?” She looked at the courtyard like she didn’t recognise it. “It’s a mess!”

 

Isabela flinched.




Hidden away in the dark, a patch of cracks that had been slowly disappearing froze.

 

One began to grow again, branching out.




“No it’s not,” Agustín said firmly. “She’s been working on this all day.”

 

“But it was perfect before,” Alma said. She took in Isabela’s appearance again, sighing heavily and shaking her head. “We’ll never get those stains out! And what is on Mirabel’s head?”

 

Mirabel touched her flower crown, cringing back. “It’s just flowers,” she mumbled. “They’re new.”

 

“I…I made it for her,” Isabela said, looking at the ground. “To apologise. I was mean to her earlier.”

 

Abuela stepped closer, examining the flower crown. She looked at the orange anthurium in Isabela’s hair, sighing heavily and shaking her head in disapproval. She took the flower from Isabela’s hair and dropped it onto the ground.

 

Isabela looked devastated. 




A crack grew. Another stopped shrinking. 




“Isa worked really hard on it,” Mirabel protested. “She’s trying new stuff!”

 

“Isabela, amor, you’re too old for such theatrics,” Alma said, ignoring Mirabel entirely. “You’re nearly a grown woman.”

 

“I…I…” Isabela’s eyes watered. “Yes, Abuela,” she whispered.

 

Bruno couldn’t stand the defeat in her voice. It felt like a punch to the stomach.

 

Isabela hadn’t done anything wrong. She wasn’t hurting anyone. She’d kept the truly dangerous plants away from everyone, especially from Camilo and Mirabel. She was in control of her magic. 

 

So why was Alma so angry?

 

“Mamá, be reasonable,” Julieta said. She stepped forward, looking at Alma pleadingly. “What’s the harm in exploring her Gift? If she can do it, isn’t that a good thing?”

 

“Julieta, we are the Madrigals. We have an image to maintain, an entire community to strengthen and lead. We cannot run around making messes, covered in stains!” Alma looked at Isabela despairingly. “You’re always such a good girl, what happened?

 

“I just wanted to…” Isabela looked seconds away from tears.

 

Bruno stared at his mother and felt like he was falling down a dark tunnel.

 

So often, during his childhood, his only wish had been ‘I just want her to be nice.’ That was all. His mother was a completely unknown figure; he didn’t even know if she had died with his father or not. He’d come up with a million and one scenarios and daydreams but, overall, his one wish had been for her to be kind and loving. 

 

From his three months of observations, he knew Alma loved her family. She was strict, she was stern; she could be harsh. But she loved them. 

 

So why wasn’t she even hearing Isabela out? Julieta was right: what was the harm in something new? 

 

“It was me,” he blurted out.

 

Everyone turned to stare at him.

 

“I saw it,” Bruno continued. “I saw it happen in a green dream.”

 

“Brunito…” Alma looked lost.

 

“I saw it was gonna happen,” Bruno said, keeping his hand on Isabela’s back. He didn’t look away from Alma. A part of him wanted to run, screaming that this was bad, so so bad. He was going to be blamed again, he was going to get hurt, he- he…

 

He had to stick up for Isabela.

 

“So when she came to apologise to Mira, I told her,” Bruno continued, trying to keep his voice steady. Alma wasn’t going to hurt him, he knew she wouldn’t. She wasn’t. “She wanted to try straight away, so I encouraged her. I saw it. It was gonna happen one way or the other, Alma.”

 

“You…Saw this…With your Gift?” Alma asked slowly, somewhat stiffly.

 

Gift. Sure. Keep calling it that.

 

But, just this once, it had made someone else smile, so he nodded. “I did,” he said. “I saw all of this, I saw Antonio’s birth, I saw- well, a bunch of stuff.”

 

“When?” Alma asked.

 

Bruno shrugged uncomfortably. “It was in the green dreams,” he said. “A few weeks ago now. Well, Antonio's birth was only a few days ago obviously, but um…The rest was a while ago.”

 

That’s why you said you’d come with me to the fields!” Pepa cried. She gave a sudden bark of laughter. “Ay, you can be sneaky, hermanito.”

 

“I wasn’t trying to be sneaky,” Bruno protested, though Pepa was grinning at him.

 

Alma just kept staring. She didn’t look angry anymore. She looked confused.

 

“...It was always gonna happen,” Bruno said quietly. “You can’t control the future. Trust me, I know. And it’s not a bad thing, doesn’t this just mean she’s stronger than you thought?”

 

To his relief, she looked thoughtful then. She looked around slowly, eyes roaming over every inch of the courtyard.

 

“It’s a good thing,” Agustín added. He looked at Alma impatiently. 

 

Camilo was clinging to the vine Isa had grown for him, eyes wide and nervous. Mirabel looked at Alma pleadingly, Luisa was still and steady as a statue. Isabela just kept her eyes on the ground. Dolores stepped closer, her concerned gaze on Isa.

 

“I think it’s pretty cool,” Félix said, leaning against one of the pillars. He sounded casual and looked casual too, but Bruno saw his jaw clench. “It’s impressive. Who knows, maybe she can grow fruit or vegetables, eh?”

 

Isabela perked up then, a spark of interest in her eyes. “Maybe…” she murmured.

 

“I like it,” Pepa said. She looked defiant but a cold breeze rustled her hair and clothes. “We could use some more colour.”

 

“We’re supposed to strengthen our community,” Julieta said softly to Alma. “This just shows that Isabela’s strong too.”

 

Silence reigned. Even Casita was totally still. 

 

Waiting.

 

Alma gave an impatient sigh. She smoothed her already perfect dress. “I want all the carnivorous ones removed,” she said firmly. “Is that understood?”

 

Isabela nodded quickly. “Yes, Abuela.”

 

“Get this courtyard back to normal. If you want to practice with…this, you will do so outside. And keep the garden in some semblance of order.”

 

Isabela nodded again, eyes wide and hopeful.

 

Alma gestured to her dress. “And for heaven’s sake, Isabela, get cleaned up. Otherwise…” She sighed again, more gently now. “Well, I am fond of alstroemerias. Some more of those would be nice.”

 

Smiling tentatively, Isabela waved her hand and more alstroemerias grew from a nearby vase.

 

Alma nodded, almost with approval.

 

Then her eyes zeroed in on him.

 

“Bruno,” she said, holding her hand out. “Walk with me, will you?”






They walked arm in arm through the town. The sun was beginning to set, casting a golden glow on the streets and he could smell flowers in the air. It was still comfortably warm. Many people called out greetings to Alma, on their way home from work or simply out for a walk themselves. To Bruno’s bafflement, they greeted him too.

 

He didn’t manage to say hello or good evening like Alma, he didn’t even wave, but he managed to smile at them. It probably looked awkward, but at least no one could say he ignored them.

 

“I told you that you could do this,” Alma said softly, a world away from the angry matriarch she’d been in Casita. “I knew you could. Certainly, Isabela behaved…strangely today. But I will admit, you all made some interesting points. Her Gift has grown. That must be a good sign, sí?”

 

“Er, well, I’d assume so,” Bruno said. They stopped in the square, right by the mural.

 

Alma looked at it, her eyes softening. “We need to add you and Tonito,” she said. “But that can wait a while. For now, we need to discuss your Gift, mijo.”

 

Bruno’s blood froze in his veins.

 

“No,” he said. “N-no, I can’t. I don’t even know how to look on purpose!” I can't, I won't, Pepa promised I don't have to...

 

“Bruno, please hear me out. You saw what Isabela can do and encouraged her accordingly, yes? It was messy, certainly, but we’ll work on that. If she can grow new things to help people, it will strengthen our home and keep us safe. It will keep the Miracle burning. The Miracle my Pedro sacrificed himself for.” She cupped his face in her hands, her gaze desperate. “Don’t you see, mijo? You helped. You can continue to help. Not just the children, but others. Your Gift is a wonder.” Her voice broke then. “As miraculous as your return. I promise you, no one will harm you here. This is not like the rest of the country, Bruno. We rely on each other here. We are the Madrigals. We have a duty and we must be strong. I know you can be strong, niño. I’ve seen it.”

 

Bruno’s heart was racing, his palms were sweating. He wanted to scream that Alma didn’t understand. This wasn’t a Gift, it had only ever hurt him.

 

“Bruno. My baby. I promise I will keep you safe.” Her voice hardened. “I will never let anyone take you again. Your papá protected you once. This time I will.”

 

Swallowing, feeling cold all over, Bruno looked at the mural. Los Madrigals. It was so strange to think he was meant to be up there. He still didn’t think of himself as Bruno Madrigal. He tried not to think of himself as Bruno Expósito either. He’d just been Bruno for so long. 

 

El chico del río.

 

He didn’t know how to be a Madrigal. Did he? Leaders and protectors, when had Bruno had ever done anything like that?

 

“We must earn our Miracle,” Alma continued more gently. “Work and dedication will keep our Miracle burning and our home safe. We are the Madrigals, it is our duty. You are a Madrigal, mijo.” She tucked a stray strand of hair behind his ear. “You are your father’s son. I know it.”

 

You are your father’s son. He’d like to be. But Pedro had died trying to save him, he’d died trying to save his whole family. His death had somehow created magic. 

 

Could Bruno ever do something like that? Could he be that brave?

 

It occurred to him then, that Pedro should be on the mural too.

 

He stared at it, his ears ringing, his heart pounding. He didn’t feel brave. He was no leader or protector. Sure, he’d wanted to help Isabela but how did that compare to leading a village?

 

What if he let the family down? Isabela’s green dream had been nice. He’d seen some very interesting flashes when he touched his door and he wrestled with the idea of telling them about every flash he'd seen, including Dolores with her newborns and Mirabel with the candle.

 

But that bit of good luck would surely wear out, right? He’d see something bad again. Sooner or later, he'd see something horrible.

 

And then what? 

 

“Please, Brunito,” Alma said, taking his hand. “Please try.”

 

He felt very small. He gripped his arm, bit his lip and tried to think.

 

He had to look away from the mural, feeling smaller by the second. He looked at the town square, at the kids running around and people heading home. He watched people close their shops and smelled cooking in the air. He could hear a dog bark and people calling to each other from down the street.

 

And every single person that passed looked at Alma with awe, greeting her eagerly.

 

Bruno was hardly up to scratch. 

 

This village was protected by magic that kept out all threats. A safe little bubble.




Fire, screaming. Gun shots, furious shouts. Smoke in the air, blood on the ground.

 

Juan, his dead eyes staring blankly at the sky.



According to just about everyone, nothing like that could ever happen here because of the magic. 

 

If Bruno didn’t use it, would he harm it? Or would he harm it by doing something wrong, seeing something awful? 

 

How did it even work? He didn’t know.

 

Alma looked at him hopefully, still tightly holding his hand.

 

Sighing, Bruno lowered his head, eyes on his feet.

 

Juan, Pedro. A ruined street, a blood soaked river.

 

Bruno thought of the kids, all his nieces and nephews, who were surely miracles in their own right. Bright, clever, amazing kids, who were safe and sound behind these magic mountains…

 

And his resolve to never look again crumbled.

 

“Okay,” he whispered. He cleared his throat and tried again. “Okay. I…I’ll try. But I can’t promise anything.”

 

He’d never, not once looked into the future on purpose. Where was he even supposed to start?

 

Alma kissed his cheek, smiling at him proudly as if he’d already done it.

 

“That’s my boy,” she said. “I knew you could do it.”

 

That makes one of us, Bruno thought. He only managed a weak nod, not even attempting a smile this time. She’d surely see right through it anyway.

 

Oh God, what had he just agreed to? How was he supposed to do this?

 

Bruno wondered and fretted about it all the way back to Casita. No answer magically revealed itself to him.




Crack.

Notes:

You didn't think I forgot about the cracks, did you? Just because some healed earlier doesn't mean they all did 😏 We may not be following the movie, but they'll still have a role to play in the coming arc.

The family unknowingly used the exact trigger words needed to make Alma actually THINK about Isabela exploring her Gift: "encourage, help, strong." Even the idea that Isa could grow fruit/vegetables is making her think.
And then for Bruno to say he SAW this happening with his Gift, AND Antonio's birth? That Isabela doing this was..."fated" perhaps? Isa's Gift grew so shortly after her son's return?
Well, she's sure thinking alright. Not in a "freedom" way unfortunately, but she's not about to blow up about it anyway.

But this has pushed at her resolve for Bruno to use his Gift. He saw two good things: Isabela growing stronger and Antonio. He actively encouraged Isabela. HELPED her. He acted like a Madrigal. In this moment he is reminding her strongly of Pedro.
Alma thinks Bruno using his Gift will keep him, and their home, safe. She is absolutely TERRIFIED of losing him again.
Bruno remains uncertain, but now Alma (unintentionally) has him worried: if he DOESN'T use it at all, would that mean the magic stops working? Would that put the kids in danger?

We know the answer is no. But we've got two heavily traumatised people bashing heads here.

Unfortunately, shit is about to hit the fan and Alma will quickly realise she shouldn't have pushed it.

Chapter 38: Caving In

Summary:

Bruno attempts to look into the future.

It can never seem to go smoothly...

Notes:

The Angst: *rolls by on heelies with an ice coffee* "Miss me?"

TRIGGER WARNING: Bruno has a big panic attack this chapter (as well as a smaller one) and sees a lot of visions involving death, violence, murder and suicide. Bruno also hurts himself by hitting his head and slamming it against the ground. Proceed with caution, skip if you need, and stay safe

Songs I listened to while writing:
Masterpiece, by Motionless In White
Bruno's Tower, from Encanto
Going Under, by Evanescence
I'll Be Good, by Jaymes Young
Where Butterflies Never Die, by Broken Iris
Sweet Dreams Are Made Of This, by Emily Browning
Where Is My Mind, by Yoav
Help I'm Alive, by Metric

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Illustrate all my pain and set it all ablaze. Burn, and set it all ablaze. So how do I apologise and put the tears back in your eyes? When every canvas that I paint is a masterpiece made of my mistakes. And in the light of my demise, I see my failures in your eyes. Every canvas that I paint is a masterpiece made of my mistakes.” - Masterpiece, Motionless In White




The very next day, Bruno reluctantly climbed the stairs and approached the big circular door. Even the corridor leading to it felt chilly.

 

Inside, the chamber was dark. A ring of sand surrounded the edge of the room, all along the walls. It was a big chamber, but maybe it felt so big because it was so completely empty. There was nothing in here except sand.

 

The pattern on the floor caught his interest at least: one big circle in the centre of the room, surrounded by spirals that fanned out across the floor, with triangular shapes in each one. 

 

It always seemed to be spirals or hourglasses. More hints at time.

 

Bruno had no idea what he was doing. He lingered in the doorway, looking around the sandstone chamber. Or maybe cave was a more apt description; it certainly felt like one.

 

Well, no answers magically revealed themselves. The room didn’t change. 

 

Sighing, Bruno forced himself to take a step, then another and another. On shaking legs, he approached the centre of the room. It seemed as good a place to start as any.

 

Once he reached the centre the door slammed shut, leaving him in darkness.

 

He yelped, tripping backwards, his hands outstretched in front of him, trying to find- something, anything. He almost expected monsters to jump out of the dark, or someone to grab him. Did he have to be in the dark for the green flashes to work now? They’d always just come whenever they wanted to.

 

“Okay,” he whispered to himself, slowly lowering himself to the ground. “Okay, okay. I can do this. I can. I think.”

 

He sat there in the dark, shaking all over. Why was it so icy cold in here? The rest of his room was warm and comfortable, bright and cheerful. But this place felt like a tomb.

 

He wanted to get out of here.

 

“Just see something,” Bruno told himself. “Come on, just look. Look for something boring.” Something easy, something dull. Something no one could complain about or hurt him for.

 

Nothing happened. He stayed kneeling on the ground, his hands pressed against the chilly stone and his breathing began to pick up the pace. It was so quiet in here, too quiet, too dark, too much. His head swam, his thoughts became jumbled with panic and Bruno ran from the room, bruising his arm with how much force he threw himself against the door.

 

He slammed it shut behind him and raced down the corridor, down the stairs and back to his bedroom.






On the second day, after breakfast, Bruno looked at the candle on Alma’s windowsill.

 

“Don’t suppose you can give me a hint, can you?” he asked dryly, leaning against the wall. Overall, trying to sound confident, or at least look like he was.

 

The candle shone steadily, sending out little sparkles of light, brighter than any other candle Bruno had ever come across. Casita’s floor rattled beneath his feet; it felt like the house was shrugging.

 

“Yeah,” Bruno said to Casita. “I don’t have a clue either.”

 

He felt sick with nerves as he returned to his room. 

 

Once he reached the top of the stairs, he looked at the dim corridor with wide eyes: carved into the wall was a big hand, pointing towards the door. There was writing inside the hand: Su Futuro Espera. 

 

“Well, that’s not ominous at all,” Bruno muttered. He had to look away from it as he passed, his skin crawling.

 

Was it just him, or did the corridor seem dimmer today? He’d like to think it was just his nerves getting to him, but this whole place put him on edge. Why couldn’t it be nice in here, like the rest of his room? Maybe if it didn’t freak him out so much, he could concentrate and figure out what to do…

 

Nothing happened that day either. 

 

Well, no. That wasn’t entirely true.

 

Bruno stood in the centre of the cave, for a long time, his fists clenched. He closed his eyes, forcing himself to take slow and steady breaths. He couldn’t stop shaking, but then there was a change: a pressure building behind his eyes.

 

There was a flash of green and nothing else. No future, or even a glimpse of one, but it was something. That had to matter, right?

 

Bruno opened his eyes, blinking green spots out of his vision. He felt light-headed.

 

“Did you see anything?” Mirabel asked eagerly at lunch.

 

Bruno shook his head. “Not really,” he admitted. “There was a green light, but nothing happened.”

 

“Don’t worry,” Agustín said, clapping him on the back. Bruno didn’t jump this time, which he’d consider an improvement. “You’ll get there!”

 

But did Bruno want to get there? He didn’t want people to come and demand that he answer their questions all day. There were some things they were simply better off not knowing about in advance. But…But…If using this so-called Gift was what kept protecting everyone…

 

Bruno looked at Mirabel and Camilo. He looked at Isabela and the new purple anthurium in her hair. He looked at Dolores, quietly eating her lunch and Luisa who kept glancing at the window, clearly eager to set off again.

 

And he looked at Antonio, fast asleep in his bassinet next to Félix. Only a few days old and already so, so loved. Safe and sound.

 

He had to try. 






On the third day it worked.

 

On the third day, it all went to hell.






Bruno nudged the sand with his foot, squinting at it. He’d brought a candle in here with him this time. Surely the sand was here for a reason, right? Was he supposed to do something with it? Or was it just decoration after all?

 

If it was just for decoration he’d like something that didn’t get in his hair and clothes, thank you.

 

He felt jittery and sick with nerves. He wanted to see something simple; the donkeys in the field, someone fishing at the river, or maybe someone shopping in the town square. Something nice and boring, an everyday occurrence. 

 

Bruno lifted a handful of sand and let it fall through his fingers as he brooded on what to try next.

 

And it happened again: that pressure in his eyes.

 

The world flashed green, the sand flashed green and Bruno scrambled back from it with a frightened yelp.

 

The sand lay there, completely normal and dull. 

 

Shaking, he laid his hand on it.

 

The pressure came back and the sand flashed again. A cool breeze came from nowhere, rustling his hair and clothes, making the cave feel colder than ever. The candle flickered but, thankfully, didn’t go out.

 

“Okay,” Bruno whispered. “Er- wow.” So the sand was supposed to help. Somehow. Bruno wasn’t really sure how he was doing it.

 

But he’d done something! It was another puzzle piece put into place.

 

“It won’t be so bad,” he muttered as he carried fistfuls of sand to the centre of the cave, spreading them out in a circle. “You’re just going to look for something boring. Something very, very boring and simple and then you can stop.”

 

But other people wouldn’t ask boring questions. They’d ask the hard questions. 

 

Will my father die, will my baby be healthy, is my spouse cheating? Will the harvest be okay, will there be a flood, will there be an earthquake? Is there danger coming?

 

Osma Pezmeruto already wanted to know when her pet fish would die. How long would it take for someone to ask about a person?

 

He was already scared, he was so scared. The second he saw something bad, he’d be blamed. It had happened before. And then what? He couldn’t leave, not now. Not when he knew who his family was. Not when he’d actually found them. 

 

Bruno wanted to run and find Alma, and tell her he’d changed his mind. He wanted to scream and cry. He wanted to go back to his bedroom and hide.

 

Damn it, why couldn’t he just do this? Why couldn’t he be brave? He just needed to look, just once, that was all. Look and then stop, take a break. He could…He could set boundaries, tell people there were some questions he wouldn’t answer…

 

Would they listen? Would anyone ever listen?

 

His chest felt far too tight as he slammed his hands into the circle of sand.

 

The pressure built up and up. The world flashed green again and again. The sand sparkled with streaks of green light.

 

And it all exploded around him.




Another village, another raid. All that was left were ruined buildings, smoke clogging the air and blood coating the roads.




“Stop it,” Bruno whispered, frozen with terror as the sand swirled around him. The circle had burst and it danced around him instead.




Bogotá, he knew Bogotá. He recognised this very street.

 

He watched, deafened by the screams around him, as a woman jumped from her balcony.




“Stop it!” Bruno screamed, pulling at his hair. Tears streamed down his cheeks, he couldn’t catch his breath and it wouldn’t stop. 




A ship sank, a forest fire spread. A train crashed, killing almost all the passengers. 

 

A man stalked a woman down a dark street, a knife in his hand.

 

A woman watched impassively as the house before her burned. People were screaming inside.

 

There were men on horseback, armed with swords and guns, riding through the jungle.

 

And Bruno recognised the man leading them.




“Stop, stop, please STOP!” Bruno screamed. He slapped his forehead again and again, willing it all to stop, to go away. He didn’t want to see any of this, he didn’t want to see those men again. 

 

Not the men who destroyed his home. Not the men who murdered Juan in front of him.

 

He squeezed his eyes shut but it kept coming. The future roared and rushed through his head like the waves of the ocean. The room rumbled around him and he was dimly aware of Casita’s fear.

 

Unthinking, bent over, Bruno bashed his head against the floor.

 

It stopped. Momentarily, it stopped. The pressure was still there behind his eyes, the world was still in shades of green, but the future was gone.

 

And it was quickly coming back. There was another flash, a family hurrying through a jungle.

 

Bruno ran from the cave, stumbling over his own feet. Something wet was on his forehead, he couldn’t breathe; he nearly fell down the stairs. On the last step, he tripped and went headlong, landing on the floor.

 

The main room was warmer, the sand circle here made a quiet sh-sh-sh sound and Bruno never wanted to look at sand again. 




People screaming, people dying. A battlefield, bloodsoaked grass. Buildings exploding as bombs detonated inside them.




The whole room shook and Bruno could plainly feel Casita’s fear now.

 

“Make it stop,” he sobbed, closing his eyes again, tugging on his hair. He managed to get to his knees but bent over again, his forehead against his legs. “Stop, stop, stop it.

 

“Bruno!” someone called and Bruno couldn’t say who it was. He just knew the future kept flashing before him, showing him awful, horrible things. He saw people dying, people hurting one another and he was terrified. 

 

“Bruno!” Arms wrapped around him, forcing him to sit up and he screamed before he could stop himself, certain he was about to be attacked again, his head bashed in, stones thrown at him or a belt whipped across his back.

 

“I’m sorry,” the voice said and Bruno forced himself to listen. “It’s just me, it’s Agustín!”

 

Agustín. What was he doing here?

 

There was someone else there, just in the edge of Bruno’s vision, but the green was taking over everything and Bruno couldn’t stop shaking, he couldn’t stop crying and he couldn’t breathe. Was this how he died, crouched on the floor?

 

“Bruno, it’s okay,” Agustín was saying, but it sounded so muffled. Bruno couldn’t concentrate. Someone else spoke and it sounded like Félix, saying “What do we…”

 

But then Bruno was gone, swept away by the future.




A family made their weary way through the jungle. They had only one cart and it didn’t hold many supplies. It also held an old woman, huddled in her shawl.

 

But then their exhausted expressions changed to fear. 

 

They had to abandon the cart as men on horseback broke through the treeline. Bruno couldn’t hear their cheers, but he could see the vicious grins on their faces.

 

It was the men from his village. He saw the man who’d seen Bruno’s eyes glow; he saw the man who shot Juan. He saw them all, all the men who’d stood by and watched their companion kill Juan.

 

They were men, but they looked like devils at that moment.

 

One slashed at the old woman, catching her side, just above her hip. One of her family members, a man, took shaking aim and shot at their attackers.

 

It was a lucky shot: the man who attacked the old woman fell dead to the ground.

 

The man carried the old woman and the shock of seeing their companion fall momentarily slowed the men. The little family fled further into the jungle, further up the mountains. A man, a younger woman, the old woman and a young boy, clinging to the woman’s hand.

 

As the rain poured down, they came upon a wide, slow river.

 

Everything was green, but Bruno knew that river. It was the jewel-coloured river he’d crossed, the one he dreamed of with Pedro. 

 

These people were approaching Encanto.

 

And, now that Bruno could see their faces, he knew them well.

 

It was Señora Rojas and what little remained of her once big family.






Agustín’s panic rose as Bruno went completely limp in his arms. Bruno’s eyes were glowing a bright emerald green, a stinging almost poisonous shade. His expression was blank, but tears poured down his face and he was shaking like a leaf.

 

Casita continued to shake and rattle, their home’s fear and concern growing by the second.

 

“Get Julieta!” he told Félix desperately. “Bring her here, hurry!”

Notes:

So, did I get anyone with that Senora Rojas reveal? 😏

Next up, the consequences of Alma's actions. Absolutely no one is happy and Alma has a lot to reflect on...

Chapter 39: Storms

Summary:

Pepa and Julieta confront Alma on her actions and their consequences. Some harsh truths come out at last.

Notes:

Angst 👏 angst 👏 angst 👏 angst 👏

Songs I listened to while writing:
Gasoline, by Halsey
The House That Dripped Blood, by The Mountain Goats
Sleepsong, by Bastille
Guiltless, by Dodie
Interlude: I'm Not Angry Anymore, by Paramore
Good For You, from Dear Evan Hansen
Demons, by Imagine Dragons
The Grey, by Icon For Hire
Blossoms, by The Amazing Devil

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Look through the air-thin walls; tear up the floorboards, strip the paint. Go over every inch of space with the patience of a saint. Grab your hat, get your coat. The cellar door is an open throat.” - The House That Dripped Blood, The Mountain Goats




Julieta sat on her brother’s bed, Bruno’s head on her lap. He was out cold; according to Agustín, his eyes had stopped glowing and he’d fainted just before Julieta arrived. She’d carefully coaxed some lulada down his throat, but he didn’t wake up, though the cut on his forehead healed right away.

 

Whatever was going on, it was caused by his Gift.

 

Julieta couldn’t fix it.

 

She wasn’t sure she could fix anything for him right now.

 

Even through two closed doors, she could hear Pepa screaming at their mother. She could hear thunder crashing and wind howling. Thank God, Félix sent the children to Dolores’s room as soon as they arrived home. Not a moment too soon, because Pepa arrived only moments after the children did, already storming.

 

The rain beat down, the thunder was deafening and Julieta didn’t doubt that some villagers would complain. What should she tell them? That Bruno was ill, Bruno was injured; Pepa was storming because she was scared…

 

But was that really any of their business? Still, she’d need to say something, or Mamá would have to, and-

 

Mamá. 

 

Julieta closed her eyes, forcing herself to take deep breaths. She was furious, she was so angry at her mother. Her blood boiled and she wanted to go and storm with Pepa, to rage and scream at Alma.

 

Look what you did! she wanted to scream. Look what you did to him!

 

She should have known Bruno hadn’t truly changed his mind. She should have known Alma pushed matters. She should have stayed with him when he tried to look into the future, to make sure he was okay.

 

It had been a surprise when Bruno mumbled that he wanted to try. He hadn’t exactly looked eager. 

 

But it had seemed like such a big step forward and he’d said he was sure when Julieta asked…

 

So she hadn’t pushed it.

 

“I’m sorry,” she whispered to her brother now, running a hand through his hair. “I’m so sorry. I should have known.”






Pepa was storming. Literally. Casita’s courtyard was a wreck, but she refused to take this argument to her room and God knew she wasn’t allowed in Alma’s room when she was like this.

 

So, despite Alma’s requests to take this somewhere more private, Pepa kept it in the courtyard.

 

“Pepa, the children could come out of Dolores’s room!” she argued.

 

“They’d hear me anyway,” Pepa hissed, lightning flashing. “I hope the whole damn Encanto hears me! How dare you push him!? You know how scared he is! Why couldn’t you just leave him alone? Let him figure things out at his own pace! By God, Mamá, we just found him!”

 

“I’m well aware we just got him back!” Alma snapped, drawing herself up. Her fear and anxiety was washed away, the mask of the stern matriarch falling into place. “For heaven’s sake, Pepa, I want him to be safe. The Miracle keeps us safe, you know that!”

 

“ENOUGH!” Pepa screamed. The clouds overhead grew darker, she was soaked to the bone and so was Alma. Casita rattled worriedly, trying to usher them towards Pepa’s room, but Pepa gripped the bannister, refusing to move an inch.

 

Enough with the Miracle! I swore to him, I promised him he wouldn’t have to look again! Not unless he wanted to!”

 

“You had no business making that promise-”

 

“Someone had to! Someone had to listen to him! I know what it’s like to have a Gift that scares you, one you can’t control! You don’t! I had every right to make that promise, I am his hermana mayor!” Thunder clapped, the wind grew harsher.

 

Her brother was out cold. Her little brother had seen something that made him scream and flinch away when Agustín tried to touch him. His Gift had worn him out so much that he fainted and he still hadn’t woken up.

 

Alma had arrived as Casita, out of breath and haggard. She’d run all the way there.

 

Pepa had taken one look at her and dragged her out of Bruno’s room.

 

She’d been screaming ever since.

 

“Don’t you care!?” she shrieked with the wind. “He’s your son! I know you don’t really give a damn about me, but you’ve always wanted him back, we all wanted him back! Why can’t you just admit that you hurt him!?

 

Alma went deathly pale.

 

“W-what…?” She shook her head, her hair plastered to her face, falling loose from its usually perfect bun. “Pepa…Mija, of course I care about you, I love you.”

 

Oh God, Pepa hadn’t meant to let that slip.

 

But she’d said it. No use in pretending she hadn’t.

 

She felt very much like the sullen teenager she used to be as she shrugged, avoiding Alma’s gaze.

 

“Never feels like it,” she muttered. When Alma reached for her, Pepa flinched away.

 

Alma looked stricken. She suddenly looked, very simply, like an old woman.

 

“You hurt him,” Pepa snarled, fury still aching in her stomach. She felt sick with anxiety. “You pushed him, you made him do something he didn’t want to do. He’s scared of his Gift, Mamá.” Her throat ached from screaming and from the tears she was fighting to hold back. “Come on, you’re not stupid. Put two and two together: why do you think he’s scared?”

 

Alma took a deep breath, her lips in a thin line. Her mask didn’t quite slip into place; her lip trembled, her eyes were too wide. 

 

“I know he is scared,” she said quietly, so quietly that Pepa had to strain to hear her over the raging storm. “I know Gifts do not exist beyond our mountains. Not knowing what it was must have frightened him.”

 

“He said it’s a curse,” Pepa spat. “He hasn’t told me anything, but I can take a few guesses, can’t you? Those scars on his back came from the nuns. What do you think such awful women would do, if they found out a child in their care could see the future?

 

Alma actually swayed in place. Casita had to usher her to the wall and Alma leaned against it, eyes wide and shoulders shaking.

 

“Mamá?” Despite herself, Pepa felt a stab of concern. For a moment, she truly thought her mother was going to faint.

 

“You don’t…You think…” Alma cleared her throat. “You think the nuns did those awful things because they knew of his Gift?”

 

Pepa nodded. “That’s my theory anyway,” she said. She had to clear her own throat, but it was no good; the tears finally escaped and she choked on a sob.

 

“Mija…” Alma reached out a hand but Pepa didn’t take it.

 

“You hurt him,” she sobbed. “Juli can’t fix it, she can’t heal him. Y-you keep…You keep doing this! I don’t want him to be scared, Mamá. I want him to stay and be happy, I-” I just got him back, we all just got him back. I want him to know we love him. I don’t care about his Gift, why do you?

 

Alma was shivering, but if it was due to the storm or her emotions, Pepa couldn’t be sure.

 

“I…I will need to speak with him,” she said, her eyes dull. “I must…” She wiped her eyes and Pepa had never seen her mother look so frail. “I must apologise to him.”

 

“If he’ll even let you,” Pepa said. Maybe it was cruel of her, but she didn’t care right now. All these years of suppressed anger, sadness, fear and grief were pouring out, directly to the source. “He might not want to hear it.”

 

Alma closed her eyes. “I know,” she whispered. She opened them again, looking at Pepa. “And you, Pepa? Will you hear it?”

 

“...I don’t know,” Pepa admitted. “Because I don’t know if I believe you.”

 

She left her mother there and finally went to her room, slamming the door behind her. She grabbed a pillow off her favourite armchair, buried her face in it and screamed. She screamed and screamed until her voice left her, until all she could do was sob.

 

All the while, her own personal storm raged, now contained within the safety of her room.




The cracks froze.

 

As soon as Alma admitted she must apologise, they froze. As Pepa finally told the truth, letting her emotions burst out at last, they froze.

 

They didn’t disappear, but they didn’t grow.

 

A pause. A delicate balance. 

 

A chance to change.




The storm was dying down. Julieta hadn’t moved an inch. She no longer worried about what to say to the villagers. She just held onto Bruno, humming under her breath, and wondered where Pepa was now; she couldn’t hear her screaming at Alma any longer. Perhaps she’d gone to her room.

 

She hoped Félix would go to her, and knew he would. 

 

So Julieta allowed herself to focus solely on her brother. Agustín would be looking after their girls, after their nephews and niece. Félix would look after Pepa. 

 

And Julieta would look after Bruno.

 

“I’m here,” she whispered to him, wondering if he could even hear her. “It’s just me, it’s just Julieta. Whatever you saw is gone now.” Her eyes stung. “You don’t have to look again. I’ll make sure no one asks you to look again. I won’t let them.”

 

Could she even keep that promise? She promised to keep her sister safe and happy, and look how that ended. Pepa had been miserable for most of their teenage years.

 

She promised to heal everyone, but that simply couldn’t be done.

 

She promised again and again to help Alma, to serve their village and community, to help look after their family. She’d been doing it since she was five years old. 

 

Could she even keep that promise?

 

She promised to protect her daughters, to make sure they were safe and happy. Julieta wondered if she was doing enough for them. She was at her stall all day, every day. How could she protect them if she wasn’t home?

 

There were so many promises that Julieta made, so many she wasn’t sure she could keep.

 

She wanted to try anyway.

 

She wanted her family to be whole and happy. That included Bruno. That would always include Bruno.

 

Come hell or high water, Julieta would find some way to ensure no one harassed him for his Gift. If he didn’t want to use it, then the village could just get used to it. He’d had no control over it before and it didn’t seem like he did now either; Julieta would not allow him to put himself through pain and torment like this.

 

But how to go about that? How did she protect him?

 

She was still mulling it over when Alma came in.

 

Her mother was drenched, no surprises there. She looked oddly small, diminished somehow. She looked exhausted and frail.

 

Julieta had never seen her mother anything less than perfectly put together. It was jarring.

 

It wasn’t enough to soften Julieta.

 

“How is he?” Alma asked quietly, her frightened gaze on Bruno.

 

“The same,” Julieta said briskly. “I assume Pepa chewed you out?”

 

Alma sighed and nodded. “You could say that, sí.”

 

“Good. I can wait a while then.”

 

Alma sighed again, so hard that her shoulders shook. She sounded so world-weary, so old. 

 

“Julieta, mija…Do you think I don’t lo-?”

 

She was cut off by Bruno stirring. He tensed under Julieta’s hand, twitching and whining.

 

“Bruno?” Julieta’s voice was sharp. Alma hurried to their side, sitting on the edge of the bed and taking Bruno’s hand.

 

“Bruno? Brunito, mijo, wake up,” Alma urged.

 

Thrashing and gasping, he did.

 

Bruno’s eyes snapped open and he sat bolt upright with a piercing, terrified scream.

Notes:

Go off, Pepa 👏👏

Next up, Bruno is Struggling™️ but there's a bit of light to be found (aka, Luisa's plate)

Chapter 40: The Saint of Never Getting It Right

Summary:

Julieta and Alma have a long overdue talk as Julieta frets over all the promises she wishes she could keep.

She wants her family safe and happy. She wants to understand her mother. She wants to help Bruno.

Sometimes, she worries none of that is possible.

Notes:

We're back with the ✨angst✨

I was originally gonna jump ahead a bit to a few days later, but honestly? This breakdown needs some real cover

TRIGGER WARNING for Bruno's dreams/visions, involving death, injury and child abuse

Songs I listened to while writing:
Blossoms, by The Amazing Devil
Waiting On A Miracle, from Encanto
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Requiem, from Dear Evan Hansen
Heart Of Stone, from Six
Exile, by Taylor Swift
Welly Boots, by The Amazing Devil
Hope You Found It Now, by Jason Walker

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And I walk, and I walk. And I walk, and I walk. Knowing every last one of them is painted in light, as I make myself acquainted with the saint of never getting it right. My dress is on fire and I hurl myself, I heal myself, I drag myself like a rug in the rain. And my saint, she is dancing. And every step I choose to take begins to set the world aflame. And the soldiers march behind me; I can hear them beat their spears. And for the first time in all my life, I know I'm more than what I fear.” - Blossoms, The Amazing Devil



Bruno was dreaming, seeing the future again. Or was he? He wasn’t sure. It wasn’t all green.

 

Not green.

 

A river turned from crystal clear blue to red and back again. Then the red water (or was it blood?) turned to sand, swelling with impossibly large waves for such a small river.

 

Green.

 

Twins were crying in their cradle, a boy and a girl. A young man and woman cooed to them, gently lifting them up to cradle them. They were facing away from him, but Bruno could see the woman had a similar hairstyle to Dolores.

 

Not green.

 

His village was on fire. Buildings collapsed; his neighbours died in their homes, in their beds, in the blood soaked streets. The church roof collapsed, sending up sparks. Fires raged and smoke clogged the air. The screams were deafening.

 

Juan collapsed in a pool of blood, a bullet wound striking his heart.

 

Green.

 

Señora Rojas was cradled by her son, Ismael. He carried her as if she was a baby. It was just Señora Rojas, Isamael, Maria and her younger cousin, Luka. They were soaked to the bone and filthy. Rain poured down and they all looked exhausted. 

 

Señora Rojas looked like she was barely alive.

 

Not green.

 

Bruno was on his hands and knees, sobbing as blood coated his back and hands, as a whip he couldn’t see slashed at his back again and again, until he was sure he would die here on the ground.

 

Green.

 

An elderly nun died in her bed, shivering. Two younger nuns sat at her bedside, praying. One looked sad, the other looked cold and uncaring.

 

Green, green, green.

 

A child ran into the road, tackled out of the way of a car by his father. They were bruised and scraped, but the car missed them both.

 

Antonio, maybe five years old, walked hand in hand with Mirabel through Casita’s courtyard. The entire village was in attendance, watching them avidly.

 

There was a massive crowd all shouting in English, in a city Bruno didn’t know. Bricks were thrown, the police swarmed in. A protest, but he didn’t know what for. They wore such odd clothes, fashions he’d never seen before. Clothing of the future, perhaps entire decades ahead.

 

Not green.

 

He was a child, his shirt sticking to his back with his own blood, locked in the dark attic. He’d given up beating at the door, he’d given up screaming and sobbing for help, for release.

 

He curled up in the corner, shivering, exhausted and in pain and wondered if he’d die up here.




Bruno woke up screaming.






“Bruno! Bruno, it’s just me! Please stop!” Julieta cried, tears stinging her eyes. All the while, her brother was screaming and sobbing, fighting to get out of her arms.

 

“Bruno, hermanito…” Her voice broke.

 

Alma spoke up, the most timid Julieta had ever heard her despite her fierce grip on Bruno’s hands. “Bruno, mijo, you’re safe.”

 

Finally, Bruno spoke. His voice was ragged, completely wrecked. “No, I’m not,” he sobbed. “I’m not.






Pepa paced up and down, stroking her braid. She was trying to focus on what Julieta was saying, honestly she was, but it just felt like water running through her fingers.

 

Bruno had woken up at last, but he’d been screaming and sobbing. When he finally stopped, he refused to talk. 

 

He pulled away from Alma, eyes tightly closed. He only opened his eyes again when Julieta quietly urged their mother to leave.

 

Well, why should Bruno talk to Alma anyway? She’d pushed him, her pressure led to this. If Bruno didn’t want to see her, that was his right.

 

But he wouldn’t talk to any of them.

 

“What do we do?” she asked Julieta for the seventh time, still pacing. Snow poured down on her and she shivered, rubbing her arms. She should have grabbed her shawl or a blanket, but she wasn’t thinking straight.

 

“Whatever we can,” Julieta said. She’d clearly been crying and Pepa’s heart broke all over again. Julieta rarely cried; she was always so serene and dependable, a steady rock in the roiling ocean. A safe harbour.

 

But Julieta was not invincible, not really. She could pretend she was all she wanted, but Pepa knew her. Her big sister was worn out, completely exhausted and Pepa was sure that Julieta was just as scared as she was.

 

So Pepa held her arms out to her and Julieta ignored the snow, hugging her tightly.

 

“He’ll be okay,” Julieta said and Pepa wasn’t sure if she was trying to convince herself or Pepa, or both of them. “He’ll be okay, we’ll get through this.”

 

“I know,” Pepa said, though she felt like she didn’t know a thing. “I trust you,” she added, because it was the truth and always would be.






Julieta didn’t know what to do. Pepa, still snowing, insisted on going to see Bruno herself. 

 

Casita’s courtyard was soaked, a complete mess. The sun was shining brightly, the sky was a vivid blue, as if the storm had never happened at all.

 

The painting next to her swayed with a sad little squeak and Julieta absentmindedly patted the wall.

 

“I know, Casita,” she said softly, sadly. “I’m worried too.”

 

“Mija?” 

 

Julieta looked up and found Alma gazing at her from her room’s doorway. She wore her black shawl; she looked pale, strangely fragile and downright elderly.

 

Julieta was a little taller than her mother. Not much, only by an inch or two, but it suddenly felt like ten feet worth of difference.

 

She wasn’t used to the unflappable, strong Alma Madrigal seeming so scared.

 

Normally, the sight would have softened her. Instead, a pulse of anger beat at her temples and her fists clenched of their accord. She felt dangerously close to tears. It was either cry or scream and Julieta wasn’t fond of either option.

 

“Mamá,” she said, more coldly than intended. “We need to talk.”

 

Julieta would give credit where it was due: Alma did not turn away or deny it. She made no excuses.

 

Instead, her mamá nodded tiredly. The floor tiles danced up and down between them, delicate and sad, gently urging Julieta forward.

 

“Yes,” Alma said. “We do.” She gestured to her door and Julieta went ahead of her.

 

For a magical room, Alma’s seemed plain compared to the rest. It was a normal bedroom by all accounts, except for the Miracle on the windowsill, overlooking Casita like a nightlight or a guiding star. There was a picture of Pedro by the bed, magically created by Casita and Alma and Pedro’s wedding photo, one of the few photos they’d taken with them so many years ago.

 

As a child, Julieta had often wondered why Casita didn’t provide her mother with a bigger, flashier room. Sometimes, she still wondered. Was it a way to keep their leader humble, or simply Alma’s preferred tastes? 

 

Pepa worked up the nerve to ask once and Alma had shaken her head.

 

“Sometimes simple is better,” she had said in her usual brisk tone, but she hadn’t looked at either of them as she said it.

 

Julieta didn’t dare call her out for lying.

 

She felt like a child again as she sat on the edge of Alma’s bed, as if waiting for a scolding. Alma sat next to her, staring down at her clasped hands. Her eyes were red-rimmed. 

 

When had she last seen her mother cry? Well, when they realised who Bruno was. But before that? It was probably at Isabela and Dolores’s births. She’d never seen her mother quite so joyful before then, so utterly overcome with emotion. Alma was not the type of woman to wear her heart on her sleeve.

 

Until now.

 

She looked every one of her years. She looked like she would shatter if someone so much as tapped against her.

 

Alma was the one waiting for a scolding now.

 

Julieta gripped the edge of the bed, her fingernails digging into the soft blanket.

 

“Do you understand what you did?” she asked, her voice low. A distant part of her felt absurd; it was as if she was addressing one of her daughters, not her own madré.

 

Alma nodded, an awkward jerky movement, like a puppet.

 

“Sí,” she said hoarsely, her eyes haunted.

 

“Do you? Do you really?” Julieta’s eyes narrowed. “Why didn’t you listen to him? Why did you push him, Mamá? I want to understand, I do, but I just…I don’t understand you.”

 

It hurt to admit, but as soon as she said it, she knew it to be true. She wasn’t sure if she understood Alma at all.

 

She wanted to. God knew she desperately wanted to. All her life she’d searched for that understanding, the shining moment where everything would click into place and she’d truly understand Alma, the way her mind worked, what she’d been through and why she pushed them all so hard.

 

That moment never came, though she kept waiting for it.

 

“Ay, Julieta…” Alma’s breath shook. “Mija…You know we must earn our Miracle. It keeps us safe; it keeps our entire valley safe. The Gifts were given to us for a reason. We must not lose our home. And I thought that…That if your brother scorned his Gift, if he called it a curse and refused to use it then…”

 

“Then it wouldn’t work anymore,” Julieta finished.

 

Alma nodded again, still staring at her hands as if they held the answers to the universe.

 

“We cannot lose our home,” she repeated with an edge of desperation. “But I swear I never meant for this to happen. I didn’t mean to hurt him. Or…Or any of you.”

 

Perhaps the worst thing was what a shock it was. Julieta stared at Alma silently, unsure of what to say.

 

“Pepa, she said-” Alma’s voice broke and Julieta saw tears in her eyes. “She said I do not c-care about her.”

 

“Mamá…”

 

“How did we get here? How did I let Pepa think such a thing?” A wild desperation was growing in her wet eyes and Alma reached for her locket, holding it tightly like a lifeline. “Your sister thinks I do not care for her. Your brother is terrified. And you, mija? Is there anything else I should know?”

 

Julieta didn’t know how to answer that.

 

I grew up too fast, she thought. So did Pepa, we both did. It doesn’t sound like Bruno got to be a child at all. 

 

I was responsible for everyone’s health since I was five. Most people don’t even thank me anymore and some people come to me for the most minor of injuries or illnesses. 

 

I hardly get to spend time with my own daughters or husband. It was thanks to Pepa and Félix urging me to take breaks that I ever got to date at all. I never got to have fun. 

 

I always had to be perfect. 

 

I still have to be perfect.

 

I’m on my feet all day, every day. I want to help everyone, I sincerely want to help, but can’t I have help too?

 

Can’t I say no?

 

“I’m tired,” Julieta forced out, past the growing lump in her throat. “I’m tired, Mamá.”

 

Slowly, Alma lifted a hand to cup Julieta’s cheek. Her lip trembled and Julieta wasn’t sure if she wanted to lean into the touch or shove her mother away.

 

Bruno had harshly wrenched his hands from hers with a terrified scream of, “DON’T TOUCH ME!”

 

Julieta wasn’t scared of her mother, but she was scared of whatever was coming next.

 

“You need to apologise to him,” she said firmly. “I don’t know when he’ll want to hear it.” Will he ever trust us again? What if he doesn’t trust any of us now? “But you need to. As many times as it takes. And you need to do better, Mamá.” She rubbed her hands against her apron, leaning away from Alma’s hand. “Not just for Bruno, but for all of us. We need to…We need to fix this.”

 

I’m going to look after him and I don’t want to be on opposite sides. I want our family to be whole. I want us all to be happy. 

 

“Bruno…He can’t be asked to do that again,” Julieta said. “I won’t let my brother be re-traumatised again and again to- to satiate people’s curiosity! The rest of us use our Gifts, we’re fulfilling our promise, but Bruno never promised anything. This isn’t on him.”

 

Alma’s eyes flickered towards the candle. Unbidden, so did Julieta’s.

 

It shone steadily as usual, its butterfly markings glittering. Such a small object, with so much power.

 

“We need to fix this,” Julieta repeated. She swallowed and said, “You need to fix this.”

 

Alma looked like she was about to crumble into pieces. She bowed her head, eyes closed as if she was praying, still holding her locket.

 

“Yes,” she whispered. “I know. And I will try.”






When Julieta finally went back to Bruno’s room, there was a trail of slush leading to his bedroom. Quietly, she opened the bedroom door.

 

Esma and Luz squeaked at her, curled up together on the pillow by Bruno’s head.

 

Her siblings were fast asleep on the huge bed, curled up like Esma and Luz, clinging to each other even in sleep. Pepa’s cloud was gone, but even in sleep her jaw was clenched.

 

Bruno looked so small, so horribly fragile that Julieta wanted nothing more than to hold onto him forever and somehow erase everything awful that had happened.

 

But she couldn’t. No one could.

 

All she could do was try and help now. All she could do was try and keep him safe from now on.

 

I promise, she thought, lying down behind him and wrapping her arms around her siblings. I promise, I promise, I promise.

 

I’ll keep you safe. I’ll always keep you safe.

Notes:

Everyone is really Going Through It 🙃

Next up, we're back with Bruno

Chapter 41: Helping Hand

Summary:

Pepa and Bruno discuss his vision of Senora Rojas and her family. As Pepa brainstorms ways to prepare, she has an idea to help Bruno too.

Notes:

✨I'M BACK, BABY!✨

In which we have some hurt and some much-needed comfort

Songs I listened to while writing:
Who Wants To Live Forever, by Queen
Pieces, by Icon For Hire
Never Too Late, by Three Days Grace
Paint Me Black, by Ben Hazlewood
This Is Me Trying, by Taylor Swift
I Wanna Get Better, by Against The Current
Human, by Dodie

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“But touch my tears with your lips; touch my world with your fingertips. And we can have forever, and we can love forever. Forever is our today. Who wants to live forever? Who wants to live forever? Forever is our today. Who waits forever anyway?” - Who Wants To Live Forever? Queen




For two days, Alma wanted to see Bruno. For two days, he asked Casita to keep her out of his room.

 

Every movement felt sluggish; he felt like he was trying to wade through a river of treacle. Even sitting up took monumental effort and his voice kept deserting him.

 

On the third day, he woke from a nap to find his head on Pepa’s lap. His sister was holding a book in one hand (a romance judging by the pink, heart-patterned cover) and stroking Bruno’s hair with the other. 

 

Bruno didn’t say anything, he didn’t even think he stirred that much but she said, “You awake?”

 

Bruno nodded.

 

She glanced down at him. She turned the page and had a look of idle curiosity on her face. Bruno didn’t buy it; he could see how tense her shoulders were.

 

“You wanna talk about it?” Pepa asked.

 

Señora Rojas. 

 

Bruno forced himself to sit up, sick to his stomach. 

 

“It was bad,” he croaked. “Really bad.”

 

Pepa studied him carefully. She closed her book, fingernails tapping on the cover to a beat he sometimes heard Félix humming.

 

“Then maybe you can write it down?” she suggested. At his surprised look, she shrugged and said, “That’s what I do sometimes. When I can’t explain how I’m feeling. I, uh…I write it down.”

 

That just might work. Bruno wasn’t sure he could explain without completely breaking down again. He’d start crying or blank out, he was sure of it. 

 

If he couldn’t rely on his voice, maybe he could trust a pen instead.

 

He nodded and Pepa swiped a sheet of paper and a pen off the floor next to the bed.

 

“Someone’s prepared,” Bruno mumbled.

 

Pepa smiled somewhat sheepishly, but she kept her arm around his shoulders as he slowly began to write down all the horrors he’d seen.






Pepa wanted to puke. Her grip on Bruno’s hand must have been crushing his fingers and the only reason there wasn’t a hurricane tearing the room apart was the mantra of, Don’t ruin it, keep the paper dry, don’t make him write that again, screaming in her head.

 

“Pepa?” Bruno was staring at her, his eyes occasionally going to the cloud. It was spreading out over the room, dark and heavy with the threat of rain; it rumbled and flashed with lightning and a wind whipped at them, ice-cold and stinging Pepa’s cheeks.

 

She made herself read it again, key phrases and words jumping out at her.




…the men who burned my village…

 

She’s a neighbour, it’s just her, her son and two of her grandchildren left…

 

…and slashed with a sword…

 

Raining. Storming, I think. They’re gonna cross the same river I did…




“My weather doesn’t reach outside the valley,” Pepa said softly, regretfully. She bit her lip, watching as the same realisation hit her brother. His eyes went dark and haunted.

 

“It could happen any time,” he said.

 

Pepa nodded. “Yes,” she said reluctantly. What could they do? Send some men up into the mountains to keep watch? But for how long? They couldn’t keep people up there indefinitely. 

 

There had to be something they could do to prepare! Pepa couldn’t sit here and ignore the fact that people were going to be in danger; that, for all she knew, they were in danger this very moment. Maybe their new home had already been attacked and they were making their uneasy way through the jungle.

 

Maybe it would storm tomorrow and the Rojas family would be here with no one to even greet them or guide them out of the mountains. What if they arrived in the middle of the night? Dolores wouldn’t even hear them…

 

No. No. They’d think of something. They had to.

 

She let her cloud coat the room, but her smile to Bruno was sincere. The same kind of smile she’d give Julieta when their sister was stressed out and needed to rest.

 

“We’ll figure it out,” she promised. She held out her little finger with a smirk, eyebrows raised.

 

Bruno scoffed at her, a little sparkle of light in his eyes. Pepa would cling to that with all her might.

 

He linked their fingers and they shook on it.

 

Mamá had broken Pepa’s last promise for her. She wouldn’t let anyone break this one.






As Pepa left, the paper held tightly in one fist, Bruno whispered her name.

 

“Hm? Sí, hermanito?” 

 

Bruno was staring at his easel, at the piles of paper and art supplies. He didn’t even glance at Pepa as he asked, “Can you bring me Luisa’s plate?”

 

“Huh? What for?” Pepa asked.

 

“I promised to paint it,” Bruno said, his voice still horribly hoarse. He tugged on his hair, bit at his thumbnail. “No time like the present.” His smirk was wry and tired and it was the weakest, most horrible attempt at a joke that Pepa had ever heard.

 

The future had better leave her brother alone.

 

All the same, she nodded. After three days of Bruno staring at the wall or ceiling, it was a relief to see him show interest in anything. 

 

“I will,” she promised. “I’ll be right back.”

 

Just as the door closed, she heard him say, “Gracias, hermana.”

 

Despite everything, that had Pepa smiling like a lunatic. Clouds and sunshine mingled above her head and she outright squealed as she left Bruno’s room.

 

She couldn’t say she was surprised to see the kids all sitting together outside the door.

 

Isabela was making petals rain down on Mirabel and Luisa, all in new bright colours: yellow, vivid purple, blue, pink, white, red and orange. Some petals were small and round, others long and thin; some looked spiky and others had strange patterns on them.

 

Mirabel blew at them, sending them back up into the air. Luisa seemed content to let them land in her hair.

 

Dolores held Antonio on her lap, her head tilted to one side as she listened to everything around her. Camilo fidgeted impatiently, perking up when he saw Pepa.

 

“Can we see Tio Bruno now?” he asked eagerly.

 

“Not yet, mijo,” Pepa said gently, her heart breaking at the disappointment on all their faces. Even Antonio seemed withdrawn.

 

“He’s still not well,” Pepa said. After all, it wasn’t a lie.

 

She carefully avoided Dolores’s knowing gaze.

 

Mirabel held out a bright sheet of blue paper folded in half. Another Get Well card.

 

Clear skies, Pepa reminded herself. Don’t start crying now.

 

“Will you give it to him?” Mirabel asked, her eyes large and solemn. “It’s from all of us.”

 

“It was Mira’s idea,” Luisa said, gathering the fallen petals in her lap.

 

“I will,” Pepa promised. “And…” As she looked at their worried faces, an idea sprang to mind. “Why don’t you all fetch your plates for me? Actually, grab them all; mine and Juli’s too.” She paused and reluctantly added, “And your abuela’s.” She’d keep it on the bottom of the stack and ask Bruno if he wanted it or not.

 

“Our plates?” Isabela’s eyebrows rose.

 

Pepa nodded, her smile cautiously growing.

 

“I think maybe your Tio could give them all a little make-over.”






Bruno didn’t expect Pepa to return with everyone’s plates and a card from the kids.

 

It was bright blue. He recognised Mirabel’s drawing style; she’d drawn Casita on the front of the card and twelve butterflies flying above the house. Inside the card, she’d written, Get well soon! Love you lots xxx

 

All the kids had signed it. Dolores had even added Antonio’s name. 

 

He pinned it to the wall, next to his portrait of Juan.

 

Carefully, not looking at it, he put Alma’s plate on the windowsill. He’d decide what to do with it later; she’d need it for dinner at any rate.

 

He wondered what they were doing. He wondered how Alma had reacted to the note.

 

“It was Félix’s idea,” Pepa had said, her eyes softening as they always did when Félix was mentioned. “Because of my Gift. Sometimes I don’t get to actually…think about what I’m feeling or why. Clear skies, y’know? Even when I’m upset, I have to focus on the weather. So he suggested writing it down. That way I can work through it, let it out, but I don’t get overwhelmed.”

 

It had helped. Bruno had written down everything he saw in that green-flash. Though it was much longer than a flash. Maybe he’d need something new to call it.

 

Either way, he’d given it to Pepa and she’d gone to tell the adults of the family. He hoped they’d either toss it or burn it before any of the kids saw.

 

Shuddering, he tried to push the thoughts away.

 

For now, he wanted to focus on his promise to Luisa. She’d asked for a unicorn, she’d get one.

 

Well, maybe more than one.

 

He picked Luisa’s carefully from the pile and studied it for a few moments, his chin resting on his hand. Luisa’s plate was painted with blue dumbbells and the leaves were a soft teal. 

 

Okay. He could work with this.

 

Bruno didn’t quite smile, but some of the tension finally left his shoulders and his jaw unclenched as he got to work.






In the end, Bruno was happy with the results.

 

In the middle of the plate, he’d painted a lavender unicorn with a pink mane and tail, bright blue eyes, silver hooves and a silver horn. It was cantering, with sparkles around its hooves and horn.

 

Around the edge of the plate, he’d added little sparkles and stars and pale pink hearts. On the left, he’d painted another, smaller unicorn; this one was rearing on its hind legs. On the right, there was a third unicorn, laying down to rest, its eyes shut.

 

Unicorns, sparkles, hearts, leaves and dumbbells. It certainly made an unusual combination.

 

It suited Luisa. She was more than her strength. She was just a kid; if she wanted unicorns then she should have them. 

 

Bruno set the plate aside.

 

“Casita?” he asked quietly. The floor gently rumbled. “Can you get that dried again?” he asked.

 

The floor rumbled again, a little more insistently and Bruno’s chair was turned back to face the table fully. Isabela’s plate was rolled towards him.

 

It was the first genuine smile Bruno gave in days.

 

“Okay,” he said, looking around his bedroom. “I can take a hint.”

 

In response, he felt Casita’s relief. Bruno pulled Isabela’s plate closer to him, a dozen ideas springing to life.

 

Blossoming so to speak.

 

He’d keep the puns to himself in case Isabela broke out those swinging vines again.

Notes:

Watch out, Julieta; Pepa's coming for that "best big sister" crown 👑

Why yes, I AM giving Pepa some of my coping mechanisms. Everyone gets projected onto in the Madrigals!

Next up, more painting! Poor Dolores is exhausted from everything she's been hearing (🎵oye, Mariano's on his way🎵), while Mirabel and Camilo finally get to hang out with their favourite Tio. Make no mistake, Bruno's not OKAY and there's still a LOT to talk about (such as the adults seeing what he wrote), but I think we all deserve a break from the constant angst

Chapter 42: Baby Steps

Summary:

Bruno begins to re-do everyone's plates, taking the first steps towards recovery.

Alma tries to plan and prepare for the future Bruno saw, taking steps of her own towards fixing things with her family, starting with Isabela and her new chaotic garden.

Both of them have important talks with Julieta.

Notes:

✨Growth✨

I was hoping to fit in the art time and Dolore's POV here, but everyone else took over 😂 Every time, I underestimate how long the chapters will be. My bad. Art and Dolores venting next time!

For now, Alma works on self-improvement and Bruno is finally out of bed

Songs I listened to while writing:
Disappear, from Dear Evan Hansen
Over The Love, by Florence And The Machine
Dysfunctional, by Fallulah
Give Us A Little Love, by Fallulah
Heavy/Numb/What I've Done/One More Light/In The End, by Future Sunsets
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“No one should flicker out, or have any doubt that it matters that they are here. No one deserves, no one deserves to disappear. To disappear; disappear. When you're falling in a forest and there's nobody around, all you want is for somebody to find you. When you're falling in a forest and when you hit the ground, all you need is for somebody to find you.” - Disappear, Dear Evan Hansen




Isabela’s plate was easy enough; previously, it had been covered in pink roses. Now there were cacti, protea flowers, snake grass and orchids in bright, bold colours instead of soft pastels. In the centre of the plate, Bruno added a circle of orange anthurium and a palma de cera. 

 

It was bright and somewhat chaotic. It certainly matched what Isa had done to the garden and courtyard. 

 

He hoped she’d like it.

 

There was no way he’d get all the plates done in one day, he’d have to at least return the ones he hadn’t done for dinner, but he hoped he could at least get one more done. 

 

As if sensing his mood (and maybe it did) Casita nudged Dolores’s plate towards him. 

 

Okay. One more and then he’d rest. 

 

Dolores’s plate had simple orange and yellow flowers and leaves, and orange wavering lines like the ones on her clothes and door. Something to do with noise, clearly, though Bruno still wasn’t sure what they were. One of these days, he’d really have to ask her.

 

Maybe it was cheesy of him to add some little mugs of chocolate santafereño, but it felt fitting. Near the wavering lines, he added Dolores’s favourite heart-shaped earrings. In the centre of the plate (well, near the edge of it, really) he painted a small image of three little coins in a jar, like the ones he’d given her, and a whole bunch of golden stars and crescent moons. After all, they usually hung out at night in the kitchen. 

 

There was a quiet knock on his bedroom door just as he finished cleaning his paintbrushes. Julieta poked her head in, looking relieved when she realised he was out of bed.

 

“Hola,” she said softly. Her eyes went to the plates and her smile grew. “Ay, Bruno, they look lovely.”

 

“Still have plenty to do,” Bruno said, biting his thumbnail and steadfastly ignoring Alma’s plate on his windowsill. “Um…Can you bring Félix and Agustín’s plates up when they’re not using them?”

 

“Sí.” Julieta’s eyebrows rose in surprise. “But you already did them?”

 

“Well, everyone else is getting a pattern in the middle of the plate,” Bruno said with a shrug. “So I wanna add one to theirs too. Only fair, right?”

 

Julieta stared at him, stepping into the room properly. She examined Isabela and Luisa’s plates, her eyes watering.

 

“Ay, hermanito,” she sighed. “You try so hard to make everything fair. Despite everything you’ve been through and seen- and I know you’ve only told me a fraction- you’re still…You’re still kind.”

 

Bruno could feel himself flushing, gripping his arm as he avoided Julieta’s anguished eyes.

 

“Uh, I- I’m not-”

 

“You are.” Her voice was firm, despite the tears in her eyes. “I don’t think you understand just how brave you are.”

 

Bruno couldn’t help but turn to her then, looking at her in astonishment, letting out a strangled, startled laugh.

 

“No, I’m not!”

 

“You are,” she said, taking his hand. “You are so much braver than you give yourself credit for.”






Alma sat in her room, reading and re-reading what Bruno had written. To think such a horrifying vision had been forced into his head; it wasn’t something he actively sought, the future had pushed it on him.

 

She had pushed it onto him.

 

And now they needed to think of a way to prepare, lest this poor woman, Señora Rojas and her family, fail to make it up the mountains. God above, Bruno had seen her get attacked with a sword. How could they get up the mountains like that?

 

Bruno had managed it. Granted, he had not been stabbed (thank God) but he’d been in an awful state. Agustín’s padré once told her it was as if the easiest path was revealed to them as they climbed, quietly ushering their family along to safety. 

 

She could only hope that remained the case.

 

She needed to think. They couldn’t ask any of their villagers to climb such steep mountains in the middle of a storm, but perhaps when they saw the dark clouds roll in they could begin the climb. They could build some sort of look-out post perhaps; somewhere safe to wait and watch for the outsiders…

 

Sighing, Alma finally put the page down. She’d held it so tightly it was now badly crumpled and her nails had made tiny tears here and there. 

 

She needed to plan. They all did. They needed to prepare. Danger would be coming so close to their valley once again, and a family’s life hung in the balance.

 

But before that, she needed to make things right with her family. 

 

She needed to make things right with her son.

 

Alma felt like she was a hundred years old as she wearily left her room, her shawl draped over her shoulders. As she descended the stairs, Isabela and Mirabel came running in from outside. Mud was spattered on Isabela’s dress and pollen was smeared on Mirabel’s hands. They were both laughing boisterously and Alma wrestled with the words that immediately sprang to mind; Inside voices please, quieten down. Isabela, your dress! Go get washed up immediately, how could you be so careless? Mirabel, wash your hands right now, don’t touch any of the furniture. 

 

She didn’t need to say anything; they both fell silent when they saw her.

 

Isabela’s smile wavered, Mirabel waved at her but it was such a shy, awkward movement.

 

Alma’s heart cracked yet again. They were having fun, getting along…Until they saw her. Then they froze.

 

Isabela looked terrified. Her sweet Isa, her little rose, looked afraid of her. Mirabel looked like she didn’t know if she should run away or not.

 

Alma fought her old, ingrained instincts…And breathed out deeply, managing a tired smile.

 

“Were you practising with your Gift?” she asked.

 

“Yes, Abuela,” Isabela said, standing straighter and holding her hands together. “Mirabel found a book about plants for me.”

 

Mirabel nodded when Alma glanced at her curiously.

 

“That was kind of you,” Alma said and Mirabel beamed.

 

“There’s some really cool ones!” Mirabel said with her usual enthusiasm, clapping her hands together. “There’s even ones from America and Europe listed, and Japan too!”

 

“I want to see what I can do,” Isabela said quietly. 

 

“May I see?” Alma asked and both girls looked at her with astonishment. “If you’d like to, of course. We still have time before dinner.”

 

Mirabel openly gaped. Isabela’s jaw dropped, but she rallied quickly and nodded, her smile more sincere.

 

“Sí,” she said. “Of course.” Casita opened the doors for them and Isabela waited until Alma reached the bottom of the stairs to hurry back outside.

 

Mirabel waited for her, only following Isabela when Alma was at her side.

 

The garden was chaotic. Isabela proudly pointed to a new bright red, spiky plant.

 

“It’s called heliconia,” she explained, a shine of excitement in her eyes. “They normally take four months to flower, but-”

 

“But Isa grew it in one hour,” Mirabel said gleefully. 

 

“That’s amazing, mi flor,” Alma said softly, and she meant it. It was a far cry from the lovely bouquets that Isabela usually did, the pretty blossoms and roses, but…

 

But it was interesting. It made Isabela bounce with excitement. 

 

To Alma, change usually meant something bad. Change meant fleeing your home in the middle of the night, as everything you knew burned behind you. Change meant losing your husband and baby son in one cruel moment.

 

But change also meant a growing family. Change meant that, one day, your son would return. 

 

Growth. Alma turned the word over in her mind, musing as Isabela showed her everything she’d grown, shyly at first then with growing pride and obvious excitement. 

 

Change could mean growth. 

 

Change meant fixing what was broken.

 

Perhaps this would be a good place to start.






Luisa squealed when she saw her redone plate and Isabela grinned, examining the bright colours from every angle. Dolores smiled softly, her eyes twinkling.

 

“Is Tio Bruno coming down yet?” Camilo demanded, slapping his hands on the table as he leaned across it to better interrogate Julieta. “Is he still sick? Can’t we see him yet? We miss him!”

 

“Camilo,” Alma sighed, but Julieta exchanged glances with Pepa.

 

“Well, actually,” Julieta said. “He’s feeling a little better.”

 

The kids all perked up. Julieta saw Agustín sigh in relief. 

 

“So maybe you can do more art with him tomorrow,” Julieta continued, hyper-aware of how relieved her mother looked. “Only if he’s still feeling up to it- if he doesn’t feel well, it’s off. But I know he misses you kids too.”

 

“Yes!” Camilo whooped, turning to high-five Mirabel, who was squealing in glee. 

 

“I’m busy tomorrow,” Luisa said, looking crushed. She turned to Mirabel and Camilo. “Tell him thank you for me, okay?”

 

“We will,” Mirabel promised. “Ooh, maybe you can write a thank you card tonight?”

 

Luisa looked surprised by the suggestion, but she nodded.

 

“Yeah,” she said. “I’d like that.”

 

“There’s that wedding planning tomorrow,” Isabela grumbled in such vehemence that Julieta turned to her in surprise. She stabbed at her food with her fork, looking mutinous. Dolores didn’t look any happier.

 

“You can come right back when you’re done with that, right?” Julieta asked.

 

Her daughter and niece nodded, but she swore Dolores muttered, “So long as no one stops us.”

 

That…Was a good point. Maybe Julieta could get a quiet word out to leave them be?

 

She was still thinking about it as she washed the dishes, setting Agustín and Félix’s aside for Bruno to re-paint yet again.

 

“Mija?” Alma stood in the doorway, looking hesitant. “Would you like a hand?”

 

It was a struggle not to do a double-take. She hesitated for only a few seconds before she nodded, making room for Alma at the sink.

 

Her mother rolled her sleeves up, quietly getting to work.

 

“Tell me honestly, Julieta,” she said softly. “How is he?”

 

“Exhausted,” Julieta said. “He looks dead on his feet, but he’s up again. He’s out of bed and painting.” The relief from such a simple gesture was immense; her brother was up and doing something he loved, showing interest in something beyond staring blankly at the wall.

 

“...And you?” Alma asked.

 

“Exhausted,” Julieta repeated with a wry smile, drying another plate as Alma began to scrub at the glasses. 

 

Alma hesitated again, looking oddly uncertain as she stared at the soapy water as if it held the secrets to the universe.

 

“Isabela’s new plants…They’re interesting.”

 

Would wonders never cease?

 

“They are,” Julieta agreed proudly.

 

“I didn’t realise how much she could do,” Alma added, her voice barely above a whisper. Some strands of hair came loose, sticking to her forehead. “She looks very happy.”

 

“She is.”

 

“I want her to be happy, mija. All of you. I just…” She sighed, shaking her head. “I hope this is a place to start.”

 

Julieta stared at her mother, at her bent head and stooped shoulders; she saw the way Alma’s hands shook and how her eyes watered. Alma looked worn out. She looked every one of her years; maybe even more.

 

“I need to talk to you,” Alma said, passing the clean plates to Julieta to dry. “And your sister. And your brother, when he’s ready.”

 

Julieta nodded, drying and putting the glasses away on autopilot, so used to the motions that she wasn’t even aware of them. 

 

“I want to fix this if I can,” Alma continued. “With everyone.”

 

She looked sincere, and Julieta could see the desperation hiding in her eyes, in the way she kept wringing her hands and didn’t quite look Julieta in the eye.

 

“Pepa won’t be happy,” Julieta warned her. 

 

“I know.”

 

I’m not happy, Mamá.”

 

“...I know. I’m sorry, mija.”

 

Julieta took a deep breath, closing the cupboard. “But we can try,” she said. “If you’ll try…If you really mean this…Then we can try. But you can’t rush this, you can’t force it.”

 

“Baby steps,” Alma said, passing her a bowl. Julieta began to dry it, looking out the kitchen window at the nearly-set sun. 

 

“Baby steps,” she agreed, thinking of the paint smeared on her brother’s hands. 

 

She only hoped this could be fixed.

Notes:

Baby steps 💕

Next up, the promised art shenanigans and Dolores POV

Chapter 43: The Same Old Theme

Summary:

Bruno spends the day with Mirabel and Camilo.

Meanwhile, Dolores hears everything. That's precisely the problem.

Notes:

TRIGGER WARNING: Dolores has a panic attack at the end of the chapter. Stay safe 💕

Bitches have no self control. It's me, I'm bitches

Songs I listened to while writing:
Zombie, by The Cranberries (my beloved)
Leave Out All The Rest, by Linkin Park
Dreams, by The Cranberries
Comfort Crowd, by Conan Gray
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Waiting In The Wings, from Tangled: The Series

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“It's the same old theme, since nineteen-sixteen. In your head, in your head, they're still fighting; with their tanks, and their bombs, and their bombs and their guns. In your head, in your head, they are dying. In your head, in your head. Zombie, zombie, zombie.” - Zombie, The Cranberries




Mirabel immediately ran to Bruno’s room after breakfast, Camilo hot at her heels.

 

“Tio!” she called as she ran. “Tio, Tio, Tio!”

 

She burst into his room and, seeing he was on his sofa, jumped on him with a happy shout. Camilo was quick to join in and they were probably squashing him horribly (his wheeze sounded pretty painted; whoops) but Mirabel didn’t want to move.

 

“Are you feeling better?” she asked eagerly. Startled, Esma and Luz ran in circles on the coffee table. Luz even climbed into an empty tea-cup.

 

“Ay, Luz,” Bruno groaned, rubbing his forehead. “I told you to knock that off!”

 

Luz squeaked, her tail hanging out of the cup. She didn’t move.

 

Bruno sighed, looking at Mirabel and Camilo.

 

“Eh,” he said. “Y-yeah. A bit better, thanks, chiquita.”

 

He did look pretty sick; he was pale with shadows under his eyes.

 

“Was it the headaches again?” she asked.

 

Bruno nodded. Camilo tried to copy Tio Félix’s sympathetic face and, even when he didn’t shape-shift, it was crazy how he could do such good impressions.

 

“Ssssoooooo…” Mirabel jumped up, grinning hopefully. “Arts and crafts?”

 

Camilo stayed lounging on Tio Bruno like he was a pillow, giving their uncle a wide-eyed, hopeful pout. Tia Pepa always fell for Camilo’s puppy-eyes.

 

Bruno huffed, but he looked like he was trying not to laugh. He shoved Camilo off him, sitting up properly.

 

“Okay,” he said. “Arts and crafts day.”

 

He moved pretty slowly as they got everything they needed and headed downstairs. He kept looking over his shoulder, like he expected someone to jump out at them and Mirabel saw him biting his already ragged nails.

 

Clearly he was still a bit sick. She’d have to keep an eye on him. 

 

Esma and Luz came running after them, scrambling up Bruno’s legs to hide in his pockets. Bruno rolled his eyes, but he smiled.

 

Well, they were pretty adorable. They couldn’t exactly join in, but they always made Tio Bruno smile and Camilo was desperate to teach them tricks. Maybe they could do that after the arts and crafts.

 

Assuming her poor Tio didn’t need to go lie down again anyway. He really was pale today.






When in doubt, Mirabel drew butterflies. Bruno grabbed Camilo’s plate and asked if there was anything he really wanted (or didn’t want) painted on it.

 

Camilo wanted drama masks. “You know, like-” He pulled a happy face and then a sad face, both highly exaggerated and slightly creepy looking.

 

Bruno however, nodded. “I know the ones,” he said with a little smile.

 

Camilo happily started drawing a family portrait of himself, Pepa, Félix, Dolores and Antonio. He must have listened to Mirabel’s lectures on shading, because it was looking way better.

 

Bruno worked on Camilo’s plate, his tongue poking out of the corner of his mouth as he concentrated.

 

He painted a pair of the promised drama masks in yellow and orange in the centre of the plate (Mirabel still thought they looked a bit creepy) and, around the edges, he painted little cartoon faces with other emotions: happy, angry and sad. One stuck its tongue out and the other looked mischievous. They were much cuter than the drama masks and looked a little like Camilo; they had the same curly hair and freckles.

 

He added some more colour to the chameleons already on the plate: red stripes and yellow spots. 

 

Camilo looked delighted.

 

“Cool!” he breathed, leaning over the table for a better look. “You work fast, Tio!”

 

Bruno shrugged, rubbing his arm. He didn’t quite look at Camilo, but his smile was pleased.

 

“Eh,” he said. “I’ve been painting for years. Sometimes you gotta work fast.”

 

“How much did you have to paint in a day, anyway?” Mirabel asked, tilting her head. “Were there other painters?”

 

“Quite a lot. Though, uh, it could vary depending on the day. And there was one other painter, the shop was pretty small,” Bruno said. “Though I think he was gonna retire soon, his hands were getting shaky…” He trailed off, his eyes turning dark and sad. He didn’t talk about his old village or friends much. Mirabel wondered how much he missed them.

 

Camilo glanced at her in concern and Mirabel shrugged helplessly.

 

Suddenly, Camilo grabbed a paintbrush, dipped it in green paint and dabbed Bruno on the nose with it.

 

Bruno snapped back to life, jerking back with a startled yelp. “Camilo!” he shouted, grabbed some tissue and wiping at his nose. It didn’t do much good, it only smeared the paint. “You little gremlin!”

 

“You know it,” Camilo said with a proud grin while Mirabel burst out laughing.

 

Bruno turned to her, hands on his hips. “Oh, think that’s funny, chiquita?”

 

“Yup,” Mirabel admitted, still giggling.

 

Her giggling abruptly turned into a shriek when Bruno swiped her cheek with pink paint.

 

“TIO!”

 

Camilo laughed so hard he fell off his chair. The entire kitchen rattled and jumped; even Casita was laughing at her.

 

“Traitor,” Mirabel grumbled. She wiped her cheek, only succeeding in getting the paint on her hand.

 

Camilo sprang up, grinning smugly at them both. “A green clown and Isa’s new twin!” he declared.

 

Bruno and Mirabel looked at each other. Maybe her uncle read her mind, because he just gave a tired sigh and nodded, giving into the inevitable.

 

Grinning, Mirabel tackled Camilo and got a big line of orange paint on his forehead.

 

“Mira, you jerk!” he yelled.

 

“You started it!”

 

“Ay, Dios, what have I gotten myself into?” Bruno sighed.

 

Esma and Luz scampered up onto the shelves. Mirabel couldn’t say she blamed them.






Dolores heard everything. Everything, all the time, unless she was in her room.

 

She heard the chaos unfolding in Casita with immense relief. Her Tio was out of bed, he was talking properly albeit quietly. He even shouted in surprise when Camilo got him. It sounded like they were getting paint all over each other.

 

She had to wonder how her mamá would react.

 

She heard a couple arguing half-way across town. She heard plenty of babies crying. She heard dogs barking and cats howling.

 

She heard everyone in line at Tia Julieta’s stall. She heard people cooking, laughing, crying and complaining. She heard people coughing and sneezing, she heard people working in the fields and orchards. She heard the lumberjacks and loggers hard at work, the seamstresses and tailors with their fabrics, scissors and needles. 

 

She’d heard her Tio Bruno screaming as the future took hold of him. She heard him banging his head on the floor of his room.

 

She heard every second of that horrible day and she’d heard every second since. 

 

Dolores was afraid to not listen for once, terrified something would happen when they only just got Bruno back. If he got hurt and she didn’t hear…If anything happened to him and she couldn’t warn anyone, she’d never forgive herself.

 

She heard Mariano pining for Isabela and his friends encouraging him to approach her.

 

She heard her mamá go to Tia Julieta with a tired sigh, taking a well-earned break from the fields.

 

She heard Abuela in a meeting with the council, discussing the nearly-finished bridge and a list of villagers that needed help with more personal matters, as well as plans for harvesting. Señor De la Cruz asked about Tio Bruno, and Abuela gracefully changed the subject after briefly saying, “A little under the weather, but improving.”

 

She heard her abuela’s heart skip a beat as she lied.

 

She heard Papá proudly showing off Antonio to his parents, all three of them cooing over her baby brother.

 

She heard Tio Agustín with his friends, taking it easy for once as they enjoyed lunch together.

 

She heard Luisa running here, there and everywhere, fixing walls and fences, carrying building supplies, herding animals and even helping to carry groceries or move furniture. Luisa shook a tree with one hand to free a football for some cheering children; she pushed on the barn which was starting to tilt and it moved back into place.

 

“Mira, you jerk!” Camilo yelled and- yes, that was definitely the sound of paint being smeared.

 

“You started it!”

 

Dolores hummed in amusement despite herself.

 

She and Isabela were stuck at the church, helping with decorations for an upcoming wedding. Hopefully they’d get home uninterrupted when they were done, then they could join their siblings and Tio.

 

Dolores wanted to see him, to reassure herself that he was truly up and about. Hearing was one thing, but she hadn’t seen him. He hadn’t been at breakfast.

 

She knew Isabela was impatient too. Her cousin had practically stomped into the church and Dolores wondered if anyone else could see how Isabela’s smile strained at the edges.

 

Dolores knew they certainly noticed the minor differences in Isabela’s appearance and in the way she summoned the requested blossoms.

 

Isabela had thrown her hair up in a quick and rather messy ponytail, instead of letting it hang loose, or braided and prettily threaded with rosebuds. The only flower in her hair, stuck into her hair tie, was a red clover and she had a band of forget-me-nots around her wrist. They clashed with her soft pink dress; suddenly its frilly skirt and flounced sleeves looked out of place on Isa.

 

Dolores could hear Isabela grinding her teeth at the requests for roses, carnations, dahlias and orchids. 

 

She couldn’t blame her. After freely experimenting so much at home, Isa must be itching to show what she could do. Isabela could grow entire trees now, and here she was, stuck with the usual requests for pretty flowers.

 

Dolores would be bored too.

 

Instead of her usual, elegant hand waves, Isabela made the flowers appear by stomping her foot, slicing her hand through the air or snapping her fingers. Habits she’d picked up during practice; more energetic movements, less elegant and (honestly) more natural. 

 

“What has gotten into her?” the mother of the bride muttered. A perfect archway of roses appeared at the altar as requested, orchids crept up the pillars and bundles of carnations were at the end of every pew. Roses and dahlias arched over the front doors of the church and more orchids appeared on every windowsill. It was beautiful and perfect, but Isabela was still getting side glances.

 

She swung through the air on her vines, not slowly and gracefully, but quickly swinging around the room in one big circle, descending so fast she was nearly a blur. 

 

“That’s not like her,” the mother of the groom whispered, shaking her head.

 

Dolores’s fists clenched. She took a deep breath, placing another vase of flowers near the entryway. 

 

“Her hair looks so messy…”

 

God above, it was just a few tangles! It wasn’t as if Isabela hadn’t brushed her hair that morning.

 

“I hear she’s growing new things at Casita.”

 

“Whatever for? Her Gift is perfect already.”

 

“I just hope it’s not too messy. It would be a shame to ruin all those pretty gowns.”

 

Dolores’s eyelid twitched and she began to grind her teeth. 

 

“Anyone would think she didn’t want to be here!”

 

“Not like her at all.”

 

“Well, Dolores is being sweet.”

 

“Shh, she’ll hear!”

 

Too late, Dolores thought bitterly. She didn’t glare at the gossiping women, but she widened her eyes when they caught her staring, keeping her face carefully blank.

 

It always worked.

 

Sure enough, the mothers of the bride and groom flinched away, trying to act as if they hadn’t been talking about Dolores’s own cousin right under her nose.

 

“Frightening gaze,” she heard.

 

“No need to look like that.”

 

Dolores helped set out the welcome sign and, with Isabela, scattered rose petals all down the aisle.

 

All the while, she imagined grabbing one of the baskets set aside for the flower girls and hitting the women on the head with it. 

 

“Ready to go?” Isabela asked.

 

“Yes,” Dolores said quickly. She took Isabela’s hand and began to pull her towards the doors.

 

“Adios!” Isabela called over her shoulder, waving at the women. They smiled, waved and cooed over her as if they hadn’t been whispering about her the entire time.

 

Only a few small changes and they muttered and fretted as if Isabela had done a complete personality switch.

 

It drove Dolores mad.

 

“I hope Tio’s okay,” Isa said once they were outside. Dolores let go of her and they walked together, their gazes locked on their home.

 

“Hm,” Dolores said with a nod.

 

That paint fight sounded like it had gotten a bit nuts. There was no way they’d have everything clean by the time they reached home, but she was curious to see what Bruno had added to Camilo’s plate. 

 

Right now, they were pretending to sword fight with the paint brushes.

 

It was a far cry from the screams and sobs she’d heard before.

 

He’d sounded so frightened…

 

Someone dropped a cup and a baby let out a frightened wail. An old man swore as he lit his cigar. 

 

Her Tio had been terrified. Her mamá was furious; she wouldn’t even look at Abuela.

 

Dolores had seen the aftermath of the storm, but she and the others had been sent to her room during the argument; she had no idea what Pepa or Alma had said to each other.

 

The villagers had grumbled about the weather, until Tia Julieta said that Pepa had only been worried because Bruno was badly ill. That shut them up.

 

It wasn’t even a lie. He’d been screaming and screaming until he collapsed entirely and then he was so terrifyingly quiet.

 

What had he seen? What had the future shown him?

 

By Tia Julieta’s stall, she heard her mamá’s cloud clap with thunder as a man tried to skip the line again.

 

Finally, that was what did it. All the days of worry and stress built up and up…

 

And finally came pouring out.

 

With a strangled sob, Dolores stopped walking. She pressed her hands over her ears, her legs shaking.

 

It was too much. All of it. All of the noise, everywhere, all at once. People arguing and gossiping, complaining and sneering. Lying to each other’s faces.

 

Her Tio Bruno, screaming and screaming in terror, backed into a corner and forced to do something he was afraid to do.

 

And it had hurt him again.

 

“I can’t,” she whispered. “Isa, I can’t.

 

“Lola?” Her cousin’s arms were around her, leading her to a nearby bench. “Dolores, it’s okay, I’m here.”

 

“It’s too much,” she gasped. “I- I-” She closed her eyes, bent over, leaning against Isabela. “Isa, Tio was so scared, he was hurt and- and I need everyone to stop making noise. All they care about is the stupid sunshine or roses, Luisa hasn’t had a break all day and some idiot with a chipped tooth from a fight he started keeps trying to skip the line for Tia Julieta’s food!”

 

“Oh, Lola…” Isabela sounded so sad, hugging her tighter.

 

“And those gossiping nags kept complaining about your hair as if you’d shaved it all off! They complained about my eyes and about you as if I can’t hear them! I can always hear them!”

 

“Lola.” Isa’s voice broke and Dolores forced herself to open her eyes.

 

“I could hear Tio Bruno,” she sobbed. “He was scared and hurt because Abuela wanted him to look.”

 

Isabela’s eyes filled with tears. She swallowed heavily, looking as helpless as Dolores felt.

 

In Casita, Tio Bruno was leading the clean-up efforts, scrubbing at the table and washing the brushes and water jars. He was up, he was talking, he was out of his room…So why was Dolores so scared now?

 

“Dolores? Isabela?”

 

Oh God, just her luck. Mariano stood only a few steps away, gaping at them.

 

As soon as Dolores’s eyes locked on his, he hurried over, kneeling down next to Isabela and laying his hand on top of Dolores’s.

 

“Dolores, mi amiga,” he said softly. “What’s wrong?”

 

Dolores’s lip trembled and her tears fell faster. She couldn’t answer. She wasn’t completely sure of what the answer should be anyway.

 

“She’s overwhelmed,” Isabela whispered, cradling Dolores close as if she was much younger than her.

 

Mariano nodded, his expression one of sympathy. He stood up and held his hands out to them both.

 

“Well then,” he said with a gentle smile, the smile Dolores loved so much. “Let’s get you both home.”

Notes:

Mariano to the rescue!

Next up, Dolores and Luisa get the Tio time they deserve

Chapter 44: Louder, Louder

Summary:

Dolores finally lets out her pent-up fear and stress about everything she's heard. Amidst his anger on his niece's behalf, Bruno has an important realisation about his own treatment.

Notes:

My birthday gift to myself is a new chapter ✌️

In other news, the first chapter of my power/role swap should be posted this week! Fingers crossed 💕

Trigger warning: Dolores is having a panic attack and there's allusions to the abuse Bruno went through, and his self-harm scars

Songs I listened to while writing:
Run, by Snow Patrol
Speeding Car, by Walking On Cars
Hope You Found It Now, by Jason Walker
Half Light, by Banners
Everything Stays, from Adventure Time
Don't Forget, from Deltarune
Secrets, by One Republic
Fix You, by Coldplay

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Slower, slower; we don't have time for that. All I want is to find an easier way to get out of our little heads. Have heart, my dear; we're bound to be afraid, even if it's just for a few days, making up for all this mess. Light up, light up. As if you have a choice. Even if you cannot hear my voice, I'll be right beside you, dear.” - Run, Snow Patrol




The kitchen was all cleaned up, but Bruno and the kids still had paint smeared all over them; there were smudges of colour across Mirabel’s cheeks and a dab of purple on her chin, and splashes on her forehead. There was even paint in her hair and splatters across her blouse. Camilo had smeared the orange streak Mirabel painted on his forehead, only succeeding in making it bigger; he’d somehow gotten a dollop of paint on his foot and there was blue paint on his ear and across his nose and splashes of pink, yellow, green and red paint on his shirt and trousers. 

 

Bruno knew he had plenty of paint on his clothes; one glance told him that. He was just glad he’d worn a plain ruana instead of the one Mirabel did for him. There was paint on his face, an uncomfortable swipe of paint drying on his neck and Camilo, the little sneak, had painted one of his eyebrows yellow.

 

All three of them had paint absolutely coating their hands. 

 

In other words, they were complete messes.

 

“Right,” Bruno sighed with a rueful smile. “Who gets the bath first?”

 

As expected, Mirabel and Camilo ran for the courtyard, shoving each other, each trying to call dibs.

 

Their bickering abruptly died when Casita’s floor rose in a wave; the front doors slammed open, ushering in Isabela, Dolores and Mariano. Dolores was quietly sobbing and Isabela and Mariano each had an arm around her, keeping her balanced.

 

“Lola!” Camilo cried, running to his sister. She sobbed even more when he hugged her.

 

“What happened?” Bruno demanded, running across the courtyard, Mirabel right behind him.

 

“She’s overwhelmed,” Isabela explained quietly, giving Dolores a wide-eyed, worried frown. “The noise was too much, and…” She bit her lip, looking between Camilo and Mirabel.

 

At the sound of his voice, Dolores looked up. She let out one more heart-wrenching sob and threw herself at him, hugging him so tightly that Bruno was sure he heard something crack.

 

His arms immediately wrapped around her, even as his heart began to race in panic. Dolores clung to him, sobbing against his shoulder and all Bruno could do was softly repeat, “Shh, shh, you’re okay, it’s okay.” He threw a helpless glance at Isabela, nodding towards Mirabel and Camilo, who were increasingly distressed. “Can you look after them, Isa?”

 

Isabela nodded with such a grim look on her face that made her look eerily like Alma. She took the two by the hand, leading them towards the stairs.

 

“Come on, you two,” she said. “Lola needs to rest a while.”

 

“But-!” Camilo began to protest, constantly looking back at his sister with wide eyes.

 

“You can see her later,” Isabela said. “After she’s rested, okay? We need to get you two cleaned up.”

 

“I’ll find Señora Pepa and Señor Félix,” Mariano said, barely above a whisper.

 

Bruno nodded. “Gracias,” he said and Mariano hurried from Casita, the tiles rippling and pushing to urge him on faster.

 

There was a little click-click-click, and then a glass of water was being gently nudged against Bruno’s ankle.

 

Sighing, he bent to pick it up, hampered by Dolores clinging to him as if he’d disappear.

 

“Alright, Lola,” he said, rubbing her back, his heart twisting at her tear-filled eyes. “Let’s get you to your room, hm?”






Dolores gulped the water, sitting on the edge of her bed. Her eyes were red-rimmed and still watery; she sniffled and rubbed at her nose.

 

Her room was utterly silent, soundproof just as she’d said. The walls were a soft, pale yellow with a pattern of glittering golden swirls and waves. Windchimes and crystals hung from hooks and pegs on the wall; there were some music boxes on her shelves. The floor was covered in a thick, fluffy carpet which muffled their footsteps and her bed was on a raised platform of its own; the bed was round, the headboard carved with birds. Her pile of pillows was even larger than Bruno’s and there was a tiple against the wall. 

 

The room was utterly huge, of course. The ceiling soared overhead, painted in a manner that reminded Bruno of the Sistine Chapel, only instead of religious imagery, it was all one big mural of the village and surrounding mountains. 

 

Dolores set the empty glass on her bedside table, her breath hitching awkwardly. She rubbed her ears and eyes, her lip still trembling.

 

“Do you wanna talk about it?” Bruno asked, careful to keep his voice at a whisper.

 

Dolores sniffled again. Her hand reached out and wrapped carefully around his wrist. She stared determinedly at her lap and Bruno flinched.

 

“Lo siento,” she whispered. “I just…I could…” Her voice broke. “I could hear everything.

 

Oh God, Bruno thought, his eyes widening and his blood turning to ice. He hadn’t even thought about Dolores’s Gift. Of course she’d heard what happened.

 

And she’d been there the day he was found, leading the rescue party into the mountains. So had she seen…?

 

She looked heartbroken. 

 

“You were hurt,” she continued. “You were scared and you were hurt, and I couldn’t do anything. You shouldn’t have to look if it hurts you. And-” Her eyes darted down to her hand, to his wrist. Her expression crumpled and the tears fell all over again. “Oh, Tio, I’m so sorry.”

 

A rather large part of Bruno desperately wanted to break down on the spot. 

 

Dolores was much too old to believe he’d simply been in a fight. Besides, she’d have heard the adults discussing it all, wouldn’t she? How much exactly had she heard? Did she know everything he’d told his sisters, or were there any blank spots for her?

 

She knew enough. She knew too much.

 

She shouldn’t have to deal with all that.

 

“I’m sorry you saw it,” he managed to choke out. “And that you heard all that.”

 

“...It was the orphanage, wasn’t it?” She kept her eyes down. “Papá told Tia Julieta about…” She gestured behind herself, to her back.

 

Bruno closed his eyes, taking a deep breath. He gently pulled his wrist from her grip, taking her hand instead. She held on tightly, squeezing with all her might.

 

“Sí,” he said with a little, jerky nod. “It was.”




“El chico del río.”

 

“Bad Luck Bruno!”

 

“Bad omen.”

 

“Jinx.”

 

“Diablo!”

 

“Cursed!”




He opened his eyes, forcing himself to meet Dolores’s heartbroken gaze.

 

“Lola, I am so sorry you heard any of that. That you saw any of it. You’re just a kid, you shouldn’t have to deal with that.”

 

“You did,” Dolores whispered. “And you were all on your own.”

 

Bruno sighed so hard his chest ached. “You weren’t just overwhelmed by the noise, huh?”

 

She shook her head, curls flying. “I heard it all,” she said. “I thought…I thought I could handle it. I’ve heard bad things before. Lots of awful things. But this time, I…I couldn’t. You’re my tio, I don’t want you to get hurt. Not ever again.”

 

This time, he was the one who hugged her. The poor thing broke down sobbing again, wailing against his shoulder.

 

If a few tears slipped from Bruno’s eyes, no one else needed to know.






Dolores hated them, all these nameless, faceless people who ever raised a hand to her uncle. The nuns, any of the other children; anyone he met who hurt him. Anyone who ever hit him, or shouted, or made him feel like he wanted to die. She hated them.

 

The family wasn't there. All those years, he’d needed them and they weren’t there. Now he was finally home, they had him back and he’d been hurt again.

 

She didn’t want to hate Abuela. She couldn’t hate Abuela, not truly…But she was so tired of hearing everything, of knowing things she shouldn’t. She couldn’t get the sound of Bruno’s screams out of her head.

 

She tried to focus on his heartbeat as he held her instead. Steady, quiet evidence that he was here; he was alive and safe, he was hugging her. He was home. 

 

Thump-thump-thump. Alive and safe, breathing and right there hugging her. Alive, alive, alive. 

 

But one question remained: how to make sure no one hurt him like that again? Abuela had told Tia Julieta she wanted to do better, but if the villagers pressed for a glimpse of the future…

 

Would Abuela give in?

 

Would Bruno give in?

 

Dolores didn’t know. 






Pepa and Félix burst into the room and Pepa immediately ran to the bed, sweeping Dolores up into her arms.

 

“Oh, bébé,” she murmured, stroking Dolores’s hair. “It’s okay, corazón, I’m here.”

 

Dolores flopped against her as if all her energy had been sapped. She wept quietly against Pepa’s shoulder, her arms shaking as she held onto her mother.

 

A warm hand rested on Bruno’s shoulder and he looked up to meet Félix’s concerned gaze. Antonio was cradled in one arm, waving his tiny fists and grumbling softly.

 

“C’mon,” Félix said, gently tugging Bruno to his feet. “Let’s give them a moment.”

 

Bruno nodded, feeling somewhat light-headed and numb as they left Dolores’s room. Once the door shut, he couldn’t hear Dolores or Pepa at all. The sky was dark with thick grey clouds and when Bruno looked out the window, he could see fog rolling in, reflecting Pepa’s worry for her daughter.

 

“You’re a mess,” Félix said with an attempt at a smile.

 

Tell me something I don’t know, Bruno thought, still staring out the window.

 

“...Do you know what happened?” Félix asked, the false cheer draining from his voice.

 

“She heard everything,” Bruno said. He felt cold. Casita rattled around them and he could feel the house’s concern. “Everything, Félix. What happened in that damn cave and…And…What happened when I arrived here. She knows about-” His voice gave way and he clutched his arm, looking at Félix with wide, desperate eyes, silently pleading with him to understand what he meant.

 

He did. The grim look on his face and sad eyes told Bruno he understood in an instant.

 

“Ay, my poor hija,” he sighed, looking at Dolores’s door. 

 

“I can’t exactly tell her I was in a fight,” Bruno said. “She knows better.”

 

“Pepa and I will talk to her,” Félix promised. “We’ll make sure she takes a break in her room for a while and…And maybe she could spend some time with you too? If that’s okay? Just to help her calm down, to reassure her.”

 

“You don’t have to ask,” Bruno said, his bitten nails digging into his scars. “Of course she can.”

 

Félix’s smile was more genuine this time. “You go get washed up, hermano,” he said gently, steering Bruno towards the bathroom. “I think maybe we all need to settle down.”

 

“Tio Félix? Tio Bruno?” Isabela poked her head out of the nursery; Mirabel and Camilo’s worried faces appeared below her arm. All three of them had spiky, colourful plants in their hair and there was a splatter of red pollen on Isabela’s cheek.

 

The red made Bruno tense up all over again, but Félix stayed smiling steadily.

 

“We’re going downstairs, kids,” he announced. “Your Tio’s gonna join us once he’s all cleaned up.” He gave Bruno a pointed look that practically ordered him to do as Félix said.

 

So he nodded. He was sure his smile looked weak and awkward, crooked as all hell. 

 

“And Lola?” Isa asked.

 

“With her mamá,” Félix said. “She needs to rest for a while.”

 

Don’t we all? Bruno wondered. He still felt light-headed as he made his way to the bathroom, his thoughts whirling around in his head, unable to settle on one train of thought. He kept skipping between, Oh God, poor Dolores, is she okay? and She knows, she heard, she knows, and This isn’t fair, it’s not fair, none of it! She shouldn’t have to deal with all that!

 

And then, finally, there was a cautious little thought that came to him slowly; testing itself.

 

I shouldn’t have had to deal with all that either.

 

Again, more firmly; I shouldn’t have had to deal with all that either.

 

The curses, the belt; the stones, the fists, the shouting. No home, no friends, no family. No security for his entire life, right up until he was thirty-years-old.

 

I shouldn’t have had to deal with all that either.

 

Attempted muggings, horrible futures haunting his dreams. Stealing food to eat when he was out of options. Fleeing from place to place when people saw his eyes flash, or when they deemed him too odd, too freakish to deal with.

 

Not to mention living with constant pain and fatigue. Some days, Bruno still expected it to come back.

 

I shouldn’t have had to deal with all that either.

 

It wasn’t fair. None of it was fair.

 

The shower spray was warm, but Bruno felt surprisingly cold as his anger built up.

 

Safe in the knowledge that Dolores was in her soundproof room, and that everyone else was safely downstairs, Bruno let out a furious shout and punched the wall.

 

It’s not fair, Dolores doesn’t deserve any of that, she’s a KID, she’s just a kid.

 

I was just a kid too.






He felt exhausted when he went downstairs. Félix took one look at him and deposited Antonio in his arms. The baby cooed at him, his tiny fists gripping Bruno’s ruana. He’d changed into the one Mirabel embroidered for him. 

 

He’d bawled his eyes out in that shower and his hair was still damp. Something in his chest felt lighter and he badly wanted to go lie down.

 

Somehow, he doubted anyone would be happy if he went and hid himself. Félix would definitely come and carry him bodily downstairs if he tried to leave. He was quite sure that Isa would chase him with her vines.

 

Besides, Camilo and Mirabel’s puppy-eyes were lethal.

 

And…He didn’t really want to be alone right now. He didn’t have to be alone.

 

Bruno looked down at Antonio, meeting the baby’s solemn gaze. Antonio was tiny and fragile and so incredibly loved. He was safe and sound.

 

The thought of anyone raising their hand to him, to any of the kids, made Bruno’s blood boil. 

 

Dolores’s Gift hurt her; Pepa had to have constant control of her emotions. Isabela was capable of so much more than she realised. He’d seen some truly ridiculously small injuries at Julieta’s stall. 

 

And Bruno’s so-called Gift had ruined his life for decades. 

 

He looked into Antonio’s wide, innocent eyes and his resolve hardened.

 

No matter what anyone said, he was never looking into the future again.




Hidden in the dark, in between the walls, a small patch of cracks froze. They were inches short of reaching the largest crack of them all, and there they stayed.

 

Waiting.

Notes:

Let 👏 Dolores 👏 rest 👏

It's one thing to have others tell you that you didn't deserve to be treated horribly. It's another thing to have that realisation yourself

Next up, some fluff: in which Luisa spends time with Bruno, and she and Dolores are introduced to art therapy 🎨 Alma attempts to talk with Pepa...

Chapter 45: Splashes

Summary:

Bruno and the kids try a new artform as Dolores and Luisa finally get to relax. Meanwhile, Alma finally approaches Pepa.

Notes:

Okay, anyone seen The Princess Diaries? Remember the scene where Mia and her mom throw darts at balloons filled with paint? That scene inspired this chapter 🎨 (And I badly want to try it myself some day!)

In which the kids and Bruno have some well-deserved fun and Alma works up the nerve to seek out Pepa

Songs I listened to while writing:
Unstoppable/Bird Set Free, by Roveena
Stand In The Rain, by Superchick
Hail Rain Or Sunshine, by The Script
Hard Times, by Paramore
Anybody Have A Map? from Dear Evan Hansen
Scars To Your Beautiful, by Alessia Cara

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And, there's a scream inside that we all try to hide. Holding on so tight but I don't wanna die, no; I don't wanna die, no. I'm unstoppable, I'm a Porsche with no brakes. I'm invincible, I win every single game. I'm so powerful, I don't need batteries to play. I'm so confident, I'm unstoppable today.” - Unstoppable/Bird Set Free, Roveena




Luisa finally arrived home after sunset and she could immediately see how tense everyone was. Tia Pepa’s cloud was big and dark, and fog swirled around her ankles. She’d known since the weather turned bad that something must have happened, but she couldn’t guess what.

 

One glance into the dining room told her that Tio Bruno wasn’t at the dinner table…But neither was Dolores.

 

“Where’s Lola?” she asked, pausing on her way to the bathroom. She needed to wash up before joining everyone.

 

“She’s resting, amor,” Félix said, and his smile looked so tired. 

 

Luisa looked at Pepa. Her aunt was staring determinedly at her plate, clutching her fork so hard her knuckles were white.

 

Abuela looked worn out, an obvious crease to her brow. Isabela was fidgeting, which was practically unheard of, and Camilo kept craning his neck to look past the doorway to the stairs.

 

“She was overwhelmed,” Tio Félix continued. “The noise got to be too much.”

 

Luisa nodded. That happened sometimes. It happened a lot when Dolores first got her Gift, not that Luisa could remember it, but she’d heard the stories. It was rare nowadays; no wonder everyone looked down.

 

Isabela caught her eye and offered her a small smile. Her sister was probably tired of flower comparisons, but she reminded Luisa of a drooping flower right now.

 

As Luisa went upstairs, she glanced worriedly at her cousin’s door. The carving shone brightly and the door was soundproof; if Dolores was still upset then Luisa would never be able to hear anything, not unless she went and opened the door.

 

Speaking of which…

 

She turned to Tio Bruno’s door, her hand in her pocket, wrapping around the little card she’d written for him. She’d forgotten to give it to Mirabel this morning, she’d been in such a rush out the door.

 

She should bathe and head down to dinner. Her stomach was rumbling and she wanted to relax a little before having an early night.

 

But she also really wanted to see her uncle.

 

Luisa felt bizarrely nervous as she knocked on his door. “Tio Bruno?” she called. “Can I come in?”

 

There were small, hurried footsteps and the door opened a crack. One of her uncle’s big green eyes peered up at her in surprise.

 

“Oh!” he said and opened the door properly. “Hola, Luisa.”

 

“Hi,” she said, the shyness rushing back. “Um, I…” She reached into her pocket and pulled the card out. It was small, pale pink, and simply read I hope you’re feeling better, love from Luisa.

 

It was plain and boring compared to the card they’d all signed, or the one Mirabel and Camilo made for him months ago, but Bruno held it like it was priceless. His smile grew, his eyes shining. He had shadows under his eyes but when he smiled like that he looked much better.

 

“Gracias,” he said. “I’m…I’m feeling a bit better.”

 

“Good,” Luisa said, rubbing the back of her neck. Ugh, it was all sweaty, gross; she really should hurry to the bath…But this was also the first time she’d seen Bruno in days, she didn’t want to rush away.

 

“Are you joining in on the art stuff tomorrow?” he asked.

 

“W-well, I have to help mend Señor De La Cruz’s fence; his dog keeps getting out between the gap, and then Padré Martinez needs me to move the church before that wedding tomorrow afternoon, they want the best sunlight possible; and Señora Pezmeruto and her sister want help with their garden…And…And…” Her voice trailed away. Bruno just stared at her, unblinking. He looked concerned.

 

“Seems to me like they can handle all that themselves,” Bruno said, leaning against his doorway. One of his rats chittered from his pocket. “Well, maybe not moving the church, but that won’t take long, will it?”

 

“Well, no…” Luisa admitted. “It’d take a few minutes really.”

 

“I give you full permission to tell them I’m super ill,” Bruno said with a faint smirk. “And you’re needed at home.”

 

“Tio!” Luisa gasped with a startled laugh, scandalised and- it must be admitted- a little excited by the idea. “Y-you, um, you mean that?”

 

“Of course. You need a break and so does Dolores.” There was a dark flicker in Bruno’s eyes when he said her cousin’s name, his smile dropping. He sighed and tried to smile again. “Your sisters and Camilo will be here too. You shouldn’t be the only one missing out.”

 

She hesitated, frozen to the spot by indecision. She had chores; she had a duty to her community. She was super-strong, dependable Luisa and she hated letting anyone down. 

 

But…But her family would be let down if she skipped out on them, wouldn’t they? She’d already missed out on today. Dolores hadn’t been well and Luisa hadn’t even known until she got home.

 

She could move the church, easy-peasy. Then she could come home to Casita and spend time with her uncle, sisters and cousins. She could keep an eye on Dolores and on Tio Bruno; if she was here, she could make sure they were okay. And then she could go help Señor De La Cruz and the Pezmeruto sisters when they were done. 

 

Yeah…Yeah! She could fit it into her schedule! She’d just get up earlier to move the church and hurry home before she got caught up in requests and missed out again. If anyone tried to stop her, she’d do what Bruno said and tell them he was ill and she needed to help.

 

It wasn’t entirely a lie, right?

 

She could help her community and help her family.

 

“Okay,” she said, chin up and smiling. “Yeah. I think I can be there.”






Isabela was pleasantly surprised when Luisa came running back to Casita after breakfast. Her sister even looked surprised to be there, a shy smile on her face.

 

“I’m um, I’m hanging out with you guys today,” she said, rubbing her arm. “I mean, I’m looking after Lola and Tio Bruno.”

 

Isabela’s eyebrows rose and she tried not to grin too obviously. Looking after them. Right, sure. Whatever Luisa needed to tell herself. At least they were all free to hang out this time. Honestly, she would have thought Luisa would be in town all day. 

 

It was a nice change.

 

She was even more surprised when Bruno led them all into the back garden. There was a pile of old sheets on the ground and…were those balloons? And darts? Isabela didn’t know much about painting, but she was pretty sure it usually involved brushes, not darts.

 

“Isa, think you can grow some trees for us to pin these to?” Bruno asked, nodding towards the sheets. “Preferably pretty thick ones.”

 

On the other hand, who was Isa to question it, if it meant experimenting more? With a grin, she stomped her foot, her fists clenched and watched in delight as a row of trees grew before them. While her uncle held the sheets in place, she used thorns to pin them to the trees.

 

Then, to her bafflement, Bruno asked her to help pin the balloons to the sheets.

 

“Why?” Isa asked, holding one of the balloons. It was filled with something.

 

“The paint’s inside,” Bruno said brightly. He really was looking better. “I saw people do this in Bogotá. We’re gonna throw the darts to pop the balloons and the paint will splatter all over the sheets.”

 

“Cool!” Camilo cried, stars in his eyes.

 

Bruno gave him a warning glance. “I’ll be keeping an eye on you, kid,” he said. He turned to Mirabel and added, “You too, chiquita.”

 

Mirabel huffed, arms crossed, but she nodded.

 

Dolores, who had been sticking to Bruno’s side like glue this whole time, smiled for the first time that morning.

 

Isabela immediately felt relieved. If this could get her prima smiling again then she was all for it.

 

“What if we make a mess?” Luisa asked, wringing her hands.

 

“That’s why we’re outside,” Bruno said. He picked up a balloon and smiled. “So, are we going to get started or stand here all day?”






Isabela loved art. Or, rather, she loved this kind of art. She laughed in glee as her next dart popped a balloon full of green paint; it ran down the sheet, mixing with the purple and blue paint already splattered across it.

 

Next to her, Camilo whooped as he hit a balloon and yellow paint poured out. His and Mirabel’s aims weren’t great; occasionally they’d just run to the sheet and stick the darts in the balloons they wanted to pop instead of throwing them. 

 

Luisa slowly loosened up, throwing the darts with abandon instead of fretting about the mess. She threw her first dart so hard that it went clear through the sheet and even the tree, soaring across the garden. She’d looked mortified, but Isabela had only laughed, easily fixing the tree with a wave of her hand. Sure, Luisa’s art now had a hole in it, but who cared? The whole point was to make something a little crazy.

 

And Dolores, thank goodness, was truly smiling. She didn’t say a word and she still stayed by Bruno’s side, but her movements loosened up; she didn’t stand so stiffly and her eyes didn’t dart about anxiously. She just popped the balloons, giggling slightly at the sound they made as the paint escaped; even to Isabela it sounded slightly sludgy, so she could only imagine how it sounded to Dolores.

 

There was no rhyme or reason to any of their art. It was chaotic and messy and Isabela loved it.

 

It was a far cry from the mural in town, or the family tree. It was nothing like the landscapes or portraits she usually saw. 

 

“Have you ever done this before, Tio?” Isabela asked as blue paint ran down his sheet in a nearly perfect line.

 

“Nope,” he said, popping the P. “Never had the space for it until now.”

 

“I like it,” Mirabel said, grabbing a dart and running to her painting to pop another balloon up close. Pink paint splashed across the sheet and some drops got on Mirabel’s hands and nose. “It’s like target practice.”

 

“Hm, maybe I should pretend they’re Osvaldo’s face after all,” Bruno muttered to himself. Dolores snorted, pressing a hand over her mouth. Isabela had no idea what that was about, but it gave her an idea.

 

She imagined the next two balloons were the faces of the gossiping women from church yesterday, the ones who’d talked badly about Isabela and Dolores with the girls right there in the room with them, the ones who’d upset her cousin so badly.

 

When she threw her darts, her aim was perfect. Red and purple paint splashed out. Grinning, Isabela summoned a handful of bright yellow pollen and threw it, letting it splatter across the paint, creating a complete (albeit colourful) mess.

 

Dolores stepped closer, her eyes big and curious.

 

“Could I have some?” she asked, barely above a whisper.

 

Isabela resisted the urge to throw her arms around her. It was the first time she’d heard Dolores speak all day.

 

But she didn’t want to put Dolores on the spot, so she just summoned some blue pollen and let it drop into Dolores’s hand.

 

Her cousin threw it with all her might, beaming as it hit the sheet.

 

“Pollen and paint,” Bruno said, looking thoughtful. “Honestly, not a bad idea, Isa.”

 

Things only got even messier from there. Camilo took two handfuls of pollen and ran to his sheet, smearing the pollen and paint across it with his hands, laughing all the while; even as he mixed it all together Isabela could see places where his handprints were obvious. Mirabel threw a dart (missing her target completely) and held out her hand for some pollen. The pollen hit, making a big splash of red and Mirabel punched the air in triumph.

 

Luisa looked startled, but when Isabela offered her some pollen she took it. She squinted in concentration as she threw it, smiling at the bright orange splatter. 

 

Yes, their artwork was all absolute messes. Chaotic, bright and perhaps a little ridiculous.

 

Isabela wondered about trying it again in her room. It would be nice to break up all that pink. Right now, only a small corner of her room had her new flowers and plants; some new decor would be nice too.

 

Dolores looked at her as if she knew what she was thinking. “Hm,” her cousin squeaked and threw another dart, a little smirk on her face.






Dolores felt like she could breathe again. After a fretful night or tossing and turning, she hadn’t been sure how today would go at all.

 

But here she was, messing about with her family.

 

Luisa was laughing freely, pollen on her hands and skirt, her hair escaping its bun. Isabela whooped and screamed; her hair was falling in her face and she’d somehow ended up even messier than Camilo.

 

Camilo was utterly hyper, running around the garden and laughing. Mirabel had paint on her hands and face, giggling and clapping as she popped her final balloon.

 

Tio Bruno was up out of bed, he was even out of the house. His heartbeat was relaxed, his smile was genuine. Sure, he yawned from time to time, but so did Dolores. He caught her eye and smiled, his eyes softening.

 

If Dolores followed him around like a baby duck, that was her own business. 

 

Logically, she knew he was doing better than he was before. He was even better than he was yesterday. Something had changed, but she wasn’t sure what.

 

But emotions weren’t always logical, and Dolores felt consumed with a need to make sure, to make absolutely sure that her Tio was truly okay.

 

If that meant sticking to him like glue for a while, so be it. He didn’t seem to have any complaints.

 

And she was having fun.

 

She let herself block out the town as best she could, instead focusing on the laughter, heartbeats and voices of her family.

 

It didn’t make everything perfect; far from it. She still felt tired and twitchy, and she kept one eye on her Tio Bruno at all times…But it helped. It helped a lot.

 

Although, there was one thing…

 

She cocked her head as they began to clean up, listening to her mamá in the fields as Abuela approached her.

 

Maybe she should keep one ear on them. Just to be safe.






Maybe Pepa should have expected it, all things considered, but she was still surprised to look across the field and see her mamá approaching.

 

Even as she walked past crops and through mud, Alma walked regally. The farmers paused in their work, doffing their hats to her.

 

At the sight of her, Pepa’s cloud grew and it rained harder on the field. Her own cloud thundered and the clouds in the sky grew darker. 

 

“Mamá,” she said stiffly. “Is it Dolores?”

 

“No, mija,” Alma said. Her voice was quiet and her eyes seemed dim. Pepa’s attention was drawn to her mother’s hands; she was fidgeting, wringing them together, twisting her wedding ring.

 

Alma Madrigal did not fidget.

 

“Is it Bruno?” Pepa asked, her heart beginning to beat faster. “Tonito? Camilo? Is it Juli? Félix?

 

“No, no, amor; no one is hurt or ill, I just…When is your break?”

 

Wrong-footed, Pepa took a moment to answer. “Um, ten minutes,” she said.

 

Alma nodded. Pepa expected her to leave, but instead she did something entirely new: she turned to the watching farmers with a shadow of her usual gracious smile and said, “Perdóname, but I need to speak with my daughter about an urgent family matter. Could you spare her a few minutes early?”

 

“Of course, Doña Alma,” one of the farmers said. The others were quick to nod. 

 

“Mamá?” Pepa’s eyebrows rose higher and higher. The rain slowly petered out, but a cool breeze hit them, rustling Pepa’s hair and making her shiver.

 

Alma sighed. Her hand came up to cup Pepa’s cheek.

 

Pepa held very still, staring into her mother’s tired eyes.

 

“Por favor,” she said softly, so softly that Pepa struggled to hear. “But may I speak with you in private, Pepita?”

 

Pepa felt completely thrown off balance. She stared at her mother, wondering what would happen if she said no. What if she told Alma to back off (or words to that effect)? 

 

Alma looked every one of her years, waiting for Pepa’s answer. She barely seemed to breathe.

 

Her hand, oddly gentle, stayed on Pepa’s cheek.

 

Slowly, more than a little reluctant, Pepa nodded. 

 

“Fine,” she said stiffly. “Let’s go.”

Notes:

✨Cliffhanger✨

My dog is slapping me for attention as I write this note 🐾 Ziggy says hello, I guess!

Next up, Pepa and Alma finally talk, and Isabela does some experimenting

Chapter 46: The Shiver of Something New

Summary:

Confronted by her mother, Pepa finally lets out everything she's been holding back all these years. Meanwhile, Isabela tries something new.

Notes:

Pepa, my beloved 💕
Isabela, my beloved 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
Guiltless, by Dodie
Hard Times, by Paramore
Because of You, by Kelly Clarkson
Two Birds, by Regina Spektor
Monster, by Dodie
Mad Woman, by Taylor Swift
Mother's Daughter, by Miley Cyrus
What Else Can I Do, from Encanto
Don't Let Me Get Me, by P!NK
Fuckin' Perfect, by P!NK

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“There is a wall in my life built by you. You opened a door that a kid shouldn't walk through. Oh, but I'm not bitter, I'm just tired; no use getting angry at the way that you're wired. Ignorant trauma in one afternoon. And I could never let you know, oh, you'd never get it. And now I'm the one who can't let go, oh, don't say it's genetic. Is it real? You believe you're guiltless. Oh, I can tell you believe you're guiltless.” - Guiltless, Dodie




Thunder rumbled overhead, the clouds were dark and heavy with the promise of rain, the threat of a storm. Pepa stared at her mother, arms tightly crossed, holding herself together. Lightning was in her veins, thunder was in her heart and a hurricane behind her eyes.

 

She felt like she could explode and tear down the entire Encanto with her. She stared at Alma’s tired eyes and fidgeting hands and, for once, she wondered if her mother would even stop her if she let go.

 

They’d left the fields and they’d left the town behind. They’d gone into the fringes of the jungle, to a quiet clearing. It was a pretty little clearing, full of flowers and a trickling stream. Somewhere overhead, she could hear birds chirping but Pepa couldn’t see them. 

 

“So,” Pepa said, her voice tight. “What do you want?”

 

Alma gave a tiny sigh, so quiet that Pepa almost missed it, and sat on a nearby rock. She held her locket tightly and bowed her head; she looked like she was praying.

 

Taking a deep breath, her mother finally met Pepa’s sparking eyes.

 

“I want to apologise, mija,” she said. “For everything.”

 

“Oh, do you?” Pepa’s voice was harsh as a whip and the wind picked up, blowing harshly against them both. Pepa was still soaked from the fields and she shivered in the cold.

 

To her surprise, Alma stood and, without a word, wrapped her shawl around Pepa.

 

The wind stopped.

 

No one touched Alma’s shawl. Ever. It was one of her most important garments; it had been given to her the same night Casita appeared, folded neatly on her new bed. Despite its age, it still looked brand new, and it smelled like Alma’s perfume and favourite soap. 

 

It was soft. It was warm. 

 

Pepa had almost expected it to be cold. 

 

On autopilot, she held it tightly against her, staring at her mother in shock.

 

“I never meant to make you feel like I didn’t care,” Alma said, her voice breaking. The unflappable, imperious Doña Alma Madrigal was gone; in her place was an old, tired woman with tear-filled eyes.

 

“I let you down,” Alma said. “If you have gone this long feeling I do not care about you…Pepita, coroazón, I am so sorry.”

 

The thunder rumbled again.

 

“You didn’t ask why I was upset,” she said. “You never asked.” Her cloud appeared at last, spreading out over them both and flashing with lightning. The sky overhead mirrored her cloud, flashing ominously. “It was always, ‘Pepa, you have a cloud. Pepa, calm down. Clear skies, clear skies. You can’t rain today, there’s a Christening, there’s a wedding, there’s an engagement party, a birthday party…’ You…You never asked! You just told me to calm down, to make clear skies! You didn’t care why I was angry or sad!”

 

Alma’s expression crumpled. Her breathing wavered and she held her locket like a lifeline.

 

Not for the first time, Pepa wondered if Pedro could see this. Would he take Pepa’s side, or Alma’s? Maybe he’d have some miraculous compromise that neither of them ever thought of. 

 

“I can’t keep my emotions under wraps or under perfect control!” Pepa cried, finally letting herself raise her voice, clutching Alma’s shawl like a shield. Against her will, the tears escaped and the rain began. “No one can! I’m only human, Mamá; I’m not Mother Nature’s daughter, or whatever shit the villagers come up with. I’m YOUR daughter!”

 

Clear…

 

No.

 

Pepa took a deep breath and stormed past her mother, claiming the nearby rock as her own seat. She sat there glaring at Alma, tears coursing down her cheeks.

 

She wished Félix was here.

 

“Why wasn’t I enough for you?” she whispered, staring at the grass, at the raindrops hitting the flowers.

 

Alma made a soft, pained noise. In three quick strides, she was in front of Pepa. She knelt in the wet grass and dirt, tightly holding Pepa’s hands.

 

“Pepa, that’s not true,” she said, her voice quiet and fierce. “I promise you. I love you, mija.”

 

Pepa met Alma’s eyes. Her mother was freely crying. Another new sight.

 

“Then why didn’t you ever say it?” she asked. “Why didn’t you show it?”

 

“I was scared,” Alma admitted. “I…I was so afraid to lose the Miracle and our home. I wanted everyone to be safe. I thought the magic would keep us safe.”

 

Pepa pulled her hands away and stood. The rain came down harder, the wind cut at her like a knife.

 

She held the shawl out until Alma took it.

 

“You hurt me,” she said. “You hurt Juli. You hurt Brunito. And the kids…Mamá, Isa was scared when you showed up and started telling her off for the new plants! Dolores has to listen to everything, all the time. And it doesn’t matter if she tells what she hears or keeps it a secret, people still complain. You still complain! She heard what happened to Bruno and she tried to keep that to herself. She shouldn’t second-guess that she can come to her family when she’s overwhelmed!”

 

Alma stood on shaking legs, holding her shawl in limp hands.

 

“That wedding they were helping with? The mothers of the bride and groom spent the whole time complaining about Isabela and Dolores, as if mi hija couldn’t hear every word! They complained about Isabela’s hair for goodness sake! She didn’t spend ages gushing over the wedding plans and their petty little grievances; she went and did her job and they complained about that. They complained about Dolores’s eyes!” Lightning flashed in the sky and shot out from her own cloud. When Pepa got her hands on those gossiping, petty bitches there would be hell to pay. Who did they think they were, talking about her daughter like that?

 

“Julieta’s on her feet all day, every day. Did you know that half the people who come to her don’t even thank her?

 

Alma shook her head, looking lost.

 

“I did not know that,” she said quietly.

 

“They go to Juli for everything. No matter how small or stupid the injury is. Someone’s got a bruise? Time to go waste Julieta’s time!”

 

The rain was turning into hail, pouring down faster and harder, pelting them with little balls of ice.

 

Oh, she could just hear the villagers complaining already.

 

And Pepa didn’t care. This time, they could damn well deal with it. Every place in the world had bad weather, no matter how idyllic. 

 

Perfection simply didn’t exist.

 

“Isabela didn’t follow the invisible script, so people complained. They insult my daughter and her appearance and her Gift, as if anyone can turn her hearing off! Luisa…You know, I think this is the first day she’s spent at home in months? I…I didn’t even realise…” Pepa’s voice lowered, trailing away as she tugged on her braid. Come to think of it, when was the last time Luisa took a break?

 

Alma looked lost too. She didn’t know the answer either.

 

Somehow, that only made it worse.

 

“Camilo’s expected to shape-shift for every little thing,” Pepa continued, pushing past that shock. “He’s expected to keep everyone else’s kids out of trouble. He babysits, he shifts into adults to make them behave; he looks after toddlers. The only reason he’s not stuck looking after babies is because Félix and I put our foot down!” She began to pace up and down, her breathing picked up speed and her hands felt like ice. 

 

“But how long will that last?” she wondered aloud. “How long until you agree for us? How long until you overrule us again?

 

And Bruno…Oh God, Bruno…

 

Her brother had been traumatised all over again. Pezmeurto was already bothering him over a goldfish. How long would it be until the villagers, or the council, started demanding visions from him? Alma and Julieta told everyone Bruno was ill, to explain Pepa’s storm and his absence the last few days, but how long would that reprieve last? 

 

People came to Julieta for the stupidest things. Pezmeruto had already proven that the village would make stupid demands of Bruno too.

 

“I’m tired,” Pepa said, forcing the words out past the lump growing in her throat. “I’m so tired, Mamá.”

 

She stopped pacing. The hail continued.

 

“Pepa…” Alma’s voice shook. She held out her hand.

 

Pepa didn’t take it.

 

“A blanket apology isn’t enough,” she said quietly. “And I don’t give a damn about words. I care about actions, Mamá.”

 

That was it, wasn’t it? She could rant and rave, and sob as much as she wanted. Alma could apologise until her voice was gone, until she was blue in the face…And Pepa would always be on edge.

 

Unless she saw some serious change…Who was to say Alma even meant it?

 

I’m sorry for everything. It was easy to say that. It wasn’t so easy to show it.

 

“I want to see it,” Pepa said, soaked to the bone, her icy hands in fists. “I want to see you mean it. I don’t want to hear it. Words are easy; actions are harder.” 

 

It was something Félix always said.

 

Pepa wanted to believe her. How many hours, days, weeks, months, years had she spent wishing her mother would just listen to her? She’d wished for so long that Alma would hear her out, that she’d loosen her tight grip on Pepa, that she’d ask why Pepa was sad or angry, instead of snapping at her.

 

“I want to see it first,” Pepa said, a command of her own. Oh, how the tables turn. “And then we can talk.”

 

Alma’s hair was coming loose from its usually immaculate style. Her make-up was smeared with tears (Pepa was sure her own looked even worse) and she looked so strangely small.

 

All the same, Alma nodded.

 

“I will try,” she said hoarsely.






The cracks grew. They froze. They shrank. They grew.

 

Among all the thunder and lightning, a mountain shook. A few rocks came loose, some trees swayed. Nothing major. But still…

 

It shook.




Okay, so they all ended up passing out in Dolores’s room. Mirabel liked Dolores’s room; it was always so peaceful. And Dolores was still feeling a little shaky so, once they cleaned up and set aside their artwork to dry (Isa volunteered her room for that) they all gathered in Dolores’s room for lunch.

 

Dolores fell asleep first. Luisa, sitting against the edge of the bed, kept one worried eye on her, but she was the second to fall asleep, with Camilo close behind.

 

“Sleep is for the weak,” Mirabel said, smothering a yawn. It was something Camilo said when they were both determined to stay up late.

 

“Then call me a weakling,” Bruno mumbled, eyes closed.

 

Isabela snorted, a surprisingly loud and inelegant sound. Mirabel grinned at her. Isabela was way more fun lately.

 

Isabela and Tio Bruno fell asleep around the same time and Mirabel stayed awake as long as she could, staring at Dolores’s painted ceiling. Maybe she could try and paint her own small version. And she’d need to pick the perfect spot to pin her art in the nursery. It was a big sheet, but most of Mirabel’s work went above her bed; she’d need to pick one of the other walls.

 

And she’d maybe ask Mamá or Tio Félix for help putting it up. Papí would probably break both his thumbs if he tried.

 

She was even more surprised when Isa cracked an eye open, yawned and wrapped an arm around Mirabel, pulling her against her big sister’s side.

 

“Nap, you dummy,” Isa mumbled, closing her eyes again. 

 

Okay, a nap did sound pretty good.

 

Mirabel closed her eyes and let herself drift off.






Isabela didn’t see Tia Pepa, Tio Félix or Antonio at dinner, and Abuela looked like she was about to fall asleep.

 

“Abuela went to find Mamá just before we went to my room,” Dolores whispered to her. She bit her lip, looking terribly guilty. “I should have stayed to listen.”

 

“No way,” Isabela whispered back firmly. “You needed to rest.”

 

Dolores was, thank goodness, looking better. There was a shine back in her eyes and her movements weren’t so tense.

 

And, wonder of wonders, Luisa had stayed with them the entire day! Isa hadn’t realised how much she’d missed spending time with Luisa until now. They needed to do it again soon.

 

Tio Bruno had vanished to his room as soon as Abuela came home. Abuela had called after him, sounding so anguished that it hurt Isabela’s heart, but Bruno had run straight to his room and hadn’t re-emerged. 

 

Given what Dolores had told her, Isabela couldn’t entirely blame him.

 

She hated to see Abuela so sad, but Tio Bruno had been hurt. And now it sounded like Tia Pepa was sad too. At least Tio Félix would help her.

 

Still, it was weird to have so many family members missing from the table. Camilo kept fidgeting restlessly, shovelling his food into his mouth with one eye on the door. Clearly he was going to run to his parents as soon as dinner was finished.

 

Isa couldn’t blame Camilo either. If her mamá hid away, how would she feel?

 

If you looked at Julieta, you wouldn’t guess anything was wrong. She valiantly kept the conversation going, a gracious smile on her face. She got them to recount their day and gently urged Abuela to eat.

 

Isabela had to admire her mother’s poise. She couldn’t imagine Julieta having to make perfect, practised poses every day; it seemed so easy for her.

 

Poses…

 

Isabela smiled at her plate with all its new, colourful flowers. Those topiaries were taking up quite a lot of space in her room. Maybe it was time to clear them out and try something new.






After dinner, Isabela hurried to her room. Julieta agreed to hang Mirabel’s artwork up for her, and Camilo’s too. Luisa took care of her own and Dolores brought hers to her room with her usual little squeak.

 

Isabela summoned some vines and used them to hang her artwork from the ceiling. It acted as a sort of curtain, hiding the topiaries from view.

 

And, with a swing of her arms and clenched fists, new vines tore the topiaries to shreds.

 

Goodbye, pretty poses. Goodbye, perfect smiles. Goodbye, elegance and beauty.

 

Beauty didn’t need to be soft. Isabela knew that now.

 

They’d tried something new today. She wanted to try another new thing.

 

She raised her arms into the air and the empty space before her came alive with a riot of colours.

 

Rows of bromeliads grew before her. There was a patch of aloe (I’ll give some to Mamá, she thought) and a spiral of different cacti, in crazy shapes and sizes. As she ran around, stomping her feet and swinging on her vines, three jacaranda trees grew. Isabela waved her arm and a flurry of the bright purple jacaranda flowers appeared mid-air, showering down around her.

 

She landed with a stomp and a tabebuia grew among the jacarandas, the bright yellow standing out among the purple.

 

Laughing, Isabela spun and kicked out, and- poof! A cloud of bright yellow pollen burst out of the plants, coating her arm and the front of her dress.

 

For a second, there was pure panic. (Oh no, it’s such a mess, I’ll never get that stain out, what will Abuela say?) Then there was a sense of downright mischief.

 

Grinning, Isabela kept kicking and slapping at the plants, sending up more and more pollen: red, green, blue, yellow and orange. It surrounded her like one of Tia Pepa’s hurricanes and Isabela danced in the mess, whooping and screaming to herself all the while.

 

Goodbye, Señorita Perfecta! I won’t be missing you!

 

When Isabela emerged from the pollen, still giggling helplessly, she was a complete mess. Her hair was tangled and she was covered in pollen from head to toe: it stained her hair and was smeared on her skin. Her previously pink dress was unrecognisable: it was mostly dark blue, streaked with red and green, and splashes of orange and yellow. Only little patches of pink showed through. Small vines twisted around her forearms like the world’s weirdest bracelets, and there was orange and purple anthurium in her hair.

 

All around her were her new plants; the trees, flowers, bushes and herbs. Sundew, cacti, vines, strangler figs; jacarandas and tabebuia, aloe, a swarm of new vivid orchids she’d never made before and bromeliads.

 

Isa needed another bath. 

 

All the same, as she looked in the mirror, she couldn’t stop smiling. With a wave of her hand, the stairs leading to her bed were covered in bright blue and purple blossoms, replacing all the pink. The blue and purple flowers spread out, creating a path to her door.

 

Maybe it was time for a new look too. New colours, new hair…

 

And a new dress.

 

She’d need to visit the dressmakers tomorrow.

Notes:

Pepa finally got to continue venting. For her, actions speak louder than words. It's hard to believe an apology when you're so used to "Pepa, you have a cloud!"
Alma admitted she was scared, but she's still holding a LOT back...

Isabela can go a little feral. As a treat 💐

Next chapter is more Madrigal sisters and Madrigal triplet centric. Isabela drags Luisa and Mirabel shopping and the triplets vent their frustrations. And...🎵Oye, Mariano's on his way🎵

Chapter 47: Twists and Turns

Summary:

The triplets spend some time together to vent and relax. Bruno continues painting the family's plates. Isabela takes Mirabel and Luisa shopping, determined to try something new, and Mariano has an important question.

Notes:

Anyone who follows me on tumblr will probably have seen that I am super sick this week, as well as super busy, so updates will be a bit slower for a while!

In any case, we're back with more Madrigal family drama

Songs I listened to while writing:
Brutal, by Olivia Rodrigo
Titanium, by Madilyn Bailey
The Greatest, by Madilyn Bailey
Who You Are, by Jessie J
Secret For The Mad, by Dodie
It's Time, by Imagine Dragons
Playing God, by Paramore
Phoenix, by Olivia Holt
Ruin, by The Amazing Devil

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And I'm so sick of 17; where's my fucking teenage dream? If someone tells me one more time, ‘Enjoy your youth!’ I'm gonna cry. And I don't stick up for myself, I'm anxious and nothing can help. And I wish I'd done this before, and I wish people liked me more. All I did was try my best, this the kind of thanks I get? Unrelentlessly upset. They say these are the golden years but I wish I could disappear. Ego crush is so severe. God, it's brutal out here.” - Brutal, Olivia Rodrigo




They were all in for a surprise when Isabela arrived for breakfast. They were once more eating outside (Luisa carried out the table and most of the chairs, while Casita ushered the other chairs out the door) and Isabela was, surprisingly, one of the last to arrive.

 

Luisa quickly saw why: there were coloured streaks in Isabela’s hair, all bright blue and yellow. Was that pollen? Her hair looked more windswept than usual and one thick strand fell over her shoulder instead of being neatly pinned back. Vines wrapped around her forearms like bracelets, dotted with tiny daisies in vivid shades of purple and blue. The blossom of choice for her hair today was a houseleek flower.

 

Huh, Luisa thought, eyebrows raising. It suits her.

 

It also clashed terribly with her pretty princess style of dress. But it looked cool. Luisa thought so anyway. She wouldn’t have thought to use pollen in her hair; how had Isa come up with that? 

 

Abuela looked like she was about to keel over. Luisa took a step closer to her on instinct, her wary eyes watching the rise and fall of her grandmother’s chest. Oh God, she wasn’t actually having a heart attack, right? Should she tell her mamá to grab the nearest plate of food? Abuela was staring at Isabela with wide eyes; she looked pale and her posture was rigid.

 

“Isabela,” she said, sounding choked. “You…Mi flor, you…Changed your hair?”

 

“Oh,” Isabela said. “Sí.” She fiddled with one of the coloured strands, twisting it around her finger. “I, um…I was experimenting last night, and some of the pollen got in my hair. Well, quite a lot of it did, actually- I mean, anyway, it gave me the idea. To…To try a different style…?” She said the last part like a question. Luisa wasn’t used to her sister stammering.

 

“Can you do my hair like that?” Mirabel asked.

 

“You’re too young,” Julieta immediately cut in firmly. Agustín nodded in agreement; he tried to look stern, but mostly looked like he was trying to imitate a frog with his puffed out cheeks. Luisa loved her papá, but unless he was really mad then he was terrible at lectures. “No dyeing your hair until you’re a teenager, Mira.”

 

Mirabel groaned, slouching in her seat. It seemed to somewhat snap Abuela out of her shock; she gave a tiny huff that might have been a laugh, or might have been a sound of shock. She shook her head and gulped at her coffee as if her life depended on it.

 

“Well,” she said. “It is…Colourful. Just be careful with what you put in your hair, amor. I wouldn’t want you to damage it.”

 

Isabela nodded with a relieved smile. “Sí, Abuela,” she said and took a seat next to Luisa.

 

The only ones missing from the table were Tia Pepa and Tio Bruno. Luisa wondered what Pepa and Abuela had said to each other. Whatever it was, she hoped it got better soon.

 

As she tucked in, she listened with half an ear as Mirabel and Dolores grilled Isabela about the colours in her hair, and pondered her upcoming chores. She…May have forgotten to go back to the village after painting yesterday. It had completely slipped her mind until she woke up from her nap and, by then, it was nearly time for dinner.

 

So her list would be double long today. But that was fine! It was only fair. It was her own fault for slacking off. She’d spent time with her family, she’d made sure Dolores and Bruno were okay, like she’d promised, and promptly forgotten the rest of her promises.

 

But it was fine. Totally okay! She’d just need to work hard to get everything done.

 

And…And maybe she’d buy herself some paint later today. That had been fun. 






Mirabel had never been shopping with her sisters. Okay, that wasn’t entirely true; she’d been shopping with them, but Mamí was always with them. The shopping trips were never very long, not unless they were preparing for one of their birthdays and you could always count on the villagers to try and ask Luisa for a favour.

 

Today was very different. Isabela grabbed hold of Mirabel and Luisa right after breakfast, her eyes shining.

 

“Wanna go shopping?” she asked. “I need a new dress.” She held out her frilly, soft pink skirts, her nose wrinkling. “Something...Brighter.” She looked at Mirabel and added, “And maybe with some embroidery?”

 

Mirabel was instantly hooked.

 

“Embroidery?” she asked hopefully. She was never allowed to touch Isa’s things before! 

 

“Please,” Isa said. That was still weird, but in a good way; Isabela actually talked to her now, and thanked her for things. She liked Mirabel’s ideas for plants and watched her sew or embroider curiously.

 

“I don’t know much about dresses,” Luisa said, rubbing her arm. “I don’t know how much help I can be.”

 

“We can all get new dresses,” Isabela said. She began to pull them towards the doors. Casita rattled its floor tiles and one of the potted plants bounced. “We’ll give each other tips, okay?”

 

“Er...Okay,” Luisa said with a shy smile. “But then I have to go to the fields and finish fixing that new barn, and Osvaldo’s cart wheels are all crooked- I don’t know what he did, but the cart won’t go in a straight line anymore! And then I need to double-check the fence on the donkey pens. And I missed out on so much yesterday, so I need to catch up...” She babbled on and on, listing her chores. Mirabel’s eyebrows rose higher and higher. Jeez, talk about a packed schedule. 

 

Isabela’s nose wrinkled again, but she didn’t say a word. She just kept a firm hold on their hands, pulling them along with her. Mirabel kept looking at the streaks of blue and yellow pollen in her sister’s hair and the vines wrapped around her forearms. She liked them better than Isabela’s usual look; it was more colourful, even if Abuela looked like she was going to have a heart-attack. But Abuela even gave her approval! Sort of. She hadn’t told Isabela to wash it out anyway. It was a better reaction than before, when Isa first started trying new things.

 

Mirabel had the feeling a lot of people would react like Abuela had. Only without improving.

 

She didn’t have long to wait; the walk to town was short and, sure enough, all eyes were on them. On Isabela.

 

Here we go, Mirabel thought grimly. But hey, eyes on the prize! She just needed to stay focused on the promised new dresses and think of ideas for embroidery. 

 

She thought Isa looked cool. Who cared what a bunch of adults thought? They weren’t even their parents, so they didn’t get a say.

 

At least, she didn’t think they did. You could never be too sure with grown-ups; some of them were incredibly bossy.






Bruno hadn’t seen Julieta’s room yet but, around lunch-time, she came back to Casita with Pepa.

 

“Meet us in my room, okay?” she said. “You can bring your paints if you want. It’s, um…” Her smile turned shyer. “It’s triplet time.”

 

Bruno had no idea what that would entail, but he highly doubted that they were about to announce they were going rock-climbing or scuba-diving, so why not find out? Besides, they were his friends even before he found out they were his sisters. He liked spending time with them.

 

He grabbed some of the plates he’d been working on and went to Julieta’s room, steadfastly ignoring the staircase to that awful cave. It seemed bigger than before and the opening to the tunnel was pitch-black, not a hint of light to be seen. I hope it closes off, Bruno thought bitterly, angrily, as he hurried from his room. I hope it collapses.

 

Julieta’s room didn’t have a creepy cave or tunnel. In fact, most of it looked like a meadow. It was absolutely huge, of course; there was a fenced off section full of different herbs, trees and bushes of fruits, rows and rows of vegetables. There was a big water feature off to the left; three little waterfalls cascading into a big pond. Water lilies floated on the pond, there was a cushioned bench in front of the water feature. The cushions were teal and patterned with hearts and herbs, the furniture was all whicker.

 

A path of stepping stones cut through the flower-dotted grass, leading to the very back of the room, where he found Julieta’s proper living space. It was a bit like looking at a dollhouse: it was a bedroom/living room, but there were only two walls, painted sky blue and separated from the remainder of the room by carved, polished pillars. The rest of the walls were painted to look like a meadow, like the rest of the room, and were so realistic that Bruno half-expected that he could keep walking, that the walls were just an illusion. But no, they were definitely there: the painted clouds didn’t move, no flowers or tree branches swayed, the grass was completely still. Even the ceiling was painted like the sky, with fluffy clouds and little birds.

 

The wooden floor was covered in thick rugs; some were fluffy, others were patterned with flowers, hearts, pestles and bowls. There were two book shelves, absolutely packed with books and photos of the Madrigals. A cabinet was full of bandages and first aid kits, which Bruno couldn’t imagine got much use. There were even little hearts engraved on the handles of the cabinet. There were two plush armchairs with a small coffee table between them. There were matching doilies on the chairs; it was all very cosy.

 

Julieta’s bed just looked soft. The blanket was blue, the pillows were blue, teal and white. There were more family photos on each bedside table and the twin wardrobes had Julieta and Agustín’s initials engraved on the doors. The pretty lights overhead gave the whole area a soft, golden glow.

 

The whole room smelled faintly of lavender. All in all, the living area screamed Mamá. The rest of it was all a mix of a chef and healer’s paradise. 

 

He found Julieta and Pepa on the bed and, for a moment, it was like walking into one of his childhood daydreams about siblings. Of all things, Julieta was doing Pepa’s hair, pulling it into three separate braids and tying them together. Pepa was reading (it looked like another romance, judging by the cover) and seemed in no hurry to move. Well, it certainly felt like something you'd see in a book. For a moment, he felt so ridiculously fond of them.

 

“Hola, hermanito,” Julieta said, still eyeing Pepa’s hair with intense concentration. “Take a seat.”

 

Bruno eyed all the soft, cool colours warily. “I don’t wanna mess your stuff up,” he said.

 

“There’s space on the floor,” she said, pinning a gold clip into Pepa’s hair. “Just be careful of the rugs.”

 

Fair enough. Bruno didn’t want to wreck those either. 

 

He made sure to push them away from him before he took a spot and got to work. Félix’s plate was simple: he added a big rainbow to the middle of the plate, with pale grey clouds on either end, dripping with tiny raindrops. Agustín’s was a little trickier.

 

“Julieta,” Bruno said, tapping the end of the brush against his chin. “Would Agustín be mad if I added a bee?”

 

Pepa let out a bark of laughter, grinning at her book. Julieta giggled, shaking her head.

 

“Trust me, Bruno,” she said. “He’d find that even funnier than I do.”

 

He still didn’t dare make it the centre-piece. Instead, he painted a piano with musical notes floating overhead…And he added a little bee among the musical notes. The temptation was too strong to resist.

 

Pepa leaned over to get a look, snickering. “It should be a host of bees,” she said. “And a bunch of beehives.” Maybe that was true, but Bruno was still worried about being mean. One bee was enough. Hopefully it would make Agustín laugh.

 

Then there were his sisters’ plates, and his own. 

 

The edges of Pepa’s plate were easy: among all the suns, he added little figures of Pepa and Félix dancing. He’d seen them dancing around the kitchen and courtyard, simply basking in each other’s company. And, because he was sure it would make Pepa grin, he painted a tiny red love-heart above each scene of them dancing.

 

As for the centre of the plate, he painted the sun poking out behind a cloud, and then another cloud with rain and one with lightning. He added thin, grey and silver swirls to represent the wind, ushering little green and orange leaves along. One last cloud sprinkled ice-blue snowflakes.

 

Then there was Julieta’s. Okay, he painted a bee on hers too. She’d giggled when he asked about the bee for Agustín’s, so this would surely get a giggle from her too. At least, that was the goal. There were pestles, bowls and herbs all along the edges of her plate, of course; Bruno added some different shades of blue to them, so they weren’t all teal. In the centre of the plate, on the top right, he painted a cactus, a unicorn and a butterfly, as a nod to her daughters. God knew she doted on them; her pride in Mirabel, Luisa and Isabela was obvious as soon she spoke of them. Her eyes always lit up.

 

On the bottom left, he painted a plate of arepas and a mug of chocolate con queso, and another plate piled high with buñuelo.

 

In the very centre, he painted another heart. This one was painted in layers of lilac, blue, pink and teal.

 

“Oh, Bruno.” Julieta’s soft voice snapped him back to reality. “Those are beautiful.”

 

Both of his sisters were peering over his shoulders, looking at the finished plates with matching smiles. 

 

“Uh, gracias.” Bruno ducked his head on reflex, unable to completely hold back his pleased smile. 

 

“What’cha gonna put on yours?” Pepa asked. She climbed off the bed to sit next to him.

 

“Um, I dunno,” Bruno admitted. He knocked on the wooden floor, frowning at his plate. 

 

“Definitely add your rats,” Julieta said, joining them. 

 

“And paintbrushes,” Pepa said. “And, um- oh, what are those called? The things artists hold when they’re mixing the paint…?”

 

“You mean a palette?” Bruno asked.

 

Pepa snapped her fingers, grinning. “Yeah!” she said. “That!”

 

So he did. He had to admit, he liked the results: little grey rats with green eyes ran around the edge of the plate, among all the hourglasses and peeking out from behind the leaves. He painted the palette and a few paintbrushes, topped with different colours, in the centre.

 

All the while, his sisters watched, making suggestions or simply watching in silence.

 

Then Julieta asked, “May I?” holding out her hand for the brush.

 

Baffled, Bruno gave it to her.

 

Without a word, she painted three little hearts at the bottom of the plate: a yellow one, a blue one and a green one in the middle.

 

“There,” she said softly. “It’s perfect now.”

 

Bruno’s heart felt like it was about to burst out of his chest, but in a very good way. Pepa sniffled, a cloud and a rainbow above her head.

 

“Sí,” Bruno said with a nod. He stared at the plate, determined to stay dry-eyed. “It is.”

 

Alma’s plate was still downstairs.

 

He still had no ideas for that one.





Isabela was no stranger to the dressmaker’s shop. There were plenty of ready-made dresses, skirts and blouses, along with shawls. And, of course, there was everything you needed to make your own outfit at home, or you could put an order in: there were rows and rows of different kinds of fabrics. There were ribbons galore, buttons, beads, threads and different kinds of needles. They even had a few sewing boxes. 

 

“Isabela!” cried Señora Blanco with a welcoming smile and extended hands- until she got a proper look at Isabela. Then her smile faltered, her stunned gaze on Isabela’s hair. “Oh!” she said. “Dear me, your hair!”

 

Isabela stayed steadily smiling, her shoulders back and chin up, and her hands delicately clasped before her.

 

“Yes,” she said. “I thought it was high-time I tried something new.” She tried to ignore her pounding heart. The entire walk here, people had stared. She’d heard whispers. She’d seen a few people outright point. 

 

You can do this, she told herself. These people weren’t her family. They were neighbours and acquaintances. If Abuela could swallow any remarks, so could they. 

 

Isa wasn’t chasing their approval anymore. At any rate, she didn’t want to. She didn’t want to be Señorita Perfecta anymore. She wasn’t an angel, she was just a girl. Gossip wasn’t exactly pleasant to deal with, but so long as her parents and Abuela stayed on her side, she’d be fine. Right?

 

“I need a new dress,” Isabela continued. She gestured to Mirabel and Luisa, keeping her smile in place. “And so do my sisters.”

 

“Of course,” Señora Blanco said, shaking off her surprise. “Well, I have some of your favourite fabrics in stock, dear. And there’s some lovely floral-print ribbons; they’d look good in your hair, or perhaps on the collar of a dress-”

 

“Actually,” Isabela interrupted. (Interrupted! She actually interrupted someone! An adult!) “I’m not here for the usual. I’m thinking of something brighter.”

 

“Oh?” Señora Blanco led them down the rows of fabrics and dresses. “I suppose…I have a rose pink, or perhaps purple would be nice?”

 

The shade of purple she showed Isa was nice, but it was also glittery and embellished with tiny pink beads. No thanks.

 

Señora Blanco’s so-called advice went in one ear and out the other, as she tried to steer Isabela towards options that weren’t all that different from what Isabela was trying to get away from. She showed Isabela an entire selection of fabric flowers, a ready-made lilac chiffon gown with ribbons on the sleeves and so many shades of pink fabrics. 

 

Isabela looked away as Señora Blanco gushed about a particular shade of pink (“It’s quite a bold shade,” she said. “Perhaps this will suit?”) and her eyes caught on a dress on a nearby mannequin.

 

The dress was ankle-length, like the one Isa wore now, but it was a bright azure. It had a halter neckline and short asymmetrical sleeves. Sure, the hem of the dress was frilled, but there were no roses and orchids, no pastels. Nothing about the dress screamed princess. And, with no pattern, that meant she could ask Mirabel to add more stuff. Maybe Julieta would help out too.

 

“That one,” Isabela said, pointing. Señora Blanco gave her a baffled glance, her smile faltering again.

 

“Are you sure, dear?” she asked. “I’ve never known you to choose blue.”

 

“Like I said,” Isabela said, tossing her hair back. “I’m trying something new.”

 

Señora Blanco still looked lost, but she nodded. “And you girls?” Señora Blanco asked, turning to Luisa and Mirabel. “Is there anything you’d like in particular, or shall we browse?”

 

Luisa, biting her lip, glanced towards a roll of soft pink and lilac chiffon.

 

“Actually,” she said quietly, so painfully shy. “I like that one…” She gestured towards it, not looking at any of them.

 

“That’s pretty,” Mirabel said with a grin, nodding in approval, as if to give her permission.

 

Señora Blanco looked more lost than ever. “Oh dear me,” she said again, wringing her hands. “Luisa, my dear, that will never last while you work. It would be ruined by the end of the day.”

 

“Then it’s not for work,” Isabela said firmly. She looked at her sister and smiled. “It’s for home. When we’re having fun.”

 

Luisa completely lit up. That made it all worth it.

 

Mirabel marched right over to a dress with a layered deep blue skirt, patterned with golden butterflies and shot through with glimmering gold and turquoise thread.

 

“What’cha think?” she asked, holding it out for them to examine.

 

“I like it,” Luisa said, giving a thumbs up.

 

“It’ll look good on you,” Isabela added. Señora Blanco softened, smiling genuinely for the first time.

 

“You’ll look very pretty, dear,” she said.

 

The Encanto worked on trading and favours: Isabela promised to decorate the outside of the shop and Luisa agreed to help move a few shelves around, and Mirabel promised to bring Señora Blanco some of Julieta’s food. With that deal sealed, they left with Isabela’s new dress, Mirabel’s skirt and the entire roll of chiffon for Luisa.

 

All in all, Isabela would consider it a successful trip. She found herself swinging her bag and walking with a spring in her step. Luisa handed her the bag of fabric and hurried away to catch up on her work.

 

“I can’t make dresses from scratch,” Isabela said to Mirabel as they headed for home.

 

“I can,” Mirabel said. “Well, mostly. The sleeves are tricky.”

 

“I’m sure Mamá will help,” Isa said. If Luisa wanted something pretty, that was what they’d make sure she got.

 

“So, about the embroidery…” Mirabel’s grin grew, an excited shine in her eyes. “What are you thinking about? What do you want?”

 

“Some of my new flowers,” Isabela said. “No roses or anything like that. Just my new ones.”

 

“I’ll need a closer look at some of them,” Mirabel said.

 

“Well, you can have a look at my room when we get back?” Isabela offered another olive branch. “I may have gone a little overboard last night.”

 

Mirabel looked more curious than ever. “Then why are we being so slow?” she demanded, rushing ahead.

 

Grinning, Isabela hitched up her skirts to run after her, but Mariano’s voice stopped her.

 

“Isabela? Pardon me, do you have a minute?”

 

“Hm?” She turned around to face him. “Oh, hola, Mariano.”

 

“Hola,” he said, stepping up to stand beside her. “I- well, there’s a few things I wanted to ask you.” He smiled sheepishly, rubbing the back of his neck. “First of all, is Dolores okay?”

 

“She’s doing better,” Isabela said. “I’ll be sure to let her know you asked.”

 

“Gracias,” Mariano said. “I hope she’s gotten some rest. And…Well, I wanted to ask if your Tia is okay as well? That was certainly some storm yesterday.”

 

From anyone else, it would have been passive aggressive. However, Isa knew that Mariano was just a sincerely nice guy, and constantly asked after everyone, if they needed anything or if he could help. She’d like to think he was being sincere now as well, that his abuela hadn’t nudged him into asking on her behalf. He wasn’t the type to gossip either.

 

“She was worried about Lola,” Isa said, which wasn’t a total lie anyway. “And Tio Bruno.”

 

“Oh, your Tio! Yes, how is he? I hope he’s doing better too?”

 

“He’s…On the mend,” Isabela said. Mirabel stood a few paces ahead, hands on her hips and watching them with a curious little pout. Isabela raised her hand in a half-wave with a wry smile.

 

“Anyway,” Isabela said, “I should-”

 

“And, um-” Mariano said at the same time. He grinned and Isabela bit back a laugh.

 

“You first,” she said.

 

“Well, I was hoping…When things have settled down again…Perhaps we could go to dinner? Or there’s some dances coming up.” He was blushing bright pink, his smile surprisingly shy. 

 

Here’s the thing: Isabela wasn’t oblivious to how Mariano looked at her, or to the compliments he’d been paying her the last few weeks. Perhaps it sounded vain and arrogant, but Isabela had plenty of boys look at her like that. Every time they did, a part of her wondered if they liked her or the idea of her. If she told them, Actually, I want to mess about and get covered in paint and mud! I want to make carnivorous plants! would they still smile at her? Or would they look at her the way so many villagers did today: with confusion and a sort of offended air, as if she’d done something to wrong them personally.

 

It seemed Mariano was sincere. Despite the colour in her hair and the vines on her arms, despite the rumours of her experiments, he was still smiling at her hopefully.

 

Unbidden, Abuela’s voice came to mind.

 

He’s such a fine young man, Abuela often said in approval. Sofia is so proud of him. He’s always thinking about others.

 

And it was true. Mariano was thoughtful, for all that he could be oblivious. He was sweet, funny, and caring.

 

A perfect gentleman, Abuela and Señora Guzman said. 

 

Perhaps he was. To do him credit, Mariano was kind. Isabela liked him.

 

But only as a friend.

 

For a moment, she faltered. Her wants fought a war in her mind; make Abuela happy, make the family proud. You need to be perfect. Wait, no you don’t! Do what you want. It wouldn’t be fair to lie to him. 

 

“Ay, Mariano,” she said softly. “I’m sorry. I’m flattered, truly I am, but I don’t see you that way.”

 

She had to admire how he kept smiling. Sure, his smile dimmed, but he nodded in understanding.

 

“Okay,” he said, equally soft and quiet. A little more hopefully, he added, “We’re still friends?”

 

“Of course,” Isabela said. With a wave of her hand, a yellow rose appeared. She held it out and Mariano took it with a little sigh of relief. He gave her a downright courtly bow and, with a fond huff of laughter, Isabela returned the gesture with an elaborate curtsy.

 

With that, she rejoined Mirabel.

 

“He likes you,” Mirabel said as soon as they started walking again.

 

“He does,” Isabela admitted. “But I don’t like him that way.”

 

“Oh,” Mirabel said. “Good, ‘cause boys are gross.” She said it so solemnly, like it should have been an obvious fact, that Isabela burst out laughing. It was a far cry from the old dainty, ladylike giggle; she snorted and wheezed, her laughter ringing out loudly.

 

“But they are!” Mirabel protested, which only made her laugh harder.






Pepa’s cloud was big and dark, but there was no rain. It appeared as soon as Julieta gently asked, “So, what did Mamá say?”

 

Bruno tensed and stayed very, very still. The three of them were crowded together on Julieta’s bed, with Pepa in the middle.

 

“That she’s sorry,” Pepa said. “She’s sorry for everything.” Her glare wavered; she bit her lip and wiped her watering eyes. “She…She said she let me down.”

 

Bruno wasn’t sure what to say to that. Besides, it was Pepa’s apology, not his. Did he even have a right to say anything?

 

“Well…That’s good, isn’t it?” Julieta asked cautiously.

 

“I don’t know,” Pepa sighed. She reached out and grabbed their hands, holding on tight. “I don’t care about words, I care about actions. How many times have we heard, I’m sorry, but? There was always a but. I want to see her change this time. Otherwise it means nothing.” Bitterly, quietly, she added, “Again.”

 

Julieta nodded, her eyes dim and sad. 

 

“Have you spoken with her?” Bruno asked curiously.

 

“Not yet,” Julieta said. “I mean, I did, but I didn’t…”

 

“Rant?” Pepa suggested. “Go off? Scream? Vent?”

 

“Alright, Miss Smarty Pants. No, I didn’t do anything like that.”

 

“Hey, you’re the one who married the walking dictionary,” Pepa said with a smirk, but her cloud was still above them, still dark and big. 

 

“Brunito?” Julieta sounded cautious again. “Are you going to talk to her?”

 

Every instinct immediately screamed No. He lay there, stiff as a board, staring at Pepa’s cloud, clinging to her hand.

 

“I don’t know,” he said. “But…But I have to, don’t I?”

 

“You don’t have to do anything you don’t want to,” Pepa said firmly, but that wasn’t entirely true, was it?

 

He shook his head. “I do,” he sighed. “I don’t want to, but…But I will. Soon.”

 

“And how are you feeling?” Pepa asked, nudging him with her hip. “You don’t have a cloud to give me a clue, hermanito. What’s going on in that head of yours?”

 

“...I’m tired,” he admitted. “But what else is new, eh? And…And I’m angry. Not just at Alma. I’m angry. ‘Cause, see, when Dolores told me she’d heard everything and- and she’d seen the scars, I- I told her she shouldn’t have to deal with all that, and…” He sat up, waving his hands about, picking up steam. “And I thought, hey, I shouldn’t have had to deal with all that either! It wasn’t fair. None of it! Okay, J-Juan used to tell me that too, but…But it was the first time I thought it myself.” His voice was raising, his eyes stung and his chest heaved as he took a deep breath and shouted, “I hate them! All of them! I hope they burn in hell, I hope they rot! I don’t forgive them, they’re evil!

 

For a moment, both of them stared at him in shock.

 

The next thing he knew, he’d been pulled into a group hug.

 

“I didn’t even know you could yell,” Pepa gently teased, her voice breaking. Her cloud began to drizzle. If Julieta was at all upset that her bed was being rained on, she didn’t show it.

 

“Ay, hermanito,” she sighed. “You’re right. You’re exactly right. You never deserved any of it.” Her hand brushed against his wrist and he tried not to flinch.

 

He didn’t manage it. He flinched and Pepa sobbed. Julieta took a deep, shaking breath and her arms wrapped back around him and Pepa.

 

“Do you want to tell us?” she asked, her voice so gentle it made Bruno want to cry. 

 

“There’s a lot,” Bruno said, his voice muffled by Pepa’s shoulder. A lot was putting it mildly.

 

“And you shouldn’t have to carry it all alone,” Julieta said. “You don’t have to tell us anything if you don’t feel comfortable, but we’re here. I promise we’re not going anywhere.”

 

There was no way he could dump his life story on them and have any of them be okay by the end of the conversation. Logically, Bruno knew that. All three of them would be wrecks if he told them.

 

But he wanted to tell them. 

 

Amazingly, he trusted them. He’d had so few people he could trust before. 

 

“You won’t like it,” he warned.

 

“We don’t have to like it,” Pepa said, holding him tighter.

 

“We just have to be there for you,” Julieta added.

 

“Triplet confession hour,” Bruno joked weakly. Julieta shook her head with an exasperated smile, her expression unbearably fond.

 

“That was dreadful,” Pepa said, pinching his arm. The drizzle of soft rain continued.

 

“Hm…” Bruno didn’t move from the embrace, but he reached out to knock on the wicker headboard. Good enough. At least, he hoped so.

 

“Okay,” he said, his eyes wandering to the birds and clouds painted on Julieta’s ceiling. “O-okay. I’ll try.”

 

They’d be there for him. They said so and he believed them.

 

Maybe that was the real magic around here.

Notes:

Mariano, my beloved 😭💕

The triplets will be the death of me, I love them so damn much

I don't plan on covering the triplets' entire conversation; we already know Bruno's story and we've seen them react to some pretty big chunks of it already. If it feels right, I'll keep it. If not, we've still lots of family feels and drama to work with

Looks like the only plate left to do is Alma's, hm? 👀

Next up: Julieta and Alma talk...And so do Alma and Bruno, as the tension finally reaches its peak...👀👀

Chapter 48: When It All Feels So Big ('Til It All Feels So Small)

Summary:

It's the first time all the Madrigals have sat at dinner together since Bruno's disastrous visions. Julieta finally has a chance to get some things off her chest and set boundaries of her own with Alma.
Meanwhile, Dolores re-starts hers and Bruno's venting sessions.

Notes:

Julieta gets another chance to vent (albeit differently from Pepa) and gets more off her chest, and sets some boundaries of her own. Alma continues to worry, and Dolores re-starts hers and Bruno's venting sessions

Songs I listened to while writing:
So Big, So Small, from Dear Evan Hansen (Julieta to the core)
Anybody Have A Map?, from Dear Evan Hansen (also very Julieta and a big Madrigal vibe in general)
Surface Pressure, from Encanto
Human, by Christina Perri
The Promise, by Emma Blackery
Flares, by The Script
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
Sunrise, by Our Last Night
Keep Holding On, by Avril Lavigne
Medicine, by Daughter

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And the house felt so big, and I felt so small. The house felt so big, and I…And I knew there would be moments that I'd miss; and I knew there would be space I couldn't fill. And I knew I'd come up short a billion different ways. And I did. And I do. And I will.” - So Big, So Small, Dear Evan Hansen




Julieta hadn’t seen her girls so close since before Mirabel’s Ceremony. Luisa was still in town, hard at work, but for once it wasn’t just Mirabel who bemoaned Luisa’s absence: Isabela did too.

 

“It was a good trip,” Isabela said, swinging their new purchases onto the kitchen table. “Though Señora Blanco…” Her smile wavered.

 

“What happened?” Julieta asked, instantly on alert. She stopped chopping vegetables and went to her daughters.

 

“Nothing,” Isabela said with a wave of her hand. “Take a look, Mamá.” Isabela fished out her new dress, a bolt of fabric for Luisa and Mirabe’s new skirt.

 

The pink and lilac chiffon was admittedly something Julieta would have immediately imagined for Isabela. Their little rose, their angel. As soon as Isabela was born and Julieta’s intuition that she was having a girl was finally confirmed, she and Agustín went all out. Agustín sewed little pink dresses, Julieta knitted pink socks and a pink blanket. They got Isabela soft, pastel coloured toys and all the gifts from their friends, Agustín’s family and the other well-wishers were all in shades of pink or lilac. Soft, pretty princess colours. Julieta even found a little headband with a rose sewn to it.

 

Now, Julieta had to wonder if that was the start of it. This obsession with Isabela being the perfect flower princess. Always sweet, always delicate; a delight to anyone who knew her. 

 

But it wasn’t what Isa wanted.

 

How had Julieta missed that? Isabela could do so much more than simple flower arrangements and, if it hadn’t been for Bruno’s Gift and Mirabel’s encouragement, they may have never known.

 

It seemed like she’d been missing a lot these days.

 

She cooed over Mirabel’s new skirt, complimenting the colours and the butterfly pattern. She smiled at Isabela’s new dress and prayed that her mother would remain understanding. It was such a vivid azure, such a different cut and style than anything else Isabela owned.

 

“Isa’s gonna let me embroider it!” Mirabel declared proudly.

 

“And I might stick a few flowers to it myself,” Isabela said, tapping the table thoughtfully. “We’ll see.”

 

“You’ll look wonderful,” Julieta told her, hugging her tightly. Isabela clung to her, such a sharp contrast from her usual quick hugs.

 

One thing she’d always known was that her daughters were stubborn girls: they’d do anything they set their minds to. Half-way did not exist for them; it was all or nothing.

 

Isabela and Mirabel were leaning over the dress, debating designs, when Bruno walked in. They both lit up and Mirabel ran to hug him.

 

No more flinching, no more jumping; Bruno hugged her back right away, ruffling her hair. Julieta couldn’t keep the smile off her face.

 

“Hey, Tio!” Isa waved him over. “What colours do you think will work best with this?” she asked, pointing to the dress.

 

“Hm…Some yellow with that shade of blue,” Bruno said and Julieta had to do a double-take; he and Pepa had the exact same concentration face. “Orange, red…Maybe some green? I mean, I take it you want contrast, not for it all to blend together?”

 

“Contrast,” Isabela confirmed with a stubborn jut to her jaw. “And bright.”

 

“Definitely yellow,” Bruno said. 

 

“I can do that,” Mirabel said, grinning, still hanging off him like a monkey. “I’ve got lots of fabric!”

 

Isabela’s eyes were beginning to sparkle with excitement. 






It wasn’t that Julieta always cooked alone; sometimes Agustín would offer to help (with mixed results) or Mirabel would help stir, or add spices, salt and pepper. Other times, it would be Luisa would insisted she could help, or Pepa would march in and vent about her day and she seamlessly joined in cooking.

 

But yes, most of the time Julieta cooked alone.

 

Today, Isabela, Mirabel, Bruno, Pepa and Félix joined her. And Antonio, if you counted sleeping in his bassinet as helping. 

 

He was such a cute little guy that Julieta certainly considered the mere sight of him helpful. 

 

Cooking passed faster with so much help of course, but it was the conversation too. The laughs and stories, the way they all smiled. 

 

Dolores creeped in, practically on tip-toe, looking a little stunned. She joined without a word, helping Félix and Isabela with the torta nega for dessert.

 

Julieta heard her whisper to Isabela; “You didn’t…” She couldn’t hear the rest when Félix called, “Ay, pass the sugar!”

 

Mirabel passed it to him and Julieta heard Isabela’s answer. Her daughter gave a careless wave of her hand. “No,” she said. “I don’t like him that way.”

 

Oh? Julieta’s eyebrows rose. A boy? Which one? Whoever he was, Isabela had turned him down. Well, she couldn’t say she’d noticed her daughter paying particular attention to anyone. But plenty of boys had crushes on Isabela, and Julieta wasn’t exaggerating or being arrogant; it was the simple truth.

 

Or rather, they did. A lot of them seemed baffled by Isabela’s new looks and the rumours of her experiments. 

 

In that case, they weren’t good enough for her anyway.

 

She’d have to ask Isabela about it later. For now, she’d focus on dinner. For now, she’d focus on the smiles of her family as they all worked together; the rainbow above Pepa’s head, the grin on Bruno’s face and Mirabel’s giggles. Félix’s booming laugh, Dolore’s smile and Isabela’s smirk as she flicked flour at Félix.






Of course, Bruno had been absent for meals for some time now, so Julieta couldn’t exactly blame Agustín for looking so surprised (albeit pleasantly surprised) and clapping Bruno on the back. Camilo immediately began to show off, shape-shifting as he recounted his day and a prank he’d pulled on another boy for pushing a younger child over into the mud. 

 

Alma, however, froze. Her eyes widened and, for a moment, she looked so hopeful it was painful. Bruno gave her a brisk nod and sat next to Pepa, nearly at the opposite end of the table.

 

Alma gave a quiet sigh but seemed to steel herself. She drew herself up, smiled at them all and took her seat at the head of the table.

 

“Well,” she said, gesturing to all the food. “We shouldn’t let this go cold. Eat up.”

 

Camilo, of course, instantly began to grab his favourites and pile them onto his plate. Agustín took one look at his plate and grinned, outright laughing when he spotted the bee.

 

“Hey!” he cried, his voice wheezing from how much he laughed. Julieta began to giggle and Pepa failed to hide her laughter behind her hands. “I’m not that bad, am I?”

 

“Kids in school call you The Bee Man,” Mirabel informed him. Félix had tears in his eyes, slapping the table as he cackled. Even Alma cracked a smile; the kids were all laughing and Bruno for once seemed completely unapologetic.

 

“Let it be known that Juli gave me permission,” he said. “Pepa said it should be a beehive and a whole swarm.”

 

“I’m right and you know it,” Pepa said, pointing at him with a fork.

 

All Julieta could think was a delighted, He called me Juli.

 

“Eh, she’s got a point,” Agustín said cheerfully, scooping more rice onto his plate. 

 

Alma gently laid a hand on Julieta’s wrist. She kept her voice low, her eyes darting between Julieta and the children.

 

“Did you hear that Isabela turned Mariano down?” Alma whispered.

 

“Mariano? As in, Mariano Guzman?” Julieta pursed her lips and shrugged. “I heard her say to Lola that she’d turned someone down.”

 

“Hm…” Alma looked worried. “I would have thought…Well, he plainly adores her.”

 

“Mamá.” Julieta’s voice hardened in warning. “Don’t.”

 

“What…? Oh, Julieta, no; I would never force a relationship on her,” Alma protested, still keeping quiet. Not that there was much point, Dolores could hear everything, but to do her credit she didn’t even look at them. She was making fun of Camilo and asking Luisa about the fence around the donkey pen.

 

“Good,” Julieta said with a nod. “Then what’s the fuss?”

 

Alma sighed. “Old habits die hard, amor,” she said softly, regretfully. “I…I want the best for her. By all rights, Mariano is the best. And I…” Her gaze went to Isabela, wistful and lost. “I feel I’m out of my depth. As if I do not know her anymore.”

 

Isabela had always been Alma’s favourite. God knew it caused problems and tension over the years. Julieta wasn’t surprised her mother was feeling lost; Isabela was different now.

 

Or maybe she was just being herself at last.

 

“Then you have to get to know her again,” Julieta said. “We all do.”

 

“I’m trying,” Alma said. “I’ve seen some of the things she’s grown. She’s creative.”

 

“She is,” Julieta agreed proudly. She watched her daughters laughing together; Luisa held the salt shaker above Mirabel’s head while Mirabel failed to reach it, giggling. A small vine appeared and snatched the salt shaker from Luisa’s hands, depositing it in Mirabel’s instead.

 

Isabela smirked at her sisters and winked, turning back to Bruno to discuss colours again.

 

Julieta didn’t doubt that the new dress would look beautiful on her. 

 

Alma sighed and sipped her water. 

 

“I suppose I thought she liked him too,” she said. 

 

“Really?” Julieta asked. Alma nodded. “I didn’t get that impression at all, Mamá.”

 

That certainly didn’t cheer Alma up; she looked woebegone. Her eyes went to Bruno and her grip on her glass tightened.

 

“How is he, mija?”

 

“Better,” Julieta said cautiously. 

 

“I need to talk to him.”

 

“Not tonight, Mamá,” Julieta said. “He’s not ready.” To try and soften the blow, she squeezed Alma’s hand. “But he will be. Soon. He said he’ll talk to you soon.”

 

Alma looked near tears. She held onto Julieta’s hand but her gaze never left Bruno. Julieta was not used to seeing such open fear in her mother’s eyes; indeed, she looked desperate and very small.

 

“I swear to God, I never meant to hurt him.”

 

“I know, Mamá.” Julieta looked at their joined hands as she continued; “But can we talk? Tonight?”

 

“Of course, mija,” Alma said. “Anytime you need.”

 

That Julieta reflected wryly, was an outright lie. But who knew, maybe that would change too.






To give them the time and privacy to talk, Alma helped Julieta clean the dishes.

 

“Did you have a good day?” she asked. “The three of you?”

 

“We did,” Julieta said. “We talked a lot…About how we’re feeling, about how things are going. We…We talked about Bruno. And what he’s been through.”

 

Alma’s expression tightened; there was a flash of agony in her eyes.

 

“I see,” she said quietly.

 

“And Pepa told us about her conversation with you,” Julieta said.

 

“That explains why it began to drizzle,” Alma said, seemingly to herself. She cleaned the dishes slowly, methodically, her gaze continually drifting out the window.

 

Someone said something, someone complained, was Julieta’s immediate fear. Someone always complained when it rained, or if it was cold or foggy. Even when the rain was needed, even when the grass was beginning to turn brown at the edges, you could always count on someone to turn it into something bad.

 

To try and turn her little sister’s emotions into something bad.

 

Unwillingly, Julieta looked at Alma. 

 

Pepa, you have a cloud. Clear skies. Pepa, stop that rain this instant. 

 

“I agree with Pepa,” Julieta said, drying the plate in her hand with more force than necessary. Mirabel’s plate with its beautiful butterflies, so perfect for her baby girl. “Words are nice. Words are easy. I don’t want words, I want change. I want action. I…I need breaks. I need time to catch my breath and be with my husband and children. I can’t be expected to heal every little bump and bruise. Of course a broken leg needs immediate fixing, but a scraped knee doesn’t- especially when it’s an adult, not a child.”

 

“Pepa said they barely thank you anymore,” Alma said, finally looking at her. Their gazes locked, both of them weary to the bone. 

 

“She’s telling the truth,” Julieta admitted. “I had a man who kept trying to skip the line; he wanted his injuries fixed before anyone else, but he got those injuries in a fight that he started. I was out of obleas and a teenage girl spent nearly ten minutes complaining that she didn’t want an arepa instead. Ten minutes! One bite and she would have been healed and on her way.”

 

Alma handed her the next clean plate and Julieta began to dry, her voice gaining force.

 

“People…Will always find a reason to complain,” Julieta said through gritted teeth. “Why am I helping Agustín with his bee stings first, why can’t I help with their bloody nose? Why don’t I have any empanadas today? This is too cold, this is too spicy. I want to help them, Mamá; I truly do. I hate to see people in pain, especially when I can fix it. But…But there’s people who take it for granted. Who take me for granted. What will they do when I’m not here anymore?”

 

Alma looked stunned.

 

“Has Doctor Ortega trained an apprentice?” Julieta pressed. “My food is next to useless when I’m sick, remember? I tried baking when I had the flu and it didn’t work beyond minor scrapes and bruises.” Not to mention it had tasted dreadful. Granted, that didn't effect her Gift, but who wanted a soggy and under-done arepa?

 

“I…Am unsure if he has,” Alma admitted. That stunned look hadn’t left her face. “I will need to ask him. I will need to bring this to the council’s attention.”

 

“Good,” Julieta said. “I want time with my family. I want time for myself. I can’t spend all day and night cooking. I want to be with my daughters and husband. I want to spend time with mi sobrinos. I want to- to laugh with Pepa and Félix, to have a real date night with Agustín. I want more time with my brother…And with you.”

 

Alma’s hand, damp from the water and soap, cupped her face; her thumb rubbed over her cheekbone. Julieta didn’t pull away.

 

“I meant what I said to you before,” Julieta said firmly. “I’m tired. And I’m tired of being tired.” She managed a weak smile. “Funny how that works.”

 

“Ay, Julieta,” Alma sighed. “I’m sorry.”

 

“I know,” Julieta said, resting her hand on top of Alma’s. “I believe you. But I want to see it. No more blanket apologies. No more brushing us off or pushing for perfection. No one is perfect.” Least of all me. And not you either.

 

This time, she said what she’d held back before.

 

“I grew up too fast,” she said. “I had to help everyone and be available at all times. I was five and people came straight to me instead of Doctor Ortega’s father first.” She vaguely remembered Alma gently urging people to see the doctor first, before coming to Julieta who, at that point, could only make sandwiches and soup under her mamá’s supervision. So new to magic, so shaky with her new Gift but oh so eager to learn.

 

That eagerness to learn, to help, had made her feel so guilty whenever she didn’t have food ready or wasn’t yet skilled enough to help with major injuries. 

 

“I was Señorita Perfecta too,” Julieta said, stepping away from Alma to start putting away the dried dishes. Alma began cleaning the glasses, watching Julieta the whole time. “Remember? My perfect Julieta. Mamá, there’s no such thing as perfection.”

 

“I thought there was,” Alma said. “I thought if we were all perfect…Then the Miracle would remain strong. We would be safe. I thought hard work and perfection would protect our family.”

 

“There’s no such thing as perfection,” Julieta repeated firmly. She held her hand out for the glass; Alma passed it to her and she began to dry while Casita opened the cupboard for her and poured more warm water, nudging the soap towards Alma. 

 

“There’s hard work and then there’s being at everyone’s beck and call. We need boundaries; all of us do, not just me.”

 

Alma nodded. Julieta wondered if she was remembering her confrontation with Pepa.

 

“I…I need to be allowed to say no,” Julieta said haltingly. “Sometimes people don’t need me, but they act like they do. Or they act like I’m meant to be available at all hours of the day. God, I was expected to cook my own wedding feast.

 

Agustín had put a firm stop to that, one of his first genuine arguments with Alma.

 

“She’s the bride!” he’d shouted. “Not the caterer! I’m not letting anyone turn her into a work-horse on her own wedding day!”

 

Julieta remembered bursting into relieved tears. Pepa had backed Agustín up, sending a cold breeze through the room, frost creeping over the furniture, threatening that she’d help Julieta and Agustín simply elope if Alma and the council didn’t back off.

 

“I shouldn’t have suggested that,” Alma said sadly. “I shouldn’t have put that on your shoulders.”

 

“No, you shouldn’t,” Julieta agreed. It felt terrifying and freeing to lay it all out, to actually speak her mind to her mother. She didn’t feel like shouting, but she felt very tired and like she might start crying.

 

She also felt lighter.

 

“I will do better, mija,” Alma promised. “I’m trying, I swear I am.”

 

Julieta nodded. She’d seen the differences. She desperately wanted to believe things could truly change; that they could all move forward instead of sliding backwards.

 

“It was nice to have everyone together again,” Julieta said.

 

“It was,” Alma said, glancing at where Bruno had sat. “And the girls went shopping?”

 

“They did. Isa got a new dress, Mirabel got a new skirt and Luisa has some fabric for a dress. Agustín says he’ll help her make it.”

 

“That’s good,” Alma said. She looked even more worn out than Julieta felt.

 

She wished she could read her mother’s mind. What was she thinking? Was she thinking about the Miracle, or the family? Was she fretting over Mariano Guzman, or would she let it go? Perhaps Señora Guzman or another member of the council had said something, or would say something. Certainly someone had complained about the drizzle, minor as it may have been…

 

“I’m taking the evening off tomorrow,” Julieta said. A statement, not a request. “And I’m spending it with Agustín and the girls.” Her hands shook as she closed the cupboard; she held them together, resisting the urge to wipe them on her apron.

 

She braced herself for a fight. Indeed, she could see the conflict on Alma’s face. Her mother wavered; her jaw tightened, her exhale was sharp. She looked out of the window, towards the light of the village.

 

Slowly, hesitantly, Alma nodded.

 

“Yes,” she said. “Spend some time with your familia, Julieta.”

 

Well, Julieta had said she wanted to see change and here it was: an agreement for time off, no arguing or guilt-trips; no passive-aggressive comments or outright orders.

 

No expectation of perfection. Or, at least, a lessening of that expectation. 

 

As Julieta left, she paused in the doorway.

 

“I meant it about spending time with you too, Mamá,” she added quietly and hurried away, in search of her husband.






There was a quiet knock on his door. Bruno clambered off his sofa and darted up the stairs, down the corridor to his door.

 

He opened it and came face to face with Dolores. She squeaked, eyes wide.

 

“Tio,” she said, a little hopeful smile on her face. “Isabela turned Mariano down.”

 

“Oh!” Bruno pulled the door open further and gestured for her to come in. She hurried inside, hands clasped together, eyes still wide with surprise. “I- are you doing okay?”

 

She nodded and sat on the sofa. Esma climbed onto her lap and Dolores patted her absentmindedly.

 

“I just…Um…” Dolores glanced at him as he sat next to her. His book lay forgotten on the coffee table. 

 

“I guess I need someone to talk to,” Dolores said. “About everything I’ve heard.”

 

Bruno smiled and gave a theatrical wave of his hand. “Vent away, kiddo,” he said. “I’m not going anywhere.”

 

Dolores breathed out in relief and launched right into it. Her shoulders loosened as she spoke about everything: gossip in town, a creaky door that bothered her, dogs barking and the constant rustle of leaves and whoosh of wind. 

 

And, of course, she talked all about Mariano.

 

Romance never held interest to Bruno (outside of stories, of course) but it was important to Dolores. In that case, he’d listen for as long as she needed…And try to at least pretend he knew what to do in such scenarios.

 

Sometimes he really wished he could have afforded those acting classes he saw advertised in Bogotá. They surely would have come in handy.

Notes:

Julieta needs a break 👏👏
Alma is trying but ooh boy, she is stressing

Dolores: "The boy I like is still single!"
Bruno: "So are you gonna ask him out now?"
Dolores: "Hell no 🙂"

Next up, we finally get to Alma and Bruno and the ✨consequences✨ We're nearly at our Dos Orguitas moment!

Chapter 49: Eclosion

Summary:

Bruno and Alma attempt to bridge the gap, but everything begins to crumble around them.

Notes:

*kicks down the door* WE'RE BACK, BABY! Encantober has taken a lot of my attention! Now we're back with Madrigal Family Drama

And, confession time: I always thought a butterfly emerging from it's cocoon was just called "emerging." Turns out, "eclosion" is another term for it 🤔

Now, onwards to the angst! In which Bruno and Alma's traumas clash once more

*TRIGGER WARNING** for panic attacks

Songs I listened to while writing:
Where Butterflies Never Die, by Broken Iris
Don't Forget About Me, by Cloves
Welly Boots, by The Amazing Devil
Circles, by Greta Svabo Bech
Demons, by Imagine Dragons
Masterpiece by Motionless In White
I Won't Crumble With You If You Fall, by Tom Jones
In The End, by Tommee Profitt
The Grey, by Icon For Hire

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Shattered glass in flower beds. Humanise inhuman ends. It's all the same for the dreamers, it's all the same for us. Float on to the painted sky, where dreams will be unified, as I'm swept inside…Where butterflies…” - Where Butterflies Never Die, Broken Iris




“And I know Abuela didn’t mean to…to sound mean,” Dolores continued, tapping her fingertips against her knees and patting the rats. “But she told Tia Julieta that she wanted the best for Isa, and that Mariano is the best. And he is! He really, really is, and I just…I know she didn’t mean it in any sort of bad way, but I just thought, And what about me?” She looked at Bruno with big eyes and squeaked. Luz squeaked with her. “Y’know? Hm, I just- oh, it’s going to sound so petty, but it’s just always about Isabela with her.”

 

“I think you’re right,” Bruno said slowly, cautiously trying to find his way in a type of conversation he’d never had before. It was one thing for Dolores to simply say she liked someone; it was another thing to listen to her gush all about him. Bruno felt completely out of his depth. “I don’t think she meant it rudely or anything.” At least, he sure hoped not. Surely not.

 

Dolores nodded. 

 

“...Are you gonna talk to Mariano?” Bruno asked.

 

Dolores squeaked again, louder now, blushing furiously. She stared at the unlit fireplace with big eyes.

 

“Oh, look at that,” she said. “I hear Mamá calling me!” She jumped up, handing Esma and Luz to him.

 

Despite his complete loss at the conversation, Bruno smirked. “Oh, do you?” he drawled. 

 

“Yes. Yes, I do.” She hurried away, hands clasped, blushing as red as her dress.

 

Bruno felt bad for chuckling, honestly he did. The poor kid had it bad. And hey, maybe Mariano would move on from Isabela now that he’d been turned down. Maybe she’d get that date she dreamed of after all.

 

He hoped so. She deserved to be happy. She deserved the best too.

 

All of those kids deserved the best.






Alma sat on her bed, staring at the candle, her locket with Pedro’s picture cupped in her hands.

 

How to fix this, how to move forward? She’d made steps; she’d like to think she was doing better. But fear still gripped her, old habits were hard to break. What if she did something wrong and the Miracle dimmed and flickered? What if they slacked too much and the magic faded? 

 

To think, Isabela had turned down Mariano! Her little rose marched about with bright colours in her hair and strange, spiky plants growing everywhere. Alma had been taken-aback at the sight of so many strange flowers, trees and bushes, all in bright and striking colours. She…Hadn’t known Isabela could be so…So…Creative. She had to admit it was creative. A portion of their garden was utterly chaotic, but eye-grabbing, thanks to her experiments. Alma wondered what her room looked like now.

 

And Pepa. Her Pepa…There was so much work to be done with Pepa.

 

Julieta was taking a break tomorrow and Alma turned that idea over and over in her head, examining it from every angle. What would Julieta do? Leave a stall of food unattended in town for the evening? Set it up in the front garden? Or simply leave the food in the kitchen and ask other members of the family to distribute it?

 

Luisa had missed an entire day’s work to paint with her siblings and cousins. How completely unlike her! Certainly, she’d made up for it today, but the idea of Luisa skipping her chores was unheard of. She was always reliable and responsible. Not many complained and grumbled to Alma about it, but she was gracious with those that did, explaining that Luisa had been more needed at home, to look after Dolores and Bruno. She’d felt a stab of guilt as she said it, but it wasn’t really a lie, was it? Luisa could always be trusted to look after anyone, so Alma hadn’t really lied to the villagers at all.

 

Her children were unhappy. The village needed them. Alma felt pulled in two different directions, but surely there was some balance she could find? Somehow. 

 

She could not lose her home. She could not lose her family. 

 

Above all, she needed to keep them safe.

 

And she needed to speak to her son. She needed to know where they stood. 

 

“Pedro,” she whispered into the night. “Help me.”

 

There was no answer; there never was, but she liked to imagine Pedro was sitting next to her, his warm arms around her like they used to be. Always trying to keep her safe.

 

Alma had spoken to her daughters and now she needed to speak with her son. She couldn’t lose him again. Never again. Her very soul recoiled from the mere idea. No, they would speak, she would find a solution. They would move forward. 

 

Somehow, she would fix it all.






For two days, it felt like all of Casita was no man’s land; there was a stalemate, an uneasy truce. Bruno joined them for meals; he’d nod at Alma but mostly spoke to the children. If he wasn’t smiling at their antics, he was talking to his sisters, or trying to keep up with Félix’s jokes and Agustín’s many accidents.

 

He did not speak to her, but he’d acknowledge her when she said “Good morning,” or “Good afternoon,” or “Good evening.” 

 

Her son. Her youngest. She’d already missed out on forty-five years of his life, forty-five years where she hadn’t been there to protect him. 

 

I will fix this, Alma promised herself, and promised Pedro, again and again. I must.

 

She felt a surge of hope when Bruno paused as he passed her that morning.

 

“Can we talk later?” he asked quietly, his gaze more on her shoulder than her face. He was tightly gripping his arm.

 

“Of course, mijo,” Alma said, her heart lifting. She didn’t dare touch him, lest he flinch away from her again, but she smiled and hoped it would put him at ease.

 

“Okay.” Bruno nodded, gaze still diverted. Had he even seen her smile? “I’ll be in my room.”






Bruno was sketching when there was a knock on his door and Alma called, “Mijo?”

 

Sometimes he forgot that was directed at him. It took him a moment to register it and answer. He swallowed heavily and set his sketchbook aside. “Uh, yeah. Come in.”

 

She opened the door and Bruno could admit he softened a little at how hopeful she looked. The stern matriarch and leader was gone; she looked surprisingly small and incredibly gentle.

 

She stepped into his bedroom with a quiet, “Hello.” She looked at the painting of his old village, her gaze lingered on the portrait of Juan he’d drawn. “You’re a wonderful artist,” she said, her eyes still roaming around the room. “You get that from-” She suddenly broke off with a strangled gasp, her hands flying to her heart. She paled drastically, her eyes wide and horrified.

 

“Alma?” Bruno jumped off the bed. “Alma, what’s-?”

 

She grabbed his wrist in a death grip and Bruno flinched back. “What is that?” she demanded, her voice breaking, high pitched and bordering on a shout. “What did you…When…?

 

Baffled, trying to pull away in vain, Bruno followed her gaze and saw what she was looking at: the painting of the jewel-coloured river. He’d finally finished it a few days ago. Its canvas was propped up against the wall, just under his windowsill. He didn’t have a frame big enough for it and wasn’t sure where to put it anyway, so he’d set it aside. Just one painting among many. He’d put in as much detail as he could, including the butterflies. It wasn’t that Bruno ever half-assed his work, but he’d put a lot of effort into this one. After all, he’d dreamed of Pedro in that river.

 

He’d been proud of it, but now he felt ice cold and uncertain, anxiety looming large.

 

“I-it’s just the river I passed through,” he stammered. Her fingernails were digging into his skin, her grip was tight enough to bruise. “Alma-”

 

“Why on earth would you paint that?” she suddenly screamed. She looked completely and utterly horrified. Tears were in her eyes, even as they narrowed into a glare. “Bruno, that’s where your father died, why would you want to paint such a thing!?”

 

Was he imagining things or did he feel something shake? He was shaking so it was hard to tell, really. He felt backed into a corner with no idea on how to proceed.




Crack.

 

Crack.

 

Crack




“I didn’t know that,” Bruno said. He felt like hands were wrapped around his throat. “How was I supposed to know that?” He tried to pull away again, his stomach churning. “Let me go.”

 

“And to just leave it lying around! Why would you-?”

 

“You’re hurting me!”




Crack, crack, rumble, crack.




She let go. Bruno stumbled back and Alma stared at him, slack-jawed. They were both shaking.

 

She made a choked sound that bordered on a sob. “Oh God,” she whispered. “Mijo, I-”

 

“Get out of my room,” Bruno said, holding onto one of the bed’s posters. “Get out.”

 

“Bruno, I didn’t mean-”

 

“Leave me alone.”

 

“Please, mijo, I just-”

 

Well, if she wasn’t going to leave then Bruno was. He couldn’t stand it in here anymore, he didn’t want to hear anymore of this. If she wasn’t going to listen to him again, why should he stand there and act like he’d done something wrong?

 

Why should he be blamed again?

 

He ran past her, ignoring when she called his name.




The mountain shook.




(Half-way across town, Dolores snapped out of her shock and went running to find Julieta and Pepa.)




As Bruno ran down the stairs, Casita tried to push him back. As Alma called after him, Casita tried to slow him down.

 

He was blinded by panic, heart pounding, anxiety taking over. He stumbled into the courtyard and didn’t even hear Agustín call his name or see Mirabel peering out of the living room.

 

“Bruno!” That hand wrapped around his wrist again, pulling him back. Alma looked and sounded desperate, but it hardly registered. He just wanted her to leave him alone, that was all, he just wanted to be alone for a while, was that so bad?

 

“Mijo, bébé, please.” She was crying. “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to scare you.”

 

“Again,” Bruno snapped. “You did it again, you mean. Let me go.”

 

“It was a shock,” Alma said over him, holding on with both hands now. “I never…that river…” She shuddered and her grip tightened. “The last time I let you go, I lost you for forty-five years, I’m not losing you again.”

 

“Alma…” Agustín stepped forward cautiously. “You need to calm down. Come on, come sit, I’ll bring you some water…”

 

“Abuela?” Mirabel was gripping the doorframe, her frightened gaze darting between the three adults.

 

“Not now, Mirabel,” Alma snapped impatiently. Her head jerked like she’d been slapped but she still glared at the child. “Go to you room, this is nothing to do with you.”

 

“Don’t talk to her like that!” Bruno shouted. Oh that did it, that did it. “I’m sick of you talking to her like that! What is your problem? She’s just a kid!”

 

Alma closed her eyes, breathing heavily. “Agustín,” she said slowly. “Take Mirabel upstairs and please, both of you stay there.”

 

“Don’t bother,” Bruno said, scowling. He glared at her hands on his wrist. “Because I’m done. You don’t get to talk to her like that!”

 

“Tio, it’s okay,” Mirabel said quietly. She hadn’t moved an inch. She looked so small, so frightened, her head bowed as if she’d done something awful.

 

Bruno knew that pose. He couldn’t stand it.




Crack. The mountain shook. Crack.




“You’re trying to make things up to Isabela,” Bruno said. “And that’s great. But what about any of the others? What about Luisa? That kid needs time to herself; she’s fourteen, why is she being asked to reroute a river!? Why is Dolores being forced to listen to everything in the village until she has a panic attack? And Pepa told me everything she told you, don’t think I’m completely out of the loop. Blanket apologies aren’t worth shit.” Any other time he’d have been appalled at his own language, especially in front of a child. Indeed, Agustín uncomfortably cleared his throat, tugging on his tie.

 

“Okay,” he said, raising his hands placatingly. “You both need to calm down.”

 

Alma didn’t even look at him. She stared at Bruno, studying his face, as if trying to remember every feature.

 

“I am trying,” she said quietly, an edge of ice in her voice. “I am trying, Bruno.”

 

“Have you talked to any of the other kids?” Bruno demanded.

 

She didn’t answer.

 

That was answer enough.

 

“Were you even going to tell everyone that Mirabel figured out who I am first?” he asked.

 

“Of course!”

 

“Oh, really? Then why did I have to say it? You kept going on about miracles and Gifts, you didn’t even thank her! What if I hadn’t given Pepa the blanket? Would you have even listened to her?”

 

“Yes,” Alma said, her voice breaking. “I…I know she wouldn’t…Wouldn’t lie about something that important.”

 

“Tio?” Mirabel was gaping at him.

 

“Mirabel, go upstairs,” Agustín said, but she didn’t move. Even Casita didn’t try to move her.

 

This time, Bruno was sure he heard something crack, but he couldn’t say from where. It sounded like it came from the floor, but when he looked down, there was nothing there.

 

“She’s your granddaughter,” he continued quietly, fiercely. He’d given up on trying to get Alma to let go. He could feel pins and needles all up his arm, his scars itched, but this time he stayed put. “If this is about that damn magic again…” He trailed off, something terrible finally occurring to him.

 

He finally looked Alma in the eye.

 

“If I didn’t get a Gift, does that mean you wouldn’t want me back?” he whispered. Because that was what it came down to, wasn’t it? The magic. The so-called Gifts. Mirabel didn’t get one and Alma acted like every move she made was wrong. She pushed him to look into the future and, once he became concerned for the kids’ safety, he gave in. And look how that ended.

 

But what if he didn’t get magic too? What if it passed him over? 

 

“No!” Alma gasped, horrified. “God, mijo, no! Of course not! I thought of you every day, I missed you every day. Magic had nothing to do with it, I just wanted you.

 

“Then why didn’t you listen when I said no?” Bruno asked. He felt like crying, the anger draining from him. “Why do you keep pushing everyone to use their Gifts every minute of the day? Why do you keep pushing Mirabel away?”

 

She stared at him. She opened her mouth to answer and shut it again. Her eyes looked glazed, her lip trembled. She looked older than her years.

 

She didn’t answer.

 

And that was when everything began to shake.






“Earthquake!” Agustín shouted. “Mira, don’t move!” Her granddaughter was crying, still holding onto the doorframe as Agustín ran to her.

 

The house trembled, Alma could hear cracking and something rumbled in the distance. She could feel despair seeping from Casita’s very walls and knew this was no normal earthquake.

 

Still holding Bruno, she ran to the kitchen archway and stood there as their home shook. Heedless to anything else, she released her son’s wrist only to pull him into her arms and hold him close.

 

“You’re okay,” she gasped. “Just don’t move, mijo, it’ll be alright.” As if he was still just a child and not a grown adult. He stood frozen in her grasp, staring at the courtyard. Oh God, everyone else was still in town, were they okay? How bad was it in the village? She could hear rumbling like thunder…No, worse than thunder.

 

She’d heard this sound only once before, as the mountains rose around her.

 

Shivering in fear, Alma looked upwards, towards the mountains, just in time to see one split entirely in half.

 

“Oh dear God,” she whispered. 

 

Crack!

 

A crack ran right through the middle of the mosaic in the courtyard, splitting it nearly in half, right where she and Bruno had been standing.

 

“You’re okay, mijo,” she repeated and doubted she was comforting him at all.

 

She’d scared him again.

 

That river, that damnable river. It had taken Pedro away from her, her other half. It had taken Bruno once before. Was it about to take him again? She hadn’t meant to lash out, she hadn’t meant to frighten him; she never meant to hurt him. It was as if…As if she’d forgotten where she was. For a moment, she wasn’t standing in Bruno’s room, but the river all over again, the water lapping at her ankles. She shuddered in pain and Pedro quietly said, “I can hold them, amor.”

 

She’d argued that she was fine, she could handle it. She would not let go of her babies.

 

But Pedro persisted and Alma handed Bruno to him.

 

Only moments later, the soldiers caught up with them.

 

Slowly, the shaking stopped.

 

Alma didn’t dare relax.

 

The mountain was open. The mountain was open. What would happen to them now? Was their home even safe anymore? If the mountain was open, anyone could get in now.

 

Her terrified gaze went to their Miracle, but it shone brightly as ever. But the mountain was open, there was a crack in their courtyard. Mirabel was crying and Agustín blinked and blinked at the crack as if trying to will it away.

 

She could hear shouting in the distance; their neighbours, the villagers. Hurried footsteps. Among it all, she thought she heard her daughters shout for her.

 

And then there was Bruno’s voice, so quiet and frightened: “I didn’t mean to break it.”

 

No, child, she thought, refusing to let go. Everything he said echoed in her mind.  No, mi vida, it wasn’t you.

 

She looked at Mirabel’s tear-streaked face and her heart broke all over again.

 

It wasn’t ever you.

 

It was me.

Notes:

*sips tea* Hey, I always said Casita wouldn't fall. I never said anything about the mountains 😏 I always intended for Bruno and Alma's argument to at least cause that big crack in the courtyard and for Bruno to finally blow up in Mirabel's defence, and worry about what Alma would have done if he didn't have a Gift. Would she have been disappointed? Angry? One more thing to talk about.
As for Alma, she had to see that painting of Bruno's eventually. She's the only other one it has any meaning for.

Truth be told, when planning this story, I went back and forth on the mountains for ages. Even until quite recently, I wasn't completely sure if I should open them or not...But that was the whole point of them opening in the movie: reaching the river, acknowledging trauma and moving forward. Opening up, metaphorically and literally.
The circumstances may be different, but Alma still needs her moment to tell the full story, no pretty metaphors or fairytale aspects: just the truth at last and to let her loved ones support her, and to support them in turn.

Up next: Dos Oruguitas 🦋💕

Chapter 50: Mariposas

Summary:

After forty-five years of silence, Alma finally tells her story. She finally lets the anger, grief and fear out.

But her family is there for her. She just needs to let the walls down.

Notes:

Chapter 50, can you believe it? I can't!

Fun fact, in my very early stages of planning, this would have been the last chapter before the epilogue, but as I wanted to fully explore the Madrigals healing, this no longer worked as a cut-off point; there's still bonding to be had and problems to resolve. And, of course, the Senora Rojas plotline was added

But here we are: Alma's chapter at last. I promised a Dos Oruguitas moment 💕🦋

TRIGGER WARNING: discussion of death, mention of Bruno's self-harm scars

Songs I listened to while writing:
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
In Case You Don't Live Forever, by Ben Platt
She Used To Be Mine, from Waitress
Young And Beautiful, by Lana Del Rey
Losing Your Memory, by Ryan Star
Titanium, by Madilyn Bailey
Safe And Sound, by Taylor Swift
Ruin, by The Amazing Devil
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
River Lullaby, from The Prince Of Egypt
All Of You, from Encanto

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And so afraid of change, in a world that never stops changing. So let the walls come down. The world will never stop changing. Never stop changing, never stop changing, never stop changing. Ay, mariposas, don’t you hold on too tight. Both of you know it’s your time to go; to fly apart, to reunite. Wonders surround you, just let the walls come down. Don’t look behind you, fly till you find your way toward tomorrow.” - Dos Oruguitas, Encanto




The candle shone brightly as ever, yet the mountain was open. What did it mean? Where did this leave them?

 

Alma held onto her son and tried to keep her breathing steady. She held him tightly, trembling from head to toe. Mirabel was crying in Agustín’s arms and Alma heard the words, “I didn’t mean to upset anyone,” and she dearly wanted to join her granddaughter in crying.

 

Casita’s doors burst open and Pepa, Julieta and Dolores ran in. Antonio was wailing in his mother’s arms. Alma could see townsfolk behind her family, all of them crowding around but not daring to barge in. It seemed everyone was talking at once, voices raised, shouting over each other.

 

“Mamá? Bruno?” Julieta’s eyes widened. “Mira!” She ran to Mirabel and Agustín, scooping her daughter up into her arms. Dolores was shaking, her hands over her ears. Pepa hurried to Alma and Bruno.

 

“What happened?” Her big green eyes darted to the crack in the courtyard. “W-what’s going on?”

 

“I do not know,” Alma was forced to admit, her voice hoarse. She looked at the candle and forced herself to loosen her grip on her son. “But…But we will figure it out. Did anywhere else shake? Were there any tremors in town?”

 

“Just in the mountains and here, Dolores says,” Pepa said, trying to hush Antonio. “It didn’t come into town.”

 

“Alma!” As always, Señor De la Cruz’s voice was louder than everyone’s. “Alma, where are you?”

 

Duty called.

 

Alma took a deep breath and forced it out slowly. She counted to three and released Bruno, but she was quick to take his hand. 

 

He looked haunted.

 

“I didn’t mean to,” he whispered, shaking even more than her. “I…I was just…”

 

“You did not do anything,” Alma said quietly, firmly. Pepa looked more lost than ever.

 

Alma, as she had so many times before, straightened up and tried to keep her expression firm and dignified. She tried to hide the fear in her heart; so much fear, hidden for so long…And where had it gotten her? 

 

She walked outside, hand in hand with Bruno, her hand on Pepa’s back.

 

She could do this. She would handle this. Of course she would. How many times had she handled a crisis before? How many times had she fixed a disaster? She was Alma Madrigal, the leader, the protector; of course she would find a way to rectify this.

 

But she was also Alma Madrigal, widow, mother and grandmother, and she was so very tired.

 

She wanted to sit down with her children and apologise once more. She wanted to hold them close and tell them about their father.

 

She wanted to gather her grandchildren around her and apologise to each and every one of them. She wanted to stay in her home and focus on her family. She wanted to tell them she loved them.

 

She wanted to ensure their dear Casita was alright.

 

She wanted…She wanted…

 

She wanted her husband.

 

“Alma!” Señor De la Cruz appeared before her, along with Sofia and Padré Martinez. “Goodness gracious, do you have any idea what’s happened? Is it the magic?”

 

It was just like acting. Playing a role.

 

Alma spoke as firmly as she could, her voice carrying over the gathering crowd; “The magic is strong. You can see how the candle shines.” Oh thank goodness, Julieta closed the doors behind her. But how long could they keep that crack secret? Could they put a rug over it? Was there anything else that could cause such damage? Agustín’s clumsiness would not explain this.

 

“But the mountain…” Osma Pezmeruto shot the open mountain a terrified glance, her hands close to her heart.

 

“I’m sure it’ll be alright,” Ofelia said gently, a hand on Osma’s shoulder. Osvaldo swallowed nervously but nodded and tried to smile when his wife looked to him for back-up.

 

Pedro, help me.

 

“But if it’s not the magic, then what is it?” Sofia asked.

 

Before Alma could answer, someone else shouted; “Why didn’t he see this coming?”

 

Manuel Sanchez.

 

He pushed through the crowd, glaring at Bruno.

 

“You’ve been hiding for weeks!” he spat. “I thought your Gift was seeing the future? So why didn’t you see this?” He pointed angrily at the mountain. People began to murmur, shuffling in place.

 

Pepa thundered.

 

“Don’t you dare,” she hissed, stepping forward.

 

Alma felt curiously light-headed. She looked at the terror in Bruno’s eyes; his hand gripped hers to tightly his knuckles turned white. She knew it was likely just a nervous reflex, but she squeezed his hand all the same. Her heartbeat was too loud in her own ears; Manuel’s voice sounded slurred and distant, distorted.

 

She thought of the scars on her son’s arms and back. The haunted look in his eyes. His screams echoed in her ears, the screams she’d helped create.

 

“You’re meant to protect us!” Manuel shouted.

 

“Hold your tongue, boy!” Señor De la Cruz barked. “You’re talking to a Madrigal!”

 

“He’s no Madrigal if he can’t help us!”

 

Behind her, Mirabel sobbed.

 

Bruno’s hand was cold as ice.

 

Her child…Her grandchild…

 

Slap!

 

Stunned gasps rang out. Manuel jerked back, a red handprint on his pale cheek. Alma’s hand stung from the force of the slap; her breathing was harsh and irregular, her eyes stung with furious tears.

 

“Don’t. You. Dare,” she growled. Fury raced through her; she was shaking again, but not from fear this time. “Don’t you dare speak to my son like that! How dare you blame him!? He has not been hiding, he has been ill!” The words came pouring out of her; “He has been ill because of his Gift, it hurts him! It left him bedridden, you ignorant fool!”

 

She’d never shouted so much in her life. She’d never been so publicly disrespectful before.

 

“Mamá!” Julieta gasped. She saw Isabela in the crowd, hand in hand with Luisa; both of them stared at her in shock. Camilo’s mouth hung open as he peeked out from behind Félix.

 

“Bruno looked into the future when I asked him to practise,” Alma said. It wasn’t even a lie. “And it left him ill and in pain. He has been unable to look since.”

 

Silence hung over the crowd. Sofia had her hands over her mouth. Alma could feel everyone’s eyes on her; their shock, their fear, their confusion and- was she imagining it?- the pride in her daughters’ gazes.

 

“If you dare speak to my son like that again,” Alma continued. “To any of mi familia again…You can sort out your own problems without our Gifts if you will take them for granted. You will not make demands, is that clear?”

 

Manuel stared at her like she was a dragon about to bite his head off.

 

She’d be lying if she said a part of her didn’t rejoice in it. He’d always been an obnoxious, arrogant little fool. 

 

“I didn’t know,” he muttered sullenly, kicking at the ground. He glared at his shoes, no longer daring to hold her gaze. “He’s meant to look…”

 

“You didn’t know because you didn’t ask,” Félix snapped, marching forward. “You just started hurling around accusations.”

 

“If all you’re going to do is cause further stress,” Julieta said, her voice ice cold. “You can go home, Manuel.”

 

He didn’t leave, but he didn’t dare protest when Señor De la Cruz pushed him back into the crowd. Padré Martinez impatiently shook his head, his toupee askew. 

 

With great effort, Alma released Bruno’s hand and gently ushered him towards Pepa. His sister immediately pulled him against her side, cradling Antonio with one arm and holding onto Bruno with the other. Bruno stared straight ahead with glassy eyes and Alma wondered if he'd even heard anything past Manuel's awful words. Félix came and stood next to Pepa, his hand on her shoulder. Her cloud was black and flashing with lightning.

 

For once, Alma scarcely glanced at it. 

 

She faced the crowd and smoothed down the front of her dress. She did not smile, but she did not cower or glare. She held her head high, refusing to show her fear or pain to them all.

 

That could come later.

 

“Now shall we discuss this like adults?” she asked cooly. “Or does anyone else require a scolding?”

 

Camilo snickered. Dolores clapped her hand over his mouth.

 

No one else made a peep.

 

“Well, that’s better,” Señor De la Cruz said with a huff. “Now, I don’t know about the rest of you, but I didn’t even feel a tremor from my home.”

 

“Nor did I,” Sofia said. “But I’m sure we all heard the rumbling.”

 

Normally Alma would invite everyone inside, but not now. Not with that crack. Not before she could find out if Casita was alright.

 

Instead, she ushered them all around the back, to the patio. The table was still outside; Luisa hurried inside and came back with more chairs. Julieta jumped into action, offering beverages of all sorts. Mirabel clung to her and Julieta held onto her just as tightly.

 

Alma watched them all, exhaustion, anger, grief and fear deep in her bones.

 

Mirabel had tear tracks on her cheeks. Pepa had a cloud above her head. Bruno was pale as a ghost. Julieta was smiling valiantly, but now Alma could see the stress in her eyes. Luisa was biting her nails, her eyelid twitching; Dolores winced at every sound, glancing longingly towards the house, but she didn’t move. Camilo hovered close to his parents; now that the shock was settling in, he seemed smaller and younger. Isabela marched about, helping Julieta, but little cacti kept appearing.

 

Casita had a crack.

 

The mountain was open.

 

Her family was at breaking point.

 

The candle still shone.

 

She’d pushed her family to this point and she hadn’t told them why. Julieta and Pepa asked her; she didn’t tell them. Bruno asked her mere moments ago and she didn’t answer.

 

How many times had Alma told herself she was fine? How many times had she reminded herself that she didn’t owe anyone her greatest tragedy?

 

It was their story too and she hadn’t told them half of it. She told herself they didn’t need to know. Why would they possibly need to know? So she pushed it down, she kept her silence…

 

But where had that silence gotten them all?

 

Forty-five years of silence. Forty-five years of pretending that all was well.

 

It hadn’t been well since her husband and baby crashed into that damnable river.

 

The river…

 

Slowly, silently, Alma turned towards the mountains. She let everyone’s voices wash over her…

 

And she began to walk.






Mirabel looked up, her eyes darting around. The townsfolk were talking over each other, each arguing over what had happened and why. Mirabel didn’t dare say a word, afraid of upsetting someone again, or getting in the way. She waited for Abuela to take charge again, but she didn’t.

 

It hit her then, all at once, that she couldn’t hear Abuela talking.

 

She couldn’t see her.

 

“Where’s Abuela?” Mirabel asked, but no one heard her. Feeling very nervous but very stubborn, Mirabel climbed onto her seat and shouted, “Hey! Hey, quiet! Where’s Abuela?

 

There was a brief, stunned pause. Everyone looked around and started shouting even more. Tia Pepa began to rain and, with a yelp, handed Antonio to Tio Félix, trying to make her cloud leave.

 

Mirabel sighed, jumping off her seat. Typical. It was like everyone just enjoyed arguing, they weren’t even getting anything done.

 

Abuela had been so upset. So angry…And so scared.

 

Mirabel had never seen her abuela look scared before.

 

Mirabel was scared too. They all were.

 

And call Mirabel crazy, but she had a hunch about where Abuela had gone. After all, if the mountains were open and they needed to know why, if it wasn’t because something was wrong with the Miracle, then they needed to check the mountain. Right?

 

As the adults began to organise a search-party, Mirabel tip-toed away. She picked up the pace, just walking at first, then jogging.

 

As soon as she was out of sight, Mirabel ran.






Hours passed. The sun was setting when Alma heard small, hurried footsteps and gasping. An exhausted but elated voice cried, “Abuela!”

 

The next thing she knew, her youngest nieta was hugging her tightly. “Abuela, there you are!” Mirabel said, still out of breath. “Why didn’t you tell anyone? Everyone’s super scared and looking for you.”

 

Oh, Mirabel. Dear, determined Mirabel.

 

Alma had let that child down so badly.

 

“I…I needed to see this place,” Alma said quietly, running a hand through the child’s hair. She stared at the river. She felt hollow. 

 

Mirabel let go and sat next to her, her little feet dangling over the edge of the rocks. She copied Alma’s posture; back straight, hands folded on her lap.

 

Ay, mi mariposa…

 

“I’ve never been able to come back here,” Alma continued. The water rushed by quietly. In the setting sun, it glinted like jewels; pink, yellow, green and blue. “This place…Is where we were given our Miracle.”

 

Mirabel’s head snapped around quickly. Her mouth hung open and she turned back to the river, staring at it with surprising solemnity for such a young child.

 

“Where Abuelo Pedro…” she whispered.

 

Alma swallowed and nodded. Her vision blurred with tears and she remembered screaming and screaming for Pedro, for Bruno. She remembered falling to her knees only a few steps away from where they sat, screaming and sobbing. All she’d been able to think was, No, no, no, please no. Not Pedro, not Bruno. Not my girls, please not my girls too.

 

That was when the candle flared and the soldiers were blasted away. The mountains rapidly grew around them and, even now, Alma wasn’t sure if she’d actually heard Bruno start to cry or if it had merely been her desperate imagination. 

 

Pedro had died. Bruno had lived, though she hadn’t known it.

 

Alma, Julieta and Pepa lived, hidden by mountains and magic. Casita appeared in more golden light, inviting Alma (terrified, heart-broken Alma) inside.

 

Alma had slept with her daughters in the same bed as her until they were two.

 

Mirabel took her hand.

 

“I’m sorry, Abuela,” she said softly. Her eyes were so much like Pedro’s; big and brown, loving and understanding.

 

Alma’s next breath caught in her throat and the tears began to fall.

 

Finally, after forty-five years of silence, she began to tell her story.

 

Not all of it. By God, she couldn’t tell a ten-year-old everything that happened that night. That could wait for later, for her children and...And for her friends.

 

But she told it. No more fairytales, no more euphemisms. 

 

It was men chasing them, not monsters. Pedro was killed, not lost. Her son was lost, not killed.

 

The Miracle had not been a gentle, beautiful thing, born only of pure love. It had been frantic and desperate, born of love and grief, blood and tears. Saving her and damning her all at once.




“Run!” Pedro shouted, dropping the candle and pushing her ahead of him. “Alma, amor, run!”

 

Every instinct screamed at her to survive. She ran, clutching her daughters close to her heart, sobbing despite her dry eyes. Fear overwhelmed her and Pepa began to wriggle and whine, quickly breaking into a full-blown scream. Julieta woke with a startled whimper, but she didn’t cry like her sister. Alma tried to loosen her grip, terrified of suffocating them, but her arms wouldn’t obey her.

 

Bruno.

 

Her son’s name flashed through her mind like lightning. Alma turned around, already reaching out for her little boy, screaming, “Pedro, hand him to-!” but it was too late.

 

The soldiers had caught up with them.

 

Pedro bent protectively over Bruno, shielding him as the machete came down.

 

He met Alma’s terrified eyes as the blow struck. He made a choked, awful noise and there was blood, so much blood. Even then, Pedro tried to protect their son; he fell sideways, trying to keep Bruno above the water, trying to turn so he’d land on his back.

 

The soldiers didn’t notice, or perhaps just didn’t care. They rode onwards, towards Alma and her daughters, as she fell to her knees and screamed.

 

That jewel-coloured river ran red, Alma’s hand dug into the damp ground and a golden flare took over everything.

 

It happened so fast: the mountains rose quickly in jagged chunks of earth. The soldiers were blasted backwards and she heard their startled, pained shouts. She heard hissing and sizzling as they were burned. She thought she heard a baby's cry, but could never be sure if it was genuine or her own desperation telling her that her son somehow lived.

 

The silence afterwards was crushing. Alma was left kneeling there in shock, trembling and gasping for breath. Her wedding candle had transformed: it shone brightly, too brightly, unnaturally bright. It was engraved with a glittering butterfly and swirls on either side. The flame was unusually steady; it didn't even flicker in the breeze.

 

Everyone crowded around, staring at her and the candle with awe, with suspicion, with fear, with hope, exhaustion and reverence. 

 

They were looking at her expectantly. As if she knew what to do.

 

Shakily, as Pepa screeched and Julieta began to sob, Alma took the candle and stood. Despite the pain in her hips, legs and back (it had only been two days since the birth), she stood up straight and held her head high, trying to hide her fear. She was just as scared as they were and she didn't know what they'd do or say about...About this, whatever it was.

 

"What should we do now?" a young man asked her and Alma didn't know.

 

She was almost grateful when the big, colourful house appeared in another, softer flash of golden light. At least it provided a distraction.

 

Alma wanted to hide. She wanted to tell everyone staring at her to figure it out themselves. She wasn't a leader, let alone their leader. What did she know? She wanted to cry. She wanted to climb over the mountains and find Pedro and Bruno. She wanted to go home. She wanted to break down and scream until her throat was raw.

 

And she knew, even then, that she would not be given that luxury...




For a long moment they sat in silence, staring at the water. The only sound was the soft current; even the birds had fallen silent. 

 

Finally, Mirabel whispered, “You were scared.

 

Alma nodded, wiping her eyes. “Yes,” she said hoarsely. “Yes, I was. I…I am.”

 

“Me too,” Mirabel said. She stood and held her hands out to Alma. Impossibly, miraculously, the child was smiling even as she cried. “We all are. But that’s okay. We can be scared together.”

 

Alma took her hands and let her granddaughter pull her to her feet.

 

Together, still holding hands, they walked into the river.

 

“You lost your home,” Mirabel said. “And Abuelo and Tio. So…So you didn’t want to lose anyone else, right? But we’re not going anywhere, I promise. I’m sure not, because I love you, Abuela. We all love you. We’re family and…And this time, we can fix things together. You don’t have to do it by yourself.”

 

The sun had nearly vanished over the horizon. All the same, a little butterfly came and fluttered around Mirabel’s head; a beautiful golden butterfly, like the one that led her to Pedro so long ago.

 

It landed in Mirabel’s dark hair, sitting like it belonged there, an unusual and wonderful ribbon.

 

A butterfly like the ones on her new skirt.

 

Alma smiled, holding Mirabel’s face in her hands, stroking her hair off her face.

 

“You are a wonder, Mirabel Madrigal,” she said gently. How could she have ever allowed herself to forget this? This child was a miracle in her own right, with enough love to light the sky.

 

She pulled Mirabel into a hug, clinging to her as Mirabel’s small arms wrapped around her. She cried silently but freely, her tears landing in Mirabel’s hair.

 

The butterfly flew away, chasing the last rays of the sun.






As they left the river, hand in hand, there were more footsteps. These ones were clumsy and uneven and Bruno nearly fell headlong as he came sprinting.

 

He stopped dead at the sight of them. He looked dead on his feet. There was a leaf in his hair, dirt on the knees of his trousers and his eyes were red-rimmed. All the same, his smile was like a ray of sunshine.

 

“Gracias a Dios!” he gasped running forward. “I thought you were- I-” He hesitated in front of her, big eyes frantic.

 

“I’m alright,” Alma said softly. Hesitantly, she reached out and cupped his cheek.

 

He didn’t flinch.

 

“Mijo, you did not do this,” Alma said. “It was me. I…I have a long story to tell you all.” She smiled ruefully. “And I’m sorry for scaring you.”

 

She was in for a wonderful shock: Bruno’s lip trembled and, in a flash, he’d flung his arms around her.

 

He was hugging her.

 

Her son was hugging her. For the first time since they found out the truth, he’d hugged her first. He didn’t pull away or flinch.

 

Her baby was hugging her.

 

Alma clung to him with all her might, quickly pulling Mirabel into the embrace. 

 

“I love you, bébé,” Alma whispered. “We’ll fix this.”

 

“Together,” Mirabel chimed in and Alma let out a wet laugh.

 

"Together," she agreed.

 

“I’m glad you’re okay,” Bruno said, his voice shaking. 

 

They stood there for a long time until Alma found the strength to speak again.

 

“Let’s go home.”

Notes:

🎵The miracle is you, not some Gift, just you...🎵

(Dos Oruguitas is always going to make me cry, well done Lin Manuel Miranda)

Alma's finally letting it out 💕 She took a huge step and is finally acknowledging her trauma for what it is. No more fairytales; no more half-stories. The truth hurts, her story is a painful one, but she's finally ready to face it
(And Bruno finally hugged her!)

And, as always, Mirabel is a miracle 💕

Next up: Alma speaks with her children and the town begins to work on the new mountain pass. Alma plans for their upcoming new-arrivals 👀👀

Chapter 51: Rebuilding

Summary:

Alma, Mirabel and Bruno return from the mountains. Alma makes her family a promise and begins to plan for their future arrivals.

Notes:

Not much action this chapter, but Alma and the council plan what to do about the new opening in the mountains. Alma plans for the Rojas family and works on her promises

Songs I listened to while writing:
All Of You, from Encanto
On My Own, by Ashes Remain
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
Ruin, by The Amazing Devil
Red Ribbon, by Madilyn Bailey
Medicine, by Daughter
Fix You, by Coldplay
From Now On, from The Greatest Showman

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Every little thing that I've known is everything I need to let go; you're so much bigger than the world I've made. So I surrender my soul, I'm reaching out for your hope. I lay my weapons down, I'm ready for you now. Bring me out; come and find me in the dark now, every day by myself I'm breaking down. I don't wanna fight alone anymore. Bring me out from the prison of my own pride. My God, I need a hope I can't deny. In the end I'm realising I was never meant to fight on my own.” - On My Own, Ashes Remain




“Mamá!” In a flash, Julieta and Pepa ran at her, pulling her into a three-way embrace. Alma clung to her girls and felt lighter than she had in years. 

 

All around them were people with lanterns; a search-party. Padré Martinez sagged in relief, tiredly crossing himself. Félix wiped his brow, giving her a fond if tired smile.

 

“What the hell were you thinking!?” Pepa demanded of her as Julieta rushed to hug Mirabel, calling for Agustín. “You climbed the mountain by yourself? Dios mio, Mamá, you could have been hurt!”

 

“I could have,” Alma agreed, pushing Pepa’s hair out of her eyes. “But I wasn’t. Mija, I…There was something I needed to see. Something I’d like to show you all soon.” Her hand lingered on her daughter’s face. Pepa watched her carefully, confused and concerned, her brows pinched. Anger and relief warred in her big green eyes, the eyes she and Bruno had inherited from Pedro’s mother. “I’m sorry, amor,” she said. “I know I said it before, but I’m sorry. I held on too tight.”

 

Her family slowly gathered around. Whether it was out of respect or confusion, the villagers hung back.

 

“I was…I am so afraid of losing you too,” Alma continued, looking around at them all. Julieta held onto Mirabel and Bruno, watching Alma with wide eyes. Agustín had his arm around Julieta and his hand on Mirabel’s shoulder.

 

Mirabel smiled at her and nodded in silent encouragement. 

 

“I pushed too hard,” Alma said. “I pushed for perfection that doesn’t exist and I’m sorry.” Isabela had her arms tightly crossed, wary and hopeful. Luisa bit her lip, shoulders hunched.

 

“I believed the Miracle would keep us safe,” Alma said, her hand on her locket. “I…I still believe that. I know Pedro is watching over us. I was given a second chance and I was so afraid to lose it that I lost sight of who our Miracle was for; all of you. Mi familia. I lost sight of you all and I can only hope I can make things right.” She did not cry this time, but instead looked them in the eye one by one. 

 

Camilo held onto Félix’s hand, watching her with amazement. Dolores gave her a small smile. Sweet Antonio was fast asleep in his father’s arms and Félix gave her an approving nod.

 

She looked at her babies: her fiery, tempestuous and big-hearted Pepa. Her loving, kind and stubborn Julieta. Her shy, creative and brave Bruno.

 

Her children. Pedro’s children. They were the greatest gift he’d ever given her.

 

“I love you,” she said to them all. “I have never been the best at saying it, or showing it. But if you will permit me another chance I will do my best to be there for you. To change for the better.”

 

For a moment, there was stunned silence. Julieta wiped her eyes.

 

Then Mirabel ran forward and flung her arms around Alma, hugging her tightly.

 

“I love you, Abuela,” she said, and that seemed to be a sort of signal because the rest of her family gathered around until it was one big Madrigal group hug- or perhaps a group tangle was the better term for it.

 

Alma caught Pepa’s gaze and held it. Her daughter looked at her for one long moment before she nodded, her expression softening.

 

“Alright,” Pepa said quietly. “Let’s try.”






Alma did not sleep well that night. She sat on the edge of her bed, watching the candle.

 

Another chance. A chance to make things right with her family. A chance to share her burdens and understand theirs. 

 

No more hiding, Alma told herself. No more hesitating. 

 

She loved them all so much it hurt. She never should have let them doubt that. 

 

She never would again.

 

Resolved, Alma finally lay down and closed her eyes.

 

She dreamed of dozens upon dozens of golden butterflies that night, all flying towards the horizon.






Bruno woke up at the crack of dawn, his stomach already grumbling. Well, he hadn’t exactly eaten much yesterday. He stumbled out of bed, smothering a yawn. He still felt exhausted; a part of him waited for the migraines, for the pain and weariness, but it didn’t come. It was just…Normal. He was tired because he’d climbed a mountain, hadn’t eaten much and then went to bed late.

 

That still startled him sometimes. 

 

“G'morning,” he mumbled to Pedro’s portrait as he went downstairs. He knew Julieta was protective of her kitchen (mostly thanks to Agustín) but she always let Bruno hang around and help; surely she wouldn’t mind if he got a head-start on breakfast.

 

He was in for a surprise; he could hear movement in the guest room. The door was hanging open and someone was pottering about inside. There was the swish of fabric being moved and slight squeaks as Casita moved the furniture about.

 

Bruno peeked inside and saw Alma putting fresh sheets on the bed. A mattress had been laid out on the floor, complete with pillows, sheets and a blanket.

 

“Er…Alma?”

 

Alma startled, fumbling with the pillow in her hands. Casita waved the shutters in greeting and those slight squeaks sounded like laughter.

 

“Oh, Bruno,” she said. “You startled me, mijo. What are you doing up so early?”

 

“I could ask you the same thing,” Bruno said, stepping into the room. “What’s all this?”

 

“Well…” Alma looked faintly embarrassed at being at…Whatever this was. She cleared her throat, fluffing up the pillow and placing it on the bed. “Your friend…This Señora Rojas and her family will need a place to rest and heal. There’s not enough room in here for the four of them, but perhaps we can set up space in the living room or someone can share their room. But Señora Rojas and her son should be comfortable here.”

 

Bruno’s mind went blank. For a moment, he could only stare. He just- he couldn’t- he wanted…

 

Bruno hurried forward and hugged her for the second time. Alma’s arms wrapped around him; one hand ran through his hair.

 

“We’ll do what we can for them,” Alma said gently. “I promise, Brunito. We’ll help them.”






Alma’s idea for the mountain pass was simple: a wall and a gate.

 

“We do not know precisely why the magic decided to open the mountains,” Alma lied and Pepa had to admire her mother’s serene expression. Talk about an expert poker face. “Perhaps it is to help more newcomers arrive more easily; that climb certainly didn’t do my son any favours. He saw a new group will arrive, though we do not know precisely when. They are all injured, but be on the look-out for an older woman unable to walk. Her son will be carrying her. I must warn you, she will be slashed with a sword.”

 

Sofia Guzman had her hand over her mouth. Padré Martinez gave a soft, sorrowful sigh and crossed himself. Señor De la Cruz looked solemn, holding his hat tightly.

 

“How many?” Padré Martinez asked.

 

Bruno looked at the ground. Pepa took his hand and held it tightly.

 

“Four,” Alma said, her expression momentarily faltering into one of sympathy, horror in her eyes. She rallied quickly, taking a deep breath and just like that she was Señora Madrigal again, all-knowing and all-powerful.

 

“A wall sounds like a good idea to me,” Señor De la Cruz said, his moustache twitching as he spoke. “We can post guards…Or would that be look-outs? Well, no matter. We can keep the opening monitored.”

 

“Do you think danger will find us here?” Sofia asked.

 

Alma kept her expression steady. “No,” she said; she sounded so sure of herself, so utterly confident. “Our Miracle would not put us in harm’s way.”

 

Pepa wondered if her mother believed that or if it was another lie for the council. She could ask her when everyone left, and wasn’t that new? Alma let them ask questions now and gave actual answers, instead of evasions and half-truths. 

 

“Do you mean that?” Pepa asked when the council left Casita. Pepa glanced at the rug thrown over the crack; Félix and Agustín had hurriedly put it there as soon as Dolores announced the council were on their way. The council must have noticed it, they’d have to be blind not to, but mercifully no one commented. Not yet anyway. “Do you really think there’s no danger coming for us?”

 

Alma used to give vague, frightening warnings of this mysterious danger when Pepa and Julieta were children. Pepa used to imagine giant shadow monsters with glowing red eyes and knives for teeth; monsters that destroyed and ate everything in their path. It gave her nightmares. After Pepa fled to her, sobbing in the middle of the night, Alma never spoke of it again.

 

“I do not know for sure,” Alma admitted, holding her locket tightly. She also glanced at the rug and flinched, her lips pressed together. “I do not think our Miracle would harm us.”

 

“The crack hasn’t grown,” Julieta offered.

 

“But it hasn’t gone away either,” Alma countered. She sighed and added, “Be careful. I don’t want anyone wandering out of the mountains unsupervised.”

 

Pepa immediately made a note to herself to keep an eye on Camilo. 

 

“We will protect ourselves,” Alma said, a strange mix of command and reassurance. “We will be safe.” She looked at the three of them and Pepa couldn’t read her expression at all.

 

“I would like to talk to you three,” she said. “About your father.”

 

Pepa froze. On instinct, she looked towards the side-stairs. She couldn’t see Pedro’s portrait from here, but she knew it like the back of her hand. 

 

Papá.

 

The villagers who remembered him praised him to the skies as a martyr and saint, but they didn’t really talk about Pedro The Person. He was an icon to them, an image to hold onto, but not really a person with likes, dislikes, hopes and fears of his own.

 

Alma rarely spoke of him, except in quiet, sad tones. Pepa had so many different images of her father in her head that changed over the years; she knew he’d saved them, that never changed. She knew he enjoyed writing. But what did he write? Poems or stories? Romances, comedies or horror? She knew he wrote some songs, Alma once showed her and Julieta the last lullaby he wrote, but that was all. Maybe he wrote plays too. She didn’t know. What was his favourite colour? Did he have a temper like Pepa, or did he have Julieta’s quiet anger? 

 

Pepa liked to imagine that when Alma snapped at her for her clouds, Pedro would be on her side. Maybe he’d encourage her to let it all out; maybe he’d smile when she caused a gust of breeze and remind her to keep an umbrella on hand when she was reading. Or maybe he’d be exactly like Alma and tell her clear skies, clear skies, clear skies.

 

She simply didn’t know.

 

But now Alma was offering to tell them.

 

“I’d like that,” Pepa said. Her voice shook despite her best efforts to sound calm. She reached out and took Julieta’s hand and Bruno’s, linking them to her.

 

“Let’s go to my room,” Alma said and she led the way as always.

 

The triplets followed after her and Pepa tried to tamp down on the rising mix of anxiety, hope and curiosity inside her. Her cloud appeared, a fuzzy and faint thing, hovering above her head.

 

She wanted to know about Pedro. She’d always wanted to know more.

 

In the back of her mind, Pepa had to acknowledge that maybe this meant her mother was changing after all.

Notes:

Look at Alma go 💕

Next up: Alma and the triplets talk about Pedro and work is done on Isabela's new dress. A storm heralds some new arrivals...👀👀

Chapter 52: Snapshots

Summary:

Alma and the triplets discuss Pedro. Isabela works on her new dress as storm clouds herald the impending arrival of newcomers...

Notes:

Insert "I have crippling depression" vine here. Perhaps TMI, but winter wants me dead; first I lost my voice (twice!) and had the flu. Then anxiety and seasonal depression decided to fuck with me. But God has seen fit to let me live another day and I'm gonna make that everyone else's problem ✊ So, while updates may be slower for a while, I'm gonna do my best! I have the entire week off work, so fingers crossed with a bit of rest I can get back into the swing of things

Songs I listened to while writing:
Cardigan, by Taylor Swift
Somewhere Over The Rainbow, by Joseph William Morgan
Girl On Fire, by Arshad
Wide Awake, by Alex G
Ashes, by Celine Dion
Bright, from Julie And The Phantoms
No Surprise, by Daughtry

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“And when you are young, they assume you know nothing. But I knew you'd linger like a tattoo kiss; I knew you'd haunt all of my what-ifs. The smell of smoke would hang around this long, ‘cause I knew everything when I was young. I knew I'd curse you for the longest time, chasin' shadows in the grocery line.” - Cardigan, Taylor Swift




Forty-six years ago…




Alma would never forget her first glimpse of Pedro. It was Día de las velitas, a warm evening, and Alma had no idea how her life was going to change that night.

 

It was so simple: she’d climbed a lamppost for a better view and watched a small, golden butterfly flutter past her. It flew over to a young man, who’d had the same idea as Alma; he’d climbed a lamppost and was peering over the crowds’ heads curiously. The butterfly circled his head and he smiled at it.

 

And then he caught Alma’s eyes.

 

Alma had immediately felt herself blush, certain she’d never seen such a handsome man in her life. He was smiling at her and he waved. Alma happily waved back, nearly losing her balance completely and she fumbled to catch herself.

 

The man quietly chuckled. Alma giggled, shrugging; a silent, Oh well, what can you do? She couldn’t bring herself to feel embarrassed, not when he was smiling at her like that.

 

As the festival continued, she kept an eye out for him. Within the hour, he found her, gently tapping her on the shoulder to catch her attention.

 

He was even more handsome up close, smiling at her so sweetly and he had the most beautiful brown eyes she’d ever seen. Alma’s own smile grew, excitement thrumming in her veins.

 

“I’m Pedro,” he said, holding his hand out.

 

“Alma,” she said, taking his hand. She’d expected him to shake her hand, but he kissed her knuckles instead and Alma was hard-pressed not to giggle from sheer delight.

 

They wandered around the square, still holding hands, easily falling into conversation as if they’d known each other for years.

 

Alma wasn’t one to believe in love at first sight but, as she and Pedro sat on the fountain to eat and happily talk, she wondered if she was changing her mind. Maybe love at first sight existed after all.

 

And maybe she’d found it.




Present day…




“Your father brought out the romantic in me,” Alma said fondly. “The dreamer. I’d always enjoyed love stories, but I also considered myself practical. I’d never truly…Ah, 'lost my head' over someone, I suppose. I’d never felt so pulled towards someone before. Pedro…He was something special.”

 

Her triplets were watching her raptly. Julieta had a hand on her heart, a sweet smile on her face. Bruno tilted his head curiously, his smile growing as if to silently encourage Alma to continue. Pepa sniffled, a little cloud above her head, a rainbow peeking out from behind it. 

 

“That’s so sweet,” Pepa murmured. 

 

“It was,” Alma agreed. “It wasn’t anything dramatic or ground-shaking. It was just…” A connection. A boy and a girl, enjoying each other’s company. Something special clicking into place.

 

“We connected,” Alma said. “Speaking with Pedro was as easy as breathing. It felt like speaking with an old friend. As if we knew each other for a long time.”

 

As if a piece of her heart said, Oh, there you are. I’ve been looking all over for you.

 

Almost shyly, Pepa said, “That’s what it felt like with Félix. Like I’d known him forever.”

 

Alma could remember just how giddy Pepa had been when she and Félix finally started talking. She wasn’t blind; she’d seen her daughter mooning after that boy. If Alma and Julieta had spent hours talking about it, waiting for them to do something, no one else needed to know. 

 

Goodness, the sunshine and rainbows had been blinding after their first date.

 

“What did he like to do?” Bruno asked.

 

“Your papá? He loved poetry and music; he often wrote his own. He insisted it was mediocre, but I loved it. He won all sorts of awards in school for writing; ribbons, some money and a notebook, I believe. I bought him a notebook and pen set for his birthday and he just about lost his mind.” Alma giggled before she could stop herself and she missed how her children softened at the sound. “You’d swear I presented him with a diamond! He…Hm…” Alma turned to her bed. “Julieta, amor, could you grab the box under my bed?”

 

Julieta did, presenting it to Alma with a bemused little smile. Alma opened it and pulled out sheets of paper.

 

“Your papá wrote these,” she said softly. “He wrote many more, of course, but we…We had to leave them behind. But these…They were for you three.”

 

It was five sheets of paper in total: two songs and three poems, dedicated to their children. Alma’s favourite had been the lullaby, Dos Oruguitas. Pedro had spent her entire pregnancy working on it, gently strumming away on his guitar, humming as he worked.

 

She missed that guitar. 

 

She wondered what happened to it. To all the things they’d been forced to leave behind. 

 

Pepa was tightly clutching one of the poems like a lifeline, her eyes brimming with tears as her cloud grew and a cold breeze ruffled her hair. Julieta held Dos Oruguitas, mouthing the words to herself as she read, holding the paper with reverence. Bruno took one of the poems cautiously, like he was afraid of tearing it; he held it practically at arms’ length but his eyes were shining.

 

“He loved you three,” Alma said gently. “So, so much. As soon as I told him I was expecting, he loved you. We both couldn’t wait for you to arrive.” She remembered debating names for weeks and weeks, fretting over finding the perfect ones. She’d knitted those blankets with the utmost care, wanting to do her best for her babies, wanting everything to be perfect for them. Pedro wrote lullabies and poems, and brought home armfuls of toys and clothes with a joyful grin. His great-uncle had made the cribs as a gift to them and Alma had cried when they were presented to them, hugging Pedro’s great-uncle tightly, thanking him again and again for his thoughtful gifts and hard work. 

 

“You were the lights of our lives,” Alma said, once more quietly rejoicing in the sight of her triplets together at last. “You are the lights of my life.”

 

With a strangled sob, Julieta threw herself into Alma’s arms, clutching her tightly. In seconds, Pepa and Bruno followed.

 

Alma held her children close and allowed herself to cry. She allowed herself to miss Pedro; to mourn him and speak about him freely. 

 

She hoped, not for the first time and not for the last, that he could see this.

 

She knew, deep in her soul, that Pedro would be proud of their family.






The next few weeks passed oddly. Construction on the new wall and gate was well underway; the pass would have some form of protection and it seemed to make everyone (especially the older generations) breathe more easily.

 

Isabela watched them curiously. Manuel Sanchez walked around, sulking, but he kept his mouth shut. People gave him a wide berth; after all, he’d been very publicly shamed by Abuela and the villagers seemed to think that shame would rub off on them.

 

“Well, I can’t say he didn’t deserve it,” Mariano said, helping to gather building supplies with Luisa.

 

“Tell me about it,” Isa scoffed. “Wish I’d gotten to hit him.”

 

“You and me both,” Luisa muttered. She took the heavier supplies from Mariano. Isabela watched them go, hands on her hips. She wondered if there were any dangerous plants she could grow around the new wall and gate. She’d have to do some more research.

 

In the meantime, she was happy to focus on her new dress.

 

As promised, Mirabel presented her with a handful of fabric flowers: small, bright yellow sunflowers and deep purple violets but she also made orange daisies, red chrysanthemums and orange geranium, all under Agustín and Julieta’s watchful eyes.

 

Julieta helped sew the flowers in place, creeping up the bodice of the dress. Agustín embroidered swirling lines of bright green vines and leaves along the skirt. Mirabel embroidered more flowers on the skirt: smatterings of rich red roses, yellow lilies and even a single cactus on the hem of the dress.

 

Isabela loved it.

 

“Oh yes,” she said gleefully, holding the dress against herself. “Look at it! It’s brilliant!”

 

“Well go try it on, Isa,” Agustín laughed.

 

Isabela needed no further prompting; she grabbed Mirabel by the hand and ran upstairs to her room, both of them positively giddy with anticipation. Isabela ducked behind her screen to change while Mirabel cried, “Presenting the one and only Isabela Madrigal!”

 

Isabela stepped back out, twirling delightedly. The dress was so bright, so unlike her usual style. The colours contrasted beautifully, the asymmetrical sleeves were a far cry from her usual frilly ones. The flowers were lovely but finally different from the pastel bundles of roses and orchids she usually went for. Isabela slipped on a pair of deep blue shoes and looked proudly in the mirror.

 

Her reflection looked back at her with a sharp, delighted grin. Her hair was a little tangled from shoving the dress over her head and the coloured streaks stood out sharply against her dark hair. The dress was bold, bright and colourful; with a snap of her fingers, a flower crown of protea flowers appeared on her head. With another snap, Mirabel had a flower crown of bright orchids and roses, all in shades of red, orange and yellow. 

 

For the first time in years (or maybe the first time ever) Isabela felt that she finally looked like herself. Isabela Madrigal, not Señorita Perfecta or Princesa Isabela.

 

Just Isabela. 

 

She couldn’t stop smiling.

 

“Let’s show Mamá y Papá!” Mirabel cried, tugging on her hand. “C’mon, c’mon!

 

When she ran back into the kitchen, Julieta’s eyes watered as she held her hands over her heart.

 

“Ay, Isa,” she said softly. “You look wonderful.”

 

“You think so?” Isabela asked hopefully, swishing her skirts.

 

“It suits you,” Agustín said, pulling her into a hug. “It suits you wonderfully, bébé.”

 

Isabela clung to her father, smiling as Mirabel babbled to Julieta about the dress and earnestly asking if she could have one like it.

 

How about that? Her little sister wanted to dress like her.

 

If that made Isabela’s heart swell, it was no one else’s business. 






Only a week later, the wall and gate were complete. 

 

Only a week later, storm clouds crept in.

 

“It’s not me,” Tia Pepa said, sipping her coffee. “It’s natural.”

 

At her words, the other adults froze. Even Pepa herself stiffened as her own words registered, exchanging frightened glances with Bruno.

 

“What?” Mirabel asked, halfway out of her seat. “What’s wrong?”

 

“Nothing, amor,” Abuela said, patting her on the head. She sighed, peering out of the window, up at the big black clouds. It began to rain. “We…We may have some visitors soon.”

 

“I’ll stay up,” Dolores said quickly. The others looked as lost as Mirabel, but Dolores seemed to know exactly what Abuela was talking about. “I can listen for them.”

 

“Lola, we don’t know when they’ll be arriving,” Félix said gently, patting her hand. “It might not even be today. We can’t ask you to stay up all night.”

 

Dolores had a determined glint in her eyes. “I can try.”

 

Mirabel didn’t know what they were talking about ( what visitors? Why did Dolores need to listen for them? Why would anyone wanna walk around in such nasty weather?) but there was one thing she knew: she wouldn’t want to mess with Dolores when she looked like that.

 

“Are they nice visitors?” Mirabel asked.

 

“Sí, chiquita,” Burno said, sounding hoarse, like he was sick again. “They’re very nice.”

 

Mirabel pursed her lips and nodded. Maybe she’d better keep an eye out too.

Notes:

Alma and Pedro, my beloved

Next up...Pedro? 👀👀

Chapter 53: Only Love Remains

Summary:

Pedro Madrigal has always been watching his family and he's made a few promises of his own.

Notes:

Remember how I said we hadn't seen the last of Pedro a while ago? Well, here we are at last! ✨ I mentioned on tumblr that there was some content for this story I was excited to get to (beyond the realisation/reunion) and this is it: in which Pedro has some promises to fulfill

Songs I listened to while writing:
The Proof Of Your Love, by For King And Country
Dos Oruguitas, from Encanto
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
Not Alone, by RED
Shattered, by Trading Yesterday
Pieces, by RED
Soldier, by Tommee Profitt and Fleurie
Close Your Eyes, by Rhodes
It's Always Been You, by Phil Wickham
I'll Keep You Safe, by Sleeping At Last

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“When it's all said and done, when we sing our final song, only love remains. Only love remains. Let my life be the proof, the proof of your love. Let my love look like you, and what you're made of. How you lived, how you died, love is sacrifice. So let my life be the proof, the proof of your love.” - The Proof Of Your Love, For King And Country




Pedro Madrigal was dead. There was no point in dancing around the facts, not after so many years. He was dead and he’d made his peace with that.

 

That didn’t mean he was done.

 

As he breathed his last, desperately shielding his son, praying for his wife and children, he saw a bright golden flare of light. Then darkness.

 

Then light again.

 

He watched, speechless and confused, as mountains rose from the ground. The soldiers were blasted away by golden light and Pedro saw them burn. Others died when they fell from their horses, breaking their necks or cracking their heads open.

 

He saw his own body, floating in the river, still holding Bruno. The baby was sobbing and a gentle wave of golden light carried Pedro’s body and Bruno to the river bank. Pedro’s body was mostly out of the water and Bruno was still on his chest, sobbing. The warm golden light didn’t leave; it stayed around the baby…Keeping him safe? Keeping him warm.

 

Pedro watched all this in disbelief.

 

I’m dead, he thought with a shudder. He knew he was, but seeing the cold hard proof of it was something else entirely.

 

Still shivering, Pedro sat next to his own body and placed his hand on his tiny son’s back, gently shushing him. Bruno couldn’t hear him and Pedro doubted he could feel him either, but it helped Pedro to feel like he was doing something for his child. He barely looked away from Bruno all night, watching the rise and fall of his chest. On the rare occasion he looked away, it was to stare at the new mountains.

 

Pedro was glowing all over, like candlelight, like the light that blasted the soldiers away and swept his son to safety. 

 

He stayed by Bruno’s side and kept watch until dawn broke and a search party arrived to look for survivors. He stayed until Bruno was carried away from the corpses.

 

Then Pedro went in search of Alma, Pepa and Julieta, on the other side of these mysterious mountains.






The afterlife was strange at first. One moment, Pedro was looking down on Earth itself, watching souls ascend and watching souls descend back to Earth, to watch their loved ones more closely…The next, he was on Earth itself, following his family around.

 

It took a while to get the hang of it, to do it on purpose.

 

And Pedro did not have favourites, but Bruno needed him more. So Pedro followed his son the most, watching over him, wishing with all his might that he could do something for his son. His son, his youngest, who had been so fragile at birth. Pedro remembered the way the midwife eyed Bruno warily, the way she said “If he lasts the night, he should be fine.” 

 

“He will,” Pedro had said firmly, holding his baby close. “Mi bébé is a fighter.”

 

Pedro stayed up with him all night, hardly daring to blink, his heart freezing and dread washing over him whenever Bruno’s little raspy breaths stuttered. 

 

“Ay, mijo,” Pedro whispered as he sat on the windowsill with Bruno. Alma, Julieta and Pepa were fast asleep. “My poor boy.”

 

Bruno whined, waving his tiny fists and Pedro held Bruno against his heart, gently shushing him and rubbing his back.

 

“I know, I know,” he said softly. “You’re probably wanting your mamí and hermanas, sí? Well…” He swallowed heavily, tears stinging his eyes. “How about we make a deal, Brunito? You keep breathing and I’ll bring you right back to them, okay? You just keep breathing and I’ll keep you safe.” Pedro kissed the top of Bruno’s head, letting his tears fall into his son’s patch of soft hair, as black as Pedro’s own. “Keep breathing. Fight. Live. Just keep breathing.”

 

Please just keep breathing.

 

When dawn broke, Bruno was still breathing and Alma burst into relieved tears at the sight of their youngest, alive and fighting as Pedro had sworn he would. 

 

Pedro kept his promise, gently depositing all three babies into Alma’s arms.

 

“Three little caterpillars,” he said, his voice breaking as he tried not to cry again. “And one stubborn little boy.”

 

In hindsight, Pedro had to admit that night seemed so simple now. He’d been terrified and helpless, but at least he’d been able to hold his family. Now he could only watch.

 

Pedro sat by Bruno on the floor of the orphanage, watching as his son drew. Bruno was drawing the street outside: Pedro recognised the striped awning over the book-shop and the bright yellow door of the dress-makers. Bruno carefully coloured in each building and gave every person he drew a bright outfit; no dull colours allowed.

 

“It’s good, Brunito,” Pedro told him proudly. “It’s very good.”

 

Bruno couldn’t hear him, of course, but Pedro liked to imagine he helped put that small, pleased smile on his son’s face anyway.






“Do you think Papá would give Agustín a shovel talk too?” Julieta asked her sister. The two of them, nineteen-years-old and bright as the stars above, were sitting on Casita’s back patio, watching the night sky.

 

“No,” Pedro told her, wishing she'd turn to face him and smile. “I like him. He makes you laugh, corazón, and you need more laughter in your life.” He shook his head fondly. “You need to remember to act like a kid sometimes.”

 

“I dunno,” Pepa said, looking thoughtful. “He doesn’t sound like the shovel talk type, y’know?” 

 

Julieta grinned. “I don’t think poor Gus would survive another one. What did you say to him anyway?”

 

Pepa’s own grin was sharp and viciously amused. She tapped her nose and said, “That’s for me to know and you to never find out.” She nudged Julieta and added, “Provided he doesn’t do anything stupid, of course.”






Pedro watched. He watched everything.

 

But he didn’t only watch. He may not be able to interact with the living, but the Miracle was born of his blood and sacrifice, his love and Alma’s love, their combined desperation.

 

If Alma was the Candle Holder, the Keeper of the Miracle, then Pedro was part of that eternal flame.

 

He reached out to the magic, their magic, and allowed in people who truly needed shelter; people who meant no harm and, through no fault of their own, had lost their place in the world. The poor lost souls who maybe never had a place of their own to begin with.

 

Anyone with hatred in their hearts would never find the Encanto. Anyone dangerous was always led in circles, guided the long way around the mountains; they never caught sight of the hidden village. He would make sure of it.

 

Pedro stood in the river where he’d died and wondered if Bruno would ever come this way.

 

If so, Pedro would walk with him the entire way.





Julieta and Pepa married Agustín and Félix. They had children. Alma stayed stiff-lipped and seemingly invulnerable under the weight of expectations, an entire village looking to her for guidance.

 

Only at home, among her grandchildren, did Alma truly light up. Pedro saw her soft-spot for Isabela; she was always eager to carry her, to brush her hair and help her dress. She clapped her hands when Isabela twirled and skipped around, trying to dance like her parents. He saw her gently kiss Dolores’s forehead and smile when the tiny girl pressed a finger to her own rosy lips and told Félix, “Shh, Papí!” when he interrupted Dolores’s story time with her abuela. 

 

Goodness, to think he was an abuelo now. How very strange indeed. How magnificent. 

 

Across the mountains, Pedro watched as Bruno entered a small village, renting a tiny room above an equally tiny tavern. He saw Bruno sit in the corner and stare into his glass of water with dull eyes; his son looked utterly exhausted and defeated, hidden in the shadows and trying to avoid notice. His hair hung in limp curls, nearly to his shoulders. He was practically drowning in his big black coat. The shadows under his eyes looked like bruises.

 

And then Juan Puerta walked in.

 

Pedro couldn’t be sure what caused the man to single Bruno out but, as soon as he had his beer in hand, Juan marched right up to Bruno and asked, “This seat taken, boy?”

 

Bruno blinked at him slowly, tiredly, as if unsure Juan was really there.

 

“Um, no?” he mumbled, more of a question than an answer, but Juan took it as permission to sit, a friendly smile on his face.




Juan gave Bruno a job. Juan worried about Bruno’s health. Juan helped Bruno find a small house.

 

Juan helped Bruno make a home for himself. He gave Bruno hope and helped him live.

 

When Juan died in defence of his boy, their boy, Pedro was the first to greet him, immediately pulling the man into a bone-crushing hug.

 

“Thank you,” Pedro said breathlessly, choking on a sob. “Thank you for our son.”

 

Juan stared hard at Pedro, his hands on Pedro’s shoulders in a tight grip. Pedro immediately understood why the man’s employees were so fast to do as they were told: Juan’s gaze had a way of piercing right through you, all-knowing, stubborn and always, always kind.

 

“You’re his papá,” Juan gasped, eyes widening. His smile was delighted, stunned. 

 

Pedro shook his head, wiping his eyes. “We both are.”






Pedro and Juan both watched Bruno warily make his way through the jungle. They winced at his injuries and Juan paced restlessly whenever Bruno stopped to rest.

 

Finally, finally, Bruno reached the river.

 

“You’re nearly there, mijo,” Pedro whispered. “Come on, you’re nearly home.”

 

Bruno lay on the riverbank, his feet in the water. He was pale and shivering, sick and injured, and Pedro refused to let his son give up now. Not when he was so close, not when he was nearly home.

 

“Your mamá’s waiting for you,” Pedro said, kneeling in the water and grabbing Bruno’s hand, the glow around him shining brighter. “Please, bébé. Your mamá, your hermanas, your sobrinos and cuñados are right there.

 

And it was the strangest thing: for the first time, Pedro could actually feel Bruno’s hand, small and shivering, too warm, in his own as he tried to pull Bruno to his feet.

 

Bruno sat up, expression bewildered. His eyes flashed green and Juan stood before him. Pedro still held his hand and he gave another desperate tug.

 

“Come on,” Pedro said, voice breaking. “Remember our deal? You keep breathing and I’ll bring you back to your mamá y hermanas.”

 

“Come on, mijo,” Juan said gruffly. “On your feet now.”

 

Bruno looked like Pedro, but Pedro could see nothing but Alma in Bruno’s determined, grim expression; the steel in his eyes, the clench of his jaw, the strength Bruno didn’t even understand he had.

 

On weak, shaking legs, Bruno made his way through the river and made his slow trek up the mountain, magic clearing his path for him, welcoming the lost Madrigal with open arms.

 

Pedro and Juan were with him every step of the way.






Now, as a storm raged, Pedro stood in the middle of the river, a little golden flame in the dark.

 

He’d been watching. He’d been listening.

 

He knew what Bruno saw.

 

“It might not be tonight, amigo,” Juan said, though it was clear he didn’t believe his own words. They’d seen that poor village destroyed; they knew how close the remaining Rojas’s were.

 

So Pedro waited as patiently as he could, watching for the little family; the family that should not have been little, that had never been little before.

 

Finally, just after ten o’clock at night, Ismael Rojas stumbled through the tree line, cradling his mother in his arms. Right behind him was Maria, his only remaining child and his only remaining nephew, Luka. Maria held Luka’s hand tightly and two small, soaked cloth bags of belongings. Luka was shaking in the heavy sheaths of rain and Pedro couldn’t tell if it was only rain on his face, or if tears were mixed in.

 

Señora Rojas was bone-pale, her side stained red with blood.

 

Thunder clapped, lightning struck, and the survivors cautiously walked through the river. Isamael would never know it, but his arm brushed Pedro’s. Maria and Luka would never know it, but Juan gently ushered them forward, his hands on their backs.

 

“T-through here!” Ismael had to shout over the wind and thunder, the pouring rain. “The pass looks easy!”

 

Maria eyed the mountain pass warily and she mumbled something like, “Too easy,” but obediently followed her father, holding her little cousin close.

 

Juan went with them, his friends.

 

Pedro stayed and waited.

 

He didn’t have to wait long.

 

Men on horseback broke through the trees and brushes, trampling the soaked flowers and kicking up mud. They looked around in frustration, gripping their weapons. 

 

Forty-five years ago, Pedro had been defenceless. He’d pushed his wife and daughters ahead of him, screaming for Alma to run. He’d made one last, desperate bid to shield his son as the machete came down on them. 

 

He wasn’t defenceless now.

 

Pedro reached out and pulled on the magic with all his might. Their Miracle, flickering but healing, just like their family. Alma prayed to the Miracle and Pedro for help, just as Pedro prayed to the Miracle and his family now.

 

Help me.

 

He glowed brighter than ever, more than a flame; he was the sun itself, magic flowing around him in a rush, just like the river.

 

The men’s horses whinnied and reared in a panic, sensing danger. Combined with the storm, the poor animals were quickly in a frenzy.

 

The men, the monsters in human skin, were thrown to the ground. Two of them fell directly into the river.

 

The horses fled.

 

“For fuck’s sake!” their leader shouted, pushing himself to his feet. “Useless beasts!”

 

One man rubbed his sore shoulder, wincing. “Let’s head back,” he said. “We can’t catch up with those rats on foot.”

 

The leader’s eyes narrowed; he took simple common sense as a challenge. “We can,” he snapped. “And we will. They can’t have gone far, not with that old woman and not in this weather.”

 

As soon as all the men had even one foot each in the river, Pedro smiled.

 

Sorry boys, but you’re in my territory now.

 

And you will never lay a finger on my family.

 

Pedro let the magic go in a wave. Gold light burst out from around him, like it had from the candle so long ago. Sparks flew through the air and he saw the men stop, baffled and afraid.

 

They saw the light too.

 

And it wasn’t the only wave to come upon them.

 

The river swelled, a wave of water rising higher and higher, nearly black. It rose like a serpent seeking its prey.

 

It was over in seconds: one man crossed himself, another swore loudly and another tried to stumble back onto the riverbank and tripped over a rock, landing on his back in the water.

 

The leader only gaped in stunned disbelief as the wave rose as high as the tree tops.

 

The wave crashed down, washing the men away. Their shouts were soon lost among the storm. Streaks of gold light shot through the water, urging it on faster, stronger, go now, go, go, go.

 

And then they were gone.

 

The storm raged on and Encanto, and Pedro’s wonderful, beautiful family were still safe.

 

And the Rojas family were safe now too.

 

The light faded back to its usual candle-like glow and the river calmed…Well, it calmed as much as it could in a storm. 

 

Pedro allowed himself to calm with it.

 

Keep breathing, he thought to the Rojas family. Just keep breathing. We’ll make sure you get there safely.

 

Alma once swore to always help those around her and Pedro made promises of his own. He would watch his family, he would always be with them; he would guide and help anyone who needed a home to the Encanto. 

 

That promise obviously extended to his family’s friends.

 

Nearly there now, Pedro thought, watching as the exhausted Rojas family stumbled their way to the new wall and gate. You’ll be alright now.

 

With that, he returned to watching his family.

 

“What do you think?” Juan asked him, appearing at his side. “Will Julieta be able to heal her?”

 

Pedro couldn’t help his proud smile.

 

“Mi amigo,” he said. “Mi hermano. You know our familia can do anything.”

Notes:

One simple rule: don't mess with Pedro's family

Pedro and Juan are best friends now, it simply had to happen. I love them so much 😭💕

Next up: the Rojas family arrive in the Encanto 👀👀

(Also, for any fellow Stranger Things fans, I've started a very Eddie-centric fanfic!)

Chapter 54: Though Hope Is Frail (It's Hard To Kill)

Summary:

The Rojas family reach the Encanto at last. The last thing they expect to see is their supposedly-dead neighbour, Bruno. After everything they've been through, a familiar face is a relief.

Notes:

First update of the new year! Hope everyone had a good holiday 💕

In which the Rojas family finally reach the Encanto. They've got one hell of a crazy story to listen to (and we finally get Senora Rojas's first name!)

Songs I listened to while writing:
When You Believe, from The Prince of Egypt
Welly Boots, by The Amazing Devil
Inkpot Gods, by The Amazing Devil
Blossoms, by The Amazing Devil
Spanish Sahara, by Foals
Atlantis, by Seafret
One More Light, by Linkin Park
Saturn, by Sleeping At Last

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“In this time of fear, when prayer so often proves in vain, hope seems like the summer bird too swiftly flown away. Yet now I'm standing here, with heart’s so full, I can't explain. Seeking faith and speaking words I never thought I'd say. There can be miracles, when you believe. Though hope is frail, it's hard to kill. Who knows what miracles you can achieve? When you believe, somehow you will. You will when you believe.” - When You Believe, The Prince of Egypt




Ismael Rojas was a man used to prayer; praying for the health and safety of his family and friends, praying he would not be led into sin…Small prayers, big prayers, seeking guidance and peace in times of turmoil.

 

He was not used to frantically praying for what remained of his family’s lives as they struggled through a storm.

 

He held his mother as tightly as he dared, given her injuries. Carmelia Rojas had always been a strong woman, a pillar in Ismael’s life; he’d been taller than her since he was fifteen, but he wasn’t used to thinking of her as small. But now? Now his mother was heartbreakingly small and frail. Her wound still bled sluggishly and she was white as a sheet, utterly still and silent in his arms. Ismael counted her breaths, timed them, terrified her heart would stop at any moment.

 

“Hold on, Mamí,” he whispered with one more prayer; a prayer that she could hear him and would feel comforted. 

 

Just behind him, Maria held Luka’s hand as they staggered along, all of them too tired to continue running. 

 

The Rojas family had been a big one. Ismael had three older sisters and two younger ones. He had two children; Delmara and Maria. He’d had so many nieces and nephews, including young Luka, only twelve-years-old…And now they were all gone. His poor wife, his lovely Aldene, was gone. Delmara was gone. His sisters, his cuñados, his nieces and nephews…They were all gone. All dead in such awful ways. So many of his friends were dead or missing, his village had been burned to the ground.

 

Ismael, Maria, his mamá and Luka had settled in another village, jumping at anything that went bump in the night, struggling to settle and find some peace.

 

Then their new village was attacked, burned to ashes again. 

 

He couldn’t lose anyone else. He just couldn’t. 

 

Ismael glanced back at Maria and Luka despairingly. Maria was only twenty-one, Luka was only twelve; they were far too young to be going through this. He kept asking them to be brave, but how much longer could he ask that of them?

 

The rain continued to pour down on them, icy cold and harsh. The wind was deafening, piercing, echoing through the mountain pass like screams. The lightning was blinding, the thunder rattled his bones. All the while, he counted his mamá’s breaths. Mud stuck to his shoes and the hems of his trousers; he couldn’t stop shivering and he flinched when Luka stumbled, sighing in relief when Maria kept her tight grip on him.

 

Please, Ismael prayed as he forced himself to keep walking. Please let us find shelter. Let us find a doctor for Mamí. Let my daughter and nephew be safe. 

 

Perhaps God was listening after all; they’d been walking for perhaps twenty minutes when they, impossibly, came upon a wall. It was a massive stone wall with a thick wooden gate; a clear seven feet high and…Was that a look-out tower on the wall? Ismael could see golden candlelight through the windows. It was the sort of wall he’d associate with a castle; a battlement, an obvious defence.

 

“Help!” he called, desperately hoping these would be friends and not foes. “Please, we need help!”

 

The men must have been watching, there was no way they heard him over the storm. Two men, young, tall and strong, burst out of the look-out tower and gaped down at him. One turned around and bellowed; “Open the gate!” He said something Ismael didn’t understand; “It’s Señor Madrigal’s friends!”

 

Ismael did not know anyone named Madrigal. The men were mistaken; they must have Ismael and his family mixed up with some other group, someone they were expecting. At some point, he’d have to explain they had it wrong.

 

For now, he wept in relief as the gate opened and more young men ushered them over the threshold. 






Things did not get any less confusing. One man helped rebind Carmelia’s wound; he hissed and shook his head when he saw how deep and inflamed it was.

 

“Don’t worry, Señor,” he said all the same. “Julieta will help her in no time.” 

 

Their doctor, Ismael assumed. But how much could a doctor from the middle of nowhere truly help? But the man sounded so confident, so at ease, that Ismael nodded. This Julieta must be good at her job to inspire such confidence. 

 

The other men fussed over Luka, Ismael and Maria, bringing them thick warm blankets and pressing food into their hands as they helped them into a horse-drawn cart. The path ahead was wide and clear, with big stones lining the sides of the path. The horse whinnied uneasily at the storm but they were soon on their way down the mountain.

 

“Welcome to the Encanto,” their driver said with a gap-toothed grin. “You’ll be safe here, don’t you worry. The Madrigals will sort it all out, they’ll know just what to do.”

 

There was that name again: Madrigal. They must have been in charge of the village. And, for some reason, the men had mistaken the Rojas’s for people who knew one of them.

 

“I…I must admit,” Ismael said uneasily. “I do not know this Señor Madrigal your friends mentioned. There must have been some confusion; they thought we were his friends.”

 

The driver’s grin only widened. “We’ll see about that,” he said and urged the horse on as fast as he dared, given the terrible weather and steep trail.

 

All the while, Ismael clung to his mother and prayed as he never had before. Luka pulled his blanket right up over his head, shuddering. Maria looked ahead with dead eyes and didn’t say a word.






Alma was woken by a loud knocking on the door and a shout of, “Doña Madrigal! It is the Rojas family!”

 

Oh goodness! Alma thought, hurrying from her bed. She tightly tied her thick bathrobe around herself, shoved her feet into her slippers and tied her hair into a quick bun at the nape of her neck, as she marched from her room and into the tempest.

 

Her entire family was woken by the noise; she wondered how many of them had truly been sleeping. God knew the storm alone was enough to keep someone awake.

 

Isabela hurried to Dolores’s door and barged right in, quickly pulling her cousin out to join them all. The poor girl had done her best, but had finally gone to bed at Félix and Pepa’s urging around midnight, yawning and dead on her feet. Now Dolores held Isabela’s hand, eyes wide. She looked at the door, caught Alma’s eyes and widened her own; her expression was taut with worry.

 

Bruno, Julieta and Pepa stood together, huddled with Agustín and Félix. Bruno looked stunned, as if he couldn’t quite believe his vision was coming to pass.

 

Casita opened the doors and there was the infamous Rojas family, along with one of the men who’d drawn tonight’s guard duty.

 

The man removed his soaked hat and inclined his head. “Doña Alma,” he said. “It is the Rojas family. As Señor Madrigal saw, they are in dire need of help.”

 

“Then let us not dally further,” Alma said, ushering the four Rojas’s inside. The man was older than her triplets; somewhere in his fifties in Alma had to guess. There was a young man and a child, and as for the elderly woman…Alma found it hard to believe the poor woman was still breathing. All four of them seemed dazed; exhausted and unsteady on their feet.

 

“Come, come,” Alma said and her family jumped into action. Julieta ran to the kitchen for food (she’d mentioned preparing a soup) while Félix and Agustín helped Ismael and Señora Rojas towards the guest room. Isabela, Luisa and Dolores ran for blankets and dry clothes.

 

The little boy (hadn’t Bruno said his name was Luka?) looked at the front doors with glazed eyes.

 

“They opened by themselves,” he mumbled.

 

“Hm? What was that, baby?” the young woman asked.

 

“The doors…” He gestured limply, shaking his head. The young woman looked increasingly concerned, brushing his hair off his forehead to check his temperature. 

 

Mirabel took the boy’s hand. “Hey, don’t worry,” she said brightly. “We’ll explain everything. Or, uh, Abuela will.” She looked between the child and young woman solemnly. “Abuela knows everything.”

 

“Mirabel, mariposa, that is simply untrue,” Alma said fondly. Despite the circumstances, she couldn't help but smile. She gestured the young woman and Luka forward. Just behind her, Señor Rojas was settling his mother on the bed as Félix lit the lamp and Agustín fluffed the pillow. “Now, how about we-?”

 

The young woman cut her off with a stunned, “Bruno?”

 

Bruno was halfway down the stairs with Pepa and Camilo. Camilo clung to Pepa and Pepa had her arm around Bruno’s shoulders; her daughter squinted up at the sky, no doubt trying to urge the storm to calm down. Truthfully, Alma didn’t notice much of a change. If Pepa wanted such weather to stop, she’d need to be calm and happy. Alma sincerely doubted anyone was calm and happy right now (except perhaps baby Tonito, still fast asleep in his parents' room.)

 

Bruno raised his hand in a limp wave with a shy smile.

 

“Hola, Maria,” he said.

 

Maria started to sob. They were loud, frightened, heartbroken sobs; the sort of sob Alma knew very well. 

 

After all, she’d made those very same noises herself. It was the noise of a woman who'd reached the end of her rope. The sounds of a young girl who finally felt safe enough to break apart.

 

“Ay, niña,” Alma sighed sadly. Luka seemed frightened by the tears, watching Maria with big eyes; he reached out uncertainly, his eyes darting to Señor and Señora Rojas. Julieta ran across the courtyard with a tray of warm soup; Dolores, Isabela and Luisa returned. Félix wrapped a blanket around Señor Rojas’s trembling shoulders and Agustín helped Julieta prop Señora Rojas up. All around them was movement and chaos, frantic attempts to make everyone comfortable, but Maria only had eyes for Bruno and ran to him.

 

Bruno practically leaped to catch her. The poor girl clung to him, sobbing her heart out.

 

“Gracias a Dios,” she cried. Behind Alma, Ismael rose on shaking legs, standing in the doorway to gawp. Luka looked more stunned than ever.

 

“Oh,” Señor Rojas breathed. “God be praised…” He crossed himself and his hand shook even more than his legs. He swallowed heavily, tears in his eyes and said, “Abuelo Juan would be so happy to see this.” He looked at Julieta with his mother and his brow furrowed; some awareness seemed to break through his shock.

 

“Is this the doctor those men were speaking of?” he asked. “If not, could we see her now?”

 

“That is my Julieta,” Alma said, placing a hand on the man’s shoulder. He seemed even more bewildered as Julieta gently coaxed a spoonful of soup into Señora Rojas’s too-pale mouth.

 

“It is a long story, Señor Rojas,” Alma said. “But before I tell it, you’d better get dry and warm.” She gave his shoulder what she hoped was a reassuring squeeze. “But I can promise you this: you and your familia are safe here.”

Notes:

They're here! They're safe! Mostly. Poor Senora Rojas still needs healing

Next up: the Rojas family are given the story of the Encanto and the Madrigals. Julieta tries to help Senora Rojas

Chapter 55: Eye of The Storm

Summary:

The Madrigals welcome the Rojas family and tell their stories. Julieta tries to heal Señora Rojas with mixed results.

Notes:

We're back, baby! Not much of an action chapter, I'm afraid. In which the Rojas family has a few bombshells dropped on them and Julieta does her best to help

Songs I listened to while writing:
Stay I Pray You, from Anastasia: Broadway
Human, by Christina Perri
Rise Up, by Imagine Dragons
One More Light, by Linkin Park
You Will Be Found, from Dear Evan Hansen

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“How can I desert you? How to tell you why? Coachman, hold the horses; stay, I pray you. Let me have a moment, let me say goodbye to bridge and river, forest and waterfall; orchard, sea and sky. Harsh, and sweet, and bitter to leave it all. I'll bless my homeland till I die.” - Stay I Pray You, Anastasia: Broadway




They brought the Rojas family into the living room. Félix had laid out blankets and pillows on the sofas, but Luisa also volunteered her room if Maria wished to sleep elsewhere and Camilo and Mirabel both offered to share with Luka. 

 

They were good kids and Bruno sat with an arm around Mirabel and Camilo as Alma gently spoke to Ismael, Maria and Luka. 

 

It was the same speech she’d given him; “You don’t need to worry; you are safe here. You will not come to harm. I am Alma Madrigal, leader of this village. I promise you will be taken care of. We look after each other here.” 

 

“I didn’t know there was a village so far out here,” Maria said. She kept looking at Bruno and, each time, he tried to give her an encouraging smile. 

 

Alma’s wry smirk had an edge of amusement to it. “We are hard to find,” she said. 

 

“And your daughter is a doctor?” Ismael asked.

 

“My Julieta,” Alma said proudly. “My eldest. And…Not quite. It is a long story, Señor. Please let me explain and then ask as many questions as you need. I understand it will be…Hard to believe.”

 

Understatement, Bruno thought, shaking his head. God knew he’d been left reeling in disbelief. He’d found it hard to swallow and he’d been having green dreams since he was five. How would four perfectly normal people take it?

 

As Alma explained the Miracle, Ismael stared at her with his mouth hanging open. He’d always been such a mannerly, put-together sort of person that the sight of him openly gawping was a surprise. Bruno had never known Ismael Rojas to gawp a day in his life. 

 

Then again, poor Ismael could hardly be blamed for forgetting his manners.

 

“Dios mio,” Maria breathed. 

 

“Whoa,” Luka said, eyes popping.

 

“I can shape-shift!” Camilo said proudly. To demonstrate, he turned into a copy of Mirabel, then of Luka and back to himself. Luka let out a startled laugh, clapping like it was a show. Camilo beamed proudly; mission accomplished, Luka was smiling.

 

“This is Pepa, my middle child,” Alma said, gesturing to Pepa. “Her mood changes the weather.”

 

Maria, Luka and Ismael glanced at the storm outside. Pepa waved a dismissive hand.

 

“Nope,” she said. “That’s all natural, not me. Sometimes you’ve gotta let nature take its course.”

 

“Julieta will do all she can to help your mother,” Alma told Ismael, reaching across the coffee table to pat his hand. “I can promise you that. As for the rest of my family, we will be on hand to help as well. To help Julieta and your mother, and the three of you as well. Three months ago, new houses were completed and a few remain unclaimed. We can help you choose one.”

 

“You…You’re just giving us a house?” Maria asked.

 

“That’s what I said,” Bruno snorted.

 

Ismael shot him a small smile. “Bruno, amigo…I am so grateful to see you alive. It is a blessing to see a friendly face.”

 

Maria tilted her head. “But if you were given a home in the village, why are you here?”

 

“Ah, that is simple,” Alma said. Her smile was undeniably mischievous now. She looked at Bruno and raised an eyebrow as if to say, Shall I? 

 

Bruno nodded and she turned back to the three Rojas’s, her smile growing as she gestured to Bruno.

 

“I believe you’re well acquainted with my youngest, Bruno.”

 

Mirabel muffled her giggle against Bruno’s shoulder. 

 

“Ta-da,” Isabela said dryly.

 

Maria, Luka and Ismael continued to stare in stunned silence.

 

“...Are you okay?” Bruno asked.

 

“What!?” Maria cried.

 

“You have a mamá?” Luka asked with a grin.

 

“Dios mio,” Ismael breathed. He blessed himself and rested his hand on his heart. “You…You’re truly…”

 

“Yeah.” Bruno smiled shyly, making awkward jazz hands. “Surprise. I, uh…Ended up here a little over three months ago. When…” He cleared his throat. “Well, you know.”

 

They nodded, wincing.

 

“None of us realised at first,” Mirabel chirped. “Except Casita.”

 

The floor tiles rippled proudly. Maria jumped, staring at the floor.

 

“Show off,” Camilo muttered, sticking his tongue out.

 

“But then Mirabel figured it out,” Luisa said proudly, ruffling her little sister’s hair.

 

“So I went to tell Mamá with Dolores,” Mirabel said, pointing to her cousin. Dolores waved shyly. “Only, Tio Bruno was with Tia Pepa when she had Antonio- he’s upstairs asleep- and he let her borrow his baby blanket.”

 

“Which matches mine and Juli’s,” Pepa said fondly. “Mamá recognised it right away.”

 

“It’s a miracle,” Ismael said. 

 

“More like a whole bunch of miracles,” Bruno said, rubbing his neck. 

 

“Wait…Those men at the gate…They knew to expect us,” Maria said slowly, puzzling it out. “Is that something to do with the magic as well?”

 

“Well, yeah,” Bruno said sheepishly. “Um…”

 

“Tio Bruno’s got a Gift too,” Camilo jumped in. “He can see the future.”

 

“Cool,” Luka said, smiling again.

 

“Yeah, so I kind of saw you guys coming and a whole bunch of other stuff- stuff from around the world, it won’t even affect us, I’m not even sure when most of it will happen. Some of it was really far into the future. A lot of crazy stuff. So we knew you’d be here during a storm, and Pepa’s magic can’t reach beyond the mountains, so we knew it wasn’t a storm she was making-”

 

“Mijo, mijo, slow down,” Alma urged. “Deep breaths.”

 

Bruno took a deep breath and held it, crossing his fingers. Alma patted his shoulder as he breathed out.

 

“Sorry,” he mumbled.

 

Ismael smiled. “Same as always, Bruno,” he said. “You haven’t changed.”

 

“No,” Bruno said, shaking his head. “I have.”






Julieta bit her lip nervously as Señora Rojas’s wound sealed shut. Agustín shuddered, but Julieta examined it closely. There was a pink scar left behind, a testament to just how much damage had been done.

 

The poor woman, Julieta thought sadly. She urged another spoonful of soup down her throat (Carmelia, hadn’t her son said her name was Carmelia?) and watched anxiously for more changes. Carmelia Rojas shivered with a burning fever; she was bone pale and looked so frail.

 

This would take time. An infection had set in, the wound was so deep, it was a wonder she’d survived a journey through the jungle in this state.

 

“This won’t be easy,” Julieta said quietly. Sometimes even magic took time. 

 

She remembered the young farmhand who had been badly trampled by a startled horse and, even with her healing food, took two weeks to fully recover. Even with her healing they’d needed Doctor Ortega’s help; the poor boy had been on death’s door. Julieta remembered the old woman who shattered her hip so badly that she needed to stay in Casita over the weekend, where Julieta could properly care for her.

 

And now this. Carmelia Rojas, slashed with a sword, practically down to the bone. It was a miracle she hadn’t bled out. It was a miracle the infection hadn’t killed her.

 

“What do you need, amor?” Agustín asked, rubbing her back.

 

“Time,” Julieta sighed. “Time and more food. She’s very sick.”






When Julieta walked in with Agustín, Ismael stood up eagerly, looking at her with hopeful eyes.

 

“It will take time,” Julieta said regretfully. “For now she is resting, but her fever is burning strongly. I’ve healed the wound, but there’s still an infection to contend with.” She sighed softly and added, “I’m sorry. I wish I could take it all away instantly. But I promise, I won’t stop until she is well.”

 

Ismael went to Julieta and shook her hand, tears in his eyes.

 

“God bless you,” he said, choked with emotion. Bruno looked at him and thought the poor man deserved to have a good cry. Ismael needed peace and quiet to break down and let it all out.

 

Speaking from experience. Everyone needed to cry sometimes and certainly after so much trauma.

 

“As for the rest of you…” Julieta looked between Ismael, Maria and Luka. “Let’s get you something to eat as well, sí?”

 

“And we’ve got clothes here,” Isabela said, nodding to the folded pile of clothing and blankets she’d left by Alma’s favourite armchair.

 

Maria sniffled, wiping her eyes. Luka leaned against her, pale as a ghost, but with a spark of hope returning to his eyes.

 

Ismael nodded, a jerky little movement of his head.

 

“Thank you,” he said, and burst into tears.

Notes:

It won't all be smooth sailing 😬

Next up, more questions and answers between the families. As Julieta struggles to heal Señora Rojas, Bruno has an idea...

Chapter 56: Step Into Your Power

Summary:

As a friend's life hangs in the balance, Bruno does something he swore to never do again.

He needs answers. Answers only the future can provide...

Notes:

✨I'm alive✨

Anyone who follows me on tumblr will already know I've got a few on-going health issues right now, which is taking up pretty much all my time and energy. However, I'm (tentatively) booked for surgery sometime this summer, so fingers crossed!

In the meantime, we're back with the Not So Anastasia AU! Only two chapters left after this 😭

In which Bruno braves the future

Songs I listened to while writing:
Rhaenyra's Coronation, from House of The Dragon
The Green Dress, from House of The Dragon
Show Yourself, from Frozen 2
Battle Scars, by Paradise Fears
Pieces, by RED
The Show Must Go On, by Queen
Human, by Dodie Clarke
I Lived, by OneRepublic
Bird Set Free/Unstoppable, by Roveena
Better Days, by Dermot Kennedy

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Come, my darling, homeward bound. I am found! Show yourself, step into your power. Grow yourself into something new. You are the one you've been waiting for all of your life. (All of my life!) Oh, show yourself.” - Show Yourself, Frozen 2




A week passed and Carmelia Rojas did not improve much at all. She spent most of her time unconscious (Julieta didn’t feel right calling it ‘sleep.’ Sleep would imply rest, and the poor woman plainly wasn’t resting), and when she was awake she was delirious. Utterly lost to her fever and infection. 

 

She’d been cut right down to the bone. It took days of Julieta forcing soup and broth down her throat for that wound to heal. The infection remained; it had set in before she’d even reached the Encanto and now it raged.

 

In that week, they got the rest of the Rojas family settled. Félix and Agustín showed Maria, Ismael and Luka the available houses. Poor Ismael was so distracted by worry for his mother that, according to Félix, he barely seemed to take in his surroundings. In the end, Maria had to coax him five times for a response before he agreed to a house she’d selected.

 

Ismael spent the week sleeping on his mother’s floor. Maria and Luka camped out in the living room, both of them insisting they didn’t want to impose on anyone’s bedroom. 

 

Julieta focussed on Carmelia (though Bruno only ever called her Señora Rojas) and collected bits of information from her family: Maria took Luka to get enrolled at the school, aided by Alma. Camila and Mirabel insisted on showing Luka around the village and even Julieta felt like crying when they finally made the boy laugh.

 

Maria, it turned out, was a baker. If Julieta wasn’t so focussed on Carmelia, she’d have been delighted to trade notes with her. As it stood, Maria talked about finding a job at one of the small bakeries. She was told, again and again, to take her time to adjust; to rest and heal, but she was a stubborn young woman.

 

At the beginning of the second week, Maria, Pepa and Isabela went shopping, looking for furniture for the Rojas’s new home. They’d already gotten new clothes (and the trading system seemed to particularly baffle young Luka), but their new house needed to be furnished before they could move in. 

 

Ismael prayed by his mother’s bedside. Julieta fretted over the fever. Carmelia Rojas mumbled about fire and wept in pain, wept for her lost friends and family. Her eyes, glassy and too bright, stared up at the ceiling.

 

Julieta looked at her flushed face, her ragged breathing and the inflamed scar on her leg…And a small, dark part of her began to prepare for the worst.

 

Magic couldn’t solve everything, no matter how much she wished otherwise. If Julieta could fix everything, she’d have a village of immortals on her hands.

 

Carmelia Rojas had lost her home twice over. She’d lost the majority of her family. She’d been injured during the first flight, the one that brought Bruno to Encanto, and according to Ismael she’d had a limp ever since. Then there was the second attack, even more brutal than the first. The flight through the jungle, choking on smoke yet again. The slash from a machete, all the way down to her bone; the infection, after a day and night of wandering, not to mention getting caught in that awful storm.

 

Julieta had gotten to Bruno before any possible infections could seep in. He was only forty; he’d been frail, but not like this. Not like an ill, old woman on the verge of death.

 

Ismael continued to pray. He continued to thank Julieta daily.

 

She smiled, squeezed his hand, and wondered how long she had until she’d have to tell him.






Julieta was distracted. She’d been cleaning the same plate for nearly five minutes now.

 

“Julieta? Juli?” Bruno touched her shoulder and she nearly jumped right off her feet, eyes wide.

 

“Oh, hermanito,” she said with a deep sigh. “Hola. Sorry.”

 

“...You okay?”

 

She bit her lip, looking behind him, but there was no one else in the kitchen but them. Ismael had returned to Señora Rojas’s bedside. Camilo and Mirabel had coaxed Luka into a game of football, he could hear them whooping and hollering through the open window. Dolores and Isabela had dragged Luisa away, insisting on doing her hair and make-up (Luisa had looked thrilled), while Pepa took a nap with Antonio. Félix and Agustín said they wanted to try a new card game. Alma had taken Maria down to the village, to speak with one of the bakers.

 

“It’s…It’s Señora Rojas,” Julieta whispered. “Bruno, hermanito, she’s not getting any better. She’s not- she’s not worse, but nothing’s changing.” Her eyes filled with tears. She looked exhausted as she leaned against the counter. “I don’t know how else to help.”

 

His blood ran cold. Señora Rojas; stubborn as a mule, unflappable Señora Rojas. The woman who had no problem telling someone if she thought they were rude. The woman who doted on her grandchildren, looking at them all as if they were living treasures. One of Juan’s friends. Señora Rojas, who forever fussed over Bruno’s health, always reminding him to take it easy.

 

She had no idea he was okay now. Each time he’d been in her room, she hadn’t registered he was there. Ismael had held her hand, gently entreating her to, “See who’s come to visit, Mamá,” but there was no recognition in her gaze.

 

She was Bruno’s friend. One of the only ones he’d ever had. One of the only people who’d given a damn about him, for so long. 

 

She couldn’t really be dying, could she?

 

You know better than that, a tired voice said, in the back of his mind. Sooner or later, everyone dies.

 

The scars on his arms itched. He tightly folded his arms and resisted the old urge to scratch or pick at them. It wouldn’t do any good, he’d only feel worse after.

 

“I’ll help,” he said hoarsely. “I’ll help in any way I can.”

 

He couldn’t do much, of course. He was no doctor and he wasn’t a magical healer like his sister. But God help him, if he could at least make Señora Rojas comfortable he’d do it, and do it gladly. 

 

“Gracias,” Julieta said. She wiped at her eyes and pulled him into a quick hug. “Ay, Bruno, I’m sorry. I know she’s your friend.”

 

“Yeah,” Bruno mumbled against her shoulder. “She is.”






I’ll help. I’ll help in any way I can.

 

Feeling useless, he dabbed a cool wet cloth against Señora Rojas’s forehead. Julieta gently coaxed a spoonful of broth down her throat. He couldn’t see much of a difference.

 

Hours had passed since dinner. It was nearly ten o’clock now. Casita was still and silent, as quiet and tense as the rest of them.

 

Ismael had finally fallen into a restless sleep, curled up in the chair next to the bed. They’d have to wake him, move him to the mattress on the ground. His neck wouldn’t thank him for his position.

 

That could wait. They’d wake him later.

 

Señora Rojas’s eyes were in a half-open daze. She pressed her thin lips together, blinking heavily, slowly.

 

And then-

 

“Bruno?” she whispered. “What are you doing here, chico? You’re supposed to be dead.”

 

Julieta took a deep, shaking breath, her hand pressed over her mouth. Bruno had to swallow twice before he could force any words out.

 

“Nope,” he said. “I- I’m not. And neither are you.”

 

Her small hand clumsily patted at his arm.

 

“Good,” she whispered. “That’s good.”

 

She closed her eyes and slept. 

 

I’ll help. I’ll help in any way I can.

 

Bruno stared at her flushed face and it hit him, for the first time, how small she was. She’d never been a particularly tall woman, but now…Now she’d lost so much weight, her hair had more white in it than grey. Her face seemed sunken.

 

She’d always helped him.

 

He couldn’t save Juan. He couldn’t save her either. But God help him, he had to try.

 

As soon as Félix came to take over from him, Bruno marched to his mother’s room.

 

“Bruno?” Alma was wrapped in her night-robe, her hair in a long loose braid. “Bébé, what is it?” She took his hands and he realised he was shaking.

 

Behind her, the candle shone as bright as a star.

 

“Julieta needs to know what to do,” Bruno said past the lump in his throat. “And- and I- I need to know if Señora Rojas will be okay.”

 

Alma nodded, still holding his hands. Her expression was steady, though he could see the bewilderment in her eyes. She had no idea where he was going with this.

 

Perhaps he was going mad to even think about it, let alone suggest it. Every instinct, ingrained in him after so many years, screamed Bad idea, bad idea, TERRIBLE DANGEROUS IDEA!

 

“I need to know,” he repeated, his voice shaking. “Her family needs to know. Ismael’s driving himself to exhaustion. I…I…”

 

“Bruno, mijo…” Alma’s eyes widened in realisation.

 

“I want- I need to try,” Bruno said. “I want to try and…And see. If anything will change. If she’ll get better or worse, or-” He couldn’t say die. “So, uh…I’ll…I’ll need a vision for that.” He swallowed heavily and nervously met his mother’s gaze. “Will you help me?”

 

She looked stunned. After a pause, she nodded. She nodded again, more firmly, a determined expression on her face.

 

“Always,” she promised and kissed his cheek. 






Bruno hated this damned cave more than ever. Alma had brought the Miracle candle with her and even she looked uneasy. The candle shone brightly, much brighter than a normal candle, and its flame never wavered. 

 

It was freezing cold in here. The light from the candle cast harsh shadows on Alma’s face, making her look older and sharper. Bruno wondered how it made him look. He wondered if he really wanted to know.

 

He shivered, looking around the empty space, at the sand ringing the room. The sand had done…something before. It had helped. 

 

“I have an idea,” he said quietly and ran for a bucket. 

 

He gathered bucketfuls of sand with shaking hands and unsteady breaths. Alma set the candle down. Quietly, she said, “I’ll be right back, Brunito,” and hurried away. Before Bruno even had a chance to panic over being alone in here, Alma returned with a quilt, which she spread out in the centre of the sand circle.

 

She knelt down, primly spreading her bedrobe and nightgown around her. Bruno knelt across from her and sighed, looking around the cavernous space.

 

It really was so damn cold in here.

 

He hated it so much.

 

“Bruno.” Alma’s voice was soft, steady. “Mi amor, you don’t have to do this.”

 

He thought of Señora Rojas, wasting away downstairs. He thought of fifteen years of, “Take care of yourself,” and “Do let me know if you need anything.” 

 

He thought of Juan, dead on the ground.

 

“Yes,” Bruno said. “I do.”

 

Only, he had no idea how. He closed his eyes and tried to will the future to come; he tried to make everything turn green, but nothing happened. When he touched the sand, it flickered with flashes of green and shivered like it was about to rise, but it didn’t.

 

With a frustrated huff, he tried again. And again.

 

“Mijo…” Alma took his hand and the sand flared. A current of green ran through the whole circle; the sand rose as high as his stomach and fell again.

 

Whispers and cries echoed in his mind. His vision flashed green.

 

“Come on,” Bruno hissed. He glared at the sand, willing it to move. He grit his teeth and hit his forehead. Of course now, when he wanted to see something, the so-called Gift wouldn’t cooperate. “Come on, you owe me!”

 

It at least owed him this.

 

And then, inexplicably, he heard Mirabel; “You can do it, Tio Bruno!”

 

She was outside the cave, right outside the door. She knocked and cheerfully repeated, “You can do it!”

 

“You got this!” Camilo cried. 

 

“Deep breaths,” Isabela said. “Focus on what you want to happen.”

 

“Hm!” came Dolores’s voice. “It’s a part of you. It’s still there, even if it’s a little stubborn.”

 

He heard a gurgle and a little murmur; gracious, had they even brought Antonio with them? This had to be Dolores’s idea. Who else would have heard him go to Alma?

 

“You can do this,” Luisa said firmly. “You can do anything you want, Tio.”

 

Their voices were all slightly muffled by the heavy stone door, but unmistakable.

 

Bruno wasn’t sure if he wanted to laugh or cry. These crazy, wonderful, impossible kids…

 

Alma gently took both of his hands. Her eyes were teary, proud. 

 

“Of course you can do this, mijo,” she said. “We’re right here with you.”

 

“We love you!” Mirabel chirped.

 

Something in Bruno’s chest loosened. The fear dimmed. It was like a key in a lock, a puzzle piece slipping into place.

 

He controlled the magic, not the other way around. No one was going to hurt him if they saw his eyes glow. No one was going to make demands, or harm him, or threaten him.

 

He didn’t need to be afraid of it. What he needed was answers. 

 

Determination welled in his chest. Bruno held onto Alma’s hands and tried to steady his breathing. He closed his eyes and tried to focus.

 

You’re not alone, you’re not alone, you’re not alone.

 

Please, he thought. I just want to know if she’ll be okay.

 

Bruno opened his eyes. The world turned green, the sand rose higher and higher, spinning faster and faster, until he and Alma were encased in a dome of spinning sand, flashing with green images.

 

“Oh!” Alma gasped in awe. She looked all around her, never once letting go of his hands. “Oh!” she cried again, more sharply, and nodded towards an image hovering in the sand on their right. “Bruno, mijo, look!”

 

He looked and the image began to animate, turning clearer and clearer.





The Rojas family stood in the crowd as a little boy with a wild mop of curly hair, hand in hand with Mirabel, made his way towards a glowing door.

 

Ismael, Maria, Luka…And Carmelia, leaning on a cane.




Señora Rojas’s eyebrows rose as a young man kissed Maria’s hand before leaving.

 

“Well,” she said drily, with exaggerated disinterest. “I suppose he’ll do.”

 

“Abuelita!” Maria protested, laughing.




“Luka, you’re a smart boy,” Señora Rojas said. “What do you call those puffy fish that blow up?”

 

Luka’s eyebrows furrowed. He looked older, maybe fifteen. “I think they’re just called puffer-fish, Abuelita,” he said.

 

Señora Rojas looked at Ismael with a smirk. “Told you so, mijo,” she said.




And, finally, a simple scene. No words were exchanged. It was just Señora Rojas, arm in arm with Ismael, taking some shaky steps outside Casita. Her son looked at her with radiant eyes and a hopeful smile. Señora Rojas had a grimly determined look on her face, gripping a cane as she took one step, then another. Finally, she let go of her son’s arm and walked on her own.




It stopped. The green fled, the sand collapsed and Bruno sputtered as it crashed over him. Alma made a small, frustrated noise, wiping at her hair.

 

But it wasn’t entirely over. Something green still glowed between them.

 

It was an orb of green light. As Bruno watched, utterly lost, it changed: it spread out, forming a rectangle. It turned lighter and shapes began to appear inside it; Señora Rojas, walking with Ismael.

 

Maybe it was instinct. Maybe it was simply curiosity. Either way, when Bruno reached out to touch it, it hardened in his hands, forming a tablet of glowing green glass.

 

He was shivering as he held it on his lap, staring raptly at the image of Señora Rojas on the road to recovery. 

 

Warm hands cupped his face. Dazed, Bruno met Alma’s eyes. She was smiling.

 

“That’s my boy,” she said, brushing his hair out of his eyes. They were both covered in bits of sand. “I knew you could do it.”

 

Bruno went to answer, but-

 

“Can we come in now!?” Camilo suddenly shouted. “We’re dying out here!”

 

Luisa hushed him, but Bruno burst out laughing. Even Alma gave a fond chuckle.

 

“Sí!” he called. “Come in!”

 

The kids needed no further prompting. Luisa pushed the door open and they all ran in, tripping over each other in their haste. Mirabel practically leapt onto Bruno’s back, draped over him like a cloak as she gasped over the tablet in his hands.

 

Dolores held Antonio close, a beaming smile on her face. Camilo was babbling a mile a minute, tugging on Alma’s sleeve and demanding details. Luisa crouched down, hands over her mouth, her eyes wide as she stared at the tablet. Isabela kicked lightly at the sand, grinning at him.

 

“That,” she said. “Is pretty cool if you ask me.”

 

“It’s so cool!” Mirabel said, roughly shaking Bruno. “Tio, that’s brand new!”

 

“Yeah,” Bruno said softly, his trembling hand lightly brushing over the tablet. “Yeah, it is.”






Bruno marched into Señora Rojas’s sick room. Sand still stuck to his clothes, hair and skin. Alma had brushed the worst of the sand off herself, tutting and sighing all the while.

 

Ismael looked cartoonishly baffled; his eyes nearly popped out of his skull, his mouth dropped. 

 

“Goodness gracious,” he gasped, leaping to his feet. “What did you get yourselves into?”

 

“Mamá?” Julieta rose from her seat, eyes wide. “Brunito?” Her gaze landed on the tablet, clutched to Bruno’s chest. “...Brunito?” she repeated, more hushed. Next to her, Agustín’s mouth hung open as he took in their messy states.

 

Taking a deep breath, Bruno held the tablet out to Ismael.

 

“Remember how we said my magic didn’t work properly?” he asked.

 

“Yes,” Ismael said slowly. “You said it hurt you…”

 

“Well,” Bruno said. “Not this time.” He held the tablet out more insistently. “It worked.”

 

With shaking hands, Ismael took the tablet. He took one look at the image of his mother on the mend and sobbed, collapsing to his knees. He bent over the tablet, shielding it like it was something precious. He was near hysterics, shuddering as he cried, as all his fear and grief poured out of him.

 

“Ismael?” Uncertainly, Bruno laid his hand on Ismael’s shoulder. Instantly, Ismael’s arm whipped out, pulling Bruno into a rather awkward embrace. He sobbed against Bruno’s stomach and Bruno could only pat his back, trying not to tense up.

 

He looked back at Alma, Julieta and Agustín. Alma was smiling, chin up, expression as serene as always. Julieta blessed herself, sagging in relief. Agustín smiled giddily, his arm around Julieta’s waist.

 

All the while, Señora Rojas slept. And, maybe it was just Bruno’s imagination, but he liked to think her breathing sounded more easy now.

 

She’s going to be okay, Bruno told himself. As relief set in, the adrenaline washed away, leaving him exhausted in seconds. He felt light-headed. She’s going to be okay.

 

And I did it, Bruno thought, still reeling. It worked. I looked. 

 

I looked and nothing bad happened.

Notes:

He did it! Look at him go 💕

Next up, Senora Rojas continues to heal, Bruno spends some time with Mirabel and contemplates some of the other visions he's had

Chapter 57: Threads On Tapestries

Summary:

In which there's loose ends to tie up. Senora Rojas continues to heal and the Madrigals continue to find their way. Dolores has a confession to make.

Notes:

*kicks down the door* I LIVED, BITCH!

So, after all those damn health issues were FINALLY sorted out (recovery is going well!) it really felt like all my motivation was dead in the water. I just couldn't get into anything. But I'm finally feeling better and work is not as hectic, so I'm back! Can't believe there's only one more chapter to go after this

Thanks so much for sticking with me through all this chaos 💕

Songs I listened to while writing:
You're On Your Own Kid, by Taylor Swift
Through Heaven's Eyes, from The Prince of Egypt
Wings, by Birdy
From Now On, from The Greatest Showman
Long Live, by Taylor Swift

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“I looked around in a blood-soaked gown and I saw something they can't take away. ‘Cause there were pages turned with the bridges burned, everything you lose is a step you take. So make the friendship bracelets, take the moment and taste it. You've got no reason to be afraid.” - You’re On Your Own Kid, Taylor Swift




I looked and nothing bad happened.

 

And nothing bad continued to happen. In fact, things went quite well.

 

Within a week, Señora Rojas opened her eyes, clear of fever and certainly full of confusion.

 

“What…?” She blinked, gazing at Ismael, Maria and Luka. She gave Alma a truly baffled look and her eyes widened when she saw Bruno. “Oh,” she said. “Oh dear. I thought I was dreaming.”

 

“No, Mamí,” Ismael said, kissing her cheek. He wiped his eyes, giving her a shaky smile. “No, it wasn’t a dream. We’re safe.” He took her hand between both of his and held it against his heart. “We’re safe,” he repeated.

 

“Hola,” Alma said to Señora Rojas, inclining her head in respect. “My name is Alma Madrigal.” Her smile held a hint of mischief. “I believe you know my son, Bruno?”

 

Señora Rojas stared at her. She stared at Bruno. Feeling absurdly shy, he waved at her.

 

She gave a huff of laughter. Then she laughed again, more loudly and sincerely. “Now that’s a story I want to hear!” she declared. Despite Maria’s protests, she pushed herself up to sit properly, leaning against the headboard. 

 

“And you shall hear it,” Alma promised.

 

“One more thing, Mamá,” Ismael said delicately. “Well, two more things really. You see, the Madrigals-”

 

Casita chose that moment to clatter the floor tiles, sway the painting on the wall and swing the shutters open and shut, all in one wild dance. A greeting, an expression of happiness, a welcome.

 

“There’s that,” Ismael said sheepishly as Casita continued to dance. 

 

Señora Rojas was still as a statue. She still looked too small and whether she was so pale because of her long illness or from the sheer shock of Casita, Bruno couldn’t be sure.

 

He certainly remembered how stunned and disbelieving he’d been the first time Casita moved around him. He’d been terrified. 

 

“...What?” Señora Rojas asked, surprisingly flat. She looked like she expected them all to laugh at her, like it was a prank.

 

Julieta walked in carrying a tray. “Ay, Casita!” she scolded. “Don’t frighten the poor woman.” She gave Señora Rojas a relieved smile, eyes shining. “Hello,” she said. “I’m Julieta, Bruno’s sister.”

 

“...What?”

 

Alma sighed. “Casita,” she said and Casita reluctantly stopped. A tile by Alma’s foot gave one last sheepish shrug and went still.

 

“Oh,” Julieta said. “I thought you were explaining everything.”

 

“We were about to,” Alma said, giving the wall an accusing frown. Casita had the good sense to not react this time. “Then Casita decided to interrupt.”

 

“I’m sorry,” Señora Rojas said slowly. “I…Is it a ghost?”

 

“No,” Alma said. “But it is a long story.”

 

“It’s really cool, Abuelita,” Luka promised.

 

Señora Rojas’ eyebrows rose. “I have time,” she said drily.

 

Alma chuckled and sat at the end of the bed. “Ay, I suppose that’s true,” she said. “Well then. Allow me to explain, Señora.”






Another day passed. Several. Señora Rojas took her first shaking steps in Casita’s front garden, supported by her son. Maria and Julieta baked together and Maria had an interview in one of the local bakeries. She returned from the interview with a new spring in her step and a hopeful smile.

 

Camilo and Mirabel continued to insist on including Luka in their games. Agustín helped him with his homework when Ismael and Maria were too busy. Sometimes he followed Luisa and helped her catch the escaped donkeys. 

 

Señora Rojas continued to walk with a cane. From the glimpses he’d had of the future, Bruno knew she’d always need one now.

 

But she was walking. She was up and about, taking one slow step at a time, full of grim determination. She was still Señora Rojas, rising to any challenge with bull-headed stubbornness. 

 

It did not surprise him that she and Alma got along like a house on fire. 

 

He passed the kitchen one day to find the two old women laughing over tea and sandwiches. They seemed to be discussing how they met their husbands. 

 

“Oh bless Ferndando’s heart,” Señora Rojas was saying past her giggles. “He fell right into the fountain!”

 

Bruno smiled and kept going, patting Esma and Luz as they chittered on his shoulders. This time, there was nothing to worry about.






Dolores squeaked as Mariano came running to her.

 

“Dolores!” he called. Oh, he looked so lovely with the sun shining in his hair, with that bright grin and that beautiful eyes.

 

“Hola, Mariano,” she managed to say. “I- um. How are you?”

 

“Very well, gracias,” he said. “I just wanted to check in on you all. Are your guests doing better?”

 

“Oh, yes!” Dolores couldn’t help but smile. “Señora Rojas is finally out of bed and starting to walk again.”

 

“That’s good.” Mariano looked at the ground, oddly shy. “And- and how are you?”

 

“Me?”

 

Mariano nodded, smiling at her.

 

“I…I’m doing okay,” she said. “It’s- well, it’s been a wild few months, hasn’t it?” She giggled a little, clasping her hands. “My uncle comes home, my brother’s born, the mountains open and more newcomers arrive…” She shrugged a little helplessly, wondering how on earth to find the right words to describe everything that had happened. Wild didn’t truly do it justice. And then there were all the changes to her family: Abuela was more relaxed, the happiest Dolores had ever seen her. Mirabel was much more confident. Isabela felt like a whole new person, wild and free and joyful. Luisa finally took some time for herself. And Dolores…She felt listened to. Truly heard for the first time in a long while. 

 

They’d nearly fallen apart. Nearly. In the end, they’d all hung on. They were all doing better. 

 

For the first time, Dolores felt like everyone in her family were equals, rather than marching to the beat of Abuela’s drum. 

 

“Wild,” Mariano agreed. 

 

For a moment, there was silence. They both smiled a little shyly. 

 

“Well, um…I’ll see you later?” Dolores tried not to wince at how nervous she sounded.

 

Mariano nodded. Dolores nodded.

 

“Bye,” she blurted out, hurrying away.

 

“Bye,” Mariano echoed, just a murmur that no one else would have heard. Dolores kept her eyes on the ground as she walked, certain she was blushing terribly.

 

But, as she walked, she remembered-




“...Are you gonna talk to Mariano?” Bruno asked.

 

 Dolores squeaked again, louder now, she was blushing and she knew it. She stared at the unlit fireplace and tried to think of something clever to say.

 

Nothing came to mind. So she retreated.

 

“Oh, look at that,” she said. “I hear Mamá calling me!” She jumped up, handing Esma and Luz to him.




And here she was, retreating again.

 

Isabela had turned Mariano down weeks ago. She hadn’t heard him lament about her in so long. 

 

He was kind. Above all, he was so kind. Even if he turned her down, he’d be sweet about it.

 

The worst he can do is say no, Dolores told herself. She stopped, fists clenched. She took a deep breath and closed her eyes. It’s not the end of the world. I can do this.

 

She spun around and ran back to Mariano.

 

“Mariano!” she cried, as loud as she dared. “Mariano!”

 

There were so many people talking, all throughout the village. Cats meowed and dogs barked. The donkeys escaped again. Luisa swore and ran after them. Abuela was introducing Señora Rojas to Señora Guzman. She could hear the river’s current. Birds chirped and sang. Mirabel and Agustín were showing Isabela how to embroider.

 

And above it all, she could hear Mariano’s heart-beat; that steady rhythm she knew so well.

 

He stopped and turned back, eyes full of surprise.

 

Dolores stumbled to a halt in front of him, hands fisted in her skirt.

 

“Dolores?”

 

“You talk so loud!” she blurted out, blushing to the tips of her ears. 

 

“Oh, um…I’m sorry?”

 

“No, it’s a good thing,” she said. Mariano looked stunned. Dolores continued in a rush. Now that she’d started, she couldn’t seem to stop. “You take care of your mother and abuela and you make them both so proud, they love you so much. You write your own poetry every night before you go to sleep and I love it.”

 

“You-” He was starting to blush. “You hear all that?”

 

“I hear you,” Dolores said. She held his gaze and straightened up. “I always hear you.”

 

Mariano stared at her. Dolores refused to look away.

 

Almost shyly, he took her hand.

 

“I see you,” he said quietly, with a sweet smile. Dolores grinned, nearly breathless with relief and sudden glee.

 

He saw her. He heard her.

 

Mariano gave a breathless little huff of laughter.

 

“Um…Would you like to get lunch together?” he asked.

 

“That sounds great,” Dolores said. 

 

Hand in hand, they went in search of a café. 






“Tio? Tio!” Camilo’s voice brought Bruno back to reality. He blinked the green away, dazed.

 

“See something cool?” Camilo asked.

 

What had he seen? Dolores being walked down the aisle by Félix…Towards a smitten Mariano Guzman.

 

“Yeah,” Bruno said with a grin. “Yeah, it was pretty cool.” He held up a hand and cut Camilo off before he could ask; “But it’s a surprise, okay?”

 

“Uuuuggghhh.” Camilo scowled but was distracted as soon as they walked into the kitchen. He immediately ran for snacks. Isabela, Mirabel and Agustín were all sitting at the table, surrounded by fabrics and different coloured threads. Isabela was embroidering with a look of intense concentration on her face. Bruno could just about hear her swearing quietly. 

 

“Language,” Agustín chided, but nodded in approval at her work. 

 

“Better,” Mirabel said, as imperious as Alma. “Much better.”

 

Agustín caught Bruno’s eye and grinned. “Kids,” he said.

 

“Better you than me,” Bruno said, snatching a cookie from Camilo as he went to run off again. 

 

“Hey!” Camilo protested.

 

“You took six, hush.” 






It was a good day, made all the better when Dolores announced she’d gone on a date with Mariano at dinner and they were planning to meet up again tomorrow. Pepa and Félix were immediately asking questions. Félix rather dramatically wailed about his baby girl being all grown up. Bruno couldn’t quite tell if he was joking or not.

 

“Boys are gross,” Mirabel said with a dismissive shake of her head.

 

“We are not!” Camilo scowled.

 

“You’re double gross.”

 

Antonio cooed, waving his tiny fists. “See?” Mirabel said. “Tonito agrees with me.”

 

“Nuh-uh,” Camilo said, shaking his head so harshly his curls flew about. “He’s agreeing with me!

 

Kids were ridiculous. Adorable, but ridiculous.

 

“Oh, can I do your make-up?” Isabela was eagerly asking Dolores. “He’s gonna drop dead, I promise!”

 

“Isn’t that the opposite of what she’d want?” Luisa asked.

 

“Figure of speech, Lu.”

 

“Who’s Mariano?” Maria asked. She blinked, flinching back in her seat as she was immediately bombarded by the Madrigals kids all trying to explain who he was. Opinions differed on if he was nice, dumb, handsome or sappy. 

 

Mirabel said he was, “A big dumb hunk.”

 

Dolores threw her napkin at her.

 

Alma watched it all and shook her head. “Ay, this family,” she said, exhausted and fond. Her gaze slid to Bruno. “I don’t suppose you saw this coming, mijo?” she asked.

 

“I’m sayin’ nothing.” Bruno held his hands up in surrender. Alma only raised an eyebrow. Her attention returned to the chaos before them. Isabela was rearranging Dolores’s hair in various styles while Pepa voiced her opinions on which hairstyles looked prettiest. Félix was still loudly carrying on about his heartbreak. Camilo, already bored, was showing Luka how to balance a spoon on his nose. Agustín fumbled and nearly knocked over his water; Julieta leaped to catch it on time, laughing at him. Luisa was trying to make Mirabel stop calling Mariano dumb, much to Maria’s bafflement. Ismael patted Félix on the back, chuckling at the theatrics. Señora Rojas, still too pale, ate slowly but watched everyone with a smile. 

 

“Brunito?”

 

“Hm?”

 

“I was thinking,” Alma said. “It’s about time we update the mural. We still need to include you and Tonito.”

 

Goodness, Bruno had completely forgotten about the mural. He’d need to add himself and Antonio; he certainly needed to update Isabela’s appearance. Honestly, with everything that had happened he just hadn’t thought about it. But as soon as she said it, an old idea came back to him.

 

“About that,” he said. “I was wondering…Could I add Papá too?”

 

For a terrible moment, he thought Alma was about to cry. Indeed, her eyes watered and her lip trembled…But she took his hand and nodded.

 

“Sí,” his mamá said softly. “That’s a lovely idea.”

 

 

 

In the courtyard, hidden under that rug placed in a panic...The crack healed.

Notes:

Everyone's right where they should be 💕

Next up, the epilogue! It's time for a certain hombrecito's Ceremony 👀👀

Chapter 58: The End Of A Decade (The Start Of An Age)

Summary:

Los Madrigals. It's not perfect, but no one ever said it needed to be.

Notes:

I straight up cried writing this, I'm not ready for it to end 😭 Thank you all so, so much for sticking with me through this story! It's been a wild ride 💕

One last time: let's go!

Songs I listened to while writing:
Proud Corazón, from Coco
All Of You, from Encanto
Long Live, by Taylor Swift
Finale, from Anastasia: Broadway
Once Upon A December, from Anastasia
Flares, by The Script
Red Ribbon, by Madilyn Bailey
Right Here, by Ashes Remain
To Build A Home, by The Cinematic Orchestra
Pompeii MMXXII, by Bastille and Hans Zimmer
At The Beginning, from Anastasia
Fix You, by Coldplay

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

“Tell them how the crowds went wild, tell them how I hope they shine. Long live the walls we crashed through, I had the time of my life with you. Long, long live the walls we crashed through, how the kingdom lights shined just for me and you. And I was screaming, ‘Long live all the magic we made!’ And bring on all the pretenders, I'm not afraid! Singing long live all the mountains we moved; I had the time of my life fighting dragons with you. And long, long live the look on your face, and bring on all the pretenders. One day, we will be remembered.” - Long Live, Taylor Swift




There was one more plate: Alma’s.

 

Casita had gently rolled the plate towards Bruno after dinner. When he tried to put it away with the others, the house simply refused to cooperate. To Casita’s credit, it didn’t feel pushy. Just a nudge in the right direction. A question: what now?

 

Alma’s plate had two candles on the sides, a handful of red blossoms on top and pale green leaves all around. But, like the rest of her family, Alma was so much more than one thing. She was much more than a candle, miraculous or not.

 

They didn’t love her because of the candle.

 

Bruno studied it carefully, pondering. What to add? What to do? 

 

What would make Alma smile? 

 

As soon as the question came to mind, Bruno had his answer.

 

“I can take a hint, Casita,” he said and took the plate upstairs. Casita rattled a few drawers, radiating a faint sense of smugness. 

 

Bruno went to his room and got to work.






The next morning, Alma’s plate was waiting at her usual spot at the table. All around the rim were butterflies: pink, red, yellow, orange, green, blue, purple. A few more sparkles had been added around the candles.

 

And in the middle of the plate,  all crowded together was the whole family. Pepa’s painted counterpart cradled Antonio with one arm. (No doubt, Bruno would have to update it as the kid got older. He didn’t mind.) Everyone had their eyes open, they were all smiling. Alma was not holding the candle. Isabela was in her new vivid azure dress. Julieta and Agustín were hand in hand. Alma had her hands on her heart; Mirabel had a tiny butterfly resting on her finger. Dolores had a hand on Camilo’s shoulder; the kid was sticking his tongue out. Luisa was in the pastel dress that Agustín was helping her make, looking sweet and earnest. Félix was grinning broadly. Bruno added Esma and Luz to his shoulders. 

 

Alma took one look at it and her eyes watered.

 

“Ay, mijo,” she said and pulled Bruno into her arms. “It’s beautiful. I love it.”

 

“You do?” Bruno asked.

 

“Yes.” She pulled back, grinning from ear to ear. “It’s wonderful.”

 

It gave him some ideas for the town’s mural. With how many changes that needed to be made, it might be best to just paint over the whole thing and start from scratch. Something new. 

 

“Hey, niños!” Bruno called, poking his head out of the backdoor. The kids, all scattered about the garden, looked up. Camilo was swinging from one of Isa’s vines. Luisa was curled up on the back steps, sketching. It looked like dress designs and…unicorns? No, they were donkeys with horns. Donkey-corns? 

 

“Yeah, Tio?” Mirabel asked.

 

Bruno leaned against the doorway. Inside, he could hear Alma gushing to Pepa and Julieta about her new plate.

 

Yeah, something new would be good.

 

“Wanna help with some more art?” he asked with a grin. 

 

It certainly caught their interest. He didn’t entirely trust the gleam in Isabela’s eyes.

 

“I’m gonna paint over the mural,” he explained. “Start a new one, y’know? So…Wanna help paint over it?”

 

“Can we make a mess?” Camilo asked, a bit too eagerly.

 

“Not too much, kiddo,” Bruno warned. “But a little bit.”

 

That was all Camilo needed to hear. He whooped and ran inside, babbling something about getting a different shirt because his mamí would totally kill him if he got paint on the one he was wearing.

 

“Can we help with the background too?” Luisa asked, looking hopeful. She was clutching her sketchbook close to her chest.

 

Well, how could he say no to that face?

 

He nodded and his nieces immediately huddled together, whispering and trading ideas. Mirabel looked like she’d just been handed a very important mission: all business. Dolores was tapping her chin as she thought.

 

Bruno loved those kids so much it hurt. 

 

Smiling, he went back inside to change too. No way was he risking getting paint all over this ruana; not the one Mirabel had embroidered. It felt like years ago now, though it had only been a few months. 

 

Bruno put the ruana carefully away and hurried back downstairs. The kids were all gathered impatiently by the doors. Camilo was literally bouncing in anticipation. 

 

“Alright, alright, let’s go,” Bruno said.

 

Casita opened the doors and the kids ran ahead. Luisa was giving Mirabel a piggy-back while Mirabel urged her to go faster. Dolores laughed loudly as she ran. Camilo cartwheeled and shape-shifted into different people: Pepa, Mariano, Luka and Félix. Isabela hitched up her skirts and positively sprinted, shouting to the others to pick up the pace.

 

Bruno followed more sedately, happy to watch.

 

Yeah, he thought. They’re all gonna be just fine.




Five years later…




The colourful curtains of flowers parted and the spotlight zeroed in on Antonio. The poor kid looked so anxious, fidgeting in place. His big brown eyes, always so expressive, sought out Mirabel, hand in hand with Julieta. 

 

It was no secret that Mirabel was Antonio’s favourite person in all the world. 

 

Mirabel’s eyes widened. She looked uncertainly at Camilo and Dolores; they both nodded. She looked back at Antonio. Looking more worried than ever, he held his tiny hand out with a pleading pout.

 

“Please,” he whispered. It was so quiet that Bruno could hear him, even from his spot next to Agustín. That one little word was enough to break his heart. Antonio was so shy, he’d never liked being the centre of attention. 

 

Mirabel straightened up; shoulders back, chin up, and she marched to Antonio’s side like she was going into battle. She took his hand and all the tension drained him from. 

 

“Come on, néné,” she said gently. “Let’s get you to your door.”

 

And there it was, another vision came to pass; one of the first Bruno ever had of Antonio. 




(His gaze flickered to Pepa and Félix, waiting by the door with Alma. He wondered if any of them would figure out he’d known what Gift Antonio would get all along. He’d surely be in for an earful for not warning Pepa about the jaguar.)




Hand in hand, Mirabel and Antonio walked through the crowd; past Mariano and Señora Guzman (Mariano kept throwing Dolores sappy little smiles. Surely Dolores knew he was planning to propose tomorrow; super-hearing aside, that sparkle in her eyes gave it away), past the Rojas family (Luka gave Antonio two thumbs up and Maria waved), past Osvaldo and Ofelia (both of them had flower crowns from Isabela, bright orange and red), up the stairs and to the door.

 

“You’ve got this,” he heard Mirabel say. She kissed Antonio’s cheek and skipped to Pepa and Félix. Félix threw an arm around her shoulders and Pepa kissed the top of her head.

 

Alma bent down to Antonio’s level, gently cradling the candle.

 

“Antonio, mi amor,” she said gently. “Do you promise you’ll use your Gift for good?”

 

Antonio looked at the candle and wrapped his hands around it. He took a deep breath and nodded, speaking as loudly and clearly as he dared: “Yes, Abuela.”

 

Alma smiled at him, eyes shining. She gently poked his nose and stepped back, gesturing towards his door.

 

In a flash, Bruno remembered-




A much older Mirabel, an adult Mirabel, was holding the candle. She kneeled down to a small girl and held the candle out. They were standing in front of a golden door with no carvings.

 

“Do you promise to use your Gift for good?” she asked.

 

“Sí, Tia,” the little girl said.




But that could wait. He watched, biting his lip, as Antonio reached out and twisted the handle on his door. There was a blinding flash of golden light and, once it dimmed, Bruno could see the carving on the door: Antonio, surrounded by animals and smiling.

 

For a moment, Antonio looked baffled. He tilted his head, pouting.

 

And then a toucan flew into the courtyard and landed on his still outstretched arm. It squealed at him, flapping its wings and Antonio’s mouth dropped open.

 

“Uh-huh,” he said. The toucan squawked again. “I understand you!” Antonio said happily. Awed gasps rang out. Pepa squealed.

 

The toucan nudged Antonio’s forehead and Antonio said, “Of course they can come!”

 

Here we go, Bruno thought, smirking.

 

Julieta glanced at him. Her eyes narrowed. “Hermanito,” she began, but she was cut off by a loud roar.

 

Right on cue, the jaguar arrived. Along with the other toucans, the capybara, the coatis, a tapir, cats and dogs, a handful of mice, parrots and a whole lot of hummingbirds. 

 

The jaguar, eager as a puppy, ran right to Antonio and scooped the kid onto its back. With one powerful pounce, it knocked his door open and carried Antonio into his new room. The rest of the animals swiftly followed.

 

There were gasps, anxious cries, laughter and cheers from the crowd. Luka loudly proclaimed he wanted a jaguar. Poor Ismael looked faint. 

 

Alma blinked, looking a little shocked herself, but she swiftly recovered. Chuckling, shaking her head, she followed Antonio.

 

“Well, let’s get this party started!” Camilo yelled. That got everyone back on track; the fireworks began and people began to hurry to see Antonio’s room. That trio of kids who followed Mirabel around were pushing each other to reach the room first. 

 

Pepa, a little pale, caught Bruno’s gaze. Like Julieta, her eyes narrowed and a cloud appeared above her head. She leaned over the bannister to shout, “Bruno! Cabron! I swear if you knew about the jaguar-!”

 

“What jaguar?” Bruno asked, batting his eyelashes.

 

“You little shit!” The fireworks drowned out the thunder. Camilo was laughing so hard he had to cling to Julieta for support. 

 

“She’s going to kill you for not warning her,” Julieta said drily.

 

Bruno stuck his tongue out. “Ay, she can try.






Antonio’s room was jungle themed. He had a giant tree house with a hammock instead of a normal bed. There was a river and all sorts of places for his new animal friends to sleep. 

 

The jaguar tried to cuddle Agustín. He seemed delighted. Antonio happily informed them the jaguar’s name was Parce. 

 

Mirabel sidled up to Bruno as the music began in earnest. “So,” she drawled, hands on her hips. “Did you know?”

 

“Since before the kid was even born,” Bruno admitted. Mirabel snorted, a hand clapped over her mouth.

 

“Yeah,” she said. “Tia Pepa is totally gonna kill you for not warning her.”

 

Bruno looked at her, his favourite niece (hey, he was only human). This bright-eyed, quick-witted kid with her big heart and more brave than she gave herself credit for.

 

He thought of the future, of Mirabel holding the candle out to a little girl who hadn’t been born yet. (Who, in all likelihood, wasn’t even a thought in Isabela or Luisa’s heads yet, whichever one of them was the mother.) Mirabel, the next candle-holder. Mirabel, who’d taken one look at Bruno five years ago and decided they were going to be friends. She’d practically called dibs. 

 

Mirabel Madrigal, who shone even brighter than the Miracle. 

 

His smile grew and he linked his arm with hers.

 

“Ay, Mira,” he said. “Some things are better as surprises, don’t you think?”

 

She hummed thoughtfully, leaning her head on his shoulder. Give it another year and she’d be taller than him.

 

“Yeah, I guess,” she said. “But Tia’s still gonna kill you.”

 

Yeah, maybe so. And maybe Mirabel would give him an earful in the future too. One of these days, that candle was going to transfer to her. That kid was a leader down to her core; she had enough love in her to light up the world. If you asked Bruno, she was the perfect choice.

 

But why spoil it? 






There's something you need to know.

 

In the mountains, there’s a hidden village. More of a town now and always growing. Protected by magic, by sacrifice; by love. Only those who need a home and safety may find it. Those with evil intent will never lay their eyes upon it, no matter how hard they seek. 

 

And in the centre of that town, is a mural. A mural of the founding family (such as they are); the ones given a Miracle fifty years ago. A family that had been torn apart in more ways than one and pulled themselves back together. This mural was painted by a lost boy, a found man, with the help of his sobrinos.

 

Alma Madrigal with her welcoming smile and steadfast gaze. Next to her, forever young and handsome, is her husband, Pedro Madrigal. Above their joined hands, floats the miraculous candle, shining gold. 

 

Beneath them are their children and sons-in-law. Bruno, holding a glowing green hourglass with a pair of little rats on his shoulders, his smile shy and crooked. Pepa, surrounded by all kinds of weather: a cloud, raindrops and sun above her head, a rainbow twisting around her like a ribbon. Julieta, surrounded by various herbs and spices, wielding a frying pan like a sword. Félix, holding a bright yellow umbrella and grinning, his arm around Pepa’s waist. Agustín, holding sheet music and surrounded by little musical notes (and, yes, a little bee is hidden in there as well.)

 

And then there’s their children. 

 

Dolores, hands held behind her ears, head tilted with a bright grin. A little coin purse is attached to her skirt. Camilo, doing a dramatic flourish, his grin mischievous and his eyes kind. Antonio, cradling a puppy, smiling shyly and earnestly.

 

Isabela, in a bright blue dress with coloured streaks in her hair: purple, green and blue; there’s an orange flower in her hair and her nails are painted black. Cradling a cactus, surrounded by passion flowers and bright flower petals raining down. Luisa, holding a donkey above her head, dressed in a pretty lavender dress with a red ribbon in her hair. Mirabel, surrounded by butterflies of all colours and sizes, her arms opened wide in welcome. All three of them are grinning widely.

 

All around them and behind them is the village: the church, the houses, the river, the mountains. A wreath of stars and butterflies surrounds them, enclosing them. 

 

Los Madrigals. Quite the big family. Soon to grow even more. 

 

They’re safe. No more visions of disaster. No more heartbreak over missing family members. No more mysteries and pain. 

 

No more cracks.

 

It’s not perfect, but what is?

 

And that’s all there is to say.






“There never was an Anastasia; she was a dream. (A beautiful dream). A dream only time will fade. (So no more talk of the Grand Duchess Anastasia Romanov). The new order has no need for fairy tales. The case is closed. Still... Far away, long ago, glowing dim as an ember. Things my heart used to know…Once upon a December.” - Finale, Anastasia: Broadway

Notes:

And that's a wrap! Once more, a massive thank you to you all 💕

Until next time! 🥰

Notes:

From the bottom of my heart: my bad. Bruno is unfortunately following in his parents' footsteps.

Next up, flashbacks of Bruno's life as he makes his way through the jungle. He has a promise to keep.

Works inspired by this one: